TEACHER'S 
REFERENCE  BOOK 


FOR 


Marshall's  Business  English 


This  little  hand-book  has  been  pveimred  by 
the  author  of  Marshall's  Business-  English, 
as  an  aid  to  busy  teachers  who  can  not 
always  spare  the  time  to  look  up  the  details 
in  such  of  the  exercises  as  involve  points  of 
grammar,  construction,  and  word  selection. 
The  correct  answers  or  sentences  are  given 
for  all  those  exercises  in  the  text,  where  a 
presentation  of  acceptable  answers  might  be 
or  aid  to  the  teacher. 


(.IXiDYEAKMAIISHALL  PUBLISIIINC  CO., 
CEDAK  RAPIDS,  IOWA 


TEACHER'S  REFERENCE  BOOK 


EXERCISE  15— Page  12. 

1.  I  feel  bad. 

2.  The  vessel  arrived  safe. 

3.  They  walked  slowly. 

4.  You  are  looking  bad  (or  ill). 

5.  He  stood  silent. 

6.  They  sat  quiet. 

7.  He  plays  badly. 

8.  His  voice  sounds  loud. 

9.  Please  remain  quiet  here  until  I  return. 

10.  The  sentence  sounds  bad. 

11.  He  crept  silently  into  the  room. 

12.  The  garments  lo6k  nice   (or  well). 

13.  He  looks  suspicious,  and  probably  distrusts  us. 

14.  He  looked  suspiciously  about  him  and  entered  the  room  slowly. 

15.  The  rose  I  recommended  smells  fragrant  and  blooms  luxuriantly. 

16.  He  stood  thoughtful  for  a  moment,  and  then  went  quietly  from 
the  room. 

17.  He  stood  defiant  and  sounded  his  bugle  loudly  enough  to  be  heard 
by  his  distant  troopers. 

18.  He  lay  quiet  for  a  time,  then  arose  and  passed  swiftly  from  the 
room. 


19.     She  remained  hel 

pless  at  home. 

20.     He  tried  hard  to 

win  the  prize. 

21.     The  genuine  coin 

rings  true. 

22.    The  child  slept  quiet  till  morning. 

23.     He  looked  angril. 

•  at  us. 

EXERCISE  16— Page 

13. 

Phrase. 

Class. 

Office. 

from  the  High  School 

prep. 

adj.  mod.  of  boys 

with  the  eleven 

prep. 

adv.   mod.  of  played 

from  our  College 

prep. 

adj.  mod.  of  eleven 

to  be 

\erbal 

subject 

of  men 

prep. 

adj.  mod.  of  leader 

in  a  good  cause 

prep. 

adj.  mod.  of  leader 

has  been  considered 

verbal 

predicate 

had  come 

\erbal 

predicate 

to  town 

prep. 

adv.  mod.  of  had  come 

on  Tuesday 

prep. 

adv.  mod.  of  had  come 

until   Satnrday 

prep. 

adv.  mod.  of  remained 

having  mailed  the  letter 

verbal 

independent 

with  all  haste 

lirep. 

adv.  mod.  of  returned 

to  the  hotel 

Iirep. 

adv.  mod.  of  returned       j 

by  and  by 

Irreg. 

adv.  mod.  of  may  learn     1 

of  courtesy 

prep. 

adj.  mod.  of  value              ^ 

In  any  one 

prep. 

adv.  mod.  of  inexcusal)le 

can  afford 

verbal 

predicate 

of  a  dictionary 

prep. 

adj.  mod.  of  cost 

in  Scotland 

prep. 

adj.  mod.  of  maidens 

by  far 

irreg. 

adv.  mod.  of  lovely 

at  once 

prep. 

adv.  mod.  of  decided 

to  invest 

verbal 

obj.  comp.  of  decided 

In  stocks 

prep, 
verbal 

adv.  mod.  of  invest 

had  expected 

predicate 

to  meet 

verbal 

o)>i.  comp.  of  had  expected 

in  the  morning 

prep. 

adv.  mod.  of  meet              4 

to  discuss 

verbal 

adv.  mod.  of  meet             ■ 

FOR  MARSHALL'S  BUSINESS  ENGLISH  3 

with  him  prep.  adv.  mod.  of  discuss 

at   the  time  prep.  adv.  mod.  of  tbinl^lng 

of  your  visit  •       prep.  adj.  mod.  of  visit 

of  lending  prep.  adv.  mod.  of  thliiliing 

to  Mr.  Hart  prep.  adv.  mod.  of  lending 

EXERCISE  17— Page  14. 

1.  I  did  not  l<no\v  it  was  she. 

2.  We  saw  Mary  and  her ;  we  are  sure  it  was  thev. 

3.  Yes.  It  is  indeed  he. 

4.  Just  l)etween  you  and  me,  it  is  my  opinion  that  lie  and  George 
will  disagree. 

5.  1  did  not  allude  to  either  you  or  her. 

6.  They  suppose  it  to  be  me,  but  it  is  he. 

7.  Neither  Charles  nor  she  was  to  blame. 

S.  The  estate  goes  to  them  and  their  brother. 

9.  We  were  met  at  the  station  by  them  and  their  friends. 

10.  They  thought  it  was  we,  but  it  was  he  and  Walter. 

11.  It  was  unkind  of  Kate  and  her  to  speak  that  way,  for  it  was  not 
we  who  were  to  blame. 

12.  It  was  through  Frank  and  her  that  word  was  sent  to  Max  and  me. 

13.  I  have  always  thought  that  it  was  he. 

14.  I  wish  you  were  more  like  him. 

15.  It  was  Henry  and  I  who  dirt  it. 

IC.  It  will  be  she,  not  Ethel,  who  will  win  the  prize. 

17.  Had  it  been  we,  both  Fred  and  she  would  have  known  it. 

18.  I  was  afraid  that  It  might  be  she. 

19.  Notwithstanding  our  assurances,  he  believed  it  to  be  them. 

EXERCISE  18— Page  16. 

chiefs,  noes.  Professors  Miller,  analyses,  halves,  cargoes,  tooth-brushes, 
series,  roofs,  mulattoes,  major-generals,  stepsons,  hoofs,  beeves,  beaux, 
amanuenses,  volcanoes,  genera,  solos,  mesdames.  pianos,  seraph  or 
(Hebrew)  seraphim,  echoes,  loaves,  octavos,  Germans,  vertebrae,  selves, 
tornadoes,  forget-me-nots,  radii  or  radiuses,  safes,  women,  nebulae,  theses, 
sons-in-law,  chrysalides,  aides  .le-camp,  Messrs.,  men-servants.  Mesdames, 
hangers-on,  crises,  siwonfuls,  termini.  Misses  Wright  or  Miss  Wrights. 

EXERCISE  19— Page  17. 

Singular — hysterics,  nebula,  dogma. 

Plural — vertebrae,  tidings,  bitters,  suds,  oats,  ashes,  bellows,  errata, 
assets,  effluvia,  larvae,  trousers. 

Singular  or  Plural — paraphernalia,  committee,  couple,  dozen,  heathen, 
band,  odds,  fish,  school,  company,  team,  measles,  family,  species,  flock. 

EXERCISE  21— Page  18. 

cattle's.  Kansas',  brother-in-law's,  oxen's,  flies'.  Governor  of  Maine's, 
Charles',  Court-martial's,  Misses  Barnes',  woman's,  women's,  gentlemen's, 
gentleman's,  monkeys',  men-servants',  fox's,  man-of-war's,  sons-in-law's. 

EXERCISE  22— Page  18. 

1.  He  asked  pay  for  two  days'  work. 

2.  We  could  see  the  edge  of  the  precipice.  I 

3.  He  bought  three  tailor's  geese  at  auction. 

4.  Both  Lee's  and  Grant's  military  maneuvers  will  always  be  famous. 

5.  They  sell  boys'  hats  and  men's  coats. 

6.  The  book  lielongs  to  Fred,  my  school  mate's  friend. 

7.  I  bought  the  wrap  at  Martin  &  Wright's. 


TEACHER'S  REFERENCE  BOOK 

8.  My  friend's  (or  friends')  sister  is  a  poetess. 

9.  King  Edward  is  the  German  Emperor's  uncle. 

10.    We  own  both  Webster's  and  Worcester's  dictionaries. 

EXERCISE  27— Page  23. 

1.  Neither  Frank  nor  I  am  to  go. 

2.  A  flock  of  birds  was  seen  above  the  lake. 

3.  The  family  are  all  at  home. 

4.  The  jury  are  not  agreed  as  to  the  evidence. 

5.  Henry,  not  his  sisters,  is  to  go. 

6.  Bread  and  milk  is  wholesome  food. 

7.  Bats  and  mice  are  vermin. 

8.  'A  pair  of  twins  were  lying  on  the  couch  asleep. 

9.  The  committee  were  dining  in  their  apartments. 

10.  Neither  the  daughter  nor  the  mother  is  ill. 

11.  Either  the  soldier  or  his  officers  are  to  blame. 

12.  Tho  goods  were  purchased  at  a  discount. 

13.  The  acoustics  of  the  hall  is  unsatisfactory  to  the  society. 

14.  Everybody  was  invited. 

15.  A  basket  of  eggs  was  on  the  table. 

16.  The  couple  have  enjoyed  their  visit 

17.  One  faction  in  the  convention  favors  Jones  and  refuses  to  support 
Robinson. 

18.  Every  one  of  us  was  absent. 

19.  Fifty  dollars  was  paid  for  the  rent. 

20.  Five  pounds  of  salt  is  needed. 

21.  Twenty  years  of  his  life  was  spent  in  Paris. 

22.  Fifteen  pounds  is  the  exact  weight 

23.  Fifteen   cents  was  contributed  by  the  teacher,  and   sevent.v-flve 
cents,  in  all,  was  raised. 

24.  Five  hundred  bushels  of  potatoes  was  the  quantity  sold  in  March. 

25.  Five  silver  dollars  were  given  to  me  today. 

EXERCISE  28— Page  25. 

1.  The  wind  blew  very  hard. 

2.  They  did  It  well. 

3.  He  ran  away  (or  has  run  away). 

4.  •  He  laid  the  book  on  the  table. 
•5.    The  bill  has  been  paid. 

6.  They  swam  (or  have  swum)  the  river. 

7.  He  lay  down  on  the  grass. 

8.  Will  the  bread  rise? 

9.  The  General  had  felled  trees,  etc. 

10.  He  came  home  yesterday. 

11.  He  taught  me  to  play  tennis. 

12.  She  has  sat  there  for  an  hour. 

13.  They  ate  (or  had  eaten)  the  bread. 

14.  He  "drank  a  pint  of  milk. 

15.  Had  I  seen  him  first.  I  would  not  have  gone. 

16.  I  am  almost  frozen. 

EXERCISE  33— Page  27. 
Verbal.  Office. 

thriving  mod.   of  business 

having  purchased  parenthetical,   or  absolute 

leai'uetl  mod.   of  man 

broken  mod.  of  man 

being  advised  mod.  of  shall  take  (reason) 


FOR  MARSHALL'S  BUSINESS  ENGLISH  5 

rising  mod.  of  market 

liiiowing  mod.  of  advised   ( reason  i 

to  accept  obj.  comp.  of  advised 

to  be  prepared  subject  of  was 

having  been  informed       mod.  of  is  to  leave  (reason) 

to  leave  att.  eouip.  of  is 

bathing  subject  of  is 

eating  obj.  of  prep,  after 

drawn  mod.  of  battle 

yielding    ■  absolute  or  "independent" 

stolen  mod.  of  property 

proving  obj.  of  prep,  by 

having  supplied  mod.  of  expected   (reason* 

written  mod.  of  instructions 

to   follow  obj.  comp.  of  expected 

EXERCISE  34— Page  29. 

1.  Had  I  known  you  wer;  not  coming,  I  shoidd  not  have  sat  there 
so  long. 

2.  The  majority  of  men  are  Inclined  to  justice. 

3.  Clay  admired  Webster  more  than  he  did  Calhoun. 

4.  I  have  not  told  him,  and  never  will  tell  him. 

0.  Since  that  time  there  have  been  several  disputes. 
C.     She  besought  him  to  spare  her  boy. 

7.  He  taught  me  to  file  letters. 

8.  She  had  lain  do\\-n  for  a  moment's  rest. 

9.  Beef  and  poultry  are  .scarce,  but  flsh  is  to  be  found  in  all  the 
markets. 

10.  It  was  your  business  to  secure  as  many  orders  as  possible,  and 
to  be  on  the  lookout  for  orders  all  the  time. 

11.  His  crime  having  been  di.scovered.  he  fled  to  South  America. 

12.  I  have  not  agreed,  and  will  not  agree,  to  his  proiwsal. 

13.  The  jury  was  out  two  hours  before  It  returned  its  verdict. 

14.  I  should  like  to  have  met  him   (or  I  should  have  liked  to  meet 
him). 

15.  The  tree  was  felled  by  my  brother  in  18»0  and  it  has  lain  there 
ever  since. 

16.  Every  one  of  us  was  asked  to  bring  his  Itooks. 

17.  You  have  not  done  your  work  heretofore,  but  I  will  see  to  It  that 
you  do  it  hereafter. 

18.  Tlie  measles  has  broken  out  and  half  the  school  are  absent. 

19.  Yon  have  not  done  it.  but  you  ought  to  do  it. 

20.  Shall  I  re<'ite  to  you  in  the  classroom  or  the  study-hall? 

21.  In  business  education,    are    to    be    found    the    shortest  roads  to 
success. 

EXERCISE  35— Page  29. 

1.  The  mercury  has  fallen  ten  degrees. 

2.  The  General,  with  his  aids,  then  entered,  and  was  at  once  con- 
ducted to  the  President's  bo.v. 

3.  Every  one  of  us  has  known  about  It. 

4.  It  -was  plain  that  the  majority  of  the  voters  were  for  Wilson. 

5.  A  number  of  hats  were  offered  for  sale. 

6.  The  greater  number  of  our  marriages  are  happy. 

7.  Since  the  passage  of  the  law,  gold  has  steadily'  flowed  Into  the 
treasury. 

8.  Her  nurse  seated  her  In  the  big  chair. 

9.  One  hundred  dollars  has  been  subscribed. 


8  TEACHER'S  REFERENCE  BOOK 

8.  My  friend  from  Chicago  wliom  I  Invited  to  visit  me  T\-ill  arrive 
on  Monday. 

9.  Tliey  are  persons  whom  we  believe  to  liave  done  wrong. 
10.    They  are  persons  who  we  think  have  done  wrong. 

NOTE. — Here  the  relative  is  the  subject  of  the  clause. 

EXERCISE  41— Page  37. 

NOTE. — There  may  be  many  ways  of  writing  these  sentences  accept- 
ably.    The  following  are  suggested : 

1.  We  have  secured  excellent  board  with  a  widow  who  resides  near 
the  college. 

2.  My  tooth  is  aching  severely  and  I  think  I  must  have  it  extracted. 

3.  Allow  me  to  thank  you  heartily  for  jour  very  generous  praise. 

4.  I  must  get  a  dictionary :  without  it.  I  cannot  tell  what  worils 
to  use. 

5.  I  went  all  the  way  to  town  before  I  was  able  to  see  him. 
C.     It  is  very  strange  that  he  said  nothing  to  me  about  it. 

7.  His  clothes  were  bought  before  his  father's  remittance  reached 
him. 

8.  He  has  faile<l  completely,  just  as  I  thought  he  would. 

9.  From  the  ap|)earance  of  the  sky.  I  think  it  will  rain. 

10.  P.  C.  Sullivan's  home  was  burned  late  last  night.  The  firemen 
did  their  Viest.  but  nothing  could  l>e  saved.  The  misfortune  is  a 
severe  one.  as  the  family  is  needy. 

EXERCISE  45— Page  40. 

1.  Ho  has  chosen  teaching  as  his  vocation. 

2.  He  will  pay  the  remainder  of  the  debt  in  March. 

3.  Himself,  open-souled  as  the  day,  he  had  a  strong  aversion  to  all 
hypocrites. 

4.  He  manifested  a  decided  dislike  to  the  proposal. 

5.  You  must  not  expect  much  of  me.  as  I  am  only  a  beginner. 

6.  The  foreign  vote  of  Chicago  is  large  (aliens  are  not  allowed  to 
vote). 

7.  His  reputation  for  truthfulness  Is  not  above  question. 

EXERCISE  46— Page  41. 

1.  Our  liardware  business  is  prosperous,  and  we  liave  man.\' 
customers. 

2.  A  Chlcatto  buyer  has  taken  most  of  this  season's  pnxluct. 

3.  We  finished  a  large  part  of  the  work  today. 

4.  What  be  said  (or  wrote)  about  his  partner  made  h^m  solicitous 
(or  anxious). 

5.  That  Harper  was  not  successful  as  a  salesman  «as  the  general 
opinion  of  his  fellow  employees. 

6.  He  sold  all  his  stock  to  the  combination  (or  syndicate)  at  ninety- 
flve.  before  asking  for  an  increase  in  his  salary.  After  the  trans- 
action, he  addressed  the  directors  of  the  old  company,  and  the 
newspapers  gave  liberal  notices.  A  few  days  later,  he  bought  a 
men's  furnishing  store. 

EXERCISE  48— Page  43. 

1.  He  asserts  (or  says,  or  maintains)  that  he  has  done  the  work. 

2.  I  suspect  that  he  is  deceiving  us. 

3.  We  claim  that  the  debt  has  been  paid  in  full. 

4.  Mav  I  be  excu.sed  this  afternoon? 


FOR  MARSHALL'S  BUSINESS  ENGLISH       '  9 

u.  I  have  adjusted  our  difficulty  with  Rogers;  he  is  to  pay  our  bill 
for  previous  expenses,  and  we  are  to  repair  his  pump  satisfac- 
torily, or  else  supply  him  with  a  new  one. 

6.  I  must  have  my  report  hy  Saturday,  or  lose  my  position. 

7.  He  planned  (or  expected)  to  sell  us  a  bill  of  goods. 

8.  We  greatly  enjoyed  the  concert;  it  was  certainly  better  than  the 
one  we  attended  last  week. 

ii.     I  have  a  good  reason  for  my  distrust,  and  I  am  determined  that 

he  shall  not  get  the  advantage  of  me  again. 
10.    It  was  extremely  irritating  to  be  imposed  on  in  that  way. 

EXERCISE  49— Page  45. 

1.  He  taught  me  all  I  Icnow  about  bookkeeping. 

2.  I  remember  his  father  very  well. 

.".  We  do  not  deal  with  the  Hammond  company. 

4.  I  predict  that  he  will  be  bankrupt  within  a  year. 

5.  He  was  reared  in  Ohio. 

6.  His  injury  did  not  occur  until  January. 

7.  He  is  staying  with  his  brother. 

S.    We  have  paid  for  the  office  furniture. 

9.  Did  you  say  that  he  is  to  come  next  week? 

10.     We  settled  that  account,  giving  them  our  note  for  the  balance. 

EXERCISE  50— Page  45. 

1.  I  forget  who  it  was  that  supplied  the  money  for  the  enterprise. 

2.  They  have  revived  an  old  claim  against  the  company,  and  wish 
me  to  act  as  referee  in  the  matter. 

3.  I  remember  him  as  a  boy.  and  regarded  him  as  a  bright  fellow 
(or  youth). 

4.  He  was  with  lis  as  a  clerk  for  a  while,  but  we  finally  got  rid  of 
him   (or  let  him  go). 

5.  He  talked  earnestly,  even  gesticulating  like  an  orator,  bnt  our 
firm  does  not  seem  enthusiastic  over  his  proposal. 

EXERCISE  51— Page  46. 

1.  His  wound  is  serious,  but  we  do  not  consider  it  dangerous. 

2.  I  was  luiaware  of  his  iiresonce.  but  was  conscious  of  a  peculiar 
feeling  that  I  was  not  alone. 

ti.     Each  of  the  firms  competed  for  our  business  (or  custom,  or  trade ) . 
4.    That  he  could  do  such  a  thing,  seems  incredible. 
.").     I  nv  wearv  of  voi-r  excuses;  luine  of  your  triiis  has  vielded  any 
exceptional    results. 

EXERCISE  52— Pa?e  48. 

1.  We  raised  fewer  chickens  this  year  than  last. 

2  He  bought  as  much  as  twenty  tiins  of  hay. 

?..  He  sold  as  many  as  six  dozen  eggs. 

4.  1  shall  hardly  be  able  to  get  out  a  statement  by  Saturday. 

.5.  I  sold  scarcelv  enough  goods  on  that  trip  to  pay  hotel  bills. 

6.  It  seems  to  me  that  your  plan  is  not  practicable. 

7.  His  teaching  was  not  practical. 

8.  It  would  not  l)e  practicable  to  use  your  machine  in  our  factory. 

9.  The  poor  fellow  is  verv  sensitive  to  criticism. 

10.  He  Is  quite  sensible  of  his  deficiencies. 


10  TEACHER'S  REFERENCE  BOOK 


As  Corrected. 


1.  He  is  likely  to  lose  his  temper  and  order  us  out  of  his  ofliee. 

2.  It  was  a  charming  book,  and  we  enjoyed  it  greatly. 

3.  This  book  has  fewer  pages  than  the  other ;  we  will  use  as  many 
as  a  dozen  per  month. 

4.  Unless  you  attend  to  business  more  closely,  you  are  likely  to  be 
discharged. 

5.  He  is  severely,  but  not  seriously  ill. 

6.  He  is  a  very  successful  salesman. 

7.  I  am  so  hoarse  I  can  hardly  speak. 

8.  We  were  much  pleased  to  learn  that  your  first  three  orders  were 
so  large.     Be  sure  to  visit  all  the  neighboring  towns. 

EXERCISE  55— Page  52. 
For  Correction. 

1.  He  had  no  defense  against  the  charge. 

2.  His  interference  hindered  us  in  getting  the  building  ready. 

3.  The  handles  are  made  by  machines. 

4.  There  is  no  necessity  for  the  firm's  going  in  debt. 

5.  He  does  not  like  to  part  with  his  money. 

6.  He  helped  me  with  both  money  and  encouragement. 

7.  I  have  no  patience  with  people  who  show  neglect  of  their  work, 
(or,  I  have  no  patience  with  people  who  neglect  their  work). 

8.  It  was  purchased  at  a  good  price. 

9.  His  profits  from  the  transaction  were  very  large. 
10.     What  security  can  you  give  me  for  my  investment? 

EXERCISE  58— Page  56. 

1.  The  Evening  Telegram  announces  the  resignation  of  the  Russian 
ambassador. 

2.  The  Bishop  is  a  genial  gentleman  ;  he  holds  the  degrees  of  D.  D. 
and  I-L.  D.  from  Princeton,  and  has  long  been  prominent  in  the 
councils  of  his  church,  that  of  the  M.  E.  South. 

3.  The  City  Council  met  at  7  P.  M.  sharp  with  His  Honor.  Mayor 
Curtiss,  in  the  chair,  and  at  once  proceeded  to  consider  amend- 
ments Nos.  3  and  4  to  Ordinance  No.  35. 

4.  We  consider  logic  an  important  subject:  it  is  taken  up  in  the 
Junior  year,  and  we  use  Sims  &  Walker's  text  during  the  first 
semester,  following  this  with  "White's  Elements." 

EXERCISE  61— Page  62. 

1.  Now  this  order  (singular  circumstance,  wasn't  it?)  was,  in  every 
particular,  identical  with  the  one  received  Apr.  14,  1913. 

2.  On  the  5th  inst..  the  will  of  the  late  Gen.  A.  T.  Joyce  was  ad- 
mitted to  probate.  In  addition  to  the  bequests  mentioned  in  the 
Times  of  Monday,  are  the  following:  To  Sarah  Miller,  an  old 
servant,  a  house  and  lot  in  Dayton,  Mich.;  to  Henry  Harmon,  a 
Cornell  student.  Class  of  '06.  a  copy  of  the  Century  Dictionary. 

3.  Ralph  seemed  in  hlirh  spirits.  "Don't  be  cast  down,  boys."  he  re- 
marked playfully :  "remember  Uncle  Zach's  old  saying.  'Cheer  up. 
the  worst  is  yet  to  come.'  Great  old  chap,  Uncle  Zach.  How  I'd 
like  to  see  him  !" 

4.  I  have  read  Chapter  XVIII.  carefully,  and  found  there  an  al- 
lusion to  II  Cor.  ix.  12.  which,  to  me,  is  not  entirely  clear. 


FOR  MARSHAT.L'S  BtTSlNESS  ENGLISH 


11 


-.      "Bosh"'   exclaimea    the   old   Kentleman,   bringing   down   his   cane 

aU  sorte  of  wrong  things,  just  because  they  are  bojs. 
EXERCISE  62— Page  64. 
1      whpn  von  make  UP    your    list    of    needed  office  employees,  you 

to  show  us  vour  goods,  and    at   the   lime,    ne 

r?em^l^t?^'wlth  a  surly  lool.  he  counted  and  handed  me 
thrmonev     He  then  left  the  oflice  swearing  like  a  pirate. 
We^ell   bettfr  gooSs  and  at  lower  prices  than  do  any  of  out 

We^'ai^' offering  a  handsome  leather  suit-case  as  a  prize  to  our 
most  successful  salesman. 

The  very  thought  of  your  leaving,  causes  me  distress. 
WanteTbv  a  single  gentleman:    apartnients  near  the  park.     Must 
hnvp  steam  heat  and  modern  plumbing.  .^^   ,  u    „„,.  „<■ 

Children  unaccompanied  by  adults  will  not  be  admitted  by  any  of 

?t%aSasTll'ht  this  evening.  Dr.  ^;al•den  will  address  the  asso- 
pintion  on  the  snblect  of  bathing  before  breakfast. 
Jus    at  dawn   a  half  dozen  autocars  crowded  with  laughing  peo_ 
Je  came  tearing  along  the  deserted  street,  the  chug-chugging  of 

^^tpoetwaT  w^K^rr^l  Pa^^tlme,  by  a  friend  of  mine 

7'u'nder:^ar"thar-the    applicant    is    a    one-legged  man  named 

AkS  do(ftor.  bv  your  unremitting  attention.  vo„  saved  my  life 
kfter  I  had  been  brought  nearly  to  the  point  of  death. 

EXERCISE  5— Page  88. 

1  3  cents.  '''■  ^  ^<^"*^^- 

2.  14  cents.  '■  H^-9^- 

3.  16  cents.  «•  ?fOO- 

4.  18  cents.  »•  23  cents. 

5.  9  cents.  10.  40  cents. 

EXERCISE  14— Page  109. 

1.  Fire  this   moniin'r   partially   destroyed   Water   Street   warehouse. 
I.of.s  ten  thousand. 

2.  Proposition    satisfactory.      Can    begin    .Tanuary    1.      Wire    con- 

:!.    Walter  seriously  ill.    Pneumonia  symptoms.     If  no  improvement, 

win  wire.  ,       „^  ,,  T    1       1 

4.  .Johnson  will  accept  ninety  per  month.  Shall  I  close? 
.-).     Shuttles   shipped    number  eight.     Must   have   number   ten.      Ship 

\  m  m  (^1 1  fl.  loI  V 

6.    Clarke  failure  seriously  affects    us.      Cancel    orders  and  return 
immediately. 


4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 
f). 

10. 

11. 

12. 

1.3, 
14 

1.0 


12  TEACHER'S  REFERENCE  BOOK 

7.  Mason's  Butler  County  majority  two  thousand.  Undoubtedly 
elected. 

8.  Offered  five  thousand  tons  Hocking  three  ninety.  Wire  instruc- 
tions immediately. 

9.  Coulter  buying  lard  heavily.     Shall  I  buyV     Wire  instructions. 
10.     Sell  apples  at  two  dollars.    Hold  potatoes  until  twentieth. 

1.  Arrived  early  today.  Interviewed  Henderson.  Will  close  deal  for 
bonus  of  ten  thousand  and  twenty  per  cent  of  stock.  Probably  his 
best  terms.    Shall  I  clo.se  deal?    Wire. 

2.  We  suffered  heavily  through  yesterday's  Are.  Both  store-rooms 
destroyed.  Little  stock  saved.  Loss  may  reach  thirty-flve  thou- 
sand. Insurance  twenty  thousand.  Weeks  before  we  can  resume. 
Better  come  in  at  once. ' 

EXERCISE  15— Page  110. 

1.  $6.50.  4.     .$15.00. 

2.  $1.65.  5.     $11.40. 

3.  60  cents. 

FOR  GENERAL  REVIEW— Page  129. 
Nouns  and  Pronouns. 

Followed  by  i.s — calisthenics,   politics,  news,  fish. 

Followed  by  are — ashes,  goods,  morals,  riches,  tidings,  dice,  fish. 

1.  Men's  hats. 

2.  Discoveries  of  science. 

S.     A  women's  rights  meeting. 
■  4.    The  cousin  of  my  aunt's  husband,  or.  My  uncle's  cousin. 

5.  The  tires  of  the  bicycle  belonging  to  Frank's  brother  are 
punctured. 

6.  Correct. 

7.  We  sell  only  men's  sizes. 

1.  Whom  do  von  see?     Him  and  Harry. 

2.  He  believed  it  to  be  us ;  but  it  was  they. 

?,.     I  was  the  man  who,  they  told  me,  was  to  be  appointed. 

4.  Whom  do  you  stippo.se  it  to  be? 

5.  Both  they  and  their  confederates  believed  it  to  be  us  who  exposed 
them. 

1.  It  could  not  have  been  they. 

2.  Each  of  us  returned  to  his  work,  or,  All  of  us  returned  to  work. 
a.     Everyone  broutrht  his  lunch. 

4.  The  book  is  not  ours ;  it  is  hers. 

5.  He  is  a  man  \^■hom  I  know  to  be  honest. 

6.  He  is  a  man  «ho.  I  feel  sure,  is  honest. 

7.  He  does  not  cross  his  t's  or  dot  his  i's. 

8.  We  saw  several  deer  and  caught  a  fine  string  of  fish. 

9.  Neither  of  us  bad  his  lesson. 

10.  They  came  with  Kate  and  me ;  but  we  do  not  know  with  whom 
else  they  are  acquainted. 

11.  The  contract  must  be  signed  both  by  you  and  your  wife. 

12.  Everybody  presented  his  ticket  at  the  door. 

13.  You  may  make  your  complaint  to  whomever  you  like. 

14.  He  was  with  Harry  and  me  when  his  friend  arrived. 

ADJECTIVES  AND  ADVERBS— Page  130. 

black,  blacker,  blackest;  handsome,  handsomer,  handsomest:  handy, 
handier,  handiest ;  true,  truer,  truest ;  good,  better,  best ;  splendid,  more 
splendid,  most  splendid :  frank,  franker,  frankest :  elegant,  more  elegant, 
most  elegant :  hearty,  heartier,  heartiest :  humane,  humaner  or  more 
humane,  humanest  or  most  humane. 


FOR  MARSHAIXS  BUSINESS  ENGLISH  13 

Uncompared:  perfect,  superior,  false,  round  and  human. 

1.  We  should  try  to  look  pleasant,  even  if  we  feel  bad. 

2.  I  have  never  seen  a  better  specimen. 

3.  Correct. 

4.  We  had  a  pleasant  time,  but  were  rather  tired  when  we  reached 
home. 

5.  We  all  looked  serious  after  he  ceased  talking. 

6.  I  saw  him  before  his  election. 

7.  I  intended  only  to  frighten  him. 

8.  The  house  is  badly  in  need  of  paint,  or  The  house  badly  needs 
paint. 

9.  He  stood  silent  for  a  minute  or  two,  then  walked  slowly  away. 

10.  I  cannot  run  so  swiftly  as  you. 

11.  She  has  seen  none  of  them  since  Easter. 

12.  I  have  no  use  for  that  kind  of  people. 

13.  That  light  complexioned  young  man  is  very  clever ;  Isn't  he? 

14.  I  should  not  select  that  kind,  as  they  are  rather  expensive. 

15.  He  talks  considerably,  but  not  nearly  so  much  as  formerly. 

16.  His  statement  is  more  nearly  complete  than  yours. 

17.  He  has  someone  else's  books. 

18.  Let  everyone  enjoy  himself. 

19.  All  of  the  five  children  quarreled  with  one  another  constantly. 

20.  Your  work  looks  very  well  indeed. 

VERBS— Page  130. 

write,  wrote,  written;  He,  lay,  lain;  talk,  talked,  talked:  lay,  laid,  laid; 
see,  saw,  seen;  go,  went,  gone;  sit,  sat,  sat;  blow,  blew,  blown;  set,  set,  set ; 
throw,  threw,  thrown. 

1.  Correct.    (Odds  is  either  singular  or  plural.) 

2.  Twenty  dollars  was  paid  for  insurance. 

3.  He  has  not  gone  to  the  theatre  for  a  month. 

4.  Thoy  laid  him  to  rest  in  the  old  church  yard  last  Wednesday. 

5.  She  came  to  school  last  term. 

6  I  should  have  liked  to  meet  him,  or,  I  should  like  to  have  met  him. 

7.  The  committee  are  invited  to  dine  at  the  Governor's  mansion. 

8.  I  fear  I  shall  be  unable  to  go. 

9.  A  pair  of  twins  were  playing  on  the  grass  near  the  gate. 

10.  If  I  were  vou.  I  should  refuse  to  go. 

11.  We  have  only  ten  dollars;  we  should  have  at  least  twenty. 

12.  Altogether,  nearly  two  hundred  dollars  was  raised. 

13.  Correct. 

14.  Fifty  tons  was  sold  In  October.     (The  quantity  Is  here  being  con- 
sidered, not  the  number  of  tons.) 

15.  Several  carloads  of  wheat  were  received.     (If  the  quantity  alone 
is  considered,  the  sentence  is  correct.) 

16.  More  than  a  thousand  bushels  of  wheat  was  burned. 

17.  Were  I  to  have  pneumonia  again.  I  think  I  should  not  recover. 

18.  The  Jury  are  dissatisfied  with  their  quarters. 

19     The  committee  includes  a  number  of  wealthy  men. 

20.  The  family  have  removed  to  California  for  their  health,  or.  The 
family  has  removed  to  California  on  account  of  Ill-health. 

21.  The  leaders,  not  the  union,  are  to  blame. 

22.  Neither  the  coundlmen  nor  the  mayor  Is  to  blame. 
''S     The  bridal  pair  were  congratulated  by  their  friends. 

24!     One  basket  of  eggs  were  nearly  all  bad,  (better.  The  eggs  in  one 
basket  were  nearly  all  bad). 


14  TEACHER"  S  REFERENCE  BOOK 

MISCELLANEOUS  ERRORS  FOR  WRITTEN  REVIEW— Page  131. 

1.  It  makes  less  noise  than  other  machines  and  seldom  requires 
repairing. 

2.  He  does  not  use  that  kind  of  envelopes  for  his  personal  letters. 

3.  He  seemed  to  feel  bad  about  it  at  the  time,  but  he  has  said 
nothing  about  it  lately. 

4.  Try  to  see  him  today. 

5.  Neither  he  or  I  will  agree  to  the  arrangement,  and  just  between 
you  and  me,  I  do  not  believe  Mr.  Harlan  himself  likes  the  plan 
very  well. 

6.  I  shall  try  to  make  the  sale,  but  I  am  not  at  all  sure  that  I  shall 
succeed. 

7.  You  are  not  the  one  I  was  looking  for. 

8.  I  shall  try  to  see  him  immediately. 

9.  He  praised  his  bravery  highly,  even  comparing  him  to  a  lion. 

10.  This  is  very  different  from  working  at  so  much  a  week. 

11.  The  gentleman  proved  to  be  no  other  than  the  president,  or,  The 
gentleman  himself  proved  to  be  the  president. 

12.  I  honor  him  beyond  all  my  friends. 

13.  I  am  younger  than  any  one  of  my  four  brothers. 

14.  Have  "you  a  good  ijen  today.  Mark?    If  not,  you  must  get  one  be- 
fore beginning  your  writing. 

15.  Speak  more  distinctly,  I  can  hardly  understand  you. 

16.  Did  you  ever  know  of  my  doing  a  thing  like  that? 

17.  Shall  I  return  the  goods  that  remain  unsold? 

18.  The  letter  has  lain  on  his  desk  for  a  week. 

19.  He  was  one  of  those  boys  who  never  do  anything  right. 

20.  I  have  no  friend  but  him. 

21.  It  is  only  laziness  that  causes  her  to  do  her  work  so  poorly. 

22.  No  one  but  Fred  and  me  is  to  blame. 

23.  It  was  not  until  Thursday  that  I  heard  of  his  going  to  Boston. 

24.  It  would  have  given  me  much  pleasure  to  go. 

25.  He  is  a  better  penman  than  bookkeeper. 

26.  This  is  an  old  story  about  ray  friend  Major  Wilson,  or,  This  is 
one  of  my  friend  Major  Wilson's  old  stories. 

27.  This  is  a  sketch  by  my  brother  when  he  was  but  sixteen,  or.  This 
sketch  was  made  by  my  brother  when  he  was  but  sixteen. 

28.  You  must  either  deliver  the  goods  yourself  or  get  someone  else  to 
deliver  them. 

29.  He  is  greatly  pleased  with  the  result. 

30.  Mr.  B.,  who  was  an  old  bookkeeper  and  another  member  of  the 
office  force  sometimes  helped  me  also. 

31.  I  have  little  use  for  this  kind  of  people. 

32.  The  rule  relates  only  to  words  ending  in  final- e. 

33.  We  have  both  Byron's  and  Moore's  poems. 

34.  He  issues  orders"  as  though  he  were  the  proprietor. 

35.  It  is  much  the  more  costly  of  the  two. 

36.  Neither  of  us  is  required  to  be  at  the  office  till  eight. 
37     Mr.  A,  and  I  were  invited. 

38.     I  did  not  go.    Had  I  gone,  I  should  probably  have  been  chosen. 

FOR  ORAL  REVIEW— Grammar— Page  132. 

1.  One  does  not  know  how  many  errors  in  grammar  he  makes,  until 
his  attention  is  called  to  them. 

2.  I  shall  be  obliged  to  cancel  our  contract. 

3.  We  have  a  complete  stock  of  the  latest  styles. 

4.  He  and  Harry  had  thought  it  was  we. 

5.  Every  man  has  some  good  in  him. 


FOR  MARSHALL'S  BUSINESS  ENGLISH  15 

6.  Nell  Is  always  afraid  of  cyclones. 

7.  1  am  so  hoarse  I  can  hardly  speak. 

8.  I  have  nearly  finished  my  new  book. 

9.  For  whom  is  this  letter? 

10.  It  is  fifteen  minutes  of  nine.  (There  is  good  authority  for  the 
expressions  as  jiiven  in  the  text) 

11.  He  is  not  so  tall  as  I. 

12.  You  study  harder  than  he. 

13.  He  was  only  slightly  ill  Monday,  but  is  very  much  worse  today. 

14.  But  three  or  four  j^eople  were  present. 

15.  Fire  of  us  girls  room  together,  and  we  quarrel  with  one  another 
nearly  every  day. 

16.  A  case  of  eggs  was  bought. 

17.  I  cannot  go  unless  you  do. 

18.  He  was  seriou.sly  ill,  but  not  really  in  danger. 

19.  As  soon  as  I  finished  speaking,  I  started  for  home. 

20.  I  fear  I  cannot  well  spare  the  money  today. 

21.  If  I  had  a  new  machine  as  Joe  has,  I  could  do  much  better. 

22.  We  rode  over,  using  a  horse  and  buggy. 

23.  We  shall  have  comi)any  to  supper. 

24.  He  asked  me  to  l)ring  him  a  morning  paper. 

25.  We  e.\pect  to  go  today. 

26.  He  should  not  submit  to  it.  If  I  were  he,  I  would  stand  up  for 
my  rights. 

MISUSED  WORDS— Page  132. 

1.  I  remember  the  date;  it  was  .June  1,  1913.     I  am  sure  of  this,  al- 
though 1  am  often  likely  to  forget  dates. 

2.  Do  you  know  when  you  will, come  to  St.  Louis  again? 

3.  I  was  staying  at  the  Palmer  House  at  the  time  of  the  accident,  or. 
Before  the  accident  occurred.  I  was  staying  at  the  Palmer  House. 

4.  At  that  school,  every  girl  must  take  two  hours'  dictation  a  day. 

5.  Every  dog  has  his  day. 

6.  He  is  now  a  fair  musician,  and  thinks  of  selecting  music  as  a 
vocation. 

7.  After  talking  with  him  an  hour  or  more,  he  did  not  seem  as  angry 
with  us  as  with  the  Brown  Company. 

S.     You  would  better  bring  your  unil)rella.  as  it  is  likely  to  rain. 
9.    His  account  was  paid  in  part  last  month. 

10.  We  have  scarcely  enough  paper  to  last  us  until  Saturday. 

11.  The  book  is  full  of  errors,  and  we  have  been  al)le  to  .sell  but  a 
small  part  of  the  invoice. 

12.  He  was  not  a  good  salesman,  and  in  this  respect  I  had  tlie  advan- 
tage of  him. 

13.  You  do  not  need  to  solicit  us  further,  as  our  answer  is  final. 

14.  We  have  enough  of  this  brand  for  present  orders,  but  our  supply 
is  not  sufficient  to  meet  the  demand  that  will  come  when  the 
season  opens. 

15.  Your  conduct  has  alienated  our  patrons,  and  we  feel  that  your 
actions  are  very  unbecoming. 

16.  One  person  left  our  employ  Imcause  he  thought  the  occupation  not 
healthful ;  this,  of  course,  is  a  mistake. 

17.  He  said  that  he  had  been  exonerated  from  all  blame  in  the  matter. 
IS.     When  I  bought  the  new  machine,  I  thought  that  it  would  prove 

successful ;  but  in  this  I  was  wrong. 

19.  He  was  killed  in  an  accident  about  a  year  ago. 

20.  He  was  ill  of  pneumonia  for  a  considerable  time. 

21.  They  have  a  neostyle  in  the  office,  but  I  am  still  rather  awkward 
in  nislng  it 


16  TEACHERS  REFERENCE  BOOK 

22.    You  will  have  exceptional  opportunities  for  making  a  success  of 

your  work. 
2.3.     I  shall  be  very  glad  to  meet  you. 

24.  You  should  be  more  careful  in  addressing  the  envelopes. 

25.  He  sent  a  post  card  (or  postal),  requesting  an  increase  In  salary. 

26.  I  greatly  enjoyed  the  ride  to  the  beach ;  your  new  carriage  is  in- 
deed a  luxury. 

27.  Our  statement  was  substantiated  by  the  testimony  of  two  of  the 
witnesses. 

28.  He  died  of  heart  disease  nearly  a  year  ago. 

29.  He  is  unfriendly  to  our  house,  and  I  am  determined  to  outdo  him 
in  that  territory  if  possible. 

30.  The  class  of  letters   you   write   are   likely    to   alienate    our  best 
customers. 

31.  As  we  were  not  in  any  hurry,  we  stayed  at  the  park  a  while  and 
listened  to  the  music. 

.32.     I   left  him  about  two  o'clock,  and  boarded  an  electric   car  for 
Boston. 

33.  You  may  transcribe  this  letter  now,  and  I  will  dictate  the  other 
later. 

34.  He  seemed  to  feel  some  resentment  towards  me,  but  did  not  accuse 
me  of  neglecting  my  duties. 

35.  I  suspect  he  has  been  tampering  with  the  records,  and  I  Intend 
to  watch  him  hereafter. 

3G.    We  were  greatly  plea.sed  with  the  new  machine;  Its  work  is  cer- 
tainly hard  to  excel. 

37.  He  contends  that  we  are  prejudiced  against  him,  but  this  Is  not 
so ;  we  have  treated  him  the  same  as  we  have  treated  others. 

38.  The  profits  on  this  work  are  rather  small. 

39.  We  think  you  should  be  satisfied    with   what   you  have  already 
received. 

40.  We  wish  to  inform  you  that  your  shipment  of  June  1  Is  received. 

41.  We  are  glad  to  say  that  your  conduct  has  been  entirely  satis- 
factory. 

42.  May  I  speak  with  you  a  few  minutes  regarding  a  business  matter? 

43.  He' has  paid  the  bill,  and  I  have  received  the  money.     You  will 
find  enclosed  a  check  for  the  amount. 

44.  You  must  stop  allowing  such  heavy  discounts.    The  house  will  not 
approve  of  it. 

45.  He  was  reared  in  Maine  and  is  well  informed  as  to  the  lumber 
business. 

46.  Thero  has  been  a  general  rise  in  prices,  and  I  think  they  will  go 
even  higher. 

47.  He  has  had  an  attack  of  nervous  prostration,  but  is  now  entirely 
recovered. 

4S.     We  reached  an  agreement  as  to  the  matter  today,  and  I  think  the 
arrangement  is  a  good  one  for  us. 

49.  We  are  expecting  a  heavy  trade  for  this  winter. 

50.  Bad  weather  has  prevented  my  cr.  ling  at  more  than  two  or  three 
towns  this  week,  but  I  hope  for  a  Itetter  record  for  next  week. 

51.  Ovu-     house     usually     contributes    liberally     to     all     benevolent 
enterprises. 


To  Aid  You  to  Examine  "Marshall's  Business  English" 


1.  Short  crisp  lessons  with  something  interesting  to  do  in  connection 
with  each.     See  pages  18-19. 

2.  The  most  needed  matters  of  grammar  covered  in  the  first  twenty-five 
lessons.      Note  novel  treatment  of  verbs,  pages  19  to  23. 

3.  Please  notice  the  interesting  lessons  on  the  use  and  misuse  of  words, 
pages  39  to  54. 

4.  Teachers  praise  the  careful  study  of  details,  as  to  form  and  appear- 
ance of  letters,  postage,  enclosures,  etc.,  pages  57  to  89. 

5.  May  we  ask  your  especial  attention  to  the  natural  and  business-like 
phraseology  of  the  model  business  letters  beginning  on  page  90  ? 

6.  Please  do  not  overlook  the  special  lessons  on  telegraphing,  the  use 
of  the  telephone,  advertising,  social  correspondence,  payments  and  remittances, 
etc.,  pages  106  to  130;  also  the  fine  line  of  special  review  work  given  on  pages 
130  and  135. 

The  rather  unusual  form  of  this  text  was  chosen,  in  order  to  provide 
for  "life  size"  letters,  envelopes,  business  forms,  etc. 

We  have  prepared  a  special  package  of  stationery,  blanks,  imitation 
postage  stamps,  etc.,  for  the  students'  convenience  in  preparing  the  lessons. 
This  package  is  not  indispensable,  of  course,  but  it  contains  just  what  is 
needed  and  is  sold  for  much  less  than  the  student  would  ordinarily  pay  at 
the  local  stationers.  There  is  also  a  teacher's  reference  book  or  "Key"  for 
all  work  requiring  correction. 

GOODYEAR-MARSHALL  PUBLISHING  CO.      ::       Cedar  Rapids,  Iowa 


il 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


*  A  Course  in  Practical  Grammar  and  Business  Corre- 
spondence for  Commercial  Schools 


-BY- 


CARL  C.  MARSHALL 

Author  of  "EsaeniiaU  o£  English,"  Bookkeeping  and  Buainess  Training,"  Etc. 


.•  >  .      '»•  , 


NINTH  EDITION 


CEDAR  RAPIDS,  IOWA 

Goodyear-Marshall  Publishing  Company 

1920 


^ 


Copyrighted  1905 
THE  GOODYEAR-MARSHALL  PUBLISHING  COMPANY 


,  c    t 


Business  English — Part  I 


A   FOREWORD 


1.  Language  affords  the  means  as  well  as  the  evidence  of  intelligence.  Whoever  ac- 
quires the  knowledge  and  use  of  a  new  word,  acquires,  also,  the  idea  for  which  that  word 
stands,  and  adds  that  much  to  his  mental  capital.  The  mind,  like  the  body,  grows  by  what 
it  feeds  upon,  and  it  gains  in  strength  by  the  clear  thinking  that  finds  expression  in  correct  and 
exact  language.  Long  ago  Lord  Bacon  gave  expression  to  these  basal  truths  in  his  famous 
observation:  "Reading  maketh  a  full  man,  conversation  a  ready  man,  and  writing  an  exact 
man." 

No  other  educational  requirement  has  so  much  to  do  with  one's  personal  success,  as  the 
ability  to  speak  and  write  one's  mother  tongue  effectively.  Throughout  our  country,  and  in 
all  departments  of  business  and  professional  life,  there  is  a  pressing  call  for  men  and  women 
who  have  been  trained  to  the  ready  use  of  good  English.  No  commercial  house  wants  a  travel- 
ing representative  who  cannot  present  his  business  intelligently  and  correctly.  A  man  who 
cannot  write  or  dictate  a  letter  expressed  in  clear  language  and  in  correct  form,  will  rarely  be 
entrusted  with  the  management  of  a  business  enterprise.  One's  intelligence  is  estimated  by  the 
way  he  uses  language,  just  as  his  social  position  will  be  inferred  by  the  kind  of  clothes  he 
wears.  The  man  who  dresses  like  a  tramp  will  be  taken  for  a  tramp,  and  the  person  who 
speaks  inaccurately  and  ungrammatically,  or  writes  a  letter  containing  errors  in  spelling, 
grammar,  punctuation,  etc.,  will  be  taken  for  an  ignoramus  and,  usually,  with  entire  justice. 

These  thoughts  are  offered  in  the  hope  that  they  may  impress  the  student  with  the  great 
practical  importance  of  the  work  outlined  in  the  following  course  in  language-training.  The 
standards  of  commercial  English  are  each  year  growing  higher,  and  familiarity  with  its  re- 
quirements is  of  paramount  importance  to  those  who  are  looking  forward  to  a  business  career. 


LESSON  1. 
Some  Important  Essentials. 

2.     An  acceptably  written  English  sentence  To  use  a  common  phrase,  the  sentence  must 

must  be  correct  in  the  following  particulars :  "sound  right." 

1.  The  words  must  be  spelled  according  5.  The  sentence  must  be  grammatical,  and 
to  standard  usage,  and  capital  letters  must  be  free  from  slang  or  other  impurities  of  speech. 
properly  used.  Most  people  knozu  enough  to  observe,  fairly 

2.  The  necessary  punctuation-marks  must  well,  the  foregoing  requirements,  but  compara- 
be  employed  tively  few  have  acquired  the  habit  of  doing  so. 

3.  Such   words    must   be    chosen    as    will     ^^\'  '^^'^  ^°"?^  °"'y  through  constant  attention 

,    ,      ,  and  pamstakmg  practice, 

express  the  thought  accurately  and  clearly.  3      ^^^^    ^^^    ^^^^  ^^^^^^      ^^^^^^^^^ 

4.  The  words  must  be  so  arranged  as  to  they  are  not  new  to  you,  but  are  you  in  the 
produce    a    pleasing    and    harmonious    effect,     habit  of  observing  them? 

462227 


4, 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


GENERAL  RULES. 

1.  Begin  every  sentence  with  a  capital  let- 
ter, and  end  it  (nsually)  zuith  a  period  (.),  an 
interrogation  (f),  or  an  exclamation  (!). 

2.  Begin  with  a  capital  letter  all  words 
used  as  proper  (individual)  names  of  persons, 
places,  and  things. 

3.  Use  proper  abbreviations  in  accordance 
with  usage,  and  place  a  period  after  ALL  ab- 
breviations. 

4.  Keep  the  margin  (space  at  the  left  of 
the  page)  uniform,  and  paragraph  each  nezv 
topic. 

5.  Use  commas,  or  such  other  punctuation- 
marks  as  may  be  necessary,  to  indicate  pauses 
or  to  make  more  clear  the  meaning  of  the  sen- 
tence, and  divide  syllables  at  the  end  of  lines, 
only  as  indicated  by  the  dictionary. 

AfHx  the  possessive  sign  ('s)  to  indicate  pos- 
session in  the  case  of  nouns  in  the  singtdar 
form;  as  boy's,  John's,  Mr.  Jones's,  Charles's; 
also,  to  irregular  plurals  (those  that  do  not 
end  in  s),  as,  men's,  children's,  oxen's,  etc. 

Affix  the  apostrophe  (')  only  to  regular 
plurals,  as,  boys'  hats;  birds'  zvings;  ladies' 
gloves. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing  rules,  the  stu- 
dent is  advised  to  study  carefully,  and  apply  in 
all  his  future  work  the  following: 

Directions  Regarding  the  Preparation  of 
Written  Exercises. 

4.  Heading.  Your  written  exercises  should 
be  given  a  suitable  heading,  which  should  in- 
clude your  name,  the  date,  subject  of  the  paper, 
or  any  other  data  that  your  teacher  may  re- 
quire. 

The  following  is  an  acceptable  form : 


5.  Margin.  A  blank  space,  or  "margin," 
should  be  reserved  at  the  left  of  all  printed, 
typewritten,  or  pen-written  manuscript.  This 
marginal  space  should  be  uniform  throughout 
the  letter  or  other  manuscript,  but  may  vary  in 
width  with  the  size  of  the  paper  used.  In  the 
case  of  common  letter  or  foolscap  paper,  it  may 
be  about  three-foujths  of  an  inch,  and  for  note- 
paper,  one-half  an  inch.  The  width  of  the 
margin  is  somewhat  a  matter  of  taste,  but  it 


should  be  kept  uniform,  since  an  irregular  or 
varying  margin  gives  an  appearance  of  sloven- 
liness to  an  otherwise  neat  manuscript. 

A  paragraph  should  begin  at  a  distance 
from  the  left  edge  of  the  paper  equal  to  tivice 
the  width  of  the  margiti. 

6.  Spelling.  No  fault  in  composition  is 
more  discreditable  than  incorrect  spelling.  A 
dictionary  should  always  be  at  hand  and 
should  be  consulted  in  the  case  of  any  word 
about  the  spelling  of  which  the  writer  has  the 
least  doubt.  Whenever  it  is  necessary  to  verify 
the  spelling  of  a  word,  one  should  at  once 
write  the  word  correctly  a  number  of  times  on 
a  piece  of  waste  paper,  in  order  that  it  may  not 
again  give  trouble.  No  one  who  forms  this 
habit  will  long  be  a  poor  speller. 

7.  Neatness.  Persons  of  taste  and  refine- 
ment should  require  no  caution  as  to  the  value 
of  neatness  in  the  matter  of  letters  or  other 
written  manuscript,  yet  many  persons  who  are 
tidy  and  careful  as  to  their  dress  or  personal 
habits,  will  write  letters  or  hand  in  school 
papers  that  show  woeful  evidence  of  careless- 
ness and  slovenliness.  But  aside  from  this  gen- 
eral consideration,  bookkeepers,  clerks,  stenog- 
raphers, and  others  who  engage  in  commercial 
employment  soon  find  that  neatness  has  a  cash 
value  as  well.  No  business  office  fails  to  ap- 
preciate this  quality  in  an  office  employee.  It 
is,  therefore,  of  special  importance  that  the 
student  of  business  English  form  this  habit  at 
the  outset.  Keep  all  written  exercises  where 
they  will  not  become  soiled,  wrinkled,  blotted, 
or  turned  up  at  the  corners.  Papers  that  re- 
quire folding  should  be  folded  evenly  and 
neatly,  the  writing  should  be  plain  and  uni- 
form and  as  free  as  possible  from  blots, 
crossed-out  words,  erasures,  etc.  One  may  be 
neat  in  his  written  work  without  being  an  ex- 
pert penman,  but  neatness,  like  other  habits, 
comes  only  through  constant  attention. 

8.  Forethought.  There  is  a  good  rule  that 
admonishes  us :  "Think  before  you  speak."  It 
is  doubly  important  to  "think  before  you 
write."  Nothing  is  of  more  advantage  to  a 
writer  than  to  form  the  habit  of  mentally  con- 
structing every  sentence  in  its  entirety,  before 
attempting  to  write  it.  By  far  the  greater  num- 
ber of  errors  in  written  composition  occur,  not 
because  the  writers  do  not  knozu  enough,  but 
because  they  do  not  take  time  to  think. 


THE  PARTS  OF  SPEECH 


Exercise  1. 

Copy  the  following  paragraphs,  carefully 
observing  the  "General  Rules"  as  to  punctua- 
tion, capitals,  margin,  paragraphing,  etc.,  also 
the  foregoing  "Directions." 

We  have  yours  of  Oct.  12  relating  to  the 
matter  of  your  undertaking  the  sale  of  the 
Beamer  furnace  in  Freeport,  111. 

Had  your  proposition  reached  us  a  week 
earlier,  we  might  have  effected  an  arrange- 
ment with  you,  but  we  signed  an  agreement 
on  Sept.  29  with  Mr.  A.  N.  Miller,  whereby 
he  became  our  exclusive  agent  at  Freeport. 

If,  however,  you  would  like  to  engage  in 
the  selling  of  our  furnaces  at  some  other 
good  point,  we  believe  we  can  give  you  entirely 
satisfactory  territory.  We  have,  at  present,  no 
agent  at  Fond  du  Lac,  Wis.,  and  we  think  that 
this  is  quite  as  promising  a  point  as  Freeport. 
We  could  also  give  you  Logansport,  Ind.,  or 
Clinton,  Iowa,  both  of  which  are  live  towns. 

The  references  sent  are  fully  satisfactory, 
and   we  are  quite  willing  to  sign  a  contract 


with  you,  provided'  you  are  suited  with  the 
territory  that  is  now  available. 

Mr.  Stevens'  partner,  Mr.  Walker,  called 
on  us  today,  and  he  tells  us  that  you  have 
been  handling  the  Bolton  Co.'s  line  of  steam- 
fittings.  In  the  event  of  our  coming  to  an 
agreement  with  you,  would  you  care  to  con- 
tinue this  work  as  a  "side  line"?  For  our 
part,  we  see  no  objection  to  such  an  arrange- 
ment. 

Marking  Papers. 

A  systematic  method  of  marking  written  exercises  is 
illustrated  on  pages  6,  7,  and  8.  The  use  of  this  system 
will  save  much  time  to  both  student  and  teacher. 

On  page  6,  is  a  key  to  the  correction-marks ;  on  page 
7,  is  a  letter,  with  the  errors  marked,  as  it  would  come 
from  the  hands  of  the  teacher,  and  on  page  8,  is  the 
letter  as  it  would  appear  after  the  designated  correc- 
tions have  been  made. 

If  the  teacher  adopts  this  method  of  marking  correc- 
tions, the  student  should  study  the  key  and  illustration': 
until  he  is  familiar  with  the  system. 

Exercise  2. 

Write  from  memory,  in  your  own  zvotlu 
the  suggestions  and  rules  given  in  Lesson  1. 


LESSON  2. 
The  Parts  of  Speech. 


9.  The  words  of  the  English  language 
have  been  divided,  according  to  meaning  and 
use,  into  eight  general  groups,  called   Parts  of 

Speech.  These  are: 

1.  Nouns,  or  names  of  persons,  places, 
objects,  or  ideas. 

Examples:  Edwin,  Chicago,  book,  love, 
intelligence. 

2.  Pronouns,  or  words  used  instead  of 
nouns,  and  to  avoid  their  petition. 

Examples:  Henry  said  to  his  mother:  "/ 
am  much  interested  in  Spanish;  may  /  study 
it?"  "Yes,"  she  answered,  "/  am  willing,  pro- 
vided you  have  time  to  give  it  proper  atten- 
tion." 

3.  Verbs,  or  words  expressing  action  or 
being,  and  used  to  affirm  something  of  some 

'person  or  thing. 

Examples:  Corn  grows.  It  will  rain.  She 
remains  at  hoine.  The  river  has  been  rising. 
Walter  is  studious. 

4.  Adjectives,  or  words  used  to  qualify  or 
limit  the  ineaning  of  a  noun  or  pronoun. 

Examples:     These    apples    are    unsalable. 


The  sentences  were  clear  and  forceful.    She  is 
very  happy  and  has  many  charming  friends. 

5.  Adverbs,  or  words  used  to  modify  the 
meaning  of  verbs,  adjectives,  or  other  adverbs. 

Examples:  They  walked  rapidly.  It  was 
very  beautiful.  The  train  was  moving  rather 
slozvly. 

6.  Prepositions,  or  words  used  to  show  re- 
lations between  nouns  and  pronouns  and  other 
words. 

Examples:  He  lived  near  the  river.  The 
goods  were  made  in  New  York.  This  affair 
is  between  you  and  me.  She  divided  them 
among  her  friends. 

7.  Conjunctions,  or  words  used  to  join 
words,  sentences,  or  parts  of  sentences. 

Examples:  Energy  and  diligence  may 
bring  wealth,  but  it  takes  dignity  and  charac- 
ter to  make  manhood  or  womanhood. 

8.  Interjections,  or  words  thrown  in  to  ex- 
press pain,  surprise,  or  other  sudden  emotion. 

Examples:  O  dear!  Ha!  LTa!  Fiddle- 
sticks !    Pshaw ! 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


1.  Capitalize. 

2.  Do  not  capitalize. 


3.     Omission  of,  or  error  in,  punc- 
tuation. 


4.  Misspelled. 

5.  Omission  of  words. 

6.  Superfluous  words. 

7.  Use  abbreviation. 

8.  Do  not  abbreviate. 

9.  Wrong  abbreviation. 
10.  Wrong  division. 


a—?^^ 


.^g-^-^-^g^ji  rrr  (  <((' 


/O. 


11.    Paragraph. 


12.  No  paragraph. 

13.  Ungrammatical. 

14.  Improper  form. 

15.  Wrong  word   or   find  a   better 
word. 

16.  Inexact  or  ambiguous. 


17.    Re-cast    or    improve    arrange- 
ment. 


'-^^^^.-9--  _^2t^,,<^/'  _.,*C-»'0->«-^ 


18.    Wrong  indentation,  margin,  or 
position. 


KEY  FOR  MARKING  PAPERS 


...^■C^l^-fc^ 


^-?>t-^<?z/ 


<L^^SoC^ 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


/  ^ 


■y  (P:^-^-  ^/"^ 


-^2^^U_^ 


THE  SENTENCE 


Exercise  3. 

Write  separate  lists  of  the  nouns,  pronouns, 
verbs,  and  adjectives  to  be  found  in  the  follow- 
ing selection. 

NOTE. — In  preparing  the  exercises,  omit  the  ad- 
jectives a,  an,  and  the. 

Mistakes  Not  Wanted. 

A  leading  fimi  in  one  of  our  Western  cities 
once  advertised  for  an  assistant  bookkeeper, 
and,  as  is  usually  the  case,  there  were  many 
applicants  for  the  place.  As  each  candidate 
for  the  position  appeared,  he  was  conducted 
to  the  private  office  of  the  senior  proprietor, 
who  at  once  asked  him  this  question :  "What 
do  you  do  when,  by  mistake,  you  make  wrong 
entries  in  your  ledger? 

The  first  applicant  replied  that  he  usually 
made  a  corresponding  entry  on  the  opposite 
side  of  the  account,  "by  error,"  or,  "to  error," 
as  the  case  might  be,  which  would  balance  the 
erroneous  entry.  "We  shall  not  need  your 
services,"  said  the  proprietor,  and  the  young 
man  was  politely  dismissed. 

The  next  applicant  said  that  he  disposed  of 
wrong  entries  by  expert  erasures,  and  showed 
that  he  could  erase  an  entry  so  neatly  that  no 
one  could  know  that  it  had  ever  been  made. 
"You  are  very  much  too  skillful,"  remarked 
the  old  merchant,  "we  should  never  feel  safe 
with  our  books  in  your  hands,"  and  the  bright 
youth  was  allowed  to  go. 

Applicant  after  applicant  appeared.  Each 
had  some  ingenious  method  of  adjusting 
wrong  entries,  and  each  was  quietly  dismissed 
with  the  assurance  that  his  services  were  not 
wanted. 


At  last  an  unassuming  and  plainly  dressed 
young  man  appeared.  The  merchant  asked  the 
usual  question,  "How  do  you  proceed  when 
you  make  wrong  entries  in  your  ledger  ?" 

"/  never  make  wrong  entries  in  my  ledger," 
quietly  replied  the  young  man. 

"You  are  the  man  we  have  been  waiting 
for,"  said  the  merchant;  "you  may  consider 
yourself  engaged." 

Exercise  4. 

Write  lists  of  the  adverbs,  prepositions,  and 
conjunctions  contained  in  the  following  sen- 
tences : 

Finally  the  red  sun  lost  hiinself  in  the 
tangle  of  deep  crimson  clouds ;  a  few  faintly 
glimmering  stars  began  to  puncture  the  dark- 
ening blue  of  the  eastern  sky,  and  weird,  deep- 
ening shadows  slowly  hid  from  view  the  low, 
rounded  hills. 

We  have  been  awaiting  your  last  report 
anxiously.  It  is  rather  unsatisfactory  to  feel 
that  our  sales  are  steadily  decreasing,  but  we 
have  never  for  a  moment  doubted  that  things 
would  soon  be  more  favorable. 

Let  your  course  be  ever  onward  and  up- 
ward, and  keep  always  in  your  heart  a  strong 
faith  in  the  sure  ultimate  triumph  of  truth  and 
honor. 

I  saw  him  only  yesterday;  he  seemed  en- 
tirely discouraged,  but  I  spoke  encouragingly 
to  him,  told  him  to  cheer  up,  and  try  again, 
for  very  few  people  succeed  at  the  first 
attempt. 


LESSON  3. 

The  Sentence. 


10.  When  words  are  used  to  express 
thought,  they  are  grouped  according  to  the 
lazv  of  association.  In  thinking  of  objects,  we 
naturally  connect,  or  associate  with  them,  the 
acts  or  qualities  that  usually  pertain  to  them. 
We  cannot  think  of  a  rose,  for  example,  with- 
out thinking  of  the  odor,  color,  or  other  quali- 
ties of  the  flower.  When  we  so  arrange  words 
that  the  acts,  qualities,  or  other  characteristics 
of  an  object  are  asserted  of  it,  the  result  is 
called  a  sentence. 

11.  The  part  of  the  sentence  that  names 
the  object  about  which  an  assertion  is  made,  is 
called  the  subject  of  the  sentence. 

12.  The  part  of  the  sentence  that  tells 
what  is  asserted  of  the  subject,  is  called  the 
predicate  of  the  sentence. 


Thus,  in  the  sentence,  "Fishes  swim,"  the 
word  iishes  names  tlie  object  about  which  an 
assertion  is  made,  and  the  word  szuiin  tells 
what  we  assert  of  fishes;  hence,  fishes  is  the 
subject  of  the  sentence  and  sivim  is  the  pred- 
icate. 

13.     A   sentence   may   consist   of   but   two 

words,  one  being  the  subject  and  the  other  the 

predicate,  as  in  the  following  sentences : 

Eagles  soar  Soldiers  inarch 

Prices  fall  Gold  glitters 

Usually,  however,  the  subject  and  the  pred- 
icate each  consists  of  several  words.  Those 
comprising  the  subject,  may  be  called  the 
General  Subject,  and  fho.se  comprising  the 
predicate,  the  General  Predicate.  Take,  for 
example,  the  following  sentence : 


10 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Our  representative,  Mr.  A.  W.  Lane,  will 
visit  your  city  about  June  1. 

Here  the  words,  Our  representative,  Mr.  A. 
W.  Lane,  comprise  the  General  Subject  be- 
cause all  of  these  words,  taken  together,  name 
that  about  which  the  assertion  is  made,  and 
the  remaining  words  comprise  the  General 
Predicate  of  the  sentence,  because  they  tell 
what  is  asserted  of  the  subject. 

The  subject  and  predicate  are  called  the 
essential  elements  of  a  sentence,  because  no 
sentence  is  complete  without  them. 

Exercise  5. 

Indicate  the  general  subjects  and  predicates 
of  the  following  sentences  : 

NOTE. — As  an  aid  in  preparing  this  exercise,  use  a 
diagram  as  here  illustrated. 

The  important  productive  areas  of  the  earth  are 
usually  alluvial  plains. 


General  Subject 
General  Predicate 


I 


Tho  important  productive  areas  of  tlie  earth 
are  usually  alluvial  plains. 


1.  The  article  was  widely  advertised. 

2.  The    climate    of    Northern    Europe 
modified  by  the  Gulf  Stream. 


is 


3.  The  President  of  the  United  States  is 
Commander  of  the  Army  and  Navy. 

4.  Readiness  and  proficiency  in  the  use  of 
English  can  be  acquired  only  through  much 
practice. 

5.  Both  the  secretary  and  the  treasurer 
have  resigned. 

6.  Iron  ore  is  produced  in  large  quantities 
near  the  western  shore  of  Lake  Superior. 

7.  The  Japanese  have  made  rapid  ad- 
vances in  all  essential  arts  of  civilized  life. 

8.  The  invention  of  the  cotton-gin  by  Eli 
Whitney,  revolutionized  the  cotton  industry  in 
America. 

9.  Only  legally  competent  persons  can 
make  binding  contracts. 

10.  The  industries  of  a  country  determine, 
largely,  the  character  of  its  people. 

Exercise  6. 
Compose  ten  original  sentences,  using  not 
fewer  than  ten  words  in  each  sentence,  and 
indicate  the  subject  ad  predicate  of  each,  as 
in  the  previous  exercise.  Have  your  sentences 
mean  something,  and  observe  carefully  the 
rules  and  suggestions  given  in  Lesson  1. 


LESSON  4. 
Bare  Subject  and  Predicate. 


14.  We  have  seen  that  a  subject  and  pred- 
icate may  each  consist  of  one  word,  as  Birds 
fly,  or  that  either  subject  or  predicate  may  con- 
sist of  a  group  of  words.  At  least  two  words, 
however,  are  necessary  to  form  the  sentence, 
one  of  which  may  be  called  the  bare  subject 
and  the  other  the  bare  predicate.  Thus,  in  the 
sentence,  "Brilliant  flowers  of  many  varieties 
grow  profusely  in  the  tropics,"  the  essential,  or 
bare  subject  is  flowers  and  the  bare  predicate  is 
grow.  The  other  words  of  the  sentence  may 
be  used  or  not,  according  to  the  degree  of  com- 
pleteness with  which  we  wish  to  express  our 
thought. 

15.  The  parts  of  a  sentence  other  than  the 
bare  subject  and  the  bare  predicate  are  called 
Modifiers. 

16.  The   bare   subject,    together   with    its 


modifiers,    is   called   the   complete   or   general 
subject. 

17.  The  bare  predicate,  with  its  modifiers, 
is  called  the  complete  or  general  predicate. 

18.  The  bare  subject  is  usually  a  noun  or 
pronoun,  while  the  bare  predicate  is  ahvays  a 
verb,  and  consists  of  one  or  more  words. 

Exercise  7. 

Write  the  bare  subject  and  bare  predicate 
of  each  of  the  sentences  in  Exercise  5. 

Exercise  8. 

By  introducing  modifiers,  expand  each  of 
the  following  sentences  into  a  sentence  con- 
taining not  fewer  than  twelve  words : 

1.  roses  bloom  4.     trees  grow 

2.  letter  was  mailed    5.     art  can  be  acquired 

3.  cities  are  built  6.     man  made 


LESSON  5. 
Classes  of  Modifiers. 


19.  Words  or  groups  of  words  that  limit 
or  qualify  the  meaning  of  nouns  or  pronouns, 
are  called  adjective  modifiers. 

Exampi.e:  Four  cars  of  7vhcat  were  re- 
ceived. 

Here  Four  and  of  tvheat  are  adjective  modi- 
fiers of  the  noun  cars. 


20.  Words  or  groups  of  words  that  limit 
or  qualify  the  meaning  of  the  bare  predicate, 
or  verb,  are  called  adverbial  modifiers. 

Examples:  He  left  immediately  for  Neiv 
York.  Here,  immediately  and  for  New  York 
are  adverbial  modifiers  of  the  verb  left. 

NOTE.— Adverbial  modifiers  of  adjectives,  adverbs, 
etc.,  will  be  considered  in  a  subsequent  lesson. 


THE  COMPLEMENTS 


11 


Exercise  9. 

Write  a  list  of  the  modifiers  in  the  following 

sentences,  state  whether  they  are  adjective  or 

adverbial  in  their  use,  and  name  the  word  that 

each  modifies.    The  following  form  may  serve 

as  a  model: 

Walter's  brother  from  Ohio  called  upon  us  yester- 
day. 

Walter's    adj.    mod.    of    the    noun    brother. 

from  Ohio    "         "        "       " 

upon  us  adv.        "        "       "      verb  called. 

yesterday     "         "        "       " 

1.  His  thoughts  were  clearly  expressed. 

2.  Our  friend   from  Detroit  arrived  here 
yesterday. 

3.  Our  old  friend  often  speaks  of  you. 

4.  Several  old  gentlemen  were  seated  on 
the  wide  veranda. 


5.  Frank's  younger  brother  arrived  very 
early  in  the  morning. 

6.  Men  of  different  races  rarely  live  har- 
moniously together  in  the  same  country. 

7.  My  agent  at  Havana  wrote  to  me 
frequently  regarding  the  business. 

8.  Both  boys  attended  Mr.  F'.s  business 
school  for  several  months  during  1914. 

Exercise  10. 

Compose  sentences  in  which  the  following 
words  and  expressions  are  used  either  as  ad- 
jectives or  adverbial  modifiers : 

charming       undesirable        considerable 
complete         early  with  pleasure 

entirely  encouraging      from  the  east 

in  July  nicely  near-by 

seldom  frequently  generous 


LESSON  6. 
The  Complements. 


21.  Some  verbs,  used  alone,  form  a  com- 
plete predicate  by  asserting  mere  action  of  the 
subject. 

Examples:  Time  flies.  Children  play. 
The  visitors  have  arrived.  The  soldiers  were 
discharged. 

22.  Some  verbs,  however,  do  not  make 
complete  sense  unless  followed  by  other  words 
or  groups  of  words  called  Complements.  They 
are  so  called  because  they  "complement,"  or 
complete,  the  meaning  of  the  verb. 

23.  The  attribute  complement  completes 
the  meaning  of  the  verb  by  affirming  some  at- 
tribute, class,  or  condition  of  the  subject. 

Examples:  The  hook  is  interesting.  Here 
the  verb  is  is  completed  in  meaning  by  the  at- 
tribute complement  interesting,  which  affirms 
an  attribute  of  the  subject,  book. 

His  companions  are  gentlemen.  Here  the 
attribute  complement  gentlemen  completes  the 
meaning  of  the  verb  and  affirms  the  class  to 
which  the  companions  (subject)  belong. 

Our  friend  has  been  unfortunate.  Here  the 
attribute  complement  unfortunate  completes 
the  predicate  verb  has  been  and  affirms  a  con- 
dition of  the  subject,  friend. 

It  is  he.  Here  the  attribute  complement  he 
completes  the  predicate  is  and  identifies  the 
pronoun  it. 

The  attribute  complement  usually  follows 
the  verb  be  or  its  forms,  is,  am,  was,  are,  were, 
will  be,  has  been,  etc. 


These  verbs  express  mere  being,  or  exist- 
ence. 

24.  The  verb  used  with  an  attribute  com- 
plement is  called  the  copula,  because  it  joins, 
or  couples,  the  subject  to  its  attribute. 

25.  Copulative  verbs  are  often  followed  by 
adverbial  modifiers  also,  and  care  must  be 
taken  to  distinguish  these  from  true  attribute 
complements. 

In  the  following  sentences  the  words  in 
italics  are  not  complements,  but  adverbial 
modifiers,  since  they  do  not  affirm  an  attribute 
or  class  of  the  subject,  but  merely  modify  the 
verb  with  reference  to  place,  time,  etc. 

The  boys  are  here.  My  friend  is  in  town. 
Yonder  is  an  eagle.  He  was  there  at  noon.  Is 
he  at  home? 

The  attribute  complement  is  usually  either  a 
noun,  a  pronoun,  or  an  adjective.  (See  ex- 
amples under  23.) 

Exercise  11. 

Write  lists  of  the  copulative  verbs,  attribute 
complements,  and  adverbial  modifiers  con- 
tained in  the  following  sentences : 

1.  He  has  been  a  teacher  for  many  ^ears. 

2.  They  were  in  town  yesterday. 

3.  She  looks  sad. 

4.  Jefferson  became  president  in  1801. 

5.  They  were  there  today. 

6.  It  was  she. 

7.  The  old  gentleman  seems  very  cheerful, 
although  he  is  quite  helpless. 


12 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


8.     Henry 
rapher. 


soon  became  a  skillful  stenog- 

Exercise  12. 

Write  six  original  sentences,  each  contain- 


be  nouns,  two  pronouns,  and  two  adjectives. 

Write    four    sentences,    each    containing    a 
copulative  verb  (am,  is,  was,  etc.)  completed 
ing  an  attribute  complement.    Let  two  of  them     by  an  adverbial  modifier. 


sentence. 


LESSON  7. 
The  Object  Complement 

26.  Some  verbs  expressing  action  require  ment.  Use 
an  object  to  complete  their  meaning.  Such 
verbs  are  called  transitive,  because  the  action 
expressed  is  transferred,  or  passed  over,  from 
the  person  who  acts  to  the  person  or  object 
that  it  acted  upon. 

Examples  Frank  caught  a  iish.  Here  the 
object  complement,  fish,  is  required  to  com- 
plete the  meaning  of  the  transitive  verb, 
caught. 

Exercise  13. 


Find  the  transitive  verbs  and  their  object 
complements  in  the  following  sentences : 

1.  We  often  saw  the  President  riding  in 
the  park. 

2.  In    1904   the    Japanese   captured    Port 
Arthur. 

3.  The  manager  of  the  school  purchased 
twenty  new  typewriters. 

4.  We  have  written  ten  original  sentences. 

5.  The  United  States  annexed  Hawaii  in 
1898. 

6.  His  daughter  always  liked  to  read. 
Compose  five  sentences,  each  containing  a 

transitive  verb  completed  by  an  object  comple- 


not  less  than  ten  words  in  each 

Exercise  14. 

Find  the  bare  subjects,  bare  predicates, 
adjective  modifiers,  attribute  and  object  com- 
plements, and  adverbial  modifiers  of  the  pred- 
icate in  the  following  sentences : 

1.  The  old  couple  had  always  lived  a  se- 
cluded life. 

2.  The  young  man  rarely  wasted  his  spare 
time. 

3.  He  has  been  president  of  the  company 
since  1912. 

4.  The  Monroe  Doctrine  has  become  the 
settled  policy  of  America. 

5.  Travelers  in  tropical  America  often  see 
monkeys  playing  among  the  tree-tops. 

6.  He  at  once  wrote  an  explanatory  letter. 

7.  They  were  not  there  during  May. 

8.  We  laid  the  flowers  carefully  on  the 
table. 

9.  The  poor  fellow  has  been  cheerful 
throughout  his  long  illness. 

10.  They  notified  my  father  yesterday. 


LESSON  8. 

Misuse  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 


27.  Other  verbs  than  he  and  its  forms  are 
frequently  used  as  copulative  verbs  to  assert 
attributes  of  the  subject,  and  it  is  a  common 
error  to  complete  these  with  adverbs  instead 
of  the  required  adjectives.  This  is  a  frequent 
error  with  those  who  know  a  little  (but  not 
enough)  of  grammar.  Thus,  people  say,  "She 
looks  charmingly,"  when  they  mean,  "She 
looks  charming." 

The  adverb  should  be  used  when  we  wish 
to  modify  the  action  expressed  by  the  verb;  as, 
He  works  slozvly.  They  looked  quickly.  She 
sings  charmingly.    He  writes  ivell. 

The  adjective  should  be  used  when  we  wish 
to  affirm  a  quality  of  the  subject;  as.  He  ap- 
pears slow  (meaning  that  he  appears  to  be  a 
slow  person).  The  story  sounds  plausible. 
She  looks  handsome.     The  cake  tastes  good. 


Exercise  15. 

Write  the  following  sentences,  choosing  the 
correct  word  from  the  two  that  are  italicized 
in  each  sentence : 


1. 

2. 

3^ 
4. 
5. 
6. 

7. 


I  feel  bad  badly. 

The  vessel  arrived  safe  safely. 

They  walked  slozv  slozvly. 

You  are  looking  bad  badly. 

He  stood  silently  silent. 

They  sat  quiet  quietly. 

He  plays  bad  badly. 

8.  His  voice  sounds  loudly  loud. 

9.  Please  remain  quiet  quietly  here  until 
I  return. 

10.  The  sentence  sounds  bad  badly. 

11.  He  crept  silent  silently  into  the  room. 

12.  The  garments  look  nice  nicely. 

13.  He  looks  suspicious  suspiciously,   and 
probably  distrusts  us. 


PHRASE  ELEMENTS 


13 


14.  He  looked  suspiciously  suspiciotis 
about  him  and  entered  the  room  slow  slowly. 

15.  The  rose  I  recommended  smells  fra- 
grantly fragrant  and  blooms  luxuriantly 
luxuriant. 

16.  He  stood  thoughtful  thoughtfully  for 
a  moment  and  then  went  quiet  quietly  from 
the  room. 

17.  He  stood  defiantly  defiant  and  sounded 
his  bugle  loudly  loud  enough  to  be  heard  by 
his  distant  troopers. 


18.  He  lay  qniet  quietly  for  a  time,  then 
arose  and  passed  sivift  stuiftly  from  the  room. 

19.  She    remained    helpless    helplessly    at 
home. 

20.  He  tried  hard  hardly  to  win  the  prize. 

21.  The  genuine  coin  rings  tndy  true. 

22.  The  child  slept  quiet  quietly  till  morn- 
ing. 

23.  He  looked  angry  angrily  at  us. 


LESSON  9. 
Phrase  Elements. 


28.  The  elements  of  a  sentence  are  the  dis- 
tinct parts  into  which  it  is  separable. 

29.  The  essential  elements  are  the  Subject 
and  the  Predicate. 

30.  The  subordinate  elements  are  the  Ad- 
jective Modifier,  the  Adverbial  Modifier,  the 
Attribute  Complement,  and  the  Object  Com- 
plement. 

31.  Independent  elements  consist  of  inter- 
jections, and  of  such  words  and  phrases  as 
have  no  grammatical  relation  to  other  parts  of 
the  sentence. 

32.  When  an  element  is  composed  of  sev- 
eral words  which  are  closely  united  in  mean- 
ing, the  group  of  words  is  called  a  phrase. 

33.  A  prepositional  phrase  is  always  a 
modifier,  and  consists  of  a  preposition  and  its 
object.  The  object  is  usually  a  noun,  or  pro- 
noun, and  the  preposition  shows  the  relation 
between  its  object  and  the  word  which  the 
prepositional  phrase  modifies. 

Example:  He  lives  in  St.  Louis.  The 
n;an  on  horseback  is  Mr.  Jones  from  Boston. 
He  was  ai  home  early  iti  the  evening. 

34.  A  verbal  phrase  is  composed  of  the 
several  words  tliat  may  be  required  to  express 
the  verbal  idea. 

Examples:  The  enemy  had  been  defeated. 
They  are  coming.  You  might  have  been  in- 
jured. She  likes  to  read.  Having  zvalked  since 
morning,  he  had  become  very  weary.  Not  be- 
ing convinced  of  his  guilt,  I  withhold  my 
judgment. 

35.  Irregular  phrases.  The  foregoing 
groups  include  the  greater  number  of  phrases, 
but  various  irregular  forms  are  of  frequent  oc- 
currence, as  illustrated  in  the  following  exam- 
ples :  He,  as  zvell  as  his  brother,  was  to  blame. 
Taken  all  in  all,  the  book  is  fairly  readable. 
He  is  an  out-and-out  rogue.  He  visited  the 
factory  from  time  to  time,  to  watch  the  prog- 


ress of  the  undertaking.     Day  by  day,  he  con- 
tinued to  improve. 

36.  OflBces  of  the  phrases.  The  preposi- 
tional phrase  is  always  a  modifier,  either  ad- 
jective or  adverbial. 

37.  Verbal  phrases  may  occur  in  any  of 
the  sentence  elements. 

38.  Irregular  phrases  are  usually  adverbial 
in  their  office.  They  may  also  be  used  as  con- 
nectives or  they  may  be  quite  independent  of 
the  other  sentence  elements. 

Exercise  16. 

Write  a  list  of  the  phrases  in  the  following 
sentences,  giving  the  class  and  office  of  each. 

Model. 
1.    We  have  been  trying  to  see  him  at  his  home. 


Phrase 

Class 

Office 

had  been  trying 

to  see 

at  home 

verbal 

verbal 

prepositional 

predicate 
obj.  comp.  of  pred. 
adv.mod.  of  trying 

NOTE. — When  phrases  tell  when,  where,  why.  or 
how  something  is  done,  they  are  adverbial  in  office. 
When  they  name  some  class^  condition,  or  quality  of  a 
noun  or  pronoun,  they  have  the  office  of  adjectives. 

1.  The  boys  from  the  High  School  often 
played  foot-ball  with  the  eleven  from  our 
college. 

2.  To  be  a  leader  of  men  in  a  good  cause 
has  ever  been  considered  a  noble  ambition. 

3.  He  had  come  to  town  on  Tuesday  and 
remained  until  Saturday. 

4.  Having  mailed  the  letter,  he  returned 
with  all  haste  to  the  hotel. 

5.  By  and  by  he  may  learn  the  value  of 
courtesy. 

6.  Bad  spelling  is  inexcusable  in  any  one 
who  can  afford  the  cost  of  a  dictionary. 


14 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


7.  There   are   maidens   in    Scotland   more  early  in  the  morning  to  discuss  the  proposition 
lovely  by  far.  with  him. 

8.  He  at  once  decided  to  invest  his  money  ... 

in  stocks  ^^-     ^^  *^^  ^'™^  °^  your  visit,  I  was  thmk- 

9.  We  had  expected  to  meet  the  manager  ing  of  lending  some  money  to  Mr.  Hart. 


LESSON  10. 
Wrong  Use  of  Pronouns. 


39.  The  misuse  of  pronouns  in  the  subject, 
in  attribute  and  object  complement,  and  •  in 
prepositional  phrases,  is  a  common,  though 
very  gross,  form  of  incorrect  English. 

40.  The  nominative  forms,  I,  we,  he,  she, 
they,  and  who,  should  be  used  only  in  the 
Subject  and  in  the  Attribute  Complement. 

Examples:  He  and  /  w^ere  chosen.  It 
was  they,  not  zve^  who  did  it. 

41.  The  objective  forms,  me,  US,  him,  her, 
them,  and  whom,  are  to  be  used  as  Object 
Complements  and  in  Prepositional  Phrases, 
never  in  the  subject  or  attribute. 

Examples  :     We  saw  Henry  and  him.    She 

looked  at  Kate  and  me. 

NOTE. — The  wrong  use  of  pronouns  is  most  likely 
to  occur  when  they  are  used  as  a  part  of  a  compound 
element;  as,  "John  and  me,"  "You  and  he,"  etc.  In 
such  cases,  the  correct  form  is  at  once  indicated  by 
omitting  from  the  expression  the  other  member  of  the 
compound  element.  Thus,  one  might  say,  "They  met 
Charles  and  //'  but  he  would  at  once  see  the  absurdity 
of  saying,  "They  met  /." 

42.  The  objective  forms  of  the  pronoun 
are  required  as  attribute  complements  after  the 
verbal  phrase  to  be;  as,  "I  know  it  to  be  him," 
"Do  you  believe  it  to  be  her?" 

For  a  further  discussion  of  pronouns  see 
Lesson  14. 

Exercise  17. 

Write  the  following  sentences,  choosing  the 
right  pronoun  from  those  italicized,  and  be 
prepared  to  give  a  reason  for  your  choice : 


1.  I  did  not  know  it  was  her  she. 

2.  We  saw  Mary  and  she  her;  we  are  sure 
it  was  they  them. 

3.  Yes,  it  is  indeed  him  he. 

4.  Just  between  you  and  me  I,  it  is  my 
opinion  that  he  hiui  and  George  will  disagree. 

5.  I  did  not  allude  to  either  you  or  her  she. 

6.  They  suppose  it  to  be  /  me,  but  it  is 
him  he. 

7.  Neither  Charles  nor  she  her  was  to 
blame. 

8.  The  estate  goes  to  they  them  and  their 
brother. 

9.  We  were  met  at  the  station  by  they 
them  and  their  friends. 

10.  They  thought  it  was  us  we,  but  it  was 
him  he  and  Walter. 

11.  It  was  unkind  of  Kate  and  she  her  to 
speak  that  way,  for  it  was  not  zve  us  who  were 
to  blame. 

12.  It  was  through  Frank  and  she  her  that 
word  was  sent  to  Max  and  /  me. 

13.  I  have  always  thought  that  it  was  he 
him. 

14.  I  wish  you  were  more  like  him  he. 

15.  It  was  Henry  and  me  I  who  did  it. 

16.  It  will  be  her  she,  not  Ethel,  who  will 
win  the  prize. 

17.  Had  it  been  we  us,  both  Fred  and  she 
her  would  have  known  it. 

18.  I  was  afraid  that  it  might  be  she  her. 

19.  Notwithstanding  our  assurances,  he 
believed  it  to  be  they  them. 


LESSON  11. 
General  Review. 


1.  Write  a  list  of  the  parts  of  speech,  and 
give  three  examples  of  iach. 

2.  What  are  the  essential  elements  of  the 
sentence  ? 

3.  What  is  meant  by  the  bare  subject? 
The  bare  predicate?  Write  two  sentences  con- 
taining not  fewer  than  ten  words  each  and 
mark  the  bare  subject  and  bare  predicate  of 
each. 


4.  Name   the   subordinate   elements  of  the 
sentence. 

5.  Write   a   sentence   containing   both   an 
adjective  modifier  and  an  adverbial  modifier. 

6.  Write  sentences  as  follows : 

(a)  Illustrate  the  use  of  an  adjective  as 
an  attribute  complement. 

(b)  A  noun  used  as  an  attribute  com- 
plement. 


NOUNS— INFLECTIOM 


15 


(c)  A  pronoun  used  as  an  object  com- 
plement. 

(d)  An  adverb  modifying  the  predicate 
verb. 

(e)  A  pronoun    used    as    an  attribute 
complement. 

7.  Name  the  three  classes  of  phrases  and 
write  sentences  illustrating  each. 

8.  Give  an  example  of  a  verbal  phrase  as 
the  predicate.  As  the  subject.  As  the  object 
complement. 

9.  Give  an  example  of  a  prepositional 
phrase  used  as  an  adjective  modifier.  As  an 
adverbial  modifier. 


10.  Form  sentences  with  the  following 
words  as  copulative  verbs,  joining  the  subject 
to  an  attribute  adjective :  remains,  tastes, 
becomes,  feels,  looks,  stands,  appears. 

11.  Write  illustrative  sentences  as  follows: 

(a)  A  pronoun  used  as  the  attribute 
complement  of  the  verbal  phrase 
to  be. 

(b)  A  preposition  having  a  noun  and 
a  pronoun  for  its  object. 

(c)  A  pronoun  used  as  an  attribute 
complement  of  a  verbal  phrase  not 
used  in  the  predicate. 

(d)  A  noun  and  a  pronoun  used  as  the 
subject. 


LESSON  12. 
Noun — Inflection  and  Number. 


43.  Hitherto  the  learner's  attention  has 
been  directed  to  the  different  parts,  or  ele- 
ments, of  which  a  sentence  is  composed,  to  the 
use  of  the  several  parts  of  speech,  and  to  the 
different  classes  of  phrases  used  in  forming 
these  elements.  We  are  now  to  examine  the 
various  changes  of  form  that  some  of  the  parts 
of  speech  undergo  in  order  to  show  differences 
in  meaning  and  certain  relations  to  other 
words. 

44.  The  variation  in  the  form  of  words  to 
show  grammatical  relations  is  called  inflection. 

45.  There  is  much  less  inflection  in  the 
English  than  in  the  Latin  or  Greek,  or  in  the 
German,  French,  or  other  European  languages. 
In  the  latter,  the  various  relations  of  nouns, 
verbs,  and  adjectives  to  one  another  are  shown 
mainly  by  variations  in  their  spelling,  by  the 
addition  of  extra  syllables,  etc.,  while  in  Eng- 
lish these  relations  are  usually  indicated  by  the 
position  of  the  words  in  the  sentence,  or  by  the 
use  of  prepositions,  verbal  phrases,  etc. 

46.  The  following  list  of  inflections  of  the 
Latin  word  stella,  a  star,  and  scribere,  to  write, 
accompanied  by  the  English  translation,  show 
in  an  interesting  way  the  contrast  in  the  mat- 
ter of  inflection,  between  the  two  languages : 


LATIN 

Stella 

stellae 

stellam 

stelUs 

Stellas 


ENGLISH 

a  star 

stars 

star  (Obj.  comp.) 

belonging  to  stars 

stars  (Obj.  Comp.) 


scribere 

scribo 

scribis 

scribit 

scribam 

scripseramus 

scripserant 

scripsissemus 


to  write 

I  write 

you  write 

he  writes 

I  shall  write 

we  had  written 

they  had  written 

they  might  have  written 


Inflection  of  the  Noun. 

47.  The  English  noun  is  inflected  to  show 
(a)  number,  (b)  possession,  (c)  gender 
(sex). 

Number. 

48.  The  plural  of  nouns  is  regularly 
formed  by  affixing  .f  or  es  to  the  singular;  as, 
boy  boys,  box  boxes. 

49.  The  plural  of  other  nouns  is  indicated 
by  a  word  of  entirely  different  form;  as,  men, 
women,  mice,  teeth,  etc. 

50.  Nouns  ending  in  y.  In  nouns  ending 
in  y,  preceded  by  a  consonant,  the  plural  is 
formed  by  changing  the  y  to  i  and  adding  es. 

Examples  :  Fly  Hies,  cry  cries,  lady  ladies, 
ally  allies. 

When  the  y  is  preceded  by  a  vowel,  the 
plural  is  regular. 

Examples:  Days,  chimneys,  boys,  mon- 
keys, alleys. 

51.  Nouns  ending  in  f .  Many  nouns  end- 
ing in  f  form  their  plurals  by  changing  the  f  to 
V  and  adding  es. 

Examples:  Self  selves,  wolf,  wolves,  life 
lives,  half  halves. 

Exceptions:  Scarfs,  gulfs,  roofs,  hoofs, 
safes,  dwarfs,  and  some  others. 


16 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


52.  Nouns  ending  in  o.  Most  nouns  end- 
ing in  0  form  their  plurals  by  the  addition  of 
es. 

Examples:  Heroes,  mosquitoes,  cargoes, 
dominoes. 

Exceptions  :  A  few  nouns,  mostly  derived 
from  the  Italian,  add  s  only;  as  pianos,  solos, 
cameos. 

53.  Compound  nouns.  A  compound  noun 
consists  of  a  base,  or  principal  part,  joined  by 
means  of  a  hyphen  to  an  adjective  or  other  de- 
scriptive word  or  phrase.  The  descriptive  part 
of  the  compound  noun  may  precede  the  base, 
as  in  coo^-stove,  fac^-hammer,  wa/or-general ; 
or  the  descriptive  part  may  follow  the  base,  as 
in  coxxrt-martial,  aide-de-camp,  hanger-o», 
son-in-laiv. 

The  plural  of  most  compounds  is  formed  by 
pluralizing  the  base,  or  principal  word,  in  the 
compound. 

Examples  :  M  other s-'m-\a\v,  ax-handlcs, 
hangers-on,  knights-er rant,  she-bears,  mouse- 
traps. 

In  a  few  compounds,  both  parts  are  plural- 
ized. 

ExAMPLESS  Women-singers,  men-servants, 
knights-templars. 

54.  Figures,  signs,  etc.  Letters,  char- 
acters, figures,  etc.,  are  pluralized  by  affix- 
ing 's. 

Examples  :     5's,  x's,  p's,  q's,  and  o's. 

55.  Singular  and  plural  alike.  Some 
nouns  have  the  same  form  in  both  singular  and 
plural. 

Examples:  Deer,  sheep,  vermin,  series, 
means. 

56.  Singular  nouns  having  plural  form. 
Some  nouns  are  singular  in  meaning  but  plural 
in  form. 

Examples:  News,  politics,  ethics,  molasses. 

57.  Nouns  with  two  plurals.  In  many 
nouns,  the  plural  is  like  the  singular  when  ref- 
erence is  had  to  a  mass  or  collection  of  indi- 
viduals indefinite  as  to  number,  but  a  regular 
plural  is  used  when  a  few  individuals  are  re- 
ferred to.  Thus,  we  may  say,  "Fish  are 
numerous  in  the  stream,"  or  "Three  fishes 
were  swimming  in  the  aquarium." 

Other  nouns  vary  their  plurals  with  the 
meaning  of  the  word. 

Heathen — Heathens.  Hop  Sing  was  a 
Christian,  but  his  brothers  were  both  heathens. 
We  give  money  for  the  conversion  of  heathen. 


Brothers — Brethren.  The  young  men  are 
brothers,  and  members  of  the  same  church; 
tliey  are  much  respected  by  their  brethren. 

Dies — Dice.  The  dies  for  making  the  medals 
were  defective.   The  gambler  used  loaded  dice. 

Bricks — Brick.  Some  broken  bricks  were 
scattered  about  the  dooryard.  Brick  are  sold 
by  the  thousand. 

Pence — Pennies.  The  price  was  eighteen 
pence.    He  counted  the  pennies  in  his  purse. 

Heads — Head.  The  hydra  was  a  fabled 
monster  having  many  heads.  They  sold 
twenty  head  of  cattle. 

58.  Proper  names  and  titles.  Proper 
names  are  usually  pluralized  in  the  same  way 
as  other  nouns  having  a  similar  spelling,  as  the 
Coxes,  the  two  John  Smiths. 

The  following  list  shows  the  manner  of  plu- 
ralizing titles  in  common  use : 


singular. 

PLURAL. 

Mr. 

Messrs.  (pro.  mesh  yerz) 

Mrs. 

Mesdames  (pro.  mes  damz) 

Dr. 

Drs. 

Prof. 

Professors. 

Gen. 

Generals. 

Capt. 

Captains. 

The  plurals  of  most  military  or  political 
titles  are  formed  by  pluralizing  the  unabbre- 
viated form  of  the  singular;  as  Governors 
Jones  and  Wilson,  Majors  Black  and  Thomp- 
kins. 

In  pluralizing  proper  names  where  a  title 
is  used,  it  was  formerly  the  custom  to  plural- 
ize  the  title  only;  as,  the  Misses  Harlan,  the 
Mesdames  Brown.  It  is  now  quite  allowable 
to  pluralize  the  surnames,  as  the  Miss  Harlans, 
the  two  Mrs.  Browns. 

Exercise  18. 

Write  the  plurals  of  the  following  words, 
consulting  the  dictionary  when  necessary : 


chief 

no 

Professor  Miller 

analysis 

half 

cargo 

tooth-brush 

series 

roof 

mulatto 

major-general 

stepson 


loaf 

octavo 

German 

vertebra 

self 

tornado 

forget-me-not 

radius 

safe 

woman 

nebula 

thesis 


NOUNS— POSSESSIVE  AND  GENDER  FORMS 


17 


I 


hoof 

beef 

beau 

amanuensis 

volcano 

son-in-law 

chrysalis 

aide-de-camp 

Mr. 

man-servant 

genus 

solo 

madame 

Mrs. 

hanger-on 

crisis 

piano 

seraph 

echo 

spoonful 
terminus 
Miss  Wright 

Exercise  19. 

Divide  the  following  words  into  three  lists. 
In  the  first,  write  all  the  singular  forms;  in 
the  second,  all  the  plurals,  and  in  the  third,  all 


that  may  be  used  either 
the  plural : 

paraphernalia 

hysterics 

vertebrae 

committee 

couple 

dozen 

tidings 

heathen 

band 

odds 

bitters 

suds 

fish 

oats 

sciiool 


in  the  singular  or  in 

company 

team 

measles 

ashes 

bellows 

nebula  * 

family 

errata 

assets 

dogma 

species 

effluvia 

larvae 

flock 

trousers 


LESSON  13. 
Nouns;  Possessive  and  Gender  Forms. 


59.  In  old  English,  possession  was  usually 
indicated  by  an  inflection  consisting  of  the  syl- 
lable es;  as,  man  manes,  John  Johnes.  The 
requirements  of  verse  led  the  early  poets  to 
lessen  the  number  of  syllables  in  possessives  by 
dropping  the  e  and  writing  man's,  John's,  etc.. 
the  apostrophe  (')  being  used  to  show  the 
omission,  just  as  it  is  used  to  show  tlie  omitted 
letters  in  ne'er,  o'er,  etc.  This  is  probably  the 
origin  of  our  present  possessive  form. 

60.  Two   forms    of   possessive   nouns. 

With  regard  to  the  formation  of  their  pos- 
sessives, the  nouns  of  the  language  fall  into 
two  general  classes : 

a.  All  nouns  in  the  singular  and  all  plurals 
that  do  not  end  in  s.  This  class  of  nouns  forms 
the  possessive  by  adding  's. 

Examples:  Horse's,  Henry's,  Charles's, 
Jones's,  men's,  deer's,  oxen's. 

b.  All  regular  plurals — tliat  is,  plurals  end- 
ing in  s — form  the  possessive  by  adding  the 
apostrophe  only. 

Examples:  Horses',  foxes',  ladies',  mos- 
quitoes'. 

NOTE. — It  vvas  formerly  the  custom  to  add  the 
apostrophe  to  singular  nouns  ending  in  s.  Under  this 
usage,  people  wrote  "Charles'  hat,"  "Mr.  Barnes'  store," 
etc.  The  apostrophe  alone  is  still  used,  however,  in 
the  case  of  a  noun  where  the  addition  of  's  would  cause 
a  disagreeable  succession  of  s  sound,  as  in  the  follow- 
ing examples : 

For  conscience'  sake.  Mr.  Smithers'  house.  She  is 
the  seamstress'  sister. 

The  possessive  form  to  be  selected  in  such  cases  is  a 
matter  of  taste. 


61.  Joint  possession.  To  show  possession 
by  the  several  persons  of  a  firm,  company,  etc., 
the  possessive  sign  is  added  to  the  last  word 
only. 

Examples:  Parker  &  Davis's  store.  Pain, 
Miller  &  Sons'  contract.  The  Knox  Bros.  & 
Co.'s  warehouse. 

62.  Separate  possession.    If  we  wish  to 

express    separate    ownership,    the    possessive 
form  should  be  given  to  each  noun. 

Examples:  Moore's  and  Miller's  organs 
are  both  standard  instruments.  Communica- 
tion was  still  maintained  between  Sherman's 
and  Grant's  armies. 

63.  Modifying  phrase.  When  a  possessive 
noun  is  modified  by  a  phrase,  the  possessive 
sign  is  added  to  the  last  word  of  the  phrase. 

Examples  :  The  King  of  Poland's  soldiers. 
The  governor  of  Iowa's  brotlier.  My  son-in- 
law's  friend. 

It  is  well,  however,  to  avoid  this  use  of  the 
possessive  when  the  modifying  phrase  contains 
several  words.  Do  not  say,  "Mr.  Randall,  my 
old  friend  from  Ohio's  mother,"  but  "The 
mother  of  Mr.  Randall,  mv  old  friend  from 
Ohio." 

The  use  of  several  possessives  in  the  same 
sentence  should  also  be  avoided;  as,  "\Ve 
traveled  with  my  wife's  cousin's  friend."  Say. 
"We  traveled  with  a  friend  of  my  wife's 
cousin." 


18 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


"Nobody's  else"  for  "Nobody  else's." 

This  is  a  common  error  of  the  over-precise  per- 
son. To  quote  an  apt  paragraph  from  the 
editor  of  "Correct  EngHsh,"  "Nobody  else  says 
nobody's  else,  for  everybody  else  says  nobody 
else's." 

NOTE. — The  word  else  is  usually  treated  as  a  pro- 
*noun,  but,  considered  separately,  it  has  more  of  the  sig- 
nificance of  the  adverb  besides.  Such  expressions  as 
nobody  else,  anybody  else,  someone  else,  etc.,  are  now 
considered  as  unified  expressions,  having  the  office  of  a 
noun,  and  the  possessive  sign  is  properly  placed  at  the 
end  of  the  phrase. 

64.  Inanimate  objects.  The  possessive 
sign  should  not  be  used  in  the  case  of  nouns 
representing  inanimate  objects  (book,  desk, 
tree,  America,  Chicago). 

Examples:  The  leaves  of  the  tree  (not 
"the  tree's  leaves").  The  pages  of  the  book. 
The  wheel  of  the  wagon.  The  needs  of  Chi- 
cago. If  we  wish  to  personify,  that  is,  to  speak 
of  the  city  as  though  it  were  a  person,  it  is 
allowable  to  say  "Chicago's  needs." 

NOTE. — Strictly  speaking,  possession  is  an  attribute 
of  conscious  beings  only,  and  the  above  phrases  mean 
"pertaining  to,"  or  "a  part  of." 

Gender  Forms. 

65.  Gender,  in  grammar,  is  the  distinction 
in  nouns  or  pronouns  with  regard  to  sex. 

66.  Nouns  or  pronouns  that  mean  males 
are  of  the  masculine  gender. 

Examples:  Boy,  Charles,  him,  man,  king, 
duke,  emperor,  he. 

67.  Nouns  or  pronouns  that  mean  females 
are  of  the  feminine  gender. ' 

Examples:  Mary,  queen,  her,  empress, 
cow,  seamstress,  she. 

68.  The  only  regular  inflection  in  English 
to  indicate  gender,  consists  in  the  addition  of 
the  syllables  ess  to  certain  nouns,  to  indicate 
the  feminine. 

Examples  :     Count,  countess ;  lion,  lioness. 

NOTE. — Formerly,  the  feminine  forms,  poetess,  doc- 
tress,  authoress,  editress,  etc.,  were  used,  but  the  use 
of  these  is  being  discontinued,  the  masculine  forms, 
poet,  author,  doctor,  etc.,  being  used  to  designtae  both 
men    and    women. 


Exercise  20. 

Write   sentences    illustrating  the  use  of  the 
following  words : 

son-in-law's  boys' 

women's  boy's 

the  Miss  Smiths  gentlemen's 

President  Adams's  attorneys-at-law's 

bird's  birds' 

lady's  ladies' 

French  &  Nelson's  French's  and  Nelson's 

queen's  queens' 

Exercise  21. 

Write    the    possessives    of    the    following 
words : 

cattle  woman 

Kansas  women 

brother-in-law  gentlemen 

oxen  gentleman 

flies  monkeys 

Governor  of  Maine  men-servants 

Charles  fox 

Court-martial  man-of-war 

Miss  Barnes  sons-in-law 

Exercise  22. 

Rewrite  in  correct  form  any  of  the  follow- 
ing sentences  that  you  think  are  incorrect : 

1.  He  asked  pay  for  two  day's  work. 

2.  He  could  see  the  precipice's  edge. 

3.  He  bought  three  tailors'  geese  at  auc- 
tion. 

4.  Both  Lee  and  Grant's  military  maneu- 
vers will  always  be  famous. 

5.  They  sell  boy's  hats  and  men's  coats. 

6.  The  book  is   Fred's  my  school  mate's 
friend. 

7.  I    bought    the    wrap    at    Martin's    and 
Wright's. 

8.  My  friends'  sister  is  a  poetess. 

9.  King  Edward  was  the  Emperor  of  Ger- 
manys'  uncle. 

10.  We  own  both  Webster  and  Worces- 
ter's dictionaries. 


LESSON  14. 
The  Pronoun;  Classes,  Uses,  and  Forms. 

69.  The  antecedent  of  a  pronoun  is  the 
noun  or  other  word  for  which  it  stands. 

Examples:  "When  Frank  bought  his 
watch,  he  did  not  know  that  his  father  intended 
buying  hi)n  one  as  a  birthday  present." 


In  this  sentence,  the  noun  Frank  is  the  ante- 
cedent of  the  italicized  pronorms. 

70.  Personal  pronouns  are  those  that 
show  by  their  form  whether  they  designate  (a) 
the  person  speaking,  (b)  the  person  spoken  to, 
or  (c)  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of. 


VERBS  AND  VERBALS 


19 


71.  Pronouns  of  the   first   person   are 

those  that  designate  the  speaker;  they  are,  I, 
me,  my,  mine,  we,  lis,  our,  ours. 

72.  Pronouns  of  the  second  person  are 
those  that  designate  the  person  or  persons 
spoken  to;  they  are,  you,  your,  and  yours. 
The  solemn  forms,  thou,  thee,  thy,  thine,  and 
ye,  are  now  used  only  in  poetry,  in  religious 
speech,  and  by  certain  religious  sects. 

73.  Pronouns  of  the  third  person  are 
those  that  designate  the  person  or  thing  spoken 
of;  they  are,  he,  his,  him,  she,  her,  hers,  they, 
their,  theirs,  them,  it.  and  its. 

74.  The  possessive  pronouns  are  those 
that  indicate  possession.  They  are  fourteen  in 
number;  viz.,  my,  mine,  our,  ours,  thy,  thine, 
your,  yours,  her,  hers,  his,  their,  theirs,  and 
its.  The  apostrophe  should  never  be  used  with 
possessive  pronouns. 

75.  Gender.  But  six  pronouns  indicate 
gender.  They  are  he,  his,  him  (masculine), 
and  she,  her,  and  hers  (feminine),  with  their 
compounds. 

76.  Agreement.  Pronouns  should  agree 
with  their  antecedents  in  person,  number,  and 
gcitdcr. 

Disagreement  in  number  is  the  most  com- 
mon violation  of  this  rule.  A  printed  notice  in 
a  large  western  railway  station  concludes  as 
follows :  "Any  person  violating  this  rule  does 
so  at  their  own  risk."  Here,  person,  the  ante- 
cedent noun,  is  singular,  while  the  pronoun, 
their,  is  plural.  The  sentence  should  read, 
"Any  person  violating  this  rule  does  so  at  his 
own  risk." 

NOTE. — When  the  antecedent  may  refer  to  persons 
of  either  sex,  the  masculine  pronoun  is  used,  as  in  the 
last   sentence. 

Correct  the  following : 

1.     Every  one  should  do  as  they  would  be 

done  by. 


2.  Neither  one  of  tiiem  had  bought  their 
tickets. 

3.  Not  one  of  us  girls  had  studied  their 
lessons. 

4.  Everybody  should  attend  to  their  own 
business. 

5.  If  anybody  makes  that  statement,  they 
are  misinformed. 

77.    Compound  personal  pronouns  are 

formed  by  affixing  self  or  selves  to  certain  of 
the  objective  and  possessive  personal  pronouns. 
Examples:       himself,     itself,     themselves, 
ourselves. 

They  are  generally  used  to  give  emphasis 
to  an  expression;  as,  I  myself  am  to  blame. 
It  was  you  yourself  who  made  the  rule. 

They  are  also  used  reflexively  after  verbs 
and  prepositions. 

Examples:  He  contradicted  himself.  She 
bought  them  for  herself. 

It  is  a  common  error  to  use  compound  for 
simple  pronouns  in  sentences  like  the  follow- 
ing: "Myself  and  sister  were  there,"  instead 
of,  "My  sister  and  /  were  there."  "Yourself 
and  Henry  were  mentioned,"  instead  of  "Yoji 
and  Henry  were  mentioned."  "They  invited 
Alice  and  myself,"  instead  of,  "They  invited 
Alice  and  me." 

NOTE.-— For  a  discussion  of  the  use  of  nominative 
and  objective  forms  of  pronouns,  see  Lesson  10. 

Exercise  23. 

Write  sentences  illustrating  the  correct  use 
of  each  of  the  following  pronouns : 
ours  them  hers 

me  myself  their 

himself  her  themselves 

us  its  theirs 

she  they  itself 


LESSON  15. 
Verbs  and  Verbals. 


78.     In  the  number  and  irregularity  of  its  errors  result  from  its  misuse  than  from  that 

inflections,  and  in  the  variety  of  uses  to  which  of  any  other  part  of  speech. 

its  several  forms  are  put  in  the  .sentence,  the  79.     Verbs  vary  in  their  forms  to  indicate 

verb  is  the  most  complicated   of  the  several  the  time  of  an  action;  as,  "He  goes  home," 

parts  of  speech.    It  is  also  the  most  important  "He  zuent  home,"  "He  zvill  go  home ;"  also  to 

from  the  standpoint  of  the  student,  since  more  show  whether  an  action  is  going  on  or  com- 


20 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


pleted ;  as,  "He  luas  zvriting  a  letter,"  "He  had 
zvritten  the  letter."  This  modification  of  the 
verb  is  called  tense. 

The  form  of  the  verb  often  varies  according 
as  the  subject  is  singular  or  plural;  as,  "The 
boy  goes  to  school,"  "The  boys  go  to  school." 
This  modification  is  called  number. 

80.  Principal  and  auxiliary  verbs.  We 
have  already  learned  that  the  predicate  verb 
may  consist  of  several  words.  When  this  is 
the  case,  the  last  one  is  called  the  "principal 
verb"  and  the  others,  "auxiliaries." 

Thus,  in  the  sentence,  "The  letter  may  have 
been  written,"  the  word  written  is  the  princi- 
pal verb,  and  the  words  may  have  been  are  the 
auxiliaries. 

Simple  Forms  of  the  Verb. 

81.  Most  verbs  in  ordinary  use  have  five 
simple  forms,  which  liave  been  variously  desig- 
nated by  different  authors.  We  shall  consider 
these  in  their  order,  as  follows : 

82.  Name-form.  This  is  the  general  form 
used  to  designate  the  verb,  and  it  is  the  form 
given  in  the  dictionary  when  it  is  defined. 

Examples:    go,  see,  look,  run,  walk. 

The  name-form  is  used  with  plural  subjects 
and  without  auxiliaries,  to  assert  action  in  the 
present  time  (present  tense). 

Examples  :  They  go.  We  zvrite.  Birds  fly. 
NOTE. — The  present  plural  of  the  verb  be  is  are. 

The  name-form  is  also  used  with  various 
auxiliaries  (will,  shall,  may,  might,  can,  could, 
etc.)  to  assert  futurity,  determination,  duty, 
possibility,  possession,  etc. 

Examples:  They  may  come.  He  should 
study.    It  wWX.rain.    I  shall  go. 

83.  The  name-form,  preceded  by  the  word 
to,  is  used  to  form  a  class  of  verbal  phrases 
called  infinitives. 

Examples  :  They  ought  to  go.  To  be  con- 
tented is  to  be  happy.    She  likes  to  skate. 

84.  The  singular  form.  This  inflection  of 
the  verb  is  usually  formed  by  adding  .y  or  es  to 
the  name-form.  It  is  used  only  in  the  predicate 
and  with  singular  subjects  in  the  third  person. 

Examples  :  She  lives  in  New  York.  The 
boy  catches  the  ball. 

The  verb  be  has  two  irregular  singular 
forms,  is  and  was.  The  singular  form  of  have 
is  has. 

85.  The  past  form.      This  is  the  form  of 


the  verb  required  when  the  assertion  refers  in- 
definitely to  past  time.  In  regular  verbs  it  is 
formed  by  adding  ed  to  the  name-form;  as, 
zvalked,  looked,  loved.     In   irregular   verbs 

often  an  entirely  different  word;  as,  see  sazv, 
go  zve7it,  run  ran,  lie  lay. 

The  past  form  of  the  verb  is  used  only  to 
form  predicates,  and  never  zvith  auxiliaries. 

Examples  :  They  went  home.  He  sazv  his 
friend.    The  book  lay  on  tlie  table. 

86.  The  perfect  participle.  This  form  de- 
rives its  name  from  the  fact  that  it  is  used  as  a 
predicate  mainly  in  the  perfect  tenses;  that  is, 
to  express  a  completed  or  "perfect"  act  or  con- 
dition. In  regular  verbs,  it  does  not  differ 
from  the  past  form.  In  irregular  verbs,  it  may 
or  may  not  differ  from  the  past  form. 

The  list  on  page  24  shows  the  past  form  and 
the  perfect  participle  of  the  more  important 
irregular  verbs.  The  incorrect  use  of  these 
forms  is  a  frequent  error  with  careless  or 
illiterate  persons. 

NOTE.— The  terra  "participle"  applies  to  those  verb 
forms  that,  aside  from  their  use  in  the  predica'e,  may 
have  the  office  of  nouns  or  of  adjectives.  Further  dis- 
cussion of  the  uses  of  participles  will  be  given  in  a 
subsequent  lesson. 

87.  Tlie  Perfect  Participle,  when  used  in 
the  predicate,  should  always  be  preceded  by 
auxiliaries. 

Examples  :  He  has  come  home.  The  let- 
ter zi'as  zvritten.  They  liad  gone.  The  fruit 
lias  been  gathered. 

88.  The  imperfect  participle  is  formed  by 
joining  ing  to  the  name-form;  as,  laughmg, 
miging,  walking.  It  is  so  called  because  it  ex- 
presses the  act  as  incomplete  or  "imperfect"  at 
tlie  time  indicated  in  the  assertion.  When  used 
in  the  predicate,  it  is  always  accompanied  by 
the  verb  be  or  some  of  its  forms  as  auxiliaries. 

Examples:  It  may  be  raining.  He  h-as 
been  writing.    I  am  coming.    She  zuas  reading. 

NOTE.— By  some  authors,  this  form  of  the  verb  is 
called  "present  participle,"  but  this  designation  is  mis- 
leading, since  the  use  of  this  form  of  the  verb  is  not 
confined  to  the  present  tense. 

Spelling  Hints. 

89.  Dropping  final  e.  In  forming  the  im- 
perfect participle  of  verbs  ending  in  e,  this  let- 
ter is  omitted  in  the  participle. 


Examples: 
ride,  riding. 


hope,  hoping;  write,  writing 


FORMS  AND  AGREEMENTS 


21 


Exceptions:  singe,  singeing;  hoe,  hoeing; 
dye,  dyeing. 

90.  Doubling  final  consonant.  When  the 
verb  consists  of  but  one  syllable  and  terminates 
in  a  single  consonant  preceded  by  a  single 
vowel,  the  final  consonant  is  usually  doubled  in 
forming  both  the  perfect  and  the  imperfect 
participle. 

ExAMPLESs  fit,  fitted,  fitting;  run,  running; 


plan,  planned,  planning;  trim,  trimmed,  trim- 
ming. 

The  final  letter  is  also  doubled  when  the 
verb  consists  of  more  than  one  syllable,  and 
when  the  final  syllable  is  accented  and  ends 
in  a  single  consonant  preceded  by  a  single 
vowel. 

Examples:  concur,  concurred,  concurring; 
remit,  remitted,  remitting. 


EXERCISE  24. 
Model. 

NAME   FORM.  SINGULAR.  PA.ST.  PERF.   P.  IMP.   P. 

go  goes  went  gone  going 

come  comes  came  come  coming 

spell  spells  spelled  spelled  spelling 

Prepare  lists,  as  in  the  above  model,  of  the  forms  of  the  following  verbs.  When  in  doubt  as 

to  the  required  form,  consult  the  dictionary ;  also,  observe  the  rules  as  to  dropping  final  e  and 

doubling  final  consonants. 

write  lie  conceal  shoe  blow 

lay  combat  throw  run  tip 

fix  take  dye  bite  charge 

catch  die  lend  sit  do 


LESSON  16. 
The  Verb;  Forms  and  Agreement. 


91.    The  verb  be.    In   English  as  in  most 
other  languages,  the  verb  he  is  much  more  ir- 
regular than  other  verbs.    As  used  in  ordinary 
speech,  it  has  eight  simple  forms,  as  follows : 
Name-form        he 


Singular 

am,  is,  zvas 

Plural 

are,  zvcre 

Perf.  Part. 

been 

Imper.  P. 

heing 

The  form  am  is  used  only  in  the  first  per- 
son and  singular  number. 

The  forms,  is  and  zuas,  are  used  only  in  the 
third  person  singular. 

In  conditional  clauses,  the  plural  form  zuere 
is  used  with  a  singular  subject.  This  is  known 
as  the  suhjimctive  form,  or  subjunctive  mode, 
of  the  predicate  verb. 

Examples:  If  I  were  he,  I  would  not  go. 
Were  he  qualified,  he  could  get  the  position. 

92.  Defective  verbs  are  those  that  have 
fewer  than  the  usual  number  of  forms.  Many 
of  the  auxiliary  verbs  have  but  two  forms. 


Examples:  may,  might;  can,  could;  shall, 
should;  will,  would. 

The  verb  ought  has  only  the  name-form.  It 
is  used  in  the  present  only,  and  without  aux- 
iliaries, and  is  always  followed  by  the  infinitive 
verbal. 

Examples:  He  ought  to  go.  She  ought  to 
have  knotim  it.    We  ought  to  be  charitable. 

It  is  a  common  error  to  use  ought  with  the 
auxiliary  had;  as,  "He  had  ought  to  study," 
"You- hadn't  ought  to  go,"  instead  of,  "He 
ought  to  (or  should)  study,"  "You  ought  not 
to  (or  should  not)  go." 

93.  Mode  and  tense  forms.  In  the  more 
technical  treatises  on  grammar,  much  attention 
is  given  to  the  various  predicate  combinations, 
which  are  considered  under  the  headings. 
"Mode"  (or  "Mood")  and  "Tense."  As  the 
detailed  study  of  these  verb  combinations  has 
little  practical  value,  it  is  omitted  in  this  book. 


•a 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


94.  Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its  subject.  The  fact  that  the  verb  may  vary  in  its 
form  to  agree  with  the  person  and  number  of  the  subject,  is  called  "the  agreement  of  the  verb 
with  its  subject."  The  most  common  errors  in  this  connection  are:  (1)  the  use  of  the  singular 
form  with  a  plural  or  compound  subject,  or  a  subject  singular  in  form  but  plural  in  meaning; 
(2)  the  use  of  the  plural  form  of  the  verb  with  a  singular  subject. 


Examples  : 


1. 

2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 


INCORRET. 

Mary  and  Ethel  has  gone. 
Cherries  is  ripe. 
People  differs  about  it. 
A  box  of  apples  were  sent. 
Politics  are  interesting. 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 


CORRECT. 


Mary  and  Ethel  have  gone. 
Cherries  are  ripe. 
People  differ  about  it. 
A  box  of  apples  was  sent. 
Politics  is  interesting. 


95.  Errors  of  this  class  occur,  not  because 
the  speaker  is  ignorant  of  the  rule  requiring 
the  verb  to  agree  with  its  subject,  but  because 
he  misapprehends  the  number  of  the  subject. 

It  is  very  important  to  remember  that  it  is 
the  meaning  and  not  the  form  of  the  subject 
that  determines  the  number-form  of  the  verb 
or  pronoun  to  be  used.  Many  nouns  that  are 
plural  in  form,  are  singular  in  meaning  and 
require  singular  verbs  or  pronouns. 

Examples:  politics,  crisis,  measles,  ethics, 
news. 

Others  are  treated  as  plurals  though  desig- 
nating but  one  article. 

Examples  :  trousers,  scissors,  tongs,  for- 
ceps. 

Nouns  in  the  plural  form  often  express 
quantity  rather  than  number ;  when  this  is 
clearly  evident,  the  singular  form  of  the  verb 
is  required.  The  following  sentences  are  cor- 
rect : 

1.  A  thousand  dollars  ivas  paid  for  the 
property. 

2.  Ten  thousand  bushels  of  wheat  zvas 
purchased  in  May. 

3.  Two  hundred  pounds  tvas  his  weight  at 
that  time. 

4.  Seven  pounds  of  salt  is  required. 

5.  Two  hundred  gallons  of  wine  ivas  sold 
to  one  customer. 

6.  Twenty-five  cents  ivas  subscribed  by  the 
class. 

7.  Sixty  ounces  ivas  the  quancity  sold  on 
Saturday. 

Unless  quantity  rather  than  number  is 
plainly  indicated  in  the  sentence,  the  plural 
form  of  the  verb  should  be  used  as  in  the  fol- 
lowing : 

1.  Three  days  zuere  given  to  London  and 
two  to  Paris. 


2. 
3. 


Five  dollars  zvere  laid  on  the  table. 
Two  gallons  luere  used. 


NOTE. — Usage  inclines  to  the  use  of  the  plural  where 
a  small  quantity  is  indicated. 

1.  Three  quarts  of  milk  were  purchased. 

2.  Several  dollars  were  paid  for  stationery. 

96.  Collective  nouns  as  subjects.  Some 
nouns  in  the  singular  form,  are  either  singular 
or  plural  in  meaning,  according  to  the  sense  in 
which  they  are  used.  These  are  called  collect- 
ive nouns. 

Study. the  following  illustrative  sentences: 

1.  The  committee  has  prepared  its  report 
and  adjourned.    . 

2.  The  committee  (that  is,  the  members  of 
the  committee)  are  unable  to  agree,  and  there- 
fore have  not  made  their  report. 

3.  The  committee  are  all  good  men. 

4.  The  committee  is  composed  of  good 
men. 

5.  The  Adams  family  is  famous  in  Ameri- 
can history. 

6.  The  family  (members  of  the  family) 
reside  on  Pine  Street. 

7.  His  family  is  large,  but  he  supports  it 
in  comfort. 

8.  A  pair  of  gloves  costs  a  dollar. 

9.  Two  pair  ivcre  sold. 

10.  A  pair  of  twins  were  abandoned  by 
their  parents. 

11.  What  means  zvere  used  to  convince 
him  ? 

That   means  of  winning  the  game  is 


12. 
unfair. 
13. 
14. 
15. 


The  jury  has  rendered  its  verdict. 
The  jury  are  tired  of  the  case. 
None  of  the  clerks  is  to  blame. 


NOTE. — None  (equivalent  to  not  one)  is  treated  as 
singular  by  most  accurate  writers. 


REVIEW  EXERCISES 


23 


Compound  Subjects. 

97.  (a)  When  tlie  assertion  applies  to 
the  several  members  of  a  compound  subject, 
the  plural  form  of  the  verb  is  required. 

Example:     Frank  and  Joe  are  sick. 

(b)  When  the  assertion  applies  to  one  of 
the  subject  members,  and  not  to  the  others,  the 
verb  should  agree  witli  that  member. 

Examples:  The  boy,  and  not  the  parents, 
zvas  to  blame.  The  parents,  and  not  the  boy, 
u;ere  to  blame. 

(c)  When  the  assertion  applies  separately 


to  several  parts,  eacli  in  the  singular  form,  the 
verb  should  be  singular. 

Examples:  Either  Frank  or  Joe  is  sick. 
Neither  the  lion  nor  the  tiger  is  native  to 
America. 

(d)  When  the  assertion  applies  separately 
to  several  parts,  some  of  which  are  singular 
and  some  plural,  the  verb  should  agree  with 
the  member  that  is  nearest  to  it. 

Examples:  Neither  the  man  nor  his  em- 
ployers zvcre  responsible.  Neither  the  employ- 
ers nor  the  man  zvas  responsible. 


LESSON  17. 


Review  Exercises. 


Exercise  25. 


Write  sentences  illustrating  the  agreement 
of  the  verb  with  the  following  nouns  used  as 
subjects.     Consult  the  dictionary  if  necessary : 

measles  pair  civics 

wages  pains  scissors 

dozen  crisis  analysis 

tidings  gentlemen  morals 

Congress  people  crowd 

whereabouts  score  tactics 

Exercise  26. 

Form  original  sentences  illustrating  the  use 
of  the  following  collective  nouns,  both  as  sin- 
gular and  as  plural  subjects : 

family  jury  couple 

company        society  mob 

flock  committee  firm 

Exercise  27. 

Correct  the  following  and  give  reasons : 

1.  Neither  Frank  nor  I  are  to  go. 

2.  A  flock  of  birds  were  seen  above  the 
lake. 

3.  The  family  is  all  at  home. 

4.  The  jury  is  not  agreed  as  to  the  evi- 
dence. 

5.  Henry  and  not  his  sisters  are  to  go. 

6.  Bread  and  milk  are  wholesome  food. 

7.  Rats  and  mice  is  vermin. 


8.  A  pair  of  twins  was  lying  on  the  couch 
asleep. 

9.  The  committee  was  dining  in  its  apart- 
ments. 

10.  Neither  the  daughter  nor  the  mother 
are  ill. 

11.  Either  the  soldier  or  his  officers  is  to 
blame. 

12.  The  goods  was  purchased  at  a  dis- 
count. 

13.  The  acoustics  of  the  hall  are  unsatis- 
factory to  the  society. 

14.  Everybody  were  invited. 

15.  A  basket  of  eggs  were  on  the  table. 

16.  The  couple  has  enjoyed  its  visit. 

17.  One  faction  in  the  convention  favor 
Jones  and  refuse  to  support  Robinson. 

18.  Every  one  of  us  were  absent. 

19.  Fifty  dollars  were  paid  for  the  rent. 

20.  Five  pounds  of  salt  are  needed. 

21.  Twenty  years  of  his  life  were  spent  in 
Paris. 

22.  Fifteen  pounds  are  the  exact  weight. 

23.  Fifteen  cents  were  contributed  by  the 
teacher,  and  seventy-five  cents,  in  all,  were 
raised. 

24.  Five  hundred  bushels  of  potatoes  were 
the  quantity  sold  in  March. 

2.'5.  Five  silver  dollars  was  given  to  me 
today. 


24 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


LESSON  18. 

Errors  in  the  Use  of  Verb-Forms. 

98.  The  use  of  improper  or  unauthorized 
verb-forms,  instead  of  the  proper  forms, 
especially  in  the  case  of  the  past,  and  the  per- 
fect forms,  is  a  very  common  error  with  care- 
less writers  or  speakers.  Errors  of  this  kind 
may  be  divided  into  the  following  classes : 

1.  The  use  of  impure  or  unauthorized 
forms ;  as,  droivndcd  for  drowned,  knowed  for 
knozvn,  ain't  or  hain't  for    am  not. 

2.  The  use  of  the  perfect  for  the  past 
forms;  as,  "I  seen  him,"  instead  of,  "I  sazv 
him."  "They  come  to  town  yesterday,"  in- 
stead of,  "They  came  to  town  yesterday." 

3.  The  use  of  the  past  for  the  perfect 
form;  as,  "They  have  went  away,"  instead  of, 
"They  have  gone  away."  "They  have  began 
the  work,"  instead  of,  "They  have  begun  the 
work." 

4.  Using  the  parts  of  one  verb  for  those  of 
another ;  as,  lay  for  lie,  sit  for  set,  etc. 

5.  Misuse  of  auxiliaries,  shown  in  the  in- 
discriminate use  of  shall  and  will,  should  and 
zi'ould,  can  and  may,  etc. 

The  following  list  of  irregular  verbs  con- 
tains the  ones  most  frequently  misused.  The 
student  should  study  this  list  until  he  can  illus- 
trate by  means  of  a  sentence  the  use  of  any 
form  given. 

Caution  :  Remember  that  the  past  form 
should  never  be  used  with  an  auxiliary,  and 
that  the  perfect  should  never  be  used  (in  the 
predicate)  without  one. 


Irregular 

Verbs. 

beat 

beat 

beaten 

begin 

began 

begun 

blow 

blew 

blown 

break 

broke 

broken 

burst 

burst 

burst 

catch 

caught 

caught 

choose 

chose 

chosen 

come 

came 

come 

do 

did 

done 

draw 

drew 

drawn 

drink 

drank 

drunk  or  drank 

drive 

drove 

driven 

eat 

ate 

eaten 

fall 

fell 

fallen 

fly 

flew 

flown 

freeze 

froze 

frozen 

go 

got 

gone 

get 

went 

got  or  gotten 

give 

gave 

given 

grow 

grew 

grown 

have 

had 

had 

know 

knew 

known 

lay 

laid 

laid 

lie  (to  rest)  lay 

lain 

pay 

paid 

paid 

ride 

rode 

ridden 

ring 

rang  or  rung 

rung 

rise 

rose 

risen 

run 

ran 

run 

see 

saw 

seen 

set    . 

set 

set 

sit 

sat 

sat 

shake 

shook 

shaken 

shoe 

shod 

shod 

sing 

sang  or  sung 

sung 

sink 

sank  or  sunk 

sunken 

slay 

slew 

slain 

speak 

spoke 

spoken 

steal 

stole 

stolen 

swim 

swam 

swum 

take 

took 

taken 

tear 

tore 

torn 

throw 

threw 

thrown 

wake 

woke  or 
waked 

waked 

wear 

wore 

worn 

weave 

wove 

woven 

write 

wrote 

written 

Transitive  and  Intransitive  Verbs. 

99.   A  transitive  verb  is  ( 

Dne  that  requires 

an  object  complement  to  complete  its  meaning. 

(See  Lesson  7.) 

Examples:     He  zmll  write 

•  a  letter.     They 

bought  the  books. 

100.    An  intransitive  verb 

1  is  one  that  does 

not  require 

an  object  complement  to  complete 

its  meaning 

Eamples  :   They  are  zvalking.    She  laughed 

heartily. 

NOTE. — Copulative  verbs,  or  those  that  are  com- 
pleted by  an  attribute  complement,  are  intransitive. 
See   24-25. 

101.  There  are  two  groups  of  verbs  that 
are  somewhat  similar,  both  in  meaning  and 
form,  the  distinction  being  that  the  verbs  of  the 
one  group  are  transitive,  while  those  of  the 
other  are  intransitive. 

We  have  here  arranged  these  verbs  in  pairs. 
Notice  that  the  first  one  in  each  pair  is  in- 
transitive, and  that  the  second  one  is  transitive. 
The  student  should  study  them  until  he  is 
familiar  with  the  forms  and  meaning  of  each. 


MISUSE  OF  AUXILIARIES 


2S 


'■I 

3.{ 


4.  \ 


5. 


I  S 


NAME-FORM.                    P/ 

1ST        PERF.  PART 

Fall  (to  topple  over) 

fell 

fallen 

Fell  (to  cause  to  fall) 

felled 

felled 

Lie  (to  recline) 

lay 

lain 

Lay  (to  cause  to  recline^ 

)  laid 

laid 

Rise  (to  ascend) 

rose 

risen 

Raise  (to  cause  to  rise' 

raised 

raised 

Learn  (to  acquire 

learned  learned 

knowledge) 

Teach  (to  cause  to 

taught 

taught 

learn) 

Sit  (to  rest) 

sat 

sat 

Set  (to  place) 

set 

set 

Sentences  Illustrating  the  Use  of  the 
Foregoing  Verbs. 

Fall   ( intrans. )  The  tree  fell  ( or  has  fallen  ) . 

Fell   (trans.)     They  have  felled  the  trtt. 

Lie  (intrans.)  He  lay  (or  zvas  lying,  or 
has  lain)  on  the  couch. 

Lay  (trans.)  They  laid  (or  will  lay,  or 
have  laid)  him  on  the  couch. 

Rise  (intrans.)  He  rose  (or  has  risen,  or 
zvill  rise)  from  his  chair. 

Raise  (trans.)  They  raised  {or  zvill  raise) 
the  flag  over  the  building. 

Sit  (intrans.)  The  king  sits  (or  sat,  or  has 
sat)  on  the  throne. 

Set  (trans.)  He  set  (or  zvill  set,  or  has  set) 
the  pitcher  on  the  table. 

Exercise  28. 

Correct  the  following  sentences  and  tell  why 
they  are  incorrect : 

L     The  wind  blowed  very  hard. 

2.  They  done  it  well. 

3.  He  has  ran  away. 

4.  He  lay  the  book  on  the  table. 


5.  The  bill  has  been  payed. 

6.  They  have  swam  the  river. 

7.  He  laid  down  on  the  grass. 

8.  Will  the  bread  raise? 

9.  The  general  had  fallen  trees  across  tiie 
road  in  order  to  hamper  the  movements  of  the 
enemy. 

10.  He  come  home  yesterday. 

11.  He  learned  me  to  play  tennis. 

12.  She  has  set  there  for  an  hour. 

13.  They  had  eat  the  bread. 

14.  He  drunk  a  pint  of  milk. 

15.  Had  I  saw  him  first,  I  would  not  have 
went. 

16.  I  am  almost  froze. 

Do  you  ever  use  any  of  the  following  forms  ? 
ain't  ketch  (for  catch)  drawed 

blowed       druv  (for  drove)  hadn't  ought 
bursted       drownded  dove  (for 

growed      knowed  dived) 

weaved 
dumb  (for  climbed)  rid  (for  rode) 

Exercise  29. 

Form  sentences  illustrating  the  correct  use 
of  the  following  forms : 

went  fell  raised 


begun 

gave 

seen 

blew 

lain 

rose 

done 

laid 

come 

sat 

swam 

wrote 

set 

stole 

took 

NOTE. — Set  is  intransitive  in  a  number  of  meanings, 
as.  The  sun  sets ;  The  current  sets  to  the  east ;  The 
plaster  has  set ;  The  blossoms  have  fallen,  and  the  fruit 
has  set;  He  set  out  to  do  his  whole  duty.  The  use  of 
set  in  the  case  of  a  brooding  hen  is  incorrect;  say, 
"a  sitting  hen  ;"  "the  hen  sits  on  her  nest." 


LESSON  19. 

Misuse  of  Auxiliaries. 


102.  Shall  and  will.  Th;sc  auxiliaries  as- 
sert either  mere  futurity  or  promise  or  deter- 
mination, according  to  the  person  of  tVe  sub- 
ject. Thus,  "I  shall"  or  "We  shall"  (first  per- 
son) asserts  mere  futurity;  as,  "I  shall  be  ill," 
"We  shall  arrive  at  six  o'clock."  "You  shall" 
or  "He  shall"  or  "They  shall"  (second  and 
third  person),  asserts  promise  or  djtermina- 
tion  on  the  part  of  the  speaker. 

Examples: 

You  shall  go  to  school  (determination). 

He  shall  be  allowed  to  go  (promise). 

They  shall  obey  the  rules  (determination). 


Will  has  much  the  same  meaning  as  shall, 
but  as  to  person,  is  u.sed  in  the  opposite  way. 
That  is,  zvill,  in  the  first  person,  implies  prom- 
ise or  determination,  and  in  the  second  and 
il:ird  person,  mere  futurity. 

Examples: 

I  will  pay  you  the  money  (promise). 
We  will  never  submit  to  it  (determination). 
You   will   arrive   at   Chicago   on    Saturday 
(futurity). 

They  will  not  consent  to  the  agreement 
(futurity). 


2G 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


The  following  arrangement  shows  the  cor- 
rect use  of  shall  and  ivill : 

MERE   FUTURITY. 

1st  Person  2nd  and  3rd  Person 

I  shall  You  will 

We  shall  He  will 

They  will 

PROMISE  OR  DETERMINATION. 


1st  Person 
I  will 
We  will 


2nd  and  3rd  Person 
.You  shall 
He  shall 
They  shall 


Exercise  30. 


Explain  the  correct  use  of  shall  and  zuill  in 
the  following  sentences : 

1.  I  will  go  if  you  desire. 

2.  You  shall  have  the  money  even  though 
I  must  sell  the  crown  jewels. — Queen  Isabella 
to  Columbus. 

3.  I  will  have  it  in  spite  of  you. 

4.  I  am  convinced  that  I  shall  not  live 
long. 

5.  He  will  do  as  he  pleases  anyhow. 

6.  They  shall  see  the  play  if  they  wish. 

7.  Do  not  fear ;  the  money  shall  be  raised. 

8.  I  will  never  see  him  again,  never. 

9.  Alas!  I  shall  never  see  him  again! 

10.     They  shall  go  to  school;  I  will   not 
allow  them  to  grow  up  in  ignorance. 
Why  are  the  following  incorrect? 

1.  I  will  probably  suffer  for  it. 

2.  You  will  not  impose  on  me  in  that 
manner. 

3.  I  fear  he  shall  be  sick. 

4.  They  shall  arrive  tomorrow  if  the 
train  is  not  delayed. 

5.  I  shall  not  allow  you  to  go. 

6.  I  will  be  unable  to  see  him. 

7.  He  will  not  go ;  I  promise  you  that. 

8.  We  shall  remit  the  amount  without 
fail  on  Jan.  1. 

9.  You  shall  probably  be  ill  to-morrow. 
10.     I  am  afraid  we  will  not  arrive  in  time. 

103.    In  asking  questions     the   auxiliary 
should  be  used  that  is  required  in  the  answer. 

Examples  : 

questions.  answers. 

Will  you  buy  it?  .1  will. 
Shall  you  enjoy  the  trip?    I  think  I  shall. 

Will  he  recover?  We  think  he  will. 

Shall  I  be  punished?  You  shall. 

Will  I  be  punished?  I  think  you  will. 


Will  I  be  ill  ?  I  think  you  will. 

Shall  he  pay  the  debt?  He  shall. 

Will  he  pay  the  debt  ?  He  will. 

Exercise  31. 

State  why  the  following  are  incorrect : 
Will  you  be  ill? 
Will  I  get  my  lesson? 

NOTE.— "Will  I?"  is  usually  incorrect,  as  only  the 
person  who  asks  the  question  can  tell  whether  he  "will" 
or  not. 

Shall  he  be  ill? 
Shall  you  try  to  win? 
Shall  to-morrow  be  fair? 
When  will  you  be  of  age? 
When  shall  I  be  elected? 
How  shall  you  get  the  money? 

104.  Should  and  would.  These  auxiliaries 
are,  respectively,  the  past  forms  of  shall  and 
will  and  have  corresponding  uses  in  the  differ- 
ent persons. 

"I  should,"  "You  would,"  and  "He  would," 
are  used  when  there  is  no  promise  or  deter- 
mination on  the  part  of  the  speaker. 

Examples:  I  should  like  to  go.  I  should 
have  gone  if  it  had  not  rained.  You  ivould 
have  failed,  had  you  attempted  it.  He  zvould 
have  been  elected  but  for  the  alien  vote. 

"I  would,"  "You  should,"  and  "He  should," 
imply  conditional  promise  or  determination  on 
the  part  of  the  speaker,  or  duty  on  the  part  of 
the  person  spoken  to. 

Examples:  I  zvould  never  have  consented 
to  such  an  arrangement.  Had  I  known  of  your 
distress,  you  shoidd  have  had  aid  (promise). 
If  I  had  the  power,  you  should  be  punished 
(determination).  He  should  support  his  par- 
ents (duty). 

NOTE. — Should  and  would  are  used  to  express  other 
meanings,  and  many  nice  distinctions  are  involved  in 
their  accurate  use.  For  the  exact  determination  of  any 
of  these  cases,  an  unabridged  dictionary  should  be 
consulted. 

Exercise  32. 

Justify  the  use  of  should  and  zvould  in  the 
following  sentences : 

1.  I  should  like  to  attend  a  convent. 

2.  H  the  lion  were  to  escape.  I  shoidd  be 
frightened. 

3.  If  you  were  my  son,  you  should  obey 
your  teacher. 

4.  Were  you  to  fail,  I  should  be  very 
greatly  disappointed. 

5.  Had  I  known  the  facts,  I  zvould  not 
have  loaned  him  the  money. 

6.  If  all  goes  well,  he  should  be  here  by 
Saturday. 


ERRORS  IN  USE  OF  VERBALS 


27 


LESSON  20. 

Verbals. 


105.  The  term  verbal  is  broadly  used  to 
designate  a  word  or  phrase  that  has  the  form, 
and  meaning  of  a  verb,  but  which  is  used  as  a 
noun  or  an  adjective  modifier. 

The  perfect  and  imperfect  participles  are 
often  used  as  verbals;  also,  several  kinds  of 
phrases,  formed  by  joining  certain  auxiliaries 
to  these  fonns ;  as,  Iiaviiig  written,  being  seen, 
having  been  noticed,  etc.  By  some  authors, 
verbals  are  called  "participial  adjectives," 
"verbal  nouns,"  "verbal  adjectives,"  "com- 
pound participles,"  etc.,  but  the  value  of  these 
distinctions  is  not  apparent. 

106.  The  infinitive  verbal  phrase  consists 
of  the  word  to,  followed  by  various  verb- 
forms;  as,  to  go,  to  be  going,  to  have  gone,  to 
be  seen,  to  have  been  seen,  etc.  The  word  to  is 
omitted  in  certain  constructions  after  an  object 
complement;  as,  "He  made  him  (to)  admit  it," 
"I  heard  her  (to)  sing." 

Exercise  33. 

Name  the  verbals  to  be  found  in  the  follow- 
ing sentences,  giving  the  office  of  each: 


1.  He  owns  a  thriving  business,  having 
purchased  it  in  January. 

2.  He  was  a  learned  man,  much  broken  in 
fortune. 

3.  Being  advised  as  to  the  situation,  we 
will  at  once  take  advantage  of  the  rising 
market. 

4.  Knowing  his  capability,  I  advised  him 
to  accept  the  position. 

5.  To  be  prepared  for  every  emergency, 
was  his  constant  aim. 

6.  Having  been  informed  of  the  occur- 
rence, he  is  to  leave  for  New  York  to-night. 

7.  Bathing  too  soon  after  eating  is  in- 
jurious. 

8.  It  was  a  drawn  battle,  yielding  no  ad- 
vantage to  either  contestant. 

9.  Any  owner  may  recover  possession  of 
stolen  property  by  proving  title. 

10.  Having  supplied  you  with  written  in- 
structions, we  naturally  expected  you  to  fol- 
low them. 


LESSON  21. 

Errors  in  Use  of  Verbals. 

107.     Verbals  modified  by  possessives.     When  a  verbal  is  used  as  the  object  of  a  preposi- 
tion, and  is  modified  by  a  noun  or  pronoun,  the  modifier  should  have  the  possessive  form. 


Examples  : 


INCORRECT. 


1.  I  did  not  know  of  him  going. 

2.  because  of  John  being  ill. 

3.  through  the  president  failing  to  come. 

4.  I  heard  of  you  and  your  brother  being 

ill. 

5.  on  the  boys  refusing  to  go. 

6.  They  heard  of  him  having  gone. 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 

5. 
6. 


CORRECT. 

I  did  not  know  of  his  going, 
because  of  John's  being  ill. 
through  the  president's  failing  to  come. 
I  heard  of  your  and  your  brother's  being 

ill. 
on  the  boys'  refusing  to  go. 
They  heard  of  his  having  gone. 


108.  Present  and  perfect  infinitives.  The  present  infinitive  (not  the  perfect)  is  re- 
quired when  reference  is  had  to  a  time  coincident  tvith  or  after  the  time  indicated  by  the  pred- 
icate verb. 

The  perfect  infinitive  is  required  when  the  reference  is  to  a  time  before  that  indicated  by  the 
predicate  verb. 


28  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Examples  : 

incorrect.  correct. 

1.  I  should  have  been  pleased  to  have  met     1.     I  should  have  been  pleased  to  meet  you. 

you.  (time  coincident  with  predicate). 

or 
I  am  pleased  to  have  met  you. 

(before  time  indicated  by  predicate). 
or 
I  am  pleased  to  meet  you  (now). 

2.  I   should   have  been   glad   to  have  heard     2.     I  should  have  been  glad  to  hear  her. 

her.  or 

I  am  glad  to  have  heard  her  (or  to  hear 
her). 

3.  We  should  have  been  delighted  to  have     3.     We  should  have  been  delighted  to  go. 

gone.  or 

We  are  delighted  to  have  gone  (or  to  go). 

109.  Omission  of  verb.       The  omission  of  the  verb  or  some  of  its  parts,  or  of  the  subject, 
may  cause  the  sentence  either  to  be  ungrammatical  or  ambiguous  (obscure)  in  its  meaning. 

Examples  : 

incorrect.  correct. 

I  like  him  better  than  John.  I  like  him  better  than  John  does. 

or 
I  like  him  better  than  I  like  John. 

Here  the  omission  of  the  verb  in  the  incorrect  sentence  leaves  the  reader  in  doubt  as  to 
which  of  the  meanings  given  in  the  correct  sentences  is  intended. 

INCORRECT.  CORRECT. 

He  knew  that  he  had  omitted  to  do  what  he     He  knew  that  he  had  omitted  to  do  what  he 
ought  to  (or  should).  ought  to  do  (or  should  do). 

Good  usage  requires  the  repetition  of  the  verb  in  such  sentences. 

110.  Agreement  of  tense  forms.      The  parts  of  a  compound  predicate  should  agree  in 
tensa-form. 

INCORRECT.  CORRECT. 

I  have  advised  him  and,  in  fact,  did  all  I  could      I  liave  advised  him  and,  in  fact,  have  done  all 
to  prevent  his  going.  I  could  to  prevent  his  going. 

or 
I  advised  him  and,  in  fact,  did  all  I  could  to 
prevent  his  going. 

In  the  incorrect  sentence,  the  perfect  form  of  the  verb  is  joined  with  the  past.     In  both  of 
the  correct  sentences,  the  tense-  and  verb-forms  agree. 

INCORRECT.  CORRECT. 

I  liave  gone  several  times  in  March  and  went     I  went  several  times  in  March  and  went  again 
again  in  April.  in  April. 


REVIEW  OF  VEKB  FORMS 


20 


LESSON  22. 
Review  of  Verb-Forms. 


Exercise  34. 


Rewrite  the  following  sentences,  correcting 
all  errors: 

Be  prepared  to  give  the  reasons  for  your 
correction. 

1.  If  I  had  knew  you  was  not  coming,  I 
would  not  have  set  there  so  long. 

2.  The  majority  of  men  is  inclined  to 
justice. 

3.  Clay  admired  Webster  more  than  Cal- 
houn. 

4.  I  have  not  and  never  will  tell  him. 

5.  Since  that  time  there  has  been  several 
disputes. 

6.  She  beseeched  him  to  spare  her  boy. 

7.  He  learned  me  to  file  letters. 

8.  She  had  laid  down  for  a  moment's  rest. 

9.  Beef  and  poultry  are  scarce,  but  fish  are 
to  be  found  in  all  the  markets. 

10.  It  was  your  business  to  have  secured 
as  many  orders  as  possible,  and  to  have  been 
on  the  look  out  for  orders  all  the  time. 

11.  His  crime  being  discovered,  he  flew  to 
South  America. 

12.  I  have  not,  and  will  not,  agree  to  his 
proposal. 

13.  The  jury  were  out  two  hours  before 
they  returned  their  verdict. 

14.  I  should  have  liked  to  have  met  him. 

15.  The  tree  was  fallen  by  my  brother  in 
1890  and  it  has  laid  there  ever  since. 

16.  Every  one  of  us  were  asked  to  bring 
our  books. 

17.  You  have  not  done  your  work  hereto- 
fore, but  I  shall  see  to  it  that  you  shall  here- 
after. 

18.  The  measles  have  broken  out  and  half 
the  school  is  absent. 

19.  You  have  not  done  it,  but  you  ought  to. 

20.  Will  I  recite  to  you  in  the  classroom  or 
the  study-hall? 

21.  In  business  education,  is  to  be  found 
the  shortest  roads  to  success. 

Exercise  35. 

Rewrite  each  of  the  following  sentences, 
choosing  the  right  word  from  those  italicized : 

1.  The  mercury  has  fell  fallen  ten  degrees. 

2.  The  general,  with  his  aids,  then  en- 
tered, and  were  ivas  at  once  conducted  to  the 
President's  box. 

3.  Every  one  of  us  has  have  known  about  it. 


4.  It  was  plain  that  a  majority  of  the  dele- 
gates luere  was  for  Wilson. 

5.  A  number  of  hats  zuere  zvas  offered  for 
sale. 

6.  The  greater  part  of  oiu'  marriages  is  are 
happy. 

7.  Since  the  passage  of  the  law,  gold  has 
steadily  Hown  flozved  into  the  treasury. 

8.  Her  nurse  sat  seated  her  in  the  big  chair. 

9.  One  hundred  dollars  have  has  been  sub- 
scribed. 

10.  A  clear  majority  of  the  convention 
was  were  for  Brown. 

11.  A  barrel  of  pecans  were  zvas  ordered  in 
October. 

12.  One  of  the  many  things  that  make 
makes  life  uncomfortable  in  the  Philippines 
is  are  the  great  multitude  of  mosquitoes. 

13.  The  course  of  events  have  has  proved 
the  truth  of  his  remark. 

14.  Ten  dollars  were  zvas  given  for  the 
coat. 

15.  His  friend  plead  pleaded  with  him,  but 
all  to  no  purpose. 

16.  The  great  height  of  the  trees  zvas  zvere 
most  impressive. 

17.  The  clanging  of  the  many  bells  zvere 
zvas  always  in  our  ears. 

18.  The  Mothers'  Club  request  requests 
the  pleasure  of  your  company  on  Tuesday 
evening. 

Exercise  36. 

Rewrite  correctly  such  of  the  following  sen- 
tences as  you  consider  incorrect : 

1.  I  think  that  neither  he  nor  his  sons  are 
in  the  city. 

2.  This  wonderful  lecturer,  and  alleged 
"humorist,"  relies  on  his  imagination  for  his 
facts  and  on  his  memory  for  liis  wit. 

3.  Failing  to  agree,  the  jury  were  dis- 
charged. 

4.  Neither  Henry  nor  Frank  were  at  home. 

5.  Price  have  rose  but  prosperity  has 
raised  them. 

6.  Bad  news  travels  fact. 

7.  I  would  think  he  should  know  better. 

8.  The  old  wreck  lay  there  for  years. 

9.  The  public  get  what  they  demand;  if 
the  drama  is  bad,  the  public,  not  the  managers, 
are  to  blame. 

10.  Twenty  cents  were  spent  for  postage- 
stamps. 


30 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


11.  I  shall  be  obliged  to  refuse  your  re- 
quest. 

12.  Will  I  get  the  book  for  you  ? 

13.  All  but  one  of  my  classmates  has  been 
successful. 

14.  The  sun  had  not  yet  rose. 

15.  Neither  of  the  boys  are  here. 

16.  I  will  not  be  able  to  attend. 

17.  I    would   be    ruined  if  I  was  to  spend 
money  as  you  do. 

18.  I  do  not  think  I  will  be  sick. 

19.  I   large   number   of   words   was   mis- 
spelled. 


20.  Each  of  these  methods  brings  the  right 
answer. 

21.  I  am  determined  that  they  shall  go. 

22.  I  have  no  doubt  of  the  senator  being 
sincere. 

23.  Since  the  beginning  of  the  Republic 
the  majority  have  ruled. 

24.  Mr.  Wilson  will  be  pleased  to  accept 
Mrs.  Clarke's  kind  invitation  for  Wednesday. 

25.  His  industry  and  capability  and  the 
fact  that  he  is  absolutely  honest,  has  won  the 
favor  of  his  employers. 


LESSON  23. 

Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 


111.  Adjectives  and  adverbs  are  closely 
related  in  form,  meaning,  and  use.  They  are 
usually  employed  as  modifiers,  and  serve  to 
vary  the  meaning  of  the  sentence  in  a  gerat 
variety  of  ways. 

112.  Most  adjectives  are  descriptive  words 
naming  qualities  belonging  to  the  object  sig- 
nified by  nouns  and  pronouns ;  as,  good,  large, 
old,  white,  kind,  etc.  Other  adjectives  are  used 
merely  to  designate  the  noun,  or  to  limit  its 
application  to  some  particular  object  or  ob- 
jects; as,  a  man,  this  desk,  those  boys,  Hve 
books,  yonder  hill,  the  school. 

113.  Adverbs  are  usually  related  as  ad- 
juncts (words  joined  to)  to  verbs  and  verbals, 
modifying  these  as  to  the  time,  place,  manner, 
or  cause  of  the  action  signified  by  the. verb; 
as,  "He  was  running  rapidly,"  "They  were 
standing  there,"  "He  came  yesterday."  They 
also  modify  adjectives  and  other  adverbs  by 
varying  the  degree  of  quality  expressed;  as, 
very  rich,  slightly  ill,  rather  quietly. 

114.  The  grammatical  variations  of  ad- 
jectives and  adverbs  are  few  and  their  inflec- 
tion simple.  Errors  in  the  use  of  these  parts  of 
speech  are  mostly  due  to  a  misunderstanding 
of  their  meanings.  Errors  of  this  class  do  not 
properly  belong  to  grammar,  but  to  diction,  or 
word-selection,  and  will  be  considered  in  a 
subsequent  lesson. 

115.  Certain  adjectives  and  adverbs  are 
inflected  to  indicate  what,  .  in  grammar,  is 
called  comparison.  There  are  three  degrees, 
or  variations,  of  comparison,  as  follows :_ 

1.  Positive  degree,  or  that  which  indi- 
cates merely  the  possession  of  the  quality;  as, 
sweet,  hot,  noble,  fast. 


2.  Comparative  degree,  or  that  form 
which  indicates  a  stronger  degree  of  quality 
than  is  expressed  by  the  positive  form;  as, 
sweeter,  hotter,  nobler,  faster. 

3.  Superlative  degree,  or  that  which  indi- 
cates a  still  stronger  degree  of  quality  than  the 
comparative;  as,  sweetest,  hottest,  noblest, 
fastest. 

116.  Inflection.  It  will  be  seen  that  in  the 
foregoing  examples  the  comparative  degree  is 
formed  by  adding  er,  and  the  superlative  de- 
gree by  adding  est  to  the  positive. 

117.  Such  adjectives  and  adverbs  as  form 
their  comparatives  and  superlatives  by  means 
of  these  inflections  are  said  to  be  compared 
regularly.  They  are  usually  words  of  one 
syllable.  Most  of  those  having  two  or  more 
syllables  are  not  compared  regularly,  but  have 
their  variations  in  degree  expressed  by  the 
qualifying  adverbs  more  and  most;  as,  more 
beautiful,  most  beautiful. 

118.  Several  adjectives  and  adverbs  are 
compared  irregularly  by  the  use  of  entirely 
dififerent  words. 


Examples: 

positive. 

good 
some 
little 
ill  or  bad 


COMPARATIVE. 

better 

more 

less  or  lesser 

worse 


SUPERLATIVE. 

best 
most 
least 
worst 


119.  Some  adjectives  and  adverbs  express 
qualities  that  do  not  admit  of  comparison. 

Examples:  round,  French,  dead,  yonder, 
there,  first. 


ERKOBS  IN  THE  USE  OF  ADJECTIVES  AND  ADVERBS 


31 


Exercise  37. 

Write,  in  the  form  given  on  the  preceding 
page,  the  comparison  of  such  of  the  following 
adjectives  and  adverbs  as  admit  of  compari- 
son. Write  in  a  separate  list  those  that  are 
not  compared.  When  in  doubt,  consult  the 
dictionary : 


handsome 

square 

good 

popular 

nicely 

complete 

contented 

universal 


safe 

quietly 

hopeful 

above 

rapidly 

lively 

sad 

perfect 


curious 

round 

matchless 

lovely 

often 

friendly 

happy 

senseless 


LESSON  24. 
Errors  in  the  Use  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 


120.  Improper  comparison.  In  the  com- 
parison of  adjectives  and  adverbs,  the  follow- 
ing errors  should  be  avoided  : 

(a)  Using  terms  of  comparison  in  the  case 
of  adjectives  that  express  absolute  quality. 
Say,  more  nearly  round,  more  nearly  equal ; 
not  "rounder,"  "more  equal,"  etc. 

(b)  Use  of  superlatives  in  comparing  two 
persons  or  things.  Say,  "This  is  the  larger 
book  of  the  two,"  not,  "This  is  the  largest  of 
the  two." 

(c)  The  making  oi  illogical  comparisons. 
Say,  "Paris  is  the  most  elegant  city  of  Eu- 
rope," or,  "more  elegant  than  any  other  city 
in  Europe,"  not,  "Paris  is  more  elegant  than 
any  city  of  Europe."  As  Paris  is  included  in 
the  phrase,  "any  city  of  Europe,"  the  last  sen- 
tence is  equivalent  to  saying  that  Paris  is  more 
elegant  than  itself.  Say,  "George  is  more 
studious  than  any  of  his  classmates,"  not 
"George  is  the  most  studious  of  his  class- 
mates." As  George  is  not  "of  his  classmates," 
the  last  sentence  is  illogical. 

121.  Improper  forms  of  adjectives  and 
adverbs.  There  are  a  number  of  uncouth  and 
wholly  unauthorized  words  and  expressions, 
the  use  of  which  ought  to  be  (but  is  not)  con- 
fined to  the  vulgar  and  illiterate.  Among 
these  the  following  may  be  mentioned :  "every- 


wheres"  and  "anywheres,"  for  everywhere  and 
anywhere;  "complected,"  for  complexioned; 
as,  "She  is  light  complected,"  instead  of,  "She 
is  light  complexioned,"  or,  "She  has  a  light 
complexion;"  "nowliere  near"  for  not  nearly, 
as,  "You  were  nowhere  near  so  sick  as  I,"  in- 
stead of,  "You  were  not  nearly  so  sick  as  I;" 
"not  much"  or  "not  muchly,"  for  not  at  all. 
"Do  you  intend  to  withdraw  from  the  con- 
test?" "Not  much."  This  barbarism  is  quite 
inexcusable.  Say,  "I  do  not,"  or  for  greater 
emphasis,  "Not  at  all,"  or  "By  no  means." 

NOTE. — The  author  has  before  him  a  business  school 
announcement  in  which  occur  the  following  question 
and    answer: 

"Have  we  then  abandoned  Blank's  shorthand?  Not 
muchly." 

"Thusly"  for  thus.  "He  reasoned  thusly," 
for  "He  reasoned  thus." 

"Illy"  for  ill.  "He  spoke  illy  of  her."  Say, 
"He  spoke  ill."  "Illy"  is  now  obsolete. 
"Beside"  for  besides.  "May  persons  beside 
me  think  so."  Say,  "May  persons  besides 
me  think  so." 

"Firstly"  for  Urst.  "Firstly,  we  wish  to  call 
your  attention  to,  etc."  While  secondly, 
thirdly,  fourthly,  etc.,  are  correct,  there  is 
neither  authority  nor  occasion  for  "firstly," 
since  the  word  Arst  is  both  an  adjective  and  an 
adverb. 


122.  Adjectives  for  adverbs.  The  misuse  of  adjectives  and  adverbs  in  attribute  comple- 
ment and  predicate  modifier  has  already  been  considered  (See  Lesson  8).  Some  errors  of  this 
class  occur  in  other  constructions. 

"Real"  for  very  or  really.    "It  is  real  pretty."    Say,  "It  is  very  (or  really)  pretty." 

"Much"  for  very  or  hadly.    "He  is  not  much  hurt."    Say,  "He  is  not  badly  hurt."    "I  am 


not  much  sick."    "Say,  "I  am  not  very  sick." 


32 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Adjectives  are  often  incorrectly  used  to  modify  other  adjectives,  as  in  the  following  ex- 
amples : 


INCORRECT. 
He  was  terrible  angry. 
It  was  uncommon  cold. 
It  was  an  awful  bloody  battle. 
He  was  a  mighty  sick  man. 


CORRECT. 

He  was  terribly  angry. 

It  was  uncommonly  (or  exceedingly)  cold. 

It  was  an  awfully  bloody  battle. 

He  is  a  very  sick  man. 


NOTE. — This  use  of  mighty  is  especially  common  as  a  colloquialism  in  our  Southern  states. 


123.  Superfluous  adjectives  and  adverbs. 

It  is  a  common  fault  of  untrained  or  thought- 
less writers,  or  those  who  write  for  sound 
rather  than  for  sense,  to  crowd  their  sentences 
with  useless  adjectives  and  adverbs. 

In  the  following  sentences,  the  italicized 
words  are  wholly  useless : 

1.  She  was  a  charming  attd  attractive  girl. 
(If  she  was  charming  it  may  be  assumed  that 
she  was  attractive.) 

2.  The  collections  were  up  to  the  usual 
average. 

3.  It  was  a  dire  and  awful  calamity. 

4.  The  funeral  obsequies  occurred  on  Tues- 
day. (As  well  might  one  speak  of  a  funereal 
funeral.) 

5.  A  punitive  law  should  be  passed  to  pun- 
ish this  offense. 

6.  His  habit  of  talking  to  himself  had 
become  habitual.  (This  sentence  occurs  in  a 
recent  work  of  fiction.  How  a  habit  could  be 
other  than  "habitual"  is  not  explained.  The 
author  probably  intended  to  say  that  the  habit 
had  become  fixed.) 

7.  The  litigants,  accompanied  by  their 
respective  attorneys,  entered  the  court-room. 
(It  is  difficult  to  frame  a  sentence  in  which 
this  much  overworked  word  "respective"  has 
any  real  use.) 

8.  You  may  think  now  that  you  are  right, 
but  you  will  see  your  error  later  on. 

9.  He  has  opened  up  a  dry-goods  store  at 
Dayton. 

10.  Errors  are  to  be  found  throughout  the 
whole  book. 

11.  We  parted  mutually  disliking  each 
other, 

12. 


The 
beneficial  to 


arrangement 
both  of  them. 


was     reciprocally 
(The  meaning  is 


properly  expressed  also,  by  retaining  the  ad- 
verb and  omitting  the  phrase,  "to  both  of 
them.") 

124.  Disagreement  in  number.  The  fol- 
lowing adjectives  have  both  a  singular  and  a 
plural  form: 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

this  these 

that  those 

A  few  others  have  the  plural  only;  as,  few, 
several,  many,  sundry,  various,  divers,  and  the 
numerals — two,  three,  four,  five,  etc. 

A  few  adjectives  are  singular  only ;  as,  none, 
either,  neither,  each,  every. 

The  adjectives  these  and  those  are  plural  in 
form  and  should  be  used  to  modify  plural 
nouns  only.  Do  not  say,  "these"  kind,  or 
"those"  sort,  but  this  or  that  kind  or  sort. 

125.  Adjectives  as  pronouns.  In  the  case 
of  certain  adjectives,  as,  one,  any,  many,  all, 
those,  few,  etc.,  the  noun  is  often  omitted,  the 
adjective  thereby  acquiring  the  function  of  a 
pronoun. 

Examples:  Matty  are  called,  but  fezv  are 
chosen.  All  should  obey  the  law.  Each 
should  do  his  part.    Neither  was  injured. 

It  should  be  remembered  that  each,  either, 
neither,  this,  that,  and  one,  are  always  singu- 
lar, and  when  used  as  subjects  require  singu- 
lar verbs.  The  words  any,  none,  and  some,  are 
either  singular  or  plural. 

All,  many,  these,  those,  and  few,  are  always 
plural. 

Those  and  them.  Very  careless  or  illiterate 
persons  use  the  pronoun  them  in  place  of  the 
adjective  those;  as,  "Them"  books  are  gone, 
Who  took  "them"  apples?  No  one  with  the 
least  regard  for  his  mother-tongue  should  be 
guilty  of  this  uncouth  form  of  speech. 


126.    Double  negatives.     The  words  no,  not,  none,  nobody,  neither,  nor,  never,  and  noth- 
ing, are  called  negatives  because  their  use  changes  an  affirmative  sentence  to  a  negative  one. 


CLAUSKS  AND  CONNECTIVES 


33 


Examples  : 

affirmative. 

1.  Either  may  go. 

2.  He  is  ill. 

3.  It  was  either  Henry  or  Ralph. 

4.  I  have  seen  him. 

5.  They  accomplished  something. 

6.  One  of  us  will  go. 


NEGATIVE. 

1.  Neither  may  go. 

2.  He  is  not  ill. 

3.  It  was  neither  Henry  nor  Ralph. 

4.  I  have  never  (or  not)  seen  him. 

5.  They  accomplished  nothing. 

6.  None  of  us  will  go. 


A  prevalent  error,  and  a  most  offensive  one  from  the  standpoint  of  good  English,  is  to 
employ  two  negatives  in  one  sentence.  The  effect  of  this  -is  to  destroy  the  negation  which  the 
speaker  wishes  to  express. 

Examples:  We  haven't  no  books.  I  haven't  never  seen  him.  It  isn't  no  use.  We  have 
not  seen  none.    They  didn't  do  nothing. 

These  slipshod  expressions  are  most  likely  to  occur  with  the  constructions,  isn't,  didn't, 
haven't,  etc.    They  should  be  carefully  avoided. 


Exercise  38. 

Write  sentences  illustrating  the  correct  use 
of  the  following  adverbs,  adjectives,  and  adjec- 
tive pronouns : 


nice 

nicely 

soon 

somewhat 

neither 

any 

well 

nearly 

yonder 

better 

best 

these 

oftener 

there 

this 

badly 

few 

less 

most 

none 

each 

Exercise  39. 

Rewrite  such  of  the  following  sentences  as 
contain  errors : 

1.  This  is  the  most  interesting  book  of  the 
two. 

2.  This  figure  is  rounder  than  that. 

3.  Of   all   his   sisters,    she   was   the   most 
favored. 

4.  Mt.    Blanc    is    higher    than    any    other 
mountain  in  Europe. 

5.  He  is  nowhere  near  so  intelligent  as  his 
brother. 

6.  He  was  dark  complected  and  wore  a 
real  stylish  hat. 


7.  We  feel  that  you  have  acted  real  mean 
in  the  matter. 

8.  It  was  tolerable  cold,  and  the  wind 
blew  awful. 

9.  He  is  a  stout,  fleshy .  man,  and  has 
formed  the  curious  and  singular  habit  of  walk- 
ing with  both  of  his  two  hands  tightly  closed. 

10.  It  is  the  largest  mill  of  its  kind  in  the 
whole  world. 

11.  The  partners  then  placed  their  respect- 
ive contributions  of  capital  in  the  bank  to  the 
credit  of  the  firm. 

12.  We  mutually  agreed  to  share  the  gains 
and  losses  equally. 

13.  Later  on,  they  intend  to  open  up  a  real 
estate  office. 

14.  Why  did  you  buy  them  kind  ? 
We  never  saw  none  of  the  samples. 
They  haven't  done  nothing  about  it  as 


15. 
16. 
yet. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 


He  is  the  best  boy  of  the  three. 

He  was  very  near  successful. 

The  argument  was  most  unanswerable. 

His  address  was  mighty  interesting. 


LESSON  25. 
Clauses  and  Connectives. 


127.  A  Clause  is  any  group  of  words  con- 
taining a  subject  and  a  predicate.  A  sentence 
may  consist  of  two  or  more  independent  or  co- 
ordinate clauses  joined  by  a  conjunction. 

Example:  You  may  go  to  New  York  and 
Arthur  may  return  to  Cincinnati. 

128.  A  sentence  may  also  consist  of  one  or 
more  independent  clauses,  and  one  or  more 
dependent,  or  subordinate,  clauses. 


Example  :  We  greatly  feared  that  he 
would  be  injured.  In  this  sentence,  "We 
greatly  feared"  is  the  main,  or  independent, 
clause,  and  "that  he  would  be  injured"  is  a 
subordinate  clause  serving  as  the  object  com- 
plement of  the  verb  feared. 

129.  Independent  clauses  are  joined  by  the 
conjunctions,  if,  but,  for,  and,  although,  as,  etc. 


34 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


131.  Subordinate  clauses  are  usually  joined 
to  the  rest  of  the  sentence  by  two  classes  of 
connectives : 

1.  Conjunctive  adverbs,  why,  when,  how, 
where,  etc. 

2.  Relative  pronouns,  who,  whom,  whose, 
which,  that,  what,  etc. 

132.  A  subordinate  clause  may  serve  as  the 
subject  of  the  sentence,  as  an  attribute  comple- 
ment, or  as  an  adjective  or  an  adverbial  modi- 
fier. The  following  sentences  illustrate  clauses 
used  as  these  several  elements,  the  words  com- 
prising the  clause  being  printed  in  italics : 

Subject.  That  he  ivould  fail,  was  the  gen- 
eral opinion. 

Attribute  complement.      His  fault  is,  that 

he  refuses  to  listen  to  advice 

Object  complement.  We  believe  that  he 
will  come. 

Adjective  modifier.  He  is  a  man  tvho 
knozvs  his  business. 


Adverbial  modifier.  We  started  when  the 
bell  began  to  ring. 

NOTE. — An  adverbial  clause  is  usually  joined  by  a 
conjunctive  adverb  to  the  word  or  phrase  it  modifies; 
as,  "You  may  go  when  he  returns."  Other  kinds  of 
clauses  are  usually  connected  to  the  rest  of  the  sen- 
tence by  means  of  a  relative  pronoun ;  as,  "I  know 
zvhom  you  mean." 

133.    Office  of  relative  pronoun.  Besides 

its  use  as  a  connective,  the  relative  pronoun 
fills  some  office  in  the  clause,  as  subject,  at- 
tributes complement,  object  complement,  or 
object  of  a  preposition.  Some  of  the  relatives, 
like  the  personal  pronouns,  have  nominative, 
objective,  and  possessive  forms.  Study  the 
following : 


NOMINATIVES. 

who 
which 
whoever 
whosover 


OBJECTIVES.  POSSESSIVES. 

whom  whose 

which  whose 

whomever 

whomsoever 
What  and  that  have  no  possessive  forms, 
and  their  nominative  and  objective  forms  are 
the  same. 


134.  The  proper  use  of  the  nominative  and  objective  forms  of  the  relative  pronouns 
should  have  the  student's  careful  attention,  as  the  misuse  of  these  forms  is  a  common  error. 

The  nominatives  zuho  and  zuhoever  should  be  used  only  as  the  subject  and  the  attribute 
complement;  the  objective  forms,  zvhom  and  zvhomez'er,  should  be  used  only  as  the  object  coni- 
pleinent,  or  as  the  object  of  a  preposition. 


Examples  : 

incorrect. 

1.  He  knows  who  we  mean. 

2.  I  wonder  whom  he  thinks  we  are. 


1. 
o 


CORRECT. 

He  knows  whom  we  mean. 
I  wonder  who  he  thinks  we  are. 


(The  relative  is  here  the  attribute  complement  of  are.) 


3.  You  may  give  the  book  to  whoever  you 

will. 
(The  relative  is  here  the  Object  of  to.) 

4.  Do  you  know  whom  it  is  ? 

5.  I  wonder  whom  will  be  chosen. 


3.     You  may  give  the  book  to  whomever 
you  will. 


4.  Do  you  know  who  it  is  ? 

5.  I  wonder  who  will  be  chosen. 


(The  relative  is  here  the  subject  of  the  clause.) 

135.  Interrogative  sentences  are  those  used  in  asking  questions ;  as,  "Whom  did  you  see  ?" 
"When  did  he  come?"  They  are  usually  introduced  by  the  words,  who,  whom,  where,  why, 
when,  etc.    These  words,  when  thus  used,  are  called  interrogatives. 

As  interrogative  pronouns,  zvho  and  whom  may  have  the  same  offices  as  when  they  are 
used  as  connectives,  the  same  errors  arise  from  their  misuse. 


AGUIOEMKNT  OF  THE  VERB  IN  CLAUSES 


85 


Study  the  followiii.q;  oxaiii|>les : 

INCORRICCT. 

1.  Who  did  he  mean? 

2.  Who  do  you  intend  to  invite? 

3.  Who  did  he  sell  it  to? 

4.  Whom  can  it  be  but  Frank? 

5.  Whom  did  you  say  ..illed? 

6.  Who  do  you  believe  it  to  be? 

Exercise  40 

Rewrite  the   following  sentences,   choosing 
the  right  word  from  those  italicized : 

1.  I  have  no  idea  zvho  whom  it  was. 

2.  Do  you  know  zuho  zchom  he  meant? 

3.  Whom  zuho  do  you  think  is  guilty? 

4.  Whom  zvho  will  it  be? 

5.  Whom  zvho  was  it  given  to? 

6.  You  may  write  to  zvhomever  whoever 
you  are  acquainted  with. 


CORRECT. 

1.  Whom  did  he  mean? 

2.  Whom  do  you  intend  to  invite? 

3.  To  whom  did  he  sell  it? 

4.  Who  can  it  be  but  Frank? 

5.  Who  did  you  say  called? 

6.  Whom  do  you  believe  it  to  be? 

7.  I  am  just  to  zvhomever  whoever  is  just 
to  me. 

8.  My  friend  from  Chicago  zvhom  zvho  I 
invited  to  visit  me,  will  arrive  on  Monday. 

9.  They  are  persons  zvhom  zvho  we  believe 
to  have  done  wrong. 

NOTE. — The  subject  of  an  infinitive  phrase  should 
have  the  objective  form. 

10.  They  are  persons  zvhom  who  we  think 
have  done  wrong. 


.  LESSON  26. 

Agreement  of  the  Verb  in  Clauses. 


136.  When  a  relative  pioiioun  is  the  sub- 
ject of  a  clause,  the  verb  in  tlie  clause  must 
agree  with  it  in  number.  As  a  pronoun  agrees 
in  number  with  its  antecedents,  it  follows  that 
the  number- form  of  a  clause  verb  must  often 
be  determined  by  a  reference  to  the  antecedent 
of  the  relative.  Thus,  in  the  sentence,  "She  is 
one  of  the  persons  who  have  been  chosen,"  the 
plural  form  of  the  verb  is  used  because  zvho  is 
the  subject,  and  its  antecedent,  persons,  is 
plural. 

Why  are  the  following  sentences  incorrect? 

1.  Only  one  of  the  robbers  who  was  cap- 
tured has  made  a  confession. 

2.  The  professor  and  his  brother  from 
Washington,  both  of  whom  was  here  last 
week,  have  gone  to  Cleveland. 

3.  Every  one  who  were  allowed  to  go 
home  during  the  holidays  have  returned. 

4.  I  am  not  among  those  who  disapproves 
of  him. 

137.  Than  and  as.  It  is  a  common  error 
to  use  these  conjunctions  before  objective  pro- 
nouns in  sentences  like  "He  is  older  than  me," 
"She  is  as  tall  as  him,"  instead  of,  "He  is  older 
than  I,"  "She  is  as  tall  as  he."  In  such  sen- 
tences, the  second  clause  is  contracted  by  the 


omission  of  the  verb.  By  supplying  the  verb, 
the  reason  for  using  the  nominative  form  be- 
comes evident.  "He  is  older  than  I  atn,"  "She 
is  taller  than  he  is." 

138.  So  and  as.  Tlie  word  as  may  be  used 
either  as  an  adverb  or  as  a  conjunction. 

Examples  :     He  is  as  guilty  as  I  am. 

Here,  the  first  as  is  an  adverb  modifying  the 
adjective  guilty,  while  the  second  as  is  a  con- 
junction connecting  the  two  clauses.  In  assert- 
ing equality  of  comparison,  as  should  be  used 
both  as  the  adverb  and  the  conjunction.  But 
in  denying  the  equality  of  comparison  the  ad- 
verb so  should  be  used. 

Examples:  He  is  as  rich  as  his  brother. 
He  is  not  so  rich  as  his  brother. 

It  is  a  common  error  to  use  the  adverb,  as 
instead  of  so,  in  sentences  like  the  last. 

Correct  the  following: 

1.  The  woolens  are  not  as  expensive  as  the 
silks. 

2.  She  is  not  as  proficient  as  Miss  Brown. 

3.  I  am  not  as  well  as  I  was  yesterday. 

4.  Business  is  not  as  good  this  year  as  last. 

5.  I  am  not  as  much  interested  as  she. 

6.  Had  you  studied  harder,  you  might  not 
be  as  deficient  as  you  are. 


36 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


139.  Neither — nor.  Neither,  when  used  as 
a  conjunction,  should  be  accompanied  by  nor. 

Examples:  Neither  John  nor  his  parents 
are  to  blame.  I  will  neither  affirm  nor  deny 
the  statement. 

It  is  a  common  fault  to  use  or  with  neither; 
as,  "I  will  neither  go  or  allow  you  to  go,"  in- 
stead of,  "I  will  neither  go  nor  allow  you  to 
go." 


Harry   will   attend 
the   House   or 


Correct  the  following: 

1.  Neither   Frank   or 
school  this  year. 

2.  It  is  likely  that   neither 
the  Senate  will  be  in  session. 

3.  Our  position  is  such  that  we  can  neither 
accept  or  reject  your  proposition. 

4.  We  do  not  believe  he  is  capable,  neither 
do  we  consider  him  reliable,  or  even  strictly 
honest. 


LESSON  27. 
Diction  or  Word-Selection. 


140.  Failure  to  use  words  in  accordance 
with  their  accepted  meanings,  is  the  cause  of 
much  weak  and  inaccurate  English.  Whoever 
would  speak  or  write  effectively  or  pleasingly, 
must  learn  to  choose  his  words  with  nice  dis- 
crimination. He  should  acquire  the  "diction- 
ary habit"  and  always  be  on  the  lookout  for 
those  apt  forms  of  expression  that  lift  speech 
above  the  common-place.  As  an  aid  to 
language-study,  nothing  is  more  important 
than  the  careful  reading  of  good  books.  It  is 
by  this  means  only  that  one  can  become  famil- 
iar with  words  as  they  are  used  by  the  masters 
of  literature.  But  it  should  be  clearly  recog- 
nized that  mere  knowledge  is  not  enough.  We 
can  learn  to  use  words  only  by  using  them.  In 
letter-  and  theme-writing,  and  in  other  forms 
of  original  composition,  the  learner  should 
constantly  put  into  practice  the  word-knowl- 
edge that  he  acquires,  otherwise,  if  he  hopes  to 
become  a  ready  and  accurate  writer,  his  labor 
will  be  in  vain. 

As  an  introduction  to  the  word-study  that 
follows,  we  offer  here  two  or  three  general 
suggestions  which  point  out  some  things  to  be 
avoided  in  choosing  words : 

1.  Use  words  only  in  accordance  with 
their  precise  meanings,  selecting  those  that 
most  clearly  and  appropriately  express  the  idea 
you  wish  to  convey. 

2.  Do  not  use  unusual,  technical,  bookish. 


and  many-syllabled  words,  rather  than  the 
commoner  words  of  every-day  speech.  Ordi- 
narily, do  not  say  reside  when  you  mean  live, 
or  expire  for  die,  or  sufficient  for  enough,  or 
anticipate  for  expect,  or  insinuate  for  hint. 

3.  In  both  writing  and  speaking,  but 
especially  in  writing,  avoid  the  use  of  all  slang, 
cant  terms,  localisms,  or  other  impurities  of 
speech.  Some  of  these  are  not  allowable  even 
in  light  conversation  among  intimates;  all  of 
them  are  out  of  place  in  written  language. 
Some  people  seem  to  take  a  kind  of  pride  in 
being,  as  they  would  put  it,  "up  to  date"  in 
slang.  It  is  usually  noticeable  that  these  per- 
sons are  not  "up  to  date"  in  more  important 
matters. 

4.  Avoid  the  use  of  needless  words,  or 
those  that  exaggerated  the  idea.  People  with 
commonplace  ideas  often  try  to  give  them  im- 
portance by  means  of  high-sounding  words, 
just  as  a  poor  cook  will  try  to  make  an  insipid 
dish  palatable  by  a  lavish  use  of  spices  or  con- 
diments. Those  who  thus  overseason  their 
language  are  fond  of  words  like  awful,  tre- 
mendous, grand,  fierce,  horrid,  splendid,  ter- 
rible, etc.  These  have  been  aptly  termed 
"awful  words."  There  are  persons  who  will 
use  the  word  "splendid"  to  describe  any  pleas- 
ing thing,  from  grand  opera  to  mince  pie. 
They  will  also  use  the  word  "horrible"  to 
describe  either  a  railway  wreck  or  a  mosquito- 
bite. 


Some  examples  are  here  offered  which  show  the  importance  of  word-selection  in  determin- 
ing the  difference  between  good  and  bad  English.  Let  the  student  study  these  examples  care- 
fully. 


WORD  STUDY 


37 


FAULTY. 

1.  The  music  was  just  simply  splendid  and     1. 

the  supper  was  certainly  immense. 

2.  I   have   perused   your   communication   of     2. 

May  9. 

3.  I  do  not  apprehend  that  he  will  accomplish     3. 

his  purpose  prior  to  his  arrival  in  San 
Francisco. 
i.     He  did  not  depart  this  life  until  he  had     4. 
reached  the  advanced  age  of  four  score 
years  and  ten. 

5.  He  has  a  good  character  in  that  section.     5. 

6.  The  grocer  has  plenty  of  patrons.  6. 

7.  He  recommended  us  to  go  to  a  party  by     7. 

the  name  of  Hawkins. 

8.  The  men  were  connected  together  by  ties     8. 

of  consanguinity. 

9.  Your  failure  to  answer  our  letter  is  im-     9. 

mensely  aggravating. 


CORRECTED. 

The  music  was  delightful  and  the  supper 

excellent. 
I  have  read  your  letter  of  May  9. 

I  do  not  think  he  will  succeed  in  his  under- 
taking until  he  reaches  San  Francisco. 

He  died  at  the  advanced  age  of  ninety. 


His   reputation   in   that   neighborhood   is 

good. 
The  grocer  has  many  customers. 
He  advised  us  to  go  to  a  person  named 

Hawkins. 
The  men  were  blood  relations. 

Your  failure  to  answer  our  letters  is  very 
irritating. 


Exercise  41. 


Rewrite  the  following  sentences,  trying  to 
express  the  intended  thought  in  simple,  clear, 
and  correct  English.  Do  not  try  to  preserve 
the  form  of  the  given  sentence,  if  the  need  of 
a  better  form  is  evident : 

1.  We  have  secured  splendid  table  board 
at  a  widow  woman's  who  resides  near  by  to 
the  college. 

2.  I  am  suffering  with  a  frightful  tooth- 
ache and  I  guess  I  must  have  it  out. 

3.  I  desire  to  acknowledge  my  obligations 
to  you  for  your  most  generous  commendation 
of  my  services.  • 

4.  I've  got  to  get  a  dictionary;  I  simply 
can't  tell  which  of  them  words  to  use  with- 
out it. 

5.  I  went  clear  to  town  before  I  could  get 
a  sight  of  him. 

6.  It's  terrible  strange  that  he  never  said 
nothing  to  me  concerning  it. 


7.  His  garments  were  purchased  prior  to 
his  reception  of  the  remittance  sent  him  by  his 
father. 

8.  He  has  turned  out  to  be  an  awful  fail- 
ure just  as  I  anticipated  that  he  would. 

9.  I  am  not  sure  but  what  it  will  rain;  it 
kind  of  looks  as  though  it  might. 

10.  At  a  comparatively  late  hour  last  night 
a  conflagration  started  in  some  unexplained 
manner  in  the  residence  property  occupied  by 
Mr.  P.  C.  Sullivan.  Despite  the  heroic  efforts 
of  the  firemen,  the  entire  structure  was  con- 
sumed by  the  devouring  element.  The  calamity 
is  a  disastrous  one  to  the  family,  as  they  are  in 
indigent  circumstances. 

(The  essential  fact  set  forth  in  this  grand- 
iloquent paragraph  should  be  expressed  in  two 
or  three  lines  at  the  most.) 


LESSON  28. 


Word 

141.  Colloquialisms.  There  are  in  Eng- 
lish many  words  and  expressions  which 
are  permissible  in  familiar  or  light  conversa- 
tion, or  even  in  informal  letters,  but  which 
are  to  be  avoided  in  more  formal  speaking 
and  writing.  These  expressions  are  known 
as  colloqtdalisms  (from  colloquial— conversa- 
tional). The  dictionaries  indicate  the  col- 
loquial use  of  words  by  the  abbreviation  "coll." 


Study. 

There  are  many  hundreds  of  these  words,  and 
their  use  is  somewhat  a  matter  of  taste  or 
judgment,  but  many  of  them  are  barely  above 
the  grade  of  vulgarism. 

In  business  English,  and  in  letter-writing 
generally,  colloquialisms  should  not  be  avoided 
to  the  extent  of  making  one's  speech  seem  stiff, 
or  over-formal,  but  anything  approaching  vul- 
garism should  always  be  shunned.     Whether 


38 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


a  business  letter  or  a  business  conversation 
should  be  colloquial,  or  whether  it  sliould  be 
entirely  formal,  is  a  matter  to  be  determined 
chiefly  by  the  relations  of  the  persons,  and  by 
the  unwritten  rules  of  taste  and  common  sense. 
In  many  cases  no  doubt,  it  is  better  to  keep  on 
the  safe  side  by  using  the  formal  rather  than 
the  colloquial  term. 

NOTE. — For  a  discussion  of  this  matter  in  relation 
to  business  letters,  see  217. 

In  the  following  discussion  of  misused 
words,  the  author's  comments  relate  to  the 
requirements  of  formal  English  only;  this  with 
the  understanding  that  some  disapproved  ex- 
pressions may  be  allowable  as  colloquialisms. 

How  to  Study  Words. 

142.  The  complete  study  of  a  word  in- 
volves four  things,  viz : 

1.  How  to  spell  it. 

2.  How  to  pronounce  it. 

3.  What  it  means. 

4.  How  to  use  it  in  any  or  all  of  its  mean- 
ings. 

Means  for  such  study  are  supplied  by  our 
dictionaries.  Of  these,  there  are  four  that  are 
in  general  use ;  viz :  "Worcester's,"  "Web- 
ster's," "The  Standard,"  and  "The  Century." 
These  works  differ  in  unimportant  matters 
only,  and  none  of  them  can  be  considered  "au- 
thoritative" to  the  exclusion  of  the  others. 

143.  How  to  use  the  dictionary.  Most 
people  know  how  to  use  a  dictionary  to  find  the 
correct  spelling  of  a  word,  but  many  have  not 
learned  to  use  it  for  the  other  purposes  of 
word-study.  To  learn  to  use  the  dictionary  in 
determining  the  correct  spelling,  pronuncia- 
tion, meaning,  and  use  of  words  should  be  one 
of  the  student's  first  steps  in  the  study  of 
English.  It  is  because  of  the  fact  that  so  many 
students,  even  in  the  advanced  grades,  have 
not  yet  learned  to  do  this,  that  the  matter  is 
referred  to  Iiere. 

144.  Diacritical  marks.  These  are  sym- 
bols employed  in  all  dictionaries  (but  not  in 
precisely  the  same  way  in  all)  to  indicate  the 


pronunciation  of  words.  At  the  bottom  of 
each  page  in  the  dictionary,  is  a  list  of  common 
words,  with  the  diacritical  marks  of  certain 
letters  given,  to  enable  the  person  who  consults 
the  dictionary  to  pronounce  other  and  un- 
familiar words  in  which  these  marks  are  v.'^ed. 

Exercise  42. 

Find,  by  means  of  the  dictionary,  the  cor- 
rect pronunciation  of  the  following  words: 

NOTE. — Do  not  overlook  the  accent  marks,  as  given 
in  the  dictionary,  which  are  quite  as  important  as  the 
diacritical    marks. 


abdomen 

acclimate 

accessory 

acoustic 

adept 

advertisement 

aeronaut 

agile 

a  la  carte 

alias 

alibi 

allopathy 

almond 

altercation 

asphalt 

athenaeum 

attache 

auspices 

automaton 

audacious 

azure 

145.  Definitions.  In  defining  words,  the 
dictionaries  (unabridged)  give  (1)  the  part 
of  speech  using  the  abbreviations,  as  n. 
(noun),  V.  (verb),  adj.  (adjective),  etc.;  (2) 
the  origin,  that  is,  the  language  and  form,  or 
"root"  from  which  the  word  is  derived,  and,  if 
an  important  word,  its  equivalent  in  other  lan- 
guages (3)  the  definition  (or  definitions,  if 
the  word  has  more  than  one  meaning)  ;  (4) 
the  synonyms,  which  include  the  other  words 
that  are  similar  in  meaning. 

In  ascertaining  the  meaning  and  use  of  a 

word,  the  entire  treatment,  as  given  in  the  dic- 

tionarv,  should  be  considered. 

NOTE. — A  key  to  the  various  symbols  and  abbrevia- 
tions used  in  defining  words  will  be  found  in  the  intro- 
ductory part  of  the  dictionary. 

Exercise  43. 

By  consulting  the  dictionary,  ascertain  the 
origin,  pronunciation,  and  meanings  of  the  fol- 
lowing words,  illustrating  their  uses  with  orig- 
inal sentences.  In  case  a  word  has  two  or 
more  meanings,  illustrate  each  with  a  sentence : 

lenient  comparable        routine 

precedence     suffice  isolate 


MISUSED  WORDS 


30 


LESSON  29. 
Misused  Words. 


146.  Much  bad  English  comes  from  con- 
fusing certain  rather  common  words  with 
others  having  a  somewhat  similar  form  and 
meaning.  In  the  following  lessons,  are  pre- 
sented for  special  study,  a  collection  of  com- 
monly misused  words,  accompanied  by  such 
suggestions  and  cautions  as  may  help  the 
learner  to  avoid  the  errors  that  are  most  likely 
to  occur  in  their  use. 

Misused  Nouns. 

Action  for  act.  "His  act  (not  his  action) 
was  illegal."  Action  usually  relates  to  an  act 
in  progress;  as,  "the  action  of  an  engine."  Act 
relates  to  a  completed  action. 

Alien — Foreigner.  An  alien  is  a  person  of 
foreign  birth  who  is  a  resident  but  not  a  citi- 
zen. A  foreigner  is  a  person  of  foreign  birth 
who  is  not  a  resident,  usually  applied  to  those 
who  are  outside  of  a  country  or  who  are 
within  its  boundaries  temporarily.  For  ex- 
ample, were  an  Englishman  to  reside  in 
America  for  a  term  of  years,  but  remain  un- 
naturalized, he  would  not  properly  be  a  for- 
eigner, but  he  would  be  an  aliai  for  the  rea- 
son that  he  is  not  a  citizen. 

Amateur  for  novice  or  beginner.  "I  did  not 
do  well,  as  I  am  but  a  novice  (not  amateur). 
An  amateur  is  one  who  practices  an  art  or 
sport  for  the  love  of  it,  instead  of  for  gain.  An 
amateur  may  or  may  not  be  unskillful. 

Antipathy  for  dislike  or  aversion.  "He 
shows  a  decided  dislike  (not  antipathy)  for 
tiresome  people."  Antipathy  is  a  constitutional 
state  or  feeling,  and  is  stronger  than  dislike ; 
as,  "an  antipathy  to  snakes,"  or,  "an 
antipathy  to  falsehool." ' 

Avocation  for  calling  or  vocation.  "He  will 
engage  in  the  law  or  in  some  other  professional 
vocation  (or  calling,  not  avocation)."  An 
avocation  is  something  in  which  one  engages 
aside  from  his  regular  calling  or  vocation. 
Thus,  one  might  say.  "My  vocation  is  teaching 
but  I  sometimes  add  to  my  income  by  story- 
writing,  canvassing,  and  other  avocations." 

Balance  for  rest  or  remainder.  "I  have  sold 
the  rest  (or  remainder,  not  balance)  of  my 
goods."  The  balance  of  an  account  is  the  ex- 
cess of  one  side  over  the  other.    So,  one  might 


write,  "I  enclose  a  check  for  the  balance  of  our 
account  in  favor  of  your  firm."  To  use  balance 
for  rest  or  remainder,  is  a  gross  error. 

Character  for  reputation.  "He  has  a  good 
reputation  (not  character)  among  his  neigh- 
bors." One's  character  is  what  he  is;  his  repu- 
tation is  what  people  think  he  is. 

Consequence  for  importance.  "That  is  a 
matter  of  little  importance  (not  consequence)." 
Consequence  relates  to  the  end,  effect,  or  result 
of  a  thing;  as,  "The  loss  of  Port  Arthur  was  a 
disaster  of  great  consequence  to  the  Russians." 
bnportance  has  reference  to  the  prominence  or 
significance  of  a  thing;  as,  "Politeness  is  con- 
sidered by  the  Japanese  a  matter  of  great  im- 
portance." 

Couple  for  tzvo.  "We  saw  tzvo  (not  a 
couple)  of  men  on  the  sidewalk."  Couple  or 
pair  relates  to  two  persons  or  things  closely 
associated;  as,  "a  betrothed  (or  married) 
couple,"  "the  dance  requires  four  couples." 
"Lions  are  said  to  hunt  in  couples  (or  pairs)." 
Do  not  say,  "a  couple  of  books,"  "a  couple  of 
weeks,"  "a  couple  of  apples,"  "a  couple  of 
boys,"  etc. 

Depot  for  station.  "We  waited  in  the  little 
station  (not  depot)  for  the  Chicago  train."  A 
depot  is  a  place  of  storage  for  goods,  etc.  The 
word  is  also  applied  to  the  terminal  passenger 
railway  stations  in  the  larger  cities,  but  even 
these  are  now  more  frequently  (and,  we  may 
add,  more  properly)  designated  as  stations. 

Device  for  article,  instrument,  or  invention. 
"The  rocking  chair  is  an  article  (not  device) 
never  used  by  the  Chinese."  "The  barometer 
is  an  important  instrument  (not  device)  in- 
vented by  Torricelli,  an  Italian  philosopher." 
A  device  is  a  contrivance  devised  for  a  specific 
puqwse;  as,  a  safety  valve,  a  thumb-screw,  a 
railroad-frog,  etc.  While  it  is  often  proper  to 
speak  of  a  device  as  an  invention,  it  is  never 
proper  to  speak  of  an  invention  as  a  device  un- 
less reference  is  had  to  its  special  purpose. 

Evidence  for  testimony.  "The  testimony 
(not  evidence)  given  by  the  witness  was  con- 
tradicted." By  evidence,  we  mean  anything 
that  tends  to  prove  or  disprove  a  proposition. 
Testimony  consists  of  the  statements  of  wit- 


40 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


iiesses.     These  statements  may  or  may  not  be 
regarded  as  evidence. 

Heap  for  much  or  a  great  many.  "We 
raised  much  (not  a  heap  of)  corn  and  wheat." 
"He  buys  a  great  many  (not  a  heap  of) 
books."  This  use  of  heap  is  very  objection- 
able. The  word  means  a  pile,  or  a  mass;  as, 
"a  heap  of  earth  and  stone,"  "On  the  barn 
floor  was  a  great  heap  of  grain." 

Lady — Gentleman.  "There  were  two  ladies 
in  the  street  car."  "Many  ladies  were  present." 
Use  the  word  women  in  such  cases.  Say,  also, 
"Mr.  and  Mrs.  Brown,"  not,  "Mr.  Brown  and 
lady."  We  may  say,  "Mrs.  H.  is  a  lady," 
meaning  that  she  is  a  gentle  and  refined 
woman,  just  as  we  may  say,  "Mr.  H.  is  a  gen- 
tleman," meaning  that  he  is  a  man  of  culture 
and  honor.  The  indiscriminate  use  of  lady  and 
gentleman  to  designate  persons  of  either  sex. 
is  in  very  bad  taste,  as  is  also  the  practice  of 
addressing  a  strange  woman  as  "lady"  instead 
of  "madam."  We  sometimes  hear  porters,  car- 
conductors,  floor-walkers,  and  other  public 
functionaries  saying,  "This  way,  lady,"  "I  do 
not  know,  lady,"  etc. ;  but  well-bred  persons 
say,  "Madam."  The  use  of  "gents"  for  gentle- 
men  is   another   current   vulgarism.     An   ex- 


perienced traveler  says  that  he  always  avoids 
a  "Ladies'  and  Gents'  Dining-Room."  An- 
other observer  of  persons  and  language  has  re- 
marked :  "gentlemen  wear  trousers;  'gents' 
wear  'pants.' 

Exercise  44. 

Illustrate  with  original  sentences  the  correct 
use  of  the  words  discussed  in  this  lesson. 

Exercise  45. 

Select  the  right  word  from  those  italicized 
in  the  following  sentences : 

1.  He  has  chosen  teaching  as  his  vocation 
avocation. 

2.  He  will  pay  the  balance  remainder  of 
the  debt  in  March. 

3.  Himself,  open-souled  as  the  day,  he 
had  a  strong  aversion  dislike  antipathy  for  all 
hypocrites. 

4.  He  manifested  a  decided  dislike  antip- 
athy as  to  the  proposal. 

5.  You  must  not  expect  much  of  me,  as  I 
am  only  a  novice  amateur  beginner. 

6.  The  foreign  alien  vote  of  Chicago  is 
large. 

7.  His  character  reputation  for  truthful- 
ness is  not  above  question. 


LESSON  30. 
Misused  Nouns. 


Majority  for  most  of  or  the  greater  number. 
"Most  (not  a  majority)  of  the  houses  are 
small."  "Of  the  machines  made  in  1905,  the 
greater  number  (not  the  majority)  were  de- 
fective." Majority  relates  to  persons  only, 
and  usually  when  a  question  of  preference  or 
voting  is  involved;  as,  "A  majority  favored 
the  election  of  Brown,"  "Mr.  A.  had  a  clear 
majority  of  the  delegates." 

Party  for  person  or  Urm.  "We  met  a  person 
(not  party)  named  Stephens."  "A  firm  (not 
party)  in  St.  Louis  has  offered  us  goods  at  a 
lower  price."  The  use  of  party  to  designate  a 
person,  belongs  to  legal  phraseology;  as,  "the 
party  to  a  contract,"  or,  "the  party  accused." 
The  use  of  party  for  person^  is  according  to 
Webster,  "now  accounted  a  vulgarism." 

Patron — Patronage.  "The  grocer  has  many 
customers  (not  patrons)."     "The  firm  has  a 


large  custom  (not  patronage)."  Patrons  and 
patronage  relate  to  the  special  support  or  favor 
given  to  an  artist,  musician,  or  author.  They 
should  never  be  used  with  reference  to  com- 
mercial or  industrial  undertakings. 

Plenty  for  many  or  enough  of.  "We  had 
hired  horses  enough  (not  plenty  of  horses)  to 
transport  the  excursionists."  "There  were 
many  people  (not  plenty  of  people)  every- 
where in  the  park."  Plenty  means  an  abun- 
dance of,  enough  and  to  spare,  and  applies  to 
quantity  rather  than  number;  as,  "plenty  of 
food,"  "plenty  of  grass,"  "plenty  of  books  and 
newspapers." 

Portion  for  part.  "A  part  (not  portion)  of 
the  town  was  burned."  "But  a  small  part  (not 
portion  of  his  money  remained."  Portion 
means  a  part  set  aside  or  allotted;  as,  "A  por- 


MISUSED  NOUNS 


41 


Hon  of  his  time  was  given  to  reading,"  or,  "A 
portion  of  his  estate  was  bequeathed  to  his 
brother." 

Ride  for  drive.  "We  went  for  a  drive  (not 
ride)  in  the  carriage."  Ride  is  properly  used 
in  the  case  of  horseback  riding,  or  riding  in  an 
automobile,  car,  steamboat,  or  of  any  means  of 
transportation  other  than  that  of  a  vehicle 
moved  by  horses  or  other  animals  that  are 
driz'cn. 

Solicitation  for  solicitude.  These  words 
are  often  confounded.  Solicitation  means  the 
act  of  soliciting  or  requesting.  Solicitude 
means  anxiety.  "He  felt  much  solicitude  (not 
solicitation)  as  to  the  success  of  the  under- 
taking." "It  was  owing  to  his  solicitation 
(not  solicitude)  that  I  consented  to  the  inter- 
view." 

Statement  for  assertion.  "He  made  asser- 
tions (not  statements)  about  his  partner  which 
were  untrue."  A  statement  is  a  formal  or 
lengthy  declaration  of  facts,  or  of  one's  opin- 
ion as  to  a  public  question.  A  mere  declara- 
tion, or  assertion  of  fact,  should  not  be  spoken 
of  as  a  statement. 

Success  for  one  who  or  that  luhich  succeeds. 
"He  has  not  succeeded  (or  achieved  success) 
as  an  author."  Do  not  say,  "He  is  not  a  suc- 
cess as  an  author."  Success  relates  to  the 
thing  achieved,  not  to  the  person  or  thing  that 
achieves  it. 

Verdict  for  opinion  or  testimony.  "It  is  the 
general  opinion  (not  verdict)  that  the  enter- 
prise is  a  failure."  "It  is  the  testimony  (not 
verdict)  of  everyone  who  has  used  it  that  the 
article  is  entirely  satisfactory.  Verdict  relates 
to  the  conclusitns  rendered  by  a  jury  in  a  law- 
suit, but,  in  a  figurative  sense,  the  word  is 
sometimes  used  to  indicate  the  conclusion  of  a 
community  as  expressed  at  the  polls,  or  in 
some  public  way ;  as,  "The  citizens  have  ren- 
dered their  verdict  against  the  party." 

Whole  for  all  or  entire.  "All  (not  the 
whole  of)  the  company  joined  in  the  ap- 
plause." "All  (not  the  whole  of)  the  prop- 
erty has  now  been  sold."  "I  have  read  the 
entire  (not  the  whole)  book." 

Using  Verbs  and  Adjectives  as  Nouns. 

The  so-called  "ready  writers"  and  other 
careless  or  flippant  persons  are  prone  to  use  as 
nouns,  certain  words  that  are  correctly  used  as 
verbs  or  adjectives  only.  Some  of  these  uses 
arc  current  in  newspapers  of  a  certain  class. 


and  may  be  allowable  as  colloquialisms,  al- 
though entirely  unauthorized  by  the  diction- 
aries or  by  really  good  usage. 

We  append  a  list  of  these,  and  advise  the 
student  to  avoid  using  them  in  all  formal  writ- 
ing, or  in  conversation  with  strangers: 

"combine,"  for  compact,  or  combination;  as, 
"They  formed  a  combine." 

"trolley,"  or  "electric,"  for  trolley  car  or 
electric  car. 

"repeat,"  for  repetition;  as,  "each  repeat  of 
the  order." 

"invite,"  for  invitation;  as,  "They  sent  me 
an  invite." 

"optional,"  for  optional  study;  as,  "Book- 
keeping is  an  optional."  (Say,  "Bookkeeping 
is  optional.") 

"human,"  for  human  being;  as,  "We 
humans  are  all  liable  to  temptation." 

"postal,"  for  postal  card;  as,  "I  sent  you  a 
postal  (or  postcard)." 

"deal,"  for  trade  or  agreement;  as,  "They 
made  a  deal." 

"raise,"  for  increase;  as,  "He  asked  for  a 
raise  in  salary." 

"write-up,"  for  newspaper  notice;  as,  "All 
the  papers  gave  him  a  write-up." 

"talk,"  for  address;  as,  "He  gave  a  talk  to 
the  stirdents." 

Say,  "He  talked  to  (or  gave  a  short,  or  in- 
formal address  to)  the  students." 

Talk  is  allowable  in  speaking  of  a  conversa- 
tion ;  as,  "We  had  a  talk  about  it." 

"recommend,"  for  recommendation ;  as,  "He 
gave  me  a  good  recommend." 

Exercise  46. 

Correct  the  following : 

1.  Our  hardware  business  is  flourishing; 
we  now  have  plenty  of  patrons. 

2.  A  Chicago  party  has  bought  a  majority 
of  this  season's  product. 

3.  He  finished  a  good  portion  of  the  work 
to-day. 

4.  My  statement  about  his  partner  aroused 
his  solicitation. 

5.  It  was  the  general  verdict  of  Harper's 
fellow  employees  that  he  was  not  a  success  as  a 
salesman. 

6.  He  sold  the  whole  of  his  stock  to  the 
combine  at  ninety-five  before  asking  for  a  raise 
in  his  salary.  After  the  deal,  he  gave  a  talk  to 
the  directors  of  the  old  company,  and  the 
newspapers  gave  him  a  big  write-up.  A  few 
days  later,  he  bought  a  gents'  furnishing  store. 


42 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


LESSON  31. 
Misused  Verbs. 


147.  Appreciate  for  enjoy.  "I  enjoyed 
(not  appreciated)  the  flowers  you  sent."  "We 
have  greatly  enjoyed  (not  appreciated)  your 
visit."  Appreciate  means  to  estimate  at  its  full 
worth,  or  to  be  sensible  of  the  value  of  any- 
thing; as,  to  appreciate  a  favor,  or  privilege. 
"We  fully  appreciate  your  allowing  us  a  credit 
at  this  time." 

Affect  and  effect.  These  verbs  are  quite  dis- 
tinct as  to  meaning,  but,  on  account  of  their 
similarity  of  form,  are  often  confounded, 
especially  by  stenographers.  Affect,  in  its 
ordinary  use,  means  to  influence  or  act  on;  as, 
"The  misfortune  will  not  affect  our  business." 
Effect,  as  a  verb,  means  to  bring  about  or  ac- 
complish; as,  "He  could  not  effect  the  sale  of 
the  property."  As  a  noun,  effect  means  a 
result ;  as,  "The  effect  of  the  new  arrangement 
was  to  increase  our  sales." 

Aggravate  for  irritate.  "His  insolent  lan- 
guage was  very  irritating  (not  aggravating)." 
Aggravate  means  to  add  to  or  render  more  of- 
fensive :  as,  "Your  denial  only  aggravates  your 
offense."  "His  insolent  language  aggravated 
my  anger."  * 

Antagonize  for  alienate.  "His  conduct  has 
alienated  (not  antagonized)  his  friends."  An- 
tagonize means  to  oppose,  while  alienate  means 
to  drive  away,  or  displease.  Thus,  one  might 
say,  "By  antagonising  the  trusts,  the  President 
has  alienated  some  wealthy  members  of  his 
party." 

Beat  for  excel  or  win.  "Robinson's  piano 
excels  (not  beats)  all  tlie  others."  "Fred  ivon 
(not  beat)  in  the  foot-race."  Beat  means  to 
strike,  or  to  overcome  in  battle;  as,  "He  was 
punished  for  heating  his  horse."  "The  Jap- 
anese beat  the  Russians  at  Mukden." 

Bound  for  determined.  "I  am  determined 
(not  bound)  to  thwart  his  plan."  Bonnd 
means  obligated ;  as,  "I  am  bound  by  my  con- 
tract to  use  hard  coal." 

Calculate  for  intend  "We  intend  (not  cal- 
culate) to  enlarge  our  building  soon."  Cal- 
adate  means  to  compute  or  forecast  through 
mathematical  process;  as,  "They  calculated 
that  the  floor  would  be  strong  enough  to  sup- 
port the  weight."  Calculate  is  also  wrongly 
used  for  likely,  as  in  the  following :  "The 
over-working   of   railway   employes    is    calcu- 


lated to  increase  the  number  of  wrecks,"  "His 
conduct  is  calcidatcd  to  get  him  into  trouble." 
Can  for  may.  Can  means,  is  able  to,  or 
has  the  power;  as,  "He  can  succeed  if  he  tries." 
May  indicates  permission  or  possibility;  as, 
"You  may  now  take  your  seat,"  or,  "It  may 
rain  to-morrow." 

Can  is  often  misused  for  may,  where  the 
speaker  asks  for  permission;  as,  "Can  I  take 
my  seat?"  instead  of,  "May  I  take  my  seat?" 
"Can  I  sell  some  of  the  machines  at  cost?" 
wrote  an  agent.  "We  do  not  know  whether 
you  can  or  not,"  answered  the  firm,  "but  we 
shall  not  alloy  you  to  try." 

Claim  for  say,  assert,  or  maintain.  "He 
maintains  (not  claims)  that  he  is  innocent." 
"He  asserts  (not  claims)  that  his  business  is 
prospering."  "She  says  or  asserts  (not  claims) 
that  she  is  but  twenty  years  old."  Claim 
means  to  demand,  or  assert  a  title  to;  as,  "He 
claims  his  reward,"  "He  claims  the  right  to 
hold  the  land."  We  may  say,  "He  claims  the 
land,"  but,  "He  asserts  (not  claims)  that  he 
owns  the  land." 

Consider  for  think,  believe,  or  regard.  "We 
think  (not  consider)  that  the  matter  is  now 
settled."  "We  believe  (not  consider)  that  your 
services  are  not  worth  more  than  twenty  dol- 
lars per  week."  "You  may  regard  (not  con- 
sider yourself  as  discharged."  Consider 
means  to  examine  carefully,  or  take  note  of: 
as,  "We  will  consider  your  claims,"  "We  will 
not  fail  to  consider  your  application  when  we 
require  another  stenographer." 

Expect  for  believe,  suppose,  or  suspect.  "I 
believe  (not  expect)  that  he  has  returned  to 
Chicago."  "I  suppose  (not  expect)  that  we 
have  bought  more  goods  than  we  shall  sell." 
"I  suspect  (not  expect)  that  he  has  been  dis- 
honest." Expect  means  a  belief  as  to  the  oc- 
currence of  some  future  event,  whether  or  not 
such  event  is  wished  for ;  as,  "I  expect  he  will 
be  ill."  "I  am  expecting  him  to-morrow." 
Suspect  means  to  surmise  or  mistrust,  usually 
with  reference  to  something  unfavorable;  as, 
"I  suspect  that  the  food  has  been  adulterated," 
or,  "We  suspect  him  of  working  against  our 
interests."  Suspect  is  often  wrongly  used  for 
expect,  or  think  in  sentences  like  the  following: 
"I  suspect  that  he  will  return  to-morrow,"  "I 
suspect  that  the  Republicans  will  win." 


MISUSED  VERBS 


43 


Fix  for  tnend  or  repair  or  adjust.  "He  will 
go  as  soon  as  he  can  repair  (not  fix)  his 
bicycle."  "My  coat  is  torn;  please  mend  (not 
fix)  it."  "Mr.  C.  is  dissatisfied  with  our  last 
shipment;  please  call  and  adjust  (not  fix,  or  fix 
up)  the  matter."  Fix  means  to  make  firm  or 
fast;  to  settle  definitely;  as,  "fix  the  price,"  "fix 
the  railway  rates,"  "fix  the  posts  firmly  in  the 


ground," 
settled). 


'Our    plans    are    fixed"    (that 


is 


Foot  for  pay.  "You  furnish  the  plans  and 
I  will  pay  (not  foot)  the  bills."  Foot  means 
to  sum  up,  as  the  figures  in  a  column.  "We 
have   posted   the   columns,   and   our   footings 


Got  for  have  or  own.  The  word  got  is  commonly  misused  to  indicate  possession,  affiiction, 
obligation,  or  necessity.  The  following  sentences  indicate  the  various  ways  in  which  this  verb 
is  incorrectly  used : 


INCORRECT. 

1.  I  have  still  got  the  money  (possession). 

2.  He  has  got  to  go  to  town  (necessity). 

3.  I  have  got  it  in  my  hand  (possession). 

4.  You  have  got  to  obey  me  (obligation). 

5.  He  has  got  the  measles  (affiiction). 

G.  I  have  got  to  quit  smoking  (necessity). 


CORRECT. 

I  still  have  the  money. 

He  must  go  to  town. 

I  have  it  in  my  hand. 

You  have  to  (or  must)  obey  me. 

He  has  the  measles. 

I  must  quit  smoking. 


It  is  quite  correct  to  use  got  in  the  sense  of  go  and  get  or  obtain,  as  in  the  following  ex- 
amples : 

Teacher — Have  you  got  the  paper  and  pens,  as  I  suggested  yesterday  ? 

Student — I  have  got  the  paper,  but  I  did  not  get  the  pens;  I  have  a  box  of  pens  in  my  desk. 

Get  and^o^  have  a  great  many  authorized  uses.  Webster  gives  nine  general  definitions 
besides  some  thirty  special  uses,  many  of  which,  however,  are  permissible  only  in  colloquial 
conversational)  speech.  One  will  avoid  misuse  of  got,  if  he  will  remember  that  it  is  not  to 
be  used  with  have  or  had  to  express  possession,  obligation,  or  affliction. 

NOTE. — The  form  gotten  is  condemned  by  some,  but  is  supported  by  good  use. 


Exercise  47. 

Illustrate  the  correct  use  of  the  following 
words : 


can  and  may 

calculate 

beat 

antagonize 

aggravate 


bound 

appreeiate 

affect 

effect 

consider 


m 


Exercise  48. 

Correct  the  following: 

1.     He  claims  that  he  has  done  the  work. 

2. .   I  expect  that  he  is  deceiving  us. 

3.     We  consider  that  the  debt  has  been  paid 

full. 


4.  Can  I  be  excused  for  this  afternoon  ? 

5.  I  have  fixed  up  our  diflficulty  with 
Rogers ;  he  is  to  foot  our  bill  for  previous  ex- 
penses, and  we  are  to  fix  his  pump  so  it  will 
work,  or  ship  him  a  new  one. 

6.  I  have  got  to  have  my  report  by  Satur- 
day or  get  fired. 

7.  He  calculated  to  sell  us  a  bill  of  goods. 

8.  We  greatly  appreciated  the  concert;  it 
certainly  beat  the  one  we  attended  last  week. 

9.  I  have  got  a  good  reason  for  my  dis- 
trust and  I  am  bound  that  he  shan't  get  tlie 
better  of  me  again. 

10.  It  was  terrible  aggravating  to  be  im- 
posed on  that  way. 


44 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


LESSON  32. 
Misused  Verbs. 


Grow  for  lessen,  diminish,  or  become.  "Our 
sales  are  decreasing  (not  growing  smaller) 
each  year."  "Our  salaries  have  steadily  dimin- 
ished (not  grown  smaller)."  "Our  customers 
are  becoming  (not  growing)  dissatisfied." 
Grow  means  to  enlarge,  to  increase  naturally ; 
as,  "The  business  is  growing  in  volume,"  "He 
is  steadily  growing  in  capability."  Its  use  in 
the  sense  of  diminishment  is  evidently  absurd. 

Learn  for  teach.  "He  is  to  teach  (not  learn) 
me  bookkeeping."  "It  will  teach  (not  learn) 
him  a  lesson."  Learn  means  to  acquire  skill 
or  knowledge;  it  is  the  act  of  the  student  or 
learner,  not  of  the  teacher  or  of  anything  ex- 
terior to  the  student. 

Love  for  like.  "He  likes  (or  enjoys,  not 
loves)  football."  "She  likes  (or  is  fond  of,  not 
loves)  chocolate  fudge."  Love  relates  to  the 
affections,  feelings,  or  sentiments.  It  is  prop- 
erly used  to  express  strong  admiration  for,  or 
enjoyment  of,  anything  that  appeals  to  the 
emotions  or  sentiments;  thus,  it  is  proper  to 
say  that  we  love  nature,  poetry,  music,  or  the 
like.  It  is  hardly  less  than  silly  to  use  the 
word  to  express  our  mere  likings  for  ordinary 
things. 

Patronize  for  buy  of  or  employ.  "We  buy 
at  (not  patronize)  Miller's  grocery."  "I  em- 
ploy Dr.  Henry,"  or,  "Dr.  Henry  is  my  physi- 
cian;" not,  "I  patronize  Dr.  Henry."  (See 
patron  and  patronage  in  "Misused  Nouns.") 

Post  for  informed.  "He  is  well  informed 
(not  posted)  regarding  financial  matters." 
Post  is  a  bookkeeping  term,  and  means  to 
transfer  amounts  from  one  book  to  another; 
as,  to  post  a  journal.  To  speak  of  a  person's 
being  "posted"  is  the  merest  jargon. 

Prophesy  for  predict.  "I  predict  (not 
prophesy)  that  he  will  succeed."  "Wiggins 
predicts  (not  prophesies)  a  storm  for  the 
20th."  Prophesy  means  foretelling  by  a 
prophet;  as,  "Daniel  prophesied  the  coming  of 
Christ." 

Raise  for  rear  or  breed.  "He  was  reared  or 
bred  (not  raised)  in  Virginia."  "They  reared 
(not  raised)  a  large  family."  Raised  in  the 
sense  of  rear  is  applied  to  crops  or  to  domestic 
animals;   as,    "They   raise   corn   and   wheat," 


"They  raised  large  numbers  of  cattle  and 
horses,"  "He  is  engaged  in  raising  chickens." 
Do  not  apply  the  word  to  persons. 

Recollect  for  remember.  "I  remember  (not 
recollect)  the  date;  it  was  Jan.  10,  1914."  "I 
remember  (not  recollect)  the  time  we  saw  the 
bear."  Recollect  means  to  recall  or  re-arrange 
in  the  mind  several  circumstances  partly  for- 
gotten; as,  "I  now  recollect  (or  recall)  the 
terms  of  our  agreement."  The  use  of  the  word 
is  suggested  by  its  form,  re-collect;  that  is,  to 
collect  again. 

Settle  for  pay.  "We  have  paid  (not  set- 
tled) this  bill."  "Select  the  goods  and  I  will 
pay  (not  settle)  for  them."  Settle  means  to  ad- 
just; as,  "to  agree  to  the  settlement  of  an  ac- 
count," "to  settle  business  affairs."  One  may 
say,  "I  settled  that  account  in  march,"  which 
may  or  may  not  mean  that  the  balance  of  the 
account  was  paid. 

State  for  say.  "He  said  (not  stated)  that 
he  would  go  to  New  York  in  June."  State 
means  to  set  forth  formally ;  as.  "to  state  one's 
opinion,"  "to  state  the  facts  of  a  case."  To  use 
state  for  say  is  as  inaccurate  as  it  is  stilted  and 
over- formal.  (See  "Statement"  in  Misused 
Nouns.) 

Stop  for  stay,  or  remain.  "He  is  staying 
(not  stopping)  at  the  Palmer  House."  "You 
may  stay  (or  remain,  not  stop)  here  till  I  re- 
turn." "They  are  staying  (not  stopping)  with 
friends  in  Buffalo."  Stop  means  to  cease  from 
moving.  "We  shall  stop  when  we  reach  Cleve- 
land." "We  shall  not  stop  till  we  reach  San 
Francisco."  "We  shall  stop  at  Chicago  on 
Monday  and  remain  until  Wednesday." 

Transpire  for  happen  or  occur.  "His  death 
had  occurred  (not  transpired)  before  my 
visit."  "Nothing  Hke  it  has  happened  (not 
transpired)  since  the  destruction  of  the 
Maine."  Transpire  means  to  become  public,  to 
escape  from  secrecy;  as,  "It  now  transpired 
that  certain  members  of  the  council  were  in  the 
pay  of  the  street-car  company."  Concerning 
the  wrong  use  of  transpire  for  happen,  Web- 
ster says :  "This  use  of  the  word  is  common 
in  the  United  States,  and  to  some  extent  in 
England,  but  it  is  condemned  by  the  critics  of 
both  countries." 


MISUSED  AKJECTIVKS  AND  ADVEKBS 


45 


Improper  Verbs. 
148.  There  is  a  tendency  among  careless 
writers  or  speakers  to  use  as  verbs,  certain 
words,  the  use  of  which  in  such  a  sense  is  quite 
unauthorized.  The  following  list  includes  a 
number  of  these  that  are  often  used,  but  seldom 
by  educated  persons : 

"gesture"  for  gesticulate.  He  "gestured" 
while  speaking. 

"neighbor"  for  to  live  as  neighbors.  We 
"neighbored"  with  them. 

"resurrect"  for  revive.  He  would  "resur- 
rect" the  Greenback  party.  (Webster  classes 
this  word  as  slang.) 

"clerk"  for  zuork  as  a  clerk.  I  am  "clerk- 
ing" in  a  store. 

"enthused"  for  become  enthusiastic.  I  did 
not  "euthuse"  over  his  plan. 

"finance"  for  supply  money  for.  He  will 
"finance"  the  undertaking. 

"railroad"  for  pass  hurriedly.  The  bill  was 
"railroaded"  through  the  legislature. 

"disremember"  for  forget.  I  "disremember" 
his  name. 

"referee"  for  act  as  referee.  He  "refereed" 
the  game. 

"mind"  for  remember.  I  "mind"  the  time 
when  you  first  came  to  us. 

"size  up"  for  measure  or  estimate.  I  have 
"sized  up"  the  business  and  I  don't  care  to  in- 
vest in  it. 

"shut"  for  rid.    I  got  "shut"  of  him  finally. 


Exercise  49. 

Select  the  correct  words  from  those  italicized 
in  the  following : 

1.  He  learned  taught  me  all  I  know  about 
bookkeeping. 

2.  I  remetnber  recollect  his  father  very 
well. 

3.  We  do  not  patronise  deal  with  the 
Hammond  company. 

4.  I  predict  prophesy  that  he  will  be  bank- 
rupt within  a  year. 

5.  He  was  raised  reared  in  Ohio. 

6.  His  injury  did  not  transpire  occur  until 
January. 

7.  He  is  stopping  staying  with  his  brother. 

8.  We  have  settled  paid  for  the  office  fur- 
niture. 

9.  Did  you  say  state  that  he  is  to  come 
next  week  ? 

10.  We  settled  fixed  up  that  account  and 
gave  them  our  note  for  the  balance. 

Exercise  50. 

Correct  the  following : 

1.  I  disremember  who  it  was  that  financed 
the  proposition. 

2.  They  have  resurrected  an  old  claim 
against  the  company,  and  want  me  to  referee 
the  matter. 

3.  I  mind  when  he  was  a  boy  and  I  sized 
him  up  then  as  a  smart  chap. 

4.  He  clerked  for  us  a  while  but  we  finally 
got  shut  of  him. 

5.  He  talked  hard,  even  gestured  like  an 
orator,  but  our  firm  does  not  seem  to  enthuse 
over  his  proposition. 


LESSON  33. 

Misused  Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 


149.  About  for  almost  or  nearly.  "The 
war  was  almost  (not  about)  over."  "He  has 
nearly  (not  about)  finished  his  work."  About 
is  properly  used  with  as  to  express  degree  of 
quality;  "about  as  cold,"  "about  as  high,"  etc. 
It  is  also  used  to  express  an  approximate  num- 
ber; as,  about  five  hundred  dollars,"  "about 
twenty  men." 

Both  for  each.  "Each  of  (not  both)  the 
players  struggled  for  the  ball."  "Each  firm 
(not  both  firms)  tried  to  get  the  business." 
Both  is  used  when  two  act  together  for  one 
purpose;  as,  "Both  boys  helped  me  with  the 


decorations,"  "Both  firms  signed  the  protest." 
Each  is  required  where  two  act  in  opposition : 
as,  "Each  boy  tried  to  win  the  prize."  Of  is 
used  with  both  before  pronouns;  as,  both  of 
us,"  "both  of  them,"  etc.,  but  not  before  nouns ; 
say,  "both  the  boys,"  not,  "both  of  the  boys." 

Conscious  for  aivare.  "I  am  azvare  (not 
conscious  )  of  your  good  intentions."  Con- 
scious and  unconscious  relate  to  what  takes 
place  within  us;  as,  "I  was  conscious  of  a  par- 
tial lapse  of  memory,"  "Being  excited,  he  was 
unconscious  of  the  pain."  Aware  and  unaware 
relate  to  what  takes  place  without  us;  as,  "I 


40 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


was  axvarc  of  the  approaching  storm,"  "I  was 
uiiazvare  of  his  enmity." 

Creditable  and  credible.  Creditable  means 
entitled  to  praise  or  credit;  as,  "His  conduct 
was  highly  creditable."  Credible  means  worthy 
of  behef ;  as,  "His  statement  is  entirely  credi- 
ble." On  account  of  their  similarity  of  form, 
these  words  are  often  confounded  by  stenog- 
raphers and  others  who  "do  not  stop  to 
think." 

Dangerous  for  in  danger,  or  very  ill.  "He 
has  had  pneumonia  for  a  week,  and  is  now 
very  dangerous."  Such  expressions  as  this, 
which  are  often  heard,  aptly  illustrate  the  ab- 
surdities that  result  from  speaking  without 
thinking.  It  would  seem  evident  that  the  more 
serious  one's  illness,  the  less  "dangerous"  one 
would  be. 

Definite  for  final.  "It  is  useless  to  urge  him 
further,  as  his  answer  seems  to  be  final  (not 
definite)."  Definite  means  clear  or  precise;  as, 
"a  definite  understanding,"  "a  definite  state- 
ment." Final  means  conclusive,  not  subject  to 
change ;  as,  "a  final  decision." 

Directly  for  as  soon  as.  "I  came  home  as 
soon  as  (not  directly)  the  parade  was  over." 
"I  knew  her  as  soon  as  (not  directly)  I  saw 
her.  This  use  of  directly  appears  to  be  a 
"Briticism,"  having  been,  according  to  Prof. 
Hill,  "imported  from  England  along  with 
other  damaged  goods." 

Each  for  every.  "Every  (not  each)  firm  in 
Peoria  has  received  the  circular."  "Every  (not 
each)  man  is  responsible  for  his  own  con- 
science." Each  refers  to  the  individuals,  taken 
separately;  as,  "Each  man  brought  his  ax," 
"Each  boy  has  his  own  lessons  to  prepare." 
Every  means  all,  without  exception;  as, 
"Every  man  was  ordered  to  go,"  "Every  dog 
has  his  day,"  "Every  day  brings  its  duties." 

Exceptionable  for  exceptional.  "His  record 
in  college  was  exceptional  (not  exceptionable). 


as  he  finished  in  three  years."  Exceptionable 
means  objectionable,  or  that  to  which  excep- 
tion may  be  taken ;  as,  "His  conduct  in  the  af- 
fair was  exceptionable  and  greatly  ofif ended 
his  employers."  Exceptional  means  rare  or  un- 
usual, in  a  favorable  sense,  hence  worth  of 
praise.  Although  opposite  in  meaning,  these 
words  are  often  confounded. 

Healthy  for  zuholesome  or  healthful.  "Rich 
food  is  unzuholesonie  (not  unhealthy)."  "Colo- 
rado has  a  healthful  (not  healthy)  climate." 
Healthy  means  possessing  health,  and  evi- 
dently should  be  applied  to  living  things  only; 
as,  "healthy  people,"  "healthy  plants  or  ani- 
mals." 

"Doctor,"  asked  a  lady,  "are  onions 
healthy?"  "I  have  never  known  them  to  com- 
plain of  ill  health,  madam."  the  doctor 
answered. 

Exercise  51. 

Illustrate  the  correct  use  of  the  following 
words : 

credible  aware 

conscoius  creditable 

exceptionable  exceptional 

healthy  final 

definite  wholesome 

Correct  the  following: 

1.  His  wound  is  bad,  but  we  do  not  con- 
sider him  dangerous. 

2.  I  was  not  conscious  of  his  presence,  but 
was  aware  of  a  peculiar  feeling  that  I  was  not 
alone. 

3.  Both  of  the  firms  competed  for  our 
patronage. 

4.  That  he  could  do  such  a  thing,  seems 
hardly  creditable. 

5.  I  am  about  tired  of  your  excuses; 
neither  of  your  trips  has  yielded  any  excep- 
tionable results. 


LESSON  34. 

Misused  Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 

There    are    feiver    (not         Liable   for  likely  or  apt.    These  words  are 

commonly  misused.  Liable  means  subject  to 
penalty;  as,  "He  is  liable  to  arrest,"  "Your 
negligence  makes  you  liable  to  discharge," 
"His  exposure  rendered  him  liable  to  an  at- 
tack of  illness."     Likely  means  the  mere  prob- 


Less  for  feiver. 
less)  stundents  in  school  this  year  than  last." 
Less  relates  to  quantity;  as,  "There  is  less  de- 
mand than  usual  for  furs,"  "There  is  less 
wheat  than  rye  in  the  elevator."  Fezver,  not 
less,  should  be  used  in  comparing  numbers. 


MISUSED  ADJKCTIVKS  AND  ADVKU15S 


47 


ability  of  an  occurrence;  as,  "It  is  likely  to 
rain,"  "He  is  likely  to  be  displeased."  Af>t 
means  tendency  to;  as,  "The  horse  is  apt  to 
shy,"  "A  gambler  is  apt  to  be  superstitious." 
Do  not  say,  "He  is  liable  to  injunj  y<ni,"  "He 
is  apt  to  get  hurt,"  "An  accident  is  apt  (or 
liable)  to  happen."  Likely  is  the  word  re- 
quired in  such  cases. 

Mad  for  angry,  unfriendly,  or  out  of 
patience.  "His  conduct  made  me  angry  (not 
mad)."  "Ethel  and  May  have  fallen  out  (or, 
have  quarreled,  not  are  mad  at  each  other)." 
Mad  means  insane,  uncontrollably  excited, 
through  fear,  passion,  etc.  To  use  the  word 
for  angry,  is  as  absurd  as  it  is  inelegant. 

Much  for  many.  "There  were  as  many  (not 
much)  as  twenty  persons  present."  "They  do 
not  raise  many  (not  much)  cattle."  Much  re- 
fers to  quantity,  not  to  number. 

Nice  for  pleasant,  agreeable,  etc.  Nice 
means  dainty,  delicate,  or  exact.  In  these 
senses,  it  may  be  applied  properly  to  many 
things,  but  the  word  is  so  commonly  over- 
worked that  it  can  hardly  be  said  to  mean  any- 
thing. There  are  persons  who  will  speak  of  a 
nice  man,  a  nice  picture,  a  nice  sermon,  a  nice 
pie,  and  so  on,  all  in  the  same  conversation. 
Those  who  have  this  "nice"  habit  are  advised 
to  drop  the  word  entirely  for  awhile,  using  in 
its  place  adjectives  that  have  a  definite  mean- 
ing, as,  charming,  pleasing,  delicious,  dainty, 
neat,  excellent,  enjoyable,  etc. 

Practical  for  practicable.  "He  suggested  a 
practicable  (not  practical)  plan."  Practical 
means  having  skill  or  practice,  or  capable  of 
being  used  for  a  useful  purpose;  as,  "a  prac- 
tical man,"  or,  "a  practical  machine."  Prac- 
ticable means  that  which  may  be  carried  out 
practically;  as,  "a  practicable  plan,  scheme,  or 
arrangement." 

Partially  for  partly.  "These  goods  are 
partly  (not  partially)  sold."  "My  time  is 
partly  (not  partially)  occupied  with  music." 
Partially  means  unfairly  or  in  a  partial  man- 
ner; as,  "to  judge  partially."  This  word  is 
often  used  for  partly,  but  its  use  in  this  sense 
is  condemned  by  the  authorities. 

Quite  for  rather  or  very.  "She  is  rather  (or 
very,  not  quite)  pretty."  "We  sold  several 
(not  quite  a  number  of)  machines  in  January." 
Quite  is  also  used  wrongly  to  indicate  quantity, 
size,  importance,  etc. ;  as,  "Quite  a  sum  of 
money,"  "She  is  quite  a  girl,"  "He  is  quite  a 
singer."  Quite  means  completely,  entirely,  per- 


fectly; as,  "quite  satisfied,"  "quite  restored  to 
health,"  "quite  finished."  The  use  of  the  word 
in  the  sense  of  very  or  rather  has  had  some 
support,  but  is  now  generally  condemned. 

Scarcely  for  hardly.  "We  shall  hardly  (not 
scarcely)  be  able  to  ship  your  goods  before  the 
fifth."  "He  is  hardly  (not  scarcely)  able  to 
walk."  Scarcely  relates  to  quantity.  "There 
is  scarcely  flour  enough  for  one  loaf."  "There 
are  scarcely  funds  enough  to  pay  the  office  sal- 
aries." Hardly  relates  to  effort,  implying  that 
it  is  hard  to  do  some  given  thing.  Thus,  one 
might  say,  "We  can  hardly  finish  the  work  in 
the  time  given,"  or,  "There  is  scarcely  time  to 
finish  the  work." 

Sensible  for  sensitive.  "He  is  very  sensitive 
(not  sensible)  to  ridicule."  Sensible  of  means 
aware  of;  as,  "I  was  sensible  of  his  dislike." 
Sensitive  to  means  affected  by;  as,  "He  is  sen- 
sitive to  cold." 

Very  for  much.  "I  am  much  (not  very) 
pleased  to  meet  you."  "I  am  much  (not  very) 
fatigued."  Very  should  generally  be  avoided 
as  a  modifier  of  verbals.  Do  not  say,  "very 
interested,"  "very,  delighted,"  etc.  Some 
verbals,  however,  have  been  so  fully  turned 
into  adjectives  that  very  may  be  used  to  qual- 
ify them;  as,  "very  tired,"  "very  charming," 
"very  learned." 

NOTE.— "K(?r3)  much  fatigued,"  "very  much  inter- 
ested," etc.,  are  correct. 

Improper  Forms. 

"Scared"  for  afraid  of.  "I  was  scared  of 
him." 

"Kind  of"  or  "Kinduv,"  for  rather  or  somc- 
zvhat;  as,  "He  is  'kind  of  slow,"  "I  'kind  of 
thought  you  might  come." 

"Three  first"  for  first  three.  "I  shall  hire 
the  three  first  men  who  apply."  There  can  be 
but  one  "first." 

"Look  at  there,"  for  look  there. 

"Tasty"  for  tasteful.  "She  is  a  'tasty' 
woman." 

Hyphenated  Words. 

150.  Many  apt  and  expressive  adjectives 
may  be  "made  to  order"  by  forming  com- 
pounds; as,  strong-armed,  clean-hearted,  long- 
headed, hard-featured,  etc.,  but  it  is  possible  to 
use  such  terms  to  excess.  Furthermore,  this 
tendency  to  use  hyphenated  terms  sometimes 
results  in  very  awkward  expressions,  and  even 
very  objectionable  forms. 


48 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Note  the  following  examples : 

FAULTY. 

1.  We  went  to  a  near-by  house.  1. 

2.  Mr.  H.,  a  one-time  member  of  Congress  2. 
from  Ohio. 

3.  A  never-to-be-forgotten  occurrence.  3. 

4.  This  fast-and-loose  policy.  4. 

5.  A  long-looked-for  event.  5. 

6.  At  last  the  many-times  predicted  dis-  6. 
aster  occurred.  predicted. 

Exercise  52. 


CORRECTED. 

He  went  to  a  house  near  by. 

Mr.  H.,  at  one  time  a  member,  etc. 

A  memorable  occurence. 

This  vacillating  policy. 

A  long-expected  event. 

At  last  occurred  the  disaster  so  often 


Choose  the  right  word  from  those  italicized 
in  the  following  sentences : 

1.  We  raised  less  fewer  chickens  this  year 
than  last. 

2.  He  bought  as  much  many   as  twenty 
tons  of  hay. 

3.  He  sold  as  many  much  as  six  dozen 
eggs. 

4.  I   shall  scarcely   hardly   be  able  to  get 
out  a  statement  by  Saturday. 

5.  I  sold  hardly  scarcely  enough  goods  on 
that  trip  to  pay  hotel  bills. 

6.  It  seems  to  me  that  your  plan  is  not 
practical  practicable. 

7.  His  teaching  was  not  practical  practi- 
cable. 

8.  It  would  not  be  practical  practicable  to 
use  your  machine  in  our  factory. 


9.  The  poor  fellow  is  very  sensitive  sensi- 
ble to  criticism. 

10.  He  is  quite  sensitive  sensible  of  his 
deficiencies. 

Correct  the  following: 

1.  He  is  liable  to  get  mad  and  order  us  out 
of  his  office. 

2.  It  was  a  nice  book  and  we  enjoyed  it  a 
whole  lot. 

3.  This  blank  has  less  pages  than  the  other, 
and  we  will  use  as  much  as  a  dozen  a  month. 

4.  If  you  do  not  attend  to  business  better, 
you  are  apt  to  be  discharged. 

5.  He  is  quite  sick,  but  not  dangerous. 

6.  He  is  quite  a  successful  salesman. 

7.  I  am  so  hoarse  I  can  scarcely  speak. 

8.  We  were  very  pleased  to  learn  that 
your  three  first  orders  were  so  large.  Be  sure 
to  look  up  all  the  near-by  towns. 


LESSON  35. 
Choice  of  Prepositions, 


151.  The  number  of  English  prepositions 
is  not  great,  but  the  relations  they  express  are 
so  numerous  and  the  usage  with  respect  to 
them  is  so  arbitrary  that  the  definitions  in  the 
dictionaries  are  often  an  insufficient  guide  to 
their  correct  use.  Usage  requires  that  certain 
prepositions  follow  certain  words,  often  with- 
out the  application  of  any  very  clearly  defined 
rules.  The  etylmology  (origin  and  significa- 
tion) of  a  word  usually  detemiines  the  preposi- 
tion to  be  used  with  it,  and  a  knowledge  of 
this  often  helps  the  learner  to  use  the  right 
preposition.  Suppose,  for  instance,  that  one  is 
perplexed  as  to  the  preposition  to  be  used  with 
the  word  accuse.  Is  one  accused  with  a  crime, 
or  of  a  crime?  The  word  accuse  is  from  the 
Latin  causa,  a  cause,  or  lawsuit;  hence  to  ac- 


cuse of  theft  means,  literally,  to  bring  to  trial 
because  of  theft.  But  we  say,  "charged  with 
a  crime."  Why  zvithF  Charge  is  derived 
from  carrus,  a  wagon;  hence,  to  load  or  lay 
on,  as  a  burden.  Therefore,  to  charge  one 
zvith  an  ofifense,  is,  literally,  to  load  or  burden 
him  with  the  offense.  No  one  who  is  thus  in- 
formed as  to  the  real  meaning  of  these  two 
words,  would  be  likely  to  err  as  to  the  preposi- 
tion that  should  follow  them. 

It  often  happens  that  either  of  several  prepo- 
sitions may  be  used  with  a  given  word,  ac- 
cording to  the  sense  in  which  the  word  is  used. 
Thus,  the  word  adapt  means  literally  to  fit  to 
or  adjust.  Hence,  we  say,  "A  man  is  adapted 
to  (that  is,  fitted  to)  his  calling."  But  when 
adapted  is  used  in  the  sense  of  suitable  or  fit, 


MISUSED  PREPOSITIONS 


40 


the  preposition  for  (which  goes  with  these 
words)  is  required;  as,  "A  fountain  pen  is 
adapted  for  writing." 

The  Uteral,  or  original  meaning  of  the 
preposition  itself  is  often  of  great  aid  in  de- 
termining its  use.  For  instance,  the  preposi- 
tion for,  in  its  original  signification,  means  the 
cause  or  reason  for  which  anything  is  done. 
Most,  if  not  all,  of  the  many  meanings  and 
uses  of  for  may  be  traced  to  this  original 
meaning. 

The  word  with  originally  meant  against. 
Out  of  this  came  the  meanings,  nearness, 
proximity,  association.  We  still  have  traces 
of  the  ancient  meaning  in  zvith-hoki,  to  hold 
against,  and  ze'///i-stand,  to  stand  against,  and 
in  such  uses  of  the  word  as  fight  zyith,  strug- 
gle zuith,  contend  with,  argue  zvith,  quarrel 
zvith,  etc.  With  is  now  more  often  used  in  its 
sense  of  agreement  or  association;  as,  work 
zvith,  agree  zuith,  unite  zvith,  and  in  contrast 
to  from,  in  such  expressions  as  differ  from, 
separate  from,  take  from,  etc. 

Exercise  53. 

To  do  the  work  of  this  exercise,  the  student 
should  have  carefully  read  the  preceding  para- 
graphs, and  have  access  to  an  unabridged  dic- 
tionary. 


1.  Why  should  we  say  angry  zvith  a  per- 
son and  angry  at  conduct?  (See  zvith  and 
at.) 

2.  When  should  we  say,  guilty  zvith,  and 
when,  guilty  off     Illustrate. 

3.  Should  we  say,  ill  of  the  measles,  or  ill 
zvith  the  measles f    Why? 

4.  Illustrate  the  use  of  agree  zvith  and 
agree  to. 

5.  Illustrate  intrust  to  and  intrust  zvith. 

6.  Justify  the  expression,  talk  to  the  point. 

7.  When  should  we  say,  slain  zuith  a  friend, 
slain  for  a  friend  and  slain  by  a  friend? 

8.  Illustrate  invest  iu,  invest  zvith,  invest 
for. 

9.  Give  correct  use  of  part  from  and  part 
zvith. 

10.  When  would  you  say,  zvalk  in,  zvalk 
into? 

11.  What  is  the  distinction  between  over 
and  above f 

12.  Give  examples  of  the  correct  use  of 
the  prepositions,  on  and  npoti,  betzveen  and 
among. 

13.  Find  out  when  to  use  "allied  to"  and 
"allied  with." 


LESSON  36. 
Misuse  of  Prepositions. 


152.  Errors  are  frequent  in  the  use  of 
prepositions  in  connection  with  the  words 
given  in  the  following  list.  The  student 
should  study  carefully  all  the  words  in  the  list, 
and  try  by  means  of  original  sentences,  to 
illustrate  the  use  of  each  word  with  the  prepo- 
sitions given  in  connection  with  it. 

NOTE.— The  preposition  of,  in  the  sense  of  belong- 
ing to,  may  be  used  with  almost  any  noun;  as,  "The 
revenge  of  a  fool."  The  preposition  by,  in  the  sense 
through  the  act  or  agency,  may  follow  nearly  all  verbs ; 
as,  "Injured  by  an  enemy,"  "Sold  by  the  author,  etc. 
These  uses  are  generally  omitted  in  the  following  list. 

Abound  zvith.  The  book  abounds  with  (not 
in)  wit. 

Accommodate  zvith  a  loan;  to  conditions. 
Accommodated  by  (not  with)  a  friend. 
Accordance  zvith  (not  to)  the  contract. 


Accused   of  theft  by  a  person. 
Accessory  to  a  crime;  after  or  before  the 
fact. 

Acquaintance  zvith  a  subject;  of  one  person 

zvith  another ;  betzveen  two  persons. 

Agent  of  a  company  for  selling  certain 
goods,  etc. 

Alarm   in  the  town  among  the  people  at  the 

news. 

Aliens  to  our  laws ;  among  our  people  in  our 
country. 

Allegiance  of  the  citizens  to  the  country ; 
"The  laws  require  allegiance  from  the  citi- 
zens." 

Acquit  of  the  charge  by  the  jury. 

Adapted  to  a  pursuit  or  calling;  for  a  pur- 
pose; from  a  source;  as,  "The  play  was 
adapted  from  the  story  of  Ruth." 


50 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Adequate  to  a  demand;  for  a  purpose. 

Advantage  of  a  circumstance;  over  an  op- 
ponent. 

Advocate  (noun)  for  a  person;  of  a  prin- 
ciple. 

Agree  to  a  proposal;  ivith  a  friend;  on  or 
upon  a  subject ;  in  our  views ;  hetiveen  or 
among  ourselves.  One  account  or  story  agrees 
with  another. 

Allied  to  something  of  the  same  class;  as, 
"The  peach  is  allied  to  the  apricot;"  zvith  a 
friend  or  ally;  as,  "Russia  is  allied  with 
France." 

Alliance  of  one  person  or  nation  with  an- 
other, for  a  purpose,  against  an  enemy;  al- 
liance of,  betzveen,  or  among  nations. 

Anger  at  an  insult ;  tozuard  a  person ;  angry 
at  a  thing;  zvith  a  person. 

Announce  to  a  person  by  (not  through) 
newspapers;  or  by  telegraph  or  letter. 

Antipathy  to  a  person  or  thing;  betzveen 
two  persons. 

Apathy  of  a  person  tozuard  a  thing. 

Arraign  at  the  bar;  before  the  judge;  for  a 
crime ;  on  or  upon  a  charge  or  indictment. 

Arrested  for  a  crime  on  suspicion  by  an  of- 
ficer on,  upon,  or  by  virtue  of  a  warrant  in 
execution  on  final  process. 

Ask  for  a  thing;  of  or  from  a  person;  about 
cr  after  one's  death,  prospects,  friends,  etc. 

Attachment  of  a  man  to  his  friends;  /or 
their  qualities;  betzveen  or  among  friends;  at- 
tached by  a  cord,  etc. 

Awkward  in  the  use  of  a  thing ;  af  an  em- 
ployment. 

Beat  with  a  stick;  by  a  trick;  into  insensi- 
bility or  submission. 

Becoming  to  a  person ;  as  a  dress  or  hat. 
"Such  conduct  was  becoming  in  her." 

Bound  by  a  contract;  zvith  a  chain  or  rope; 
into  a  book  or  bundle;  under  a  penalty. 

Careful  in  one's  business,  language,  habits, 
etc.;  about  an  afifair;  for  the  future;  of  one's 
money. 

Cause  of  an  accident;  for  anger,  inter- 
ference, alarm,  etc. 

Choose  from  or  among  a  number ;  one  out 
of  many ;  betzveen  two ;  for  a  given  purpose. 

Class  of  things;  in  or  at  college,  in  arith- 
metic. 


Compare  an  object  with  a  similar  object  in 
order  to  note  points  of  resemblance,  etc. ;  as, 
"We  compare  the  picture  in  the  book  zvitli 
those  of  the  magazine."  We  compare  an  ob- 
ject to  another  of  an  entirely  different  class, 
but  which  resembles  it  in  some  special  way; 
as,  to  compare  the  parks  of  a  city  to  the  lungs 
of  the  human  body;  or,  to  compare  a  brave 
man  to  a  lion. 

Exercise  54. 

Write  the  following  sentences,  choosing  the 
right  preposition  from  those  italicized: 

1.  -The  waters  abound  iti  zvith  fish. 

2.  He  is  accused  zvith  of  embezzling  his 
employer's  money. 

3.  He  has  but  slight  acquaintance  zvith  of 
the  matter. 

4.  Allegiance  by  from  the  citizens  to  for 
the  laws  is  the  foundation  of  good  govern- 
ment. 

5.  He  was  acquitted  of  from  all  complicity 
in  the  crime. 

6.  We  fear  your  machine  is  not  adapted 
for  to  our  requirements. 

7.  He  is  an  advocate  for  of  municipal 
ownership. 

8.  Our  several  competitors  agreed  between 
among  themselves  not  to  put  in  bids  for  the 
contract. 

9.  Several  companies  were  allied  with  to 
us  in  our  contention  for  lower  rates. 

10.  He  showed  anger  tozvard  at  me,  and  I 
was  also  angry  at  zvith  him. 

Write  correctly  such  of  the  following  sen- 
tences as  you  consider  incorrect : 

1.  He  was  awkward  in  boxing,  and  also  at 
handling  the  dumbbells. 

2.  On  account  of  his  ill  temper,  we  com- 
pared him  with  a  snapping-turtle. 

3.  His  death  was  announced  to  me  through 
a  telegram. 

4.  He  has  a  great  antipathy  for  snakes. 

5.  He  was  arrested  on  a  bench  warrant' 
from  Judge  Haynes. 

6.  The  pumping-plant  was  inadequate  for 
the  needs  of  the  city. 

7.  I  agreed  with  my  friend's  views  in  the 
matter. 

8.  I  chose  one  from  out  of  the  many 
ponies  offered,  and  paid  for  it  on  the  spot. 

9.  He  was  struck  with  a  stone. 

10.  A  quarrel  between  the  three  fellows 
caused  them  to  be  arrested  on  disturbing  the 
peace. 


MISUSED  PREPOSITIONS 


51 


LESSON  37. 
Misused  Prepositions. 


Complain  to  one  in  authority  of  or  against 
a  person  for  a  specified  act;  of  the  conduct  of 
a  person ;  before  a  court ;  in  a  newspaper  about 
the  non-enforcement  of  laws,  etc. 

Confirm  a  statement  by  (not  with)  testi- 
mony; confirmed  j«  habits  or  opinions. 

Contrast  one  thing  zirith  another. 

Converse  with  friends  about  (not  on)  a 
topic. 

Defense  or  defend  against  an  assault  or 
charge;  in  law,  defense  to  an  action,  or  con- 
struct a  defense  from  testimony. 

Deliberate  on  or  upon  (better  than  about  or 
concerning)  a  matter. 

Dexterity  of  hand,  action,  or  movement; 
with  the  pen  or  sword ;  in  managing  men ;  at  a 
game. 

Die  of  a  disease ;  by  accident  (as  by  drown- 
ing, by  a  fall,  etc.);  in  pain  or  agony;  zvith 
one's  comrades ;  for  one's  friends  or  principles. 

Differ  rvith  a  person  (contention)  ;  from  an 
opinion  or  result. 

Different  from  (not  to)  another  object 
qualities. 

Difference  betxveen  two  or  among  several 
persons  or  objects ;  in  qualities  or  style ;  dififer- 
ence  (controversy)  with  a  person;  a  difference 
of  one  thing  from  (not  to)  another. 

Enemy  0/  (not  to)  another  person;  in  war. 

Envious  of  (not  toward)  a  person;  of  his 
wealth,  power,  etc. 

Faithful  in  service  or  work;  to  duties  or 
employers. 

Friendship  of  one  person  for  or  toward 
(not  to)  another;  between  or  among  (not  of) 
persons. 

Give  to  a  person  for  (not  to)  a  cause  or 
purpose.  We  give  a  thing  into  another's  care, 
and  give  for  in  the  place  of)  another. 

Happy  at  a  discovery;  over  (not  at)  a  suc- 
cess. "He  has  a  happy  manner  zvith  his 
friends."  Happy  in  one's  circumstances  or 
among  one's  children. 

Help  in  (not  at)  a  work;  with  money  or  ad- 
vice ;  to  success ;  against  an  enemy. 


Hinder  in  his  progress;  from  accomplishing 
something;  by  mismanagement  or  opposition. 

Impudence  from  (or  the  impudence  of)  a 
subordinate  to  his  superior. 

Injury  of  a  cause;  to  a  person  or  object;  by 
a  fire;  by  or  from  an  accident,  collision,  etc.; 
through  negligence. 

Listen  to  (not  at)  music,  an  address,  etc.; 
for  something  expected;  as,  to  listen  for  his 
friend's  footsteps;  for  a  signal. 

Love  of  one's  country ;  for  one's  friends ;  to 
or  toivard  God. 

Made  from,  of,  or  out  of  (not  with)  ma- 
terials, as,  paper,  iron,  wood,  etc. ;  into  a  given 
form;  for  a  certain  purpose;  with  hands;  by 
hand ;  by  a  person ;  zvith  a  lathe. 

Marriage  of  or  betzveen  two  persons,  or  of 
one  person  to  or  with  another;  marriage 
among  the  Chinese. 

Necessity  of  surrender,  or  of  ceasing  to 
carry  on  some  enterprise,  usually  expressed  in 
the  negative;  as,  "There  is  no  necessity  of  our 
giving  up,"  etc. ;  for  action,  as  a  necessity  for 
rapid  work;  to  a  person  or  purpose;  as,  "Bread 
is  a  necessity  to  (not  for)  me." 

Neglect  of  a  duty  by  a  person ;  or  neglect  of 
a  child  by  its  parents.  "He  showed  much  neg- 
lect of  (not  for)  his  duties." 

Part  from  a  friend ;  part  with  money  or 
other  possessions. 

Patience  zuith  offenders;  in  si:ffering; 
under  affliction. 

Plead  zvith  one  in  authority  for  an  offender ; 
against  an  injustice;  to  an  indictment;  at  the 
bar;  before  a  judge;  in  court. 

Prejudice  against  (not  toward)  a  person; 
in  one's  favor. 

Profit  of  an  act  or  of  work;  on  an  invest- 
ment; in  a  business;  the  profits  of  a  business, 
capital,  labor,  etc. 

Purchase  at  a  price  or  at  auction ;  of  or  from 
a  person ;  for  cash ;  zvith  money ;  on  time  or 
credit;  or  on  a  note. 

Reason  of  a  tiling  or  occurrence  that  re- 
quires an  explanation;  for  a  thing  that  is  done 
or  felt;  as,  "What  is  the  reason  for  his  queer 
action  ?"  "He  had  no  reason  for  going,  or  for 
anger  or  complaint." 


52 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Recover  from  (not  of)  an  illness;  (in  law) 
to  recover  judgment  against;  to  recover  dam- 
ages of  or  from  a  defendant. 

Revenge  iipon  a  person,  for  an  injury. 

Security  /or  (not  of)  a  debt;  for  a  pris- 
oner ;  in  the  sum  of  five  hundred  dollars. 

Speak  to  or  zvith  a  person  (as  in  a  conver- 
sation) ;  of  or  about  a  thing;  on  a  subject;  in 
parliamentary  language,  to  speak  to  the  ques- 
tion. 

Exercise  55. 

Illustrate  with  original  sentences  the  correct 
use  of  the  following  combinations : 

die  by  complaint  against 

different  in  confirm  in 

faithful  in  dexterity  with 

friendship  for  differ  from 

die  of  complain  of 


faithful  to 
enemy  of 

Correct  the  following  where  necessary ; 


dexterity  at 
differ  with 


1. 

2. 
ting 


He  had  no  defense  to  the  charge. 
His  interference  hindered  us  from  get- 
the  building  ready. 

3.  The  handles  are  made  with  machines. 

4.  There  is  no  necessity  of  the  firm's  going 
in  debt. 

5.  He  does  not  like  to  part  from  his  money. 

6.  He   helped  me  both   in  money  and  en- 
couragement. 

7.  I  have  no  patience  for  people  who  show 
neglect  in  their  work. 

8.  It  was  purchased  for  a  good  price. 

9.  His  profits  by  the  deal  were  very  large. 
10.     What  security  can  you  give  me  on  my 

investment  ? 


LESSON  38. 
Big  Words. 

153.  While  some  persons  allow  their  speech  to  degenerate  into  a  disorderly  jumble  of 
slang  and  flippant  colloquialisms,  others  go  to  the  opposite  extreme  and  affect  unusual  and  pon- 
derous words,  bookish  expressions,  and  round-about  forms  of  speech.  This  kind  of  jargon 
aibounds  in  second-class  novels,  newspapers  of  the  poorer  sort,  and  in  the  work  of  weak  and 
mediocre  writers  generally. 

By  way  of  suggestion,  we  cite  here  a  few  examples  of  what  should  be  avoided  by  all  who 
would  learn  to  express  themselves  in  clear,  simple,  and  forcible  English : 


GRANDILOQUENT. 

1.  superintend  the  correspondence.  1. 

2.  solicit  your  consideration.  2. 

3.  We  take  the  liberty  to  advise  you  that,  3. 

etc. 

4.  was  tendered  a  banquet.  4. 

5.  I  beg  leave  to  offer  some  brief  observa-         5. 

tions. 

6.  The  mad  course  of  the  infuriated  animal         6. 

was  soon  arrested. 

7.  We  beg  to  acknowledge  the  receipt  of         7. 

your  esteemed  communication  of 
May  8. 

8.  A  vast  concourse  of  people.  8. 

9.  I  am  gratified  to  acknowledge  the  ex-         9. 

ceedingly  valuable  benefits  I  have  re- 
ceived through  my  attendance  at 
your  estimable  institution. 


PLAIN   ENGLISH. 

Attend  to  the  letter-writing. 

Ask  your  attention. 

We  write  to  inform  you  that,  etc. 

Was  asked  to  a  dinner. 
I  ask  to  say  a  few  words. 

The  frightened  horse  was  soon  stopped. 

We  have  your  letter  of  May  8. 


A  big  crowd. 

I  am  glad  to  say  that  I  have  been 
greatly  benefited  by  attending  your 
excellent  school. 


BIG  WORDS 


The  preceding  sentence  is  quoted  from  a  school  catalog, 
the  following  "companion  piece" : 


In  another  part  of  the  catalog  is 


10. 


11. 

12. 
13. 

14. 


This  institution  is  absolutely  unsur- 
passed in  the  advantages  it  extends 
to  its  matriculates  by  that  of  any 
other  institution  in  the  country. 

On  account  of  financial  reverses,  our 
firm  has  been  compelled  to  succumb. 

He  is  financially  embarrassed. 

He  donated  generously  for  the  relief 
of  the  unfortunate. 


10.     The  advantages  offered  by  this  school 
are  unexcelled. 


11.     Our  firm  has  failed. 


12. 
13. 

14. 


He  is  short  of  money. 

He  gave  much  to  the  poor. 


He    died 
business. 


soon    after    retiring    from 


He  departed  this  life  within  a  brief 
period  subsequent  to  his  withdrawal 
from  commercial  pursuits.. 

In  the  following  list  of  words,  those  printed  in  heavy-face  type  are  less  concise  and  forci- 
ble than  the  italicized  expressions  following  them : 

Avoid  the  Use  of 


Abundance    for  enough  or  plenty. 

Amplify  for  enlarge  or  expand. 

Anticipate   for  expect. 

Abhor  or  abominate  for  dislike. 

Abominable  for  unpleasant;  as,  "This 
weather  is  'abominable.'  " 

Abrogate  for  annul  or  cancel. 

Absolutely  for  quite  or  entirely. 

Absentminded  for  forgctfid  or  preoccu- 
pied 

Attain  or  obtain  for  get. 

Consummated  for  finished,  completed,  or 
solemnized  (in  case  of  a  marriage  ceremony). 

Depreciate    for  fall  in  price. 

Extend  or  proffer  for  give  or  offer,  as  to 
"extend"  an  invitation,  to  "proffer"  assistance. 

Inaugurate  or  initiate  for  begin  or  com- 
mence. 

Paraphernalia  for  equipment. 

Partake  for  eat. 

Perambulate  for  zvalk  about. 

Proposition    for  offer,  or  business  affair. 

The  misuse  of  this  word  has  become  the 
veriest  slang.  During  a  recent  railway  jour- 
ney, the  author  sat  near  a  well-dressed  Chi- 
cago business  man,  with  whom  this  word 
proposition  was  clearly  a  favorite.  In  the 
course  of  an  hour's  talk,  he  used  the  word  in 
six  different  ways,  none  of  them  correct.  Just 
before  leaving  the  train,  lie  referred  to  the 
President  of  the  United  States  as  "a  hot  prop- 
osition!" 


Exonerate  for  relieve  from  blame. 

Endeavor  for  try. 

Sufficient  for  enough. 

Expenditures  for  payments. 

New  departure  for  reform  or  improvement. 

In  the  immediate  future  for  soon. 

Superintend  for  direct,  manage  or  oversee. 

Remunerate  for  pay. 

Remunerative  for  paying  or  profitable. 

Transpire   for  occur  or  become  known: 

Witness   for  see. 

Considerable  for  much  or  many. 

The  foregoing  list  includes  but  a  few  of  the 
many  "big  words"  that  are  often  used  for 
their  shorter  and  plainer  equivalents.  It  can- 
not be  held  that  the  use  of  such  words,  within 
their  correct  meaning,  is  positively  incorrect, 
])ut  their  use  is  very  often  in  bad  taste,  and 
tends  to  a  pompous  and  exaggerated,  instead 
of  a  simple  and  accurate,  style  of  speech. 

Exercise  56. 

Rewrite  the  following  sentences,  trying  in 
each  case  to  express  the  thoughts  in  simple, 
clear,  and  concise  language : 

1.  The  price  of  agricultural  productions 
has  become  so  depreciated  that  I  do  not  antici- 
pate being  able  to  discharge  my  indebtedness 
to  you  prior  to  the  first  day  of  January. 


54 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


2.  The  roads  have  been  rendered  so  abom- 
inable by  the  late  inclement  weather,  that  we 
have  been  unable  to  get  our  grain  transported 
to  the  railroad. 

3.  Your  last  shipment  of  oil  is  absolutely 
unsalable,  but  fortunately  we  still  have  an 
abundance  of  the  good  quality  on  hand — quite 
sufficient  for  our  trade. 

4.  If  agreeable  to  you,  we  will  abrogate 
the  old  agreement  and  consummate  a  new  one. 

5.  We  absolutely  exonerate  you  from  all 
intentional  negligence  in  the  matter. 

6.  For  us  to  undertake  to  remunerate  him 
to  the  extent  of  his  demands,  would  undoubt- 
edly prove  an  expensive  proposition. 


7.  We  hope  to  amplify  the  area  of  our 
commercial  operations  in  the  immediate 
future. 

8.  In  my  absentmindedness,  I  was  peram- 
bulating the  walks  in  the  park,  entirely  uncon- 
scious of  the  engagement  I  had  made  to  meet 
you  at  ten  o'clock.  I  solicit  your  forgiveness 
for  this  seeming  negligence. 

9.  We  not  only  remunerated  him  for  his 
personal  expenditure,  but  we  reimbursed  him 
for  the  sums  he  had  expended  in  purchasing 
his  traveling  paraphernalia. 

10.  We  have  decided  to  inaugurate  a  new 
departure  from  our  previous  methods,  and  al- 
low our  trade  discounts  only  to  cash  patrons. 


LESSON  39. 

The  Qualities  of  Correct  Expression. 

154.  The  learner's  attention  has  hitherto  been  directed  to  a  study  of  the  correct  forms 
and  uses  of  words.  We  are  now  to  consider  some  of  the  principles  of  word-arrangement,  or 
phraseology  and  the  more  important  general  qualities  of  correct  expression. 

Good  English  involves  much  more  than  mere  compliance  with  the  rules  of  grammar  and 
the  use  of  proper  words.  The  purpose  of  language  is  not  merely  to  express  our  thoughts,  but 
to  impress  them  on  others.  A  sentence  may  be  entirely  grammatical,  yet  so  vague  and  weak  as 
to  be  well-nigh  meaningless. 

Good  business  English  should  have  four  qualities.  These,  in  the  order  of  their  importance, 
are,  correctness,  clearness,  brevity,  and  force. 


Correctness. 

155.  To  be  correct,  a  sentence  should  be — 

(1)  Grammatical;  that  is,  each  word 
should  have  the  form  and  use  prescribed  by 
the  rules  of  grammar. 

(2)  Composed  of  words  properly  spelled 
and  capitalized,  and  used  in  accordance  with 
their  established  meaning. 

(3)  Properly  punctuated;  that  is,  its  parts 
separated  and  its  last  word  followed  by  such 
point,  or  punctuation-mark,  as  may  be  neces- 
sary to  make  clear  its  meaning. 

156.  The  requirements  of  grammar  with 
respect  to  the  several  parts  of  speech,  also  the 
matter  of  using  words  according  to  their  ac- 
cepted meaning,  have  been  discussed  in  pre- 
vious chapters.  With  regard  to  the  correct- 
ness of  sentences,  it  now  remains  to  consider 
the  requirements  of  capitalization  and  punc- 
tuation. 


The  Use  of  Capital  Letters. 

157.  The  omission  of,  or  evident  misuse 
of  capitals,  like  incorrect  spelling  and  the  vio- 
lation of  the  rules  of  grammar,  indicates  lack 
of  education.  While  there  is  much  variation 
in  the  use  of  capitals  in  certain  cases,  there  is 
nevertheless  a  general  uniformity,  which  is 
governed  by  fairly  definite  rules. 

158.  The  following  sub-divisions  include 
the  more  important  cases  : 

When  Capitals  Are  Required. 
1.    Initial  letters.   The  initial  (beginning) 
letter  of  every  sentence,  every  quotation  form- 
ing   a    sentence,    and    every    line    of    poetry, 
should  be  a  capital. 

Examples  : 

At  the  top  of  the  hill, 
notice  which  read,  "No 
here,"  so  we  turned  back. 

Half  a  league,  half  a  league. 


we 


encountered  a 
shooting    allowed 


Half  a  league  onward ! 


THE  QUALITIES  OF  CORRECT  EXPRESSION— CAPITALIZING 


55 


2.  Proper  nouns,  titles,  etc.  A  capital  let- 
ter should  begin  all  special  (individual) 
names,  whether  of  persons,  places,  or  things; 
also  titles,  as  Major,  Doctor,  Professor,  etc., 
when  applied  to  individuals.  Letters  used  to 
designate  degrees,  as  LL.  D.,  D.  D.,  A.  M.. 
etc.,  also  require  capitals.  Capitals  are  also 
used  for  many  abbreviations;  as,  C.  O.  D.,  Cr., 
P.  M. 

NOTE. — A  list  of  the  more  important  abbreviations 
will  be  found  near  the  end  of  this  book. 

When  a  name,  as  that  of  a  society  or  of  a 
book,  consists  of  a  series  of  words,  only  the 
more  important  are  begun  with  capitals ;  as, 
"The  Society  for  the  Prevention  of  Cruelty 
to  AniiTials,"  "The  Decline  and  Fall  of  the 
Roman  Empire." 

3.  Words  denoting  Heaven,  the  Bible 
and  the  Deity,  also  pronouns  referring  to  the 
Deity,  should  begin  with  capitals.  "It  is 
through  His  grace  and  in  obedience  to  His  law, 
that  is,  the  Word  of  God,  that  we  hope  for 
Paradise." 

Observe  that  the  word  god  does  not  require 
a  capital  when  used  other  than  as  an  appella- 
tion of  the  Deity;  as,  "The  mills  of  the  gods 
grind  slowly." 

NOTE. — The  word  bible,  when  used  as  a  general 
term  to  indicate  a  book,  is  not  capitalized.  Example: 
He  bought  a  bible.  The  firm  makes  a  specialty  of 
handsomely  bound  bibles. 

4.  Adjectives  derived  from  proper  nouns 

should  begin  with  capitals;  as,  American, 
French,  Johnsonian,  English,  Victorian.  Some 
adjectives  of  this  class  have  become  so  far  dis- 
associated from  their  derivatives,  that  the 
initial  capital  is  not  required. 


Examples:  quixotic,  a  china  cup,  a  mal- 
tese  cat,  a  newfoundland  dog,  a  german-silver 
spoon,  morocco  leather. 

(a)  Verbs  derived  from  proper  nouns  are 
not  usually  capitalized;  as,  boycott,  christen, 
gerrymander,  burke  (to  suppress  secretly). 
An  exception  to  this  rule  is  Christiau-izc. 

(b)  The  words  east,  west,  north,  south, 
northwest,  etc.,  are  capitalized  when  used  to 
designate  a  part  of  the  country ;  as,  "The 
South  had  its  own  problems;"  "The  North- 
west is  peculiarly  interesting  to  a  man  from 
the  East." 

(c)  The  adjectives  eastern,  western, 
northern,  etc.,  are  often  capitalized  when  used 
with  respect  to  some  particular  region;  as, 
"The  customs  of  Eastern  people,"  "Contrary  to 
Southern  interests,"  "He  lives  in  Eastern 
Ohio."  These  words  should  not  be  capitalized 
when  used  merely  to  indicate  location ;  as. 
"Rochester  is  in  the  western  part  of  New 
York." 

(d)  The  word  state  is  usually  capitalized 
when  used  as  an  ofificial  title ;  as,  "Contrary  to 
the  laws  of  the  State  of  Ohio,"  "I  am  the 
State,"  said  Louis  XIV.  State  is  not  capital- 
ized in  ordinary  uses  of  the  word ;  as,  "Ne- 
braska is  a  productive  state." 

5.  The  words  I  and  0.  The  pronoun  / 
and  the  interjection  O  should  always  be  capi- 
talized.    The  interjection  oh  is  not  capitalized 
unless  it  begins  a  sentence  or  a  line  of  poetry. 

6.  Roman  numerals.  Capitals  are  gen- 
erally used  for  these,  as  VIII,  LX,  etc.,  but 
small  letters  are  employed  when  the  numeral  is 
used  to  indicate  a  passage  of  Scripture;  as, 
"John  xvii-2L" 


159.  Printing-oflBce  customs.  There  is  much  variation  among  newspapers  and  other  pub- 
lishing offices,  as  to  certain  uses  of  capitals.  For  instance,  in  some  offices,  the  words  Repub- 
lican, Democrat,  Catholic,  Methodist,  etc.,  are  capitalized,  while  in  other  offices  they  are  not. 
Each  printing  office  has  its  own  special  custom  with  regard  to  capitalizing  and  other  matters, 
which  are  known  among  printers  as  "the  office  style." 

The  selected  words  and  expressions  given  on  page  56  show  a  growing  tendency  to  drop 
capitals  in  newspaper  offices.  In  the  first  column,  the  capitalizing  is  in  accordance  with  the 
strict  application  of  the  rules.  The  second  column  shows  the  usage  of  many  newspapers.  Most 
of  the  examples  given  are  taken  from  recent  issues  of  a  leading  newspaper,  and  fairly  illustrate 
the  usage  of  many  of  the  city  dailies. 

Opinions  may  dififer  as  to  which  form  the  student  should  adopt.  Scholars,  literary  persons, 
and  many  teachers,  would  doubtless  advocate  strict  capitalizing,  but  the  tendency  among  news- 
papers, and  in  business  offices  as  well,  is  toward  a  more  restricted  use  of  capitals.  The  author 
would  advise  students  of  shorthand  and  others  who  are  fitting  themselves  for  business  pursuits, 
to  follow,  generally,  the  rule,  "Use  capitals  only  when  they  are  plainly  required;  when  in 
doubt,  use  small  letters." 


56 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


LITERARY  STYLE. 

1.  The  Ohio  River. 

2.  Fourth  Street. 

3.  The  Board  of  Pubhc  Works. 

4.  The  Federal  Grand  Jury. 

5.  The  Repubhcan  Party. 

6.  The  Health  Department. 

7.  Every  court  in  the  State  and  Nation. 

8.  The  President  of  the  Rock  Island  Sys- 

tem. 


BUSINESS  USAGE. 

1.  The  Ohio  river. 

2.  Fourth  street. 

3.  The  board  of  public  works. 

4.  The  federal  grand  jury. 

5.  The  republican  party. 

(Chicago  Tribune.) 

6.  The  health  department. 

7.  Every  court  in  the  state  and  nation. 

8.  The  president  of  the  Rock  Island  sys- 

tem. 


The  Chicago  Record-Herald  prints,  "The  President  (meaning  the  President  of  the  United 
States)  has  returned."    The  Tribune  prints,  "The  president  of  the  United  States." 

Most  newspapers  print,  "the  President,"  when  alluding  to  the  President  of  the  United 
States,  but  do  not  capitalize  in  speaking  of  the  president  of  a  railway  or  the  president  of  a 
club  or  society,  or  even  of  a  foreign  country. 


9.     The  Lake  Avenue  Police  Station. 

10.  The  Governor  of  Missouri  is  a  Demo- 

crat. 

11.  The    Government    will    prosecute    the 

Beef  Trust. 

12.  The  Seventh  Ward  Committee. 

Exercise  57. 

Give  reason  for  the  use  of  all  capitals  found 
in  the  following  sentences : 

1.  He   used   the    word    in   a    Pickwickian 
sense. 

2.  His  subject  was,  "The  Origin  and  De- 
velopment of  Stenography." 

3.  In  his  hour  of  need,  the  old  Canadian 
turned  to  the  Savior  and  His  promises. 

4.  We  had  supper  at  tlie  Star  and  Garter. 

5.  It  was  as  plain  as  Holy  Writ. 

6.  We   visited   the    Capitol   and   met   Mr. 
Walker,  the  present  Secretary  of  State. 

7.  The  Mountain  and  the  Squirrel 

Had  a  quarrel. 
And  the  former  called  the  latter,  "Little 
Prig;" 
Bun  replied : 

8.  The  Eastern  man  marvels  at  the  pro- 
gressiveness  of  the  West. 

9.  It  was,  after  all,  a  Utopian  scheme. 


9.  The  Lake  avenue  police  station. 

10.  The  governor  of  Missouri  is  a  demo- 

crat. 

11.  The    government    will    prosecute    the 

beef  trust. 

12.  The  Seventh  ward  committee. 

10.  At  this  point,  the  Senator  interposed. 
"You  are  quite  wrong,"  said  he,  "I  am  by  no 
means  a  convert  to  the  Baconian  theory." 

Exercise  58. 

Rewrite  the  following  sentences,  using  capi- 
tals as  required : 

1.  the  evening  telegram  announces  the 
resignation  of  the  russian  ambassador. 

2.  the  bishop  is  a  genial  gentleman;  he 
holds  the  degree  of  d.  d.  and  11.  d.  from  prince- 
ton  and  has  long  been  prominent  in  the  coun- 
cils of  his  church,  that  of  the  m.  e.  south. 

3.  the  city  council  met  at  7  p.  m.  sharp 
with  his  honor,  mayor  curtiss,  in  the  chair, 
and  at  once  proceeded  to  consider  amendments 
nos.  3  and  4  to  ordinance  no.  35. 

4.  we  consider  logic  an  important  subject; 
it  is  taken  up  in  the  junior  year,  and  we  use 
simms  &  walker's  text  during  the  first  semester, 
following  this  with  "white's  elements." 


LESSON  40. 
Punctuation. 


160.  Punctuation  is  tlie  use  of  certain  char- 
acters, called  punctuation-marks,  as  a  means 
of  indicating  to  the  eye  the  construction  of 
written  sentences  and  the  relation  of  their 
parts.  In  a  general  way,  punctuation-marks 
serve  the  same  purpose  in  written  composition 


tliat  is  served  by  the  pause  in  oral  speech. 
However,  pauses  are  often  required  in  read- 
ing or  speaking,  where  no  punctuation-marks 
are  used  in  the  matter  read,  and  marks  are 
often  used  where  the  oral  reading  would  re- 
quire   no   pauses.     As   punctuation-marks  are 


PUNCTUATION 


87 


mainly  used  to  indicate  the  construction  of 
sentences,  it  is  evident  that  no  one  can  punctu- 
ate accurately  who  does  not  understand  sen- 
tence structure.  It  is,  also,  true  that  punctua- 
tion presents  few  difficulties  to  those  who  fully 
understand  the  sentence  and  the  relations  of  its 
parts. 

The  Punctuation  Marks. 

161.  Ten  kinds  of  punctuation-marks  are 
in  common  use,  as  follows : 

Coma  (,)         Exclamation      ( !) 

Semicolon  ( ;)         Dash  ( — ) 

Colon  ( :)  Parenthesis         () 

Period  (.)         Brackets  ([]) 

Interrogation    (?)         Quotations     ("  ") 

162.  Punctuation  may  conveniently  be 
studied  under  two  general  divisions : 

1.  Terminal  punctuation,  or  the  use  of 
marks  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 

2.  Intermediate  punctuation  or  the  use 
of  marks  in  separating  the  parts  of  the  sen- 
tence. 

Terminal  Punctuation. 

163.  The  period  (.)  is  placed  at  the  end 
of  a  declarative  sentence ;  that  is,  a  sentence 
which  consists  of  an  ordinary  assertion. 

Example  :  Insects  abound  in  tropical 
countries. 

164.  The  interrogation  or  question  mark 
(  ?)  follows  interrogative  sentences,  or  ques- 
tions. 

Example:     Where  is  your  home? 

A  sentence  is  often  declarative  in  form  but 
interrogative  in  meaning. 

Examples: 

Attorney.  You  say  you  came  home  about 
nine  o'clock? 

Witness.     Yes,  sir. 

Attorney.  And  the  defendant,  Mr.  Brown 
was  in  the  house? 


Witness.     Yes,  sir. 
Attorney.     You  saw  him? 
Witness.     Yes,  sir. 

165.  The  exclamation  ( !)  follows  ex- 
clamatory sentences,  or  those  expressing  sur- 
prise or  strong  emotion. 

Examples:  How  beautiful  it  is!  What 
wonderful  patience  he  shows ! 

Exclamatory  sentences  may  also  have  the 
form  of  assertions,  questions,  or  commands. 

Examples:  The  city  is  burning !  Dare  you 
ask  me  to  sacrifice  my  honor!  O,  see  that 
beautiful  bird ! 

166.  Imperative  sentences,  or  commands, 

may  be  followed  by  either  exclamations  or 
periods,  according  to  the  degree  of  urgency 
implied. 

Examples:  Here,  boys,  catch  that  car! 
Now,  Harry,  do  not  fail  to  be  at  home  by  nine. 

167.  Related  sentences.  Sentences  that 
are  grammatically  distinct  are  often  so  closely 
related  that  tliey  are  not  separated  by  the  or- 
dinary terminal  marks. 

168.  The  semicolon  ( ;)  is  used  to  separate 
sentences  that  are  very  closely  related  in  mean- 
ing. 

Examples  :  Rubber  is  found  in  most  trop- 
ical countries ;  the  best,  however,  comes  from 
the  forests  of  the  Amazon  Valley. 

169.  The  colon  (  :)  is  used  to  separate  sen- 
tences that  are  less  closely  related  than  those 
requiring  the  semicolon,  but  too  closely  con- 
nected to  require  a  period. 

Examples:  Cigarette-smoking  dulls  the 
faculties  and  depletes  energy :  that  business 
men  recognize  this,  is  made  evident  by  tlie  fact 
that  several  railroad  companies  refuse  to  em- 
ploy cigarette-smokers. 


58 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


170.  The  comma  (,)  is  the  most  important 
of  the  marks  required  in  separating  the  parts 
of  the  sentence.  The  principal  cases  requiring 
the  use  of  the  comma  for  this  purpose  are  the 
following : 

1,  Introductory  elements.  These  are  usu- 
ally set  ofif  by  the  comma. 

Examples:  Gentlemen,  you  are  quite 
wrong  in  your  conclusions.  As  to  that,  we  can 
give  no  definite  answer  now.  Speaking  gen- 
erally, we  are  not  favorably  impressed  by  his 
work. 


LESSON  41. 
Intermediate  Punctuation. 

2.  Parenthetical  expressions.  By  these, 
are  meant  such  words  or  expressions  as  are 
not  grammatically  essential  to  the  sentence. 
They  were  formerly  enclosed  in  parentheses. 

Examples  :  We  will  refer  your  proposition, 
however,  to  the  directors.  Your  expenses. 
even  though  they  exceed  one  hundred  dollars 
per  month,  will  be  borne  by  the  firm. 

He  usually  visited  the  office  on  Saturday, 
often  as  early  as  eight  o'clock,  and  remained 
several  hours. 


3.  Explanatory  elements.  These  are  w  ords,  phrases,  or  clauses  inserted  in  the  sentence 
to  make  its  meaning  clearer,  but  do  not  closely  modify  its  parts. 

Examples:  Mr.  Barlow,  our  neiu  neighbor,  is  employed  at  Caldwell's.  Our  bookkeeper 
tvho  had  noticed  the  discrepancy,  called  my  attention  to  it.  My  uncle,  who  is  much  interested  in 
painting,  will  call  on  you  next  week. 

Clauses  like  the  one  set  off  by  commas  in  the  last  sentence,  are  called  non-restrictive 
because  they  explain,  but  do  not  restrict,  the  application  of  the  assertion  to  the  word  modified. 
They  should  be  distinguished  from  restrictive  clauses,  which  are  not  set  off  by  commas.  Study 
the  following  examples : 


THE  CLAUSE  NON-RESTRICTIVE. 

1.  Cochineal,  which  is  an  important  dye- 

stuff,  comes  from  Mexico. 

2.  The  boy,  who  was  not  afraid  of  work, 

remained  with  us  several  months. 

3.  The   newspapers,   which   made   a   point 

of    being    sensational,    greatly    ex- 
aggerated the  affair. 


THE  CLAUSE  RESTRICTIVE. 

1.  The  Cochineal  that  comes  from  Mexico 

is  the  best  to  be  had. 

2.  A  boy  who  is  not  afraid  of  work  can 

always  find  employment. 

3.  Those  newspapers  that  make  a  point  of 

being  sensational  greatly  exaggerated 
the  affair. 


NOTE. — As  a  rule,  the  relative  zvho  or  zuhich  is  preferably  used  in  non-restrictive,  and  the  relative  that  in 
restrictive  clauses. 


4.  Inverted  elements.  A  modifying  word, 
phrase,  or  clause,  is  said  to  be  inverted  when  it 
begins  the  sentence,  instead  of  following  the 
word  it  modifies.  Inverted  elements  are  set 
off  by  commas. 

Examples  :  Sometime  in  February,  we  sent 
you  full  instructions  as  to  this  matter.  (Here 
the  phrase  sometime  in  February  is  inverted, 
since  its  natural,  or  regular,  position  would  be 
at  the  close,  instead  of  at  the  beginning,  of  the 
sentence.)  To  make  sure  of  the  sale,  I  called 
at  the  office  again.  When  I  visited  Mayzuood, 
he  was  not  at  home.  Of  the  many  machines  zve 
have  used,  this  seems  to  be  the  most  satisfac- 
toi^y 

5.  Elements  forming  a  series.  Commas 
are   required   to   separate  the  parts  of  a  con- 


nected series,  unless  all  the  conjunctions  are 
present. 

Examples:  Neither  Brown,  Watson,  Par- 
ker, nor  Davis,  has  yet  sent  in  a  report.  (No- 
tice that  the  comma  is  used  between  the  last 
two  members,  notwithstanding  the  presence  of 
the  conjunction.  This  is  now  required  by  the 
best  usage.  Were  all  the  conjunctions  present, 
no  comma  would  be  required ;  as,  "Neither 
Brown  nor  Watson  nor  Parker  nor  Davis  has 
yet  sent  in  a  report.")  Eggs,  butter,  cheese, 
and  poultry  are  all  very  scarce. 

Sometimes,  for  purposes  of  emphasis,  all  the 
conjunctions  are  omitted ;  in  this  case,  a  comma 
is  placed  after  the  last  word  in  the  series. 

Examples:  Prudence,  temperance,  indus- 
try, faithfulness,  are  the  qualities  that  make 
for  success. 


REVIEW 


6.  Informal  quotations.  An  informal 
quotation  is  one  that  is  not  formally  intro- 
duced by  "as  follows,"  "viz.,"  "in  these 
words,"  or  some  similar  expression.  Informal 
quotations  are  set  off  by  commas. 

Examples:  We  notice  that  you  say, 
"bronze  caskets  with  steel  handles,"  but  we 
assume  that  you  meant,  "steel  caskets  with 
bronze  handles."  You  know  the  old  saying, 
"All  is  not  gold  that  glitters.' 

7.  Antithetic  words  or  phrases.  These 
are  expressions  that  show  antithesis,  or  con- 
trast, and  are  set  off  by  commas. 

Examples:  Friday,  not  Thursday,  was  the 
day  agreed  upon.  It  was  the  cloth-bound 
books,  not  those  with  paper  covers,  that  we 
ordered. 

8.  Omission  of  verb.  When  a  verb  is 
omitted,  the  comma  is  used  to  indicate  the 
omission. 

Examples  :  I  went  to  St.  Paul  and  he,  to 
Omaha.  We  find  that  the  four-inch  cutter  is 
too  heavy  and  the  three-inch,  too  light.  Mr. 
Wayne  delivered  the  flour  and  Mr.  Hart,  the 
apples. 

9.  Attribute  clauses  are  set  off  by  com- 
mas. 

Examples:  The  question  is.  What  are  we 
to  do  about  it?  My  opinion  is,  that  he  will 
prove  to  be  a  reliable  man. 


10.    Clauses  of  a  compound  sentence.    A 

comma  is  used  to  show  the  omission  of  the 
conjunction  between  the  clauses  of  a  short 
compound  sentence. 

Examples:  You  may  accept  his  offer,  we 
will  ship  the  goods  to-morrow.  (If  the  con- 
junction were  inserted  after  "offer,"  the 
comma  would  not  be  needed.)  I  hope  you 
will  remit  the  money,  I  am  needing  it  very 
much. 

If  the  clauses  are  longer,  both  the  comma 
and  the  conjunction  may  be  used. 

Examples  :  We  hope  to  have  everything  in 
readiness  for  our  removal  to  the  new  building 
by  the  first  of  May,  and  we  shall  expect  you 
here  by  April  15  to  assist  in  the  packing.  (If 
the  conjunction  is  omitted  in  sentences  of  this 
kind,  a  semicolon  is  used  to  separate  the 
clauses.     See  168.) 

171.  General  rule  for  the  use  of  the 
comma.  While  the  student  will  find  it  greatly 
to  his  advantage  to  be  familiar  with  the  fore- 
going special  rules  for  the  use  of  the  comma, 
he  must,  in  many  cases,  rely  more  upon  his 
judgment  than  upon  the  particular  application 
of  any  rule.  In  many  instances,  he  may  be 
aided  by  the  following  general  rule: 

Place  the  comma  wherever  its  use  tends  to 
make  the  meaning  of  the  sentence  clearer,  and 
where  no  other  punctuation-mark  seems  ap- 
plicable. 


Exercise  59. 
Give  a  reason  for  the  use  of  each  punctua- 
tion-mark in  the  following  sentences: 

1.  Still,  it  does  not  appear  to  us  that  he  has 
done,  intentionally  at  least,  any  wrong  thing 
while  acting  as  our  agent. 

2.  And  to  think  that,  notwithstanding  our 
previous  relations,  he  could  write  us  a  letter 
like  that! 

3.  Just  across  the  street,  is  a  little  book 
store;  near  to  that,  an  old  Italian  has  a  fruit 
stand. 

4.  Money,  friends,  and  opportunity  having 
gone,  he  sank,  poor  fellow !  into  a  state  of  utter 
despair. 

5.  Electricity,  the  real  nature  of  which  is 
quite  unknown  to  science,  has  wonderfully 
added  to  the  convenience,  comfort,  and  pleas- 
ure of  modern  life. 

6.  Upon  the  success  of  the  undertaking. 


LESSON  42. 

Review. 

we  have  staked  thousands  of  dollars ;  in  this 
venture,  as  in  our  former  ones,  we  have  never 
once  doubted,  much  less  feared,  as  to  the  re- 
sult. 

7.  It  is  in  steadiness,  industry,  and  will, 
not  in  good  intentions,  that  you  are  deficient. 

8.  We  shot  ducks,  geese,  and  other  fowl ; 
we  fished  in  brook,  river,  and  sea ;  we  climbed 
mountains;  we  rowed,  sailed,  or  rested,  ac- 
cording to  our  mood ;  in  short,  for  six  weeks, 
we  fairly  reveled,  care  free,  in  the  delights  of 
an  outdoor  existence. 

9.  After  all,  Ralph,  what  are  you  but  an 
impulsive,  inexperienced  boy? 

10.  I  said  that  he  is  dishonest,  it  is  true, 
and  I  very  much  regret  it. 

11.  I  said  that  he  is  dishonest:  it  is  true; 
and  I  very  much  regret  it. 

Note  how  the  punctuation  affects  the  mean 
ing  of  the  last  two  sentences. 


60 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


LESSON  43. 


Special  Uses  of  the 

172.  The  Period. 

1.  Letters  and  figures  used  in  numbering 
cliapters,  paragraphs,  problems,  etc.,  should  be 
followed  by  the  period.  (See  the  sub-divisions 
of  this  and  other  text-books.) 

2.  Abbreviations.  All  abbreviations,  ini- 
tials, etc.,  should  be  followed  by  the  period. 

Examples  :  lb.,  C.  &  N.  W.  Ry.,  J.  P.  Hill, 
Esq.,  Mr.  A.,  Mrs.  C,  Miss  B.,  Thos.  Brown, 
M.  A. 

3.  Signatures,    titles,    headings,    etc. 

George  Wilson.     Autobiography  of  a  Sailor. 
My  Hobbies. 

Custom  varies  considerably  as  to  this  use  of 
the  period.  The  display-headings  used  in 
newspapers  and  magazines  are  not  usually 
punctuated,  nor  are  the  headings  of  advertise- 
ments, title  pages,  etc.  In  some  publications, 
the  headings  of  chapters  and  divisions  are 
punctuated,  in  others  they  are  not. 

173.  The  Colon. 

Formal  introductions  to  quotations^  resolu- 
tions, documents,  etc.,  are  followed  by  a  colon. 

Examples:  Above  the  doorway  of  one 
of  the  inns,  a  queer  sign  reads  as  follows: 
"Comfort  and  Good  Meat  and  Forage  for 
Men  and  Beasts."  The  resolution,  as  amended, 
was  then  adopted  as  follows : 

Resolved,  that  it  is  the  sense  of  this  conven- 
tion, etc. 

NOTE. — The  colon  and  dash  are  sometimes  used 
where  the  matter  quoted  begins  a  separate  line,  as  in 
the  following  examples : 

This  Indenture  Witnesseth  : — 
That  H.  A.  Bell,  party  of  the  first  part,  etc. 
We  give,  herewith,  the  terms  of  our  prop- 
osition; viz. : — 

We  will  deliver,  etc. 

NOTE. — The  expression  "viz."  is  an  abbreviation  of 
the  Latin  word  videlicet,  which  means,  "that  which  may 
be  seen."  It  is  read,  "namely,"  and  is  always  followed 
by  a  period.  When  used  as  an  introductory  word,  it  is 
usually  preceded  by  a  semicolon,  and  may  be  followed 
by  a  comma,  a  colon,  a  dash,  or  a  colon  and  a  dash, 
according  to  circumstances  and  the  variations  of  usage. 

174.  The  Semicolon. 

1.    Enumeration  of  particulars. 

Examples:  The  following  subjects  were 
discussed:  Kindergartens;  German  in  the 
Grade  Schools;  Teachers'  Salaries;  and  Cor- 
poral Punishment.     Add  the  following  num- 


Punctuation-Marks. 

bers:  67;  126;  698;  473.  Our  plans  include 
the  following  features :  To  advertise  in  all 
the  newspapers  in  the  territory;  to  circular- 
ize all  the  dealers;  to  send  agents  into  all  the 
important  towns ;  to  give  public  demonstra- 
tions at  the  leading  stores. 

2.  Sentences  contracted  to  phrases,  as 

often  required  in  lists,  catalogs,  etc. 

Examples:  Charles  Walker  Benton;  born, 
1821;  graduated  at  Amherst,  1845;  enlisted 
in  the  Union  Army,  1862;  brevetted  Major, 
1864. 

3.  Before  viz.,  i.  e.,  e.  g.,  as,  for  example, 
etc.,  when  they  formally  introduce  an  enumer- 
ation of  particulars. 

Examples:  There  are  six  elements  of  a 
contract :  viz. :  parties,  consideration,  etc. 
(See  also  last  sentence  illustrating  use  of  the 
colon,  173.) 

When  viz.,  and  e.  g.,  with  the  matter  to 
which  they  relate,  are  used  parenthetically  in 
the  sentence,  the  semicolon  is  not  used. 

Examples:  Sorne  of  our  dress  fabrics,  viz., 
mohairs,  silks,  and  grenadines,  are  all  im- 
ported. 

175.  The  Comma. 

1.     Dates.  A  comma  should  be  placed  be- 
tween the  day  of  the  month  and  the  year. 
Examples:     June  25,  1913. 

2.  Addresses.  Commas  should  separate 
the  parts. 

Examples:     118  Fern  Ave.,  Redlands,  Cal. 
No.  26,  63rd  St.,  Hyde  Park,  Chicago. 
Cadmus,  Linn  Co.,  Kans. 

3.  Numbers.  Commas  are  often  used  to 
separate  numbers  into  periods  of  three  figures; 
as,  214,629,506. 

176.  The  Dash. 

1.  Break  in  the  thought.  A  dash  is  often 
used  to  set  off  a  word  or  expression  that  inter- 
rupts the  natural  course  of  the  sentence. 

Examples:  As  for  his  generosity — ^but 
the  less  said  about  that  the  better.  If  I  suc- 
ceed— and  I  will  succeed — the  reputation  of 
our  goods  will  be  firmly  established. 

The  dash,  like  the  comma  and  the  marks  of 
parenthesis,  is  often  used  to  enclose  parentliet- 
ical  expressions.  "As  for  myself — knowing 
him  as  I  do — I  am  not  surprised  at  his  suc- 
cess." 


SPECIAL  USB  OF  PUNCTUATION-MARKS 


61 


2.  Omitted  numbers  or  letters.  The  dash 
is  used  to  show  the  omission  of  figures  when 
reference  is  had  to  a  succession  of  dates  or 
numbers  in  a  series,  also  to  show  the  omission 
of  letters  in  words  which,  for  any  reason,  the 
writer  does  not  wish  to  spell  in  full. 

Examples:  "Our  Mr.  Haynes  will  be  in 
your    city    Dec.    7-12."    Read    pages  18-26. 

Mr.  J s  B n  is  not  in  the  least  dull,  and 

he  will  understand  what  is  referred  to.  (This 
form  of  innuendo  is  more  common  in  England 
than  in  America.) 

177.  Marks  of  Parenthesis. 

1.  Parenthetical  matter.  Marks  of  paren- 
thesis are  used  to  enclose  parenthetical  matter 
less  closely  related  to  the  structure  of  the  sen- 
tence than  that  set  off  by  the  comma. 

Example:  Upon  Mr.  Bell's  return  here 
(you  will  recall  that  he  had  gone  to  St.  Louis 
in  March),  we  discussed  the  matter  fully. 

Figures,  signs,  etc.  Signs,  characters,  etc., 
given  for  illustration  are  enclosed  in  paren- 
theses; as  (  +  )    (?)    (^). 

2.  Amounts  and  numbers  given  in  com- 
mercial papers,  wliich  are  written  in  words, 
are  enclosed  in  parentheses. 

Examples:  "I  promise  to  pay  twenty 
dollars  ($20) ;"  "We  agree  to  deliver  five  (5) 
cords  of  best  oak  wood. 

178.  Brackets. 

The  most  important  use  of  brackets  is  to  en- 
close explanatory  matter  inserted  by  some  one 
other  than  the  author  of  the  composition. 

Examples:  Ladies  and  Gentlemen  :  When 
I  first  met  Mr.  Scott  in  this  city  in  1862  [The 
speaker  was  in  error  here,  as  Mr.  Scott  did 
not  come  to  our  city  till  Sept.  1,  1863.    Ed.] 


179.  Apostrophe. 

The  original  use  of  the  apostrophe  was  to 

indicate  omitted  letters.     It  is  still  used   for 

this   purpose,    in   such   constructions   as   e'er, 

isn't,  there's,  etc.  Its  use  to  indicate  possession 

■  has  this  origin.     (See  Lesson  13.) 

The  apostrophe  is  to  used  to  show  the  omis- 
sion of  figures  or  words  in  indicating  a  year ; 
as,  '05  (1905J.  The  days  of  '76  (1776).  He 
reached  the  mines  in  'forty-nine.  Also  in 
indicating  the  plurals  of  letters,  figures,  signs, 
etc. ;  as,  "the  5's,"  "x's,"  "p's,  and  q's." 

180.  Quotation  Marks. 
Quotation-marks    are    used    to    enclose    all 

clirect  quotations;  that  is,  quotations  in  which 
the  identical  words  are  quoted. 

Examples:  He  said,  "Economy  is  the  road 
to  wealth." 

An  indirect  quotation  is  one  that  does  not 
purport  to  give  the  exact  words  of  the  speaker 
or  author.     Quotation-marks  are  not  required. 

Example:  He  said  that  economy  is  the 
road  to  wealth. 

A  quotation  within  a  quotation  is  enclosed 
in  single  marks. 

Examples:  "In  the  first  place,"  said  my 
father,  "I  hope  you  will  remember  the  old 
saying,  'A  rolling  stone  gathers  no  moss,'  and 
not  make  the  mistake  of  needlessly  going  from 
place  to  place." 

Ouotation-marks  are  also  used  to  enclose  a 
woTd  or  phrase  not  in  good  use,  or  one  used  in 
a  humorous  or  sarcastic  sense. 

Examples:  We  fear  the  whole  affair  is  a 
"fake."  The  young  man  aspired  to  be  a 
"poet,"  but  his  "poetry"  did  not  appear  to 
command  a  high  price  in  the  market. 


LESSON  44. 
Review  Tests. 


Exercise  60. 

Give  a  reason  for  the  use  of  each  of  the 
punctuation-marks  in  the  following  sentences: 

1.  We  have  received  from  the  publishers, 
N.  P.  Hartman  &  Co.,  the  following  new 
books : 


"Among  the  Earth's  Neighbors,"  by  Geo. 
S.  O'Laughlin,  A.  M.,  Professor  of  Astron- 
omy, Baldwin  College. 

"Will-o'-the-Wisp,  or  the  Strange  Adven- 
tures of  Patty,"  by  "Yale  '09."  (James  S. 
Cook.) 


62 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


2.  To  whom  it  May  Concern: — 
Whereas,  on  Saturday,  April  25,  1913, 

3.  Our  goods  have  the  following  special 
merits,  viz.:  (1)  they  are  made  of  the  finest 
Para  rubber;  (2)  they  are  so  simply  con- 
structed that  a  child  can  use  them;  (3)  all 
extra  parts  (including- valves)  can  be  supplied 
on  short  notice. 

4.  We  were  at  Burnham  in  May,  not  in 
June,  as  Callie  wrote.  By  the  way,  while  there, 
I  visited  the  "Old  Church"  (as  the  people  now 
call  it).  You  will,  doubtless,  recall  that 
Father's  old  friend,  Cameron,  is  buried  there. 
The  simple  inscription  on  his  headstone — 
barely  decipherable— reads  as  follows :  "Here 
lies  Thomas  Marvin  Cameron,  born,  Mar.  2. 
1798;  died,  June  21,  1869." 

5.  In  the  Register  for  October,  we  find 
this  entry :  "C.  A.  Stone,  Harvard,  78 ;  Ad- 
mitted to  membership,  June  12,  1886;  Presi- 
dent of  Society,  3892-3;  died,  Nov.  16,  1895." 

6.  I  have  often  thought — in  fact,  I  think 
I  got  the  idea  from  you  in  the  first  place — 

that  our  friend  G Id  W s  (perhaps  it 

isn't  best  to  spell  the  name  in  full;  letters  go 
"astray,"  sometimes,  you  know,)  may  have 
known  more  about  this  aflfair  than  he  cared  to 
admit. 


Exercise  61. 

Copy  the  following,  inserting  the  necessary 
punctuation-marks  at  the  places  indicated  by 
the  vertical  lines : 

1.  Now  this  order  [singular  circumstance] 
wasn't  it||  was|  in  every  particular]  identical 
with  the  one  received  Apr|  14 1  1913 1 

2.  On  the  5th  inst||  the  will  of  the  late 
Gen  I  A|  T|  Joyse  was  admitted  to  probate] 
In  addition  to  the  bequests  mentioned  in  the 
Times  of  Monday]  are  the  following]  to  Sarah 
Miller]  an  old  servant]  a  house  and  lot  in 
Dayton]  Mich]]  to  Henry  Harmon]  a  Cornell 
student]  Class  of  ]06]  a  copy  of  the  Century 
Dictionary] 

3.  Ralph  seemed  in  high  spirits]  ] Don't 
be  cast  down]   boys]]   he  remarked  playfully] 

] Remember  Uncle  Zach's  old  saying]  ]cheer 
up]  the  worst  is  yet  to  come]]  Great  old  chap] 
Uncle  Zach]     How  I'd  like  to  see  him]] 

4.  I  have  read  Chapter  XVIII]  carefully 
and  found  there  an  allusion  to  II  Cor]  ix]  12 
which]  to  me   is  not  entirely  clear] 

5.  ]Boshl  exclaimed  the  old  gentlemani 
bringing  .  down  his  cane  with  emphasis] 
I  When  you  quote  that  silly  old  saying]  ]boys 
will  be  boys]]  you  mean]  simply]  that  boys 
ought  to  be  allowed  to  do  all  sorts  of  wrong 
things]  just  because  they  are  boys]] 


LESSON  45. 
Clearness,  Force  and  Brevity. 


181.  Clearness  is  the  quality  of  a  sentence 
which  makes  it  immediately  and  completely 
understood. 

As  the  first  object  of  all  composition  is  to 
convey  thought,  no  other  element  of  style — 
not  even  correctness — is  more  important.  It 
is  quite  possible  for  a  sentence  to  be  entirely 
correct,  from  a  grammatical  standpoint,  yet  so 
obscure  that  its  meaning  can  only  be  guessed  at. 

182.  Clearness  is  secured  mainly  through 
attention  to  the  following  matters : 

1.  The  use  of  the  words  that  mean  to  the 
reader  what  they  mean  to  the  writer. 

2.  Such  natural  arrangement  of  the  words 
that  the  relations  of  the  diflferent  parts  of  the 
sentence  may  be  easily  perceived. 

3.  Using  pronouns  in  such  a  way  that 
their  antecedents  are  plainly  indicated. 

4.  Avoiding  long  sentences  and  useless 
words. 


5.  Omitting  no  words  that  are  necessary 
to  make  the  meaning  clear. 

6.  Proper  punctuation. 

183.  The  opposite  of  clearness  is  am- 
biguity or  obscurity.  This  fault  may  result 
from  a  neglect  of  any  of  the  elements  of  clear- 
ness. The  person  who  would  write  clearly 
should  keep  in  mind  two  general  conditions : 

First,  that  his  thoughts  are  necessarily 
clearer  to  his  own  mind  than  they  can  be  to 
his  readers,  even  after  he  has  employed  the 
clearest  expression  possible.  Only  the  thinker 
himself  can  know  perfectly  his  own  thought; 
for  language,  however  well  chosen,  is  not 
thought,  but  merely  the  vehicle  of  thought, 
and  like  other  human  devices,  never  quite  per- 
fect. Therefore,  the  fact  that  the  writer  him- 
self understands  what  he  has  written,  is  not 
proof  that  it  may  be  understood  by  another. 


CLEARNESS 


63 


Second,  it  is  not  enough  merely  to  write  in 
such  a  way  that  the  reader  may  understand, 
provided  he  goes  to  enough  trouble.  As  Prof. 
A.  S.  Hill,  in  his  admirable  work,  The  Foun- 
dations of  Rhetoric,  observes  :  "Few  readers 
have  the  time  or  inclination  to  master  un- 
familiar words,  to  supply  omissions  in  lan- 
guage, or  to  unravel  tangled  thoughts.    If  they 


do  not  get  at  the  meaning  of  a  sentence  with- 
out trouble,  the  chances  are  that  they  will  not 
get  at  it  at  all." 

Whoever  would  write  understandingly, 
should  bear  in  mind  Ouintilian's  famous  rule : 
"Care  should  be  taken,  not  that  the  reader 
may  understand,  but  that  he  must  understand, 
whether  he  will  or  not." 


184.  Positions  of  elements  has  much  to  do  with  clearness.  The  student  should  carefully 
study  the  following  examples,  noticing  the  effect  produced  by  a  change  in  tlie  position  of  the 
italicized  expressions : 


FAULTY. 

1.  White  ladies'  shirt-waists  at  cost. 

2.  Found. — A  handsome  black  gentleman's 

overcoat. 

3.  Notice. — The  members  of  the  Riverside 

Archery  Club  will  not  shoot  them- 
selves nor  permit  the  grounds  to  be 
used  by  non-members  oiving  to  the 
recent  death  of  the  President  during 
the  remainder  of  the  week. 

4.  My    partner    would    neither    advertise 

himself  nor  allow  me  to. 


1. 

2. 

3. 


CORRECTED. 

Ladies'  white  shirt-waists  at  cost. 

Found. — A  gentleman's  handsome  black 
overcoat. 

Ozving  to  the  recent  death  of  the  Presi- 
dent, the  grounds  of  the  Riverside 
Archery  Club  will  be  closed  during 
the  remainder  of  the  week. 


4. 


My  partner  would  neither  advertise  our 

business    himself,    nor    allow   me   to 

do  so. 

On  any  day,  you  may  secure  a  seat  that 

has  been  reserved  for  committeemen. 

Sometimes  it  is  difficut  to  find  the  kind 

of  help  we  want. 
//  he  calls,  you  may  tell  him  that  I  shall 

report  him  to  the  firm,  or 
You  may  tell  him  that  if  lie  calls  I  shall 
report  him  to  the  firm. 
185.     The  placing  of  a  modifying  element  in  a  position  where  it  may  be  taken  to  modify 
either  what  goes  before  or  what  comes  after  it,  has  been  called  a  "squinting"  construction,  as 
it  seems  to  "look  both  ways."     Some  of  the  most  annoying  ambiguities  are  caused  by  these 
squinting  constructions.     Note  the  following: 


5. 


7. 


You  may  secure  a  seat  on  any  day  that 
has  been  reserved  for  cnnmittccmen. 

It  is  difficult  to  find  the  kmd  of  help  we 
want  sometimes. 

You  may  tell  him,  if  he  calls,  that  I 
shall  report  him  to  the  firm. 


1.  If  you  cannot  adjust  the  account,  for 

thirty  days,  we  will  give  you  an  ex- 
tension at  six  per  cent. 

2.  Though  the  work  of  many  of  our  em- 

ployees is  unsatisfactory,  ivhen  sum- 
mer comes,  we  allow  them  all  two 
weeks  off. 


3.  There  were  booths  where  divers  cheap 

toys  were  offered  for  sale  by  pretty 
Italian  girls,  that  were  marked  "im- 
ported from  Germany,"  although  the 
paint  on  them  was  hardly  dry. 

4.  He  has  been  aiding  Fred  to  make  sales 

on  our  account  for  three  months. 


3. 


If  you  cannot  adjust  the  account,  we 
will  give  you  an  extension  for  thirty 
days  at  six  per  cent. 

Although  the  work  of  many  of  our  em- 
ployees is  unsatisfactory,  we  allow 
tliem  all  two  weeks  off  ivlicn  summer 
comes  or 

Although,  ivhen  summer  comes,  the 
work  of  many  of  our  employees  is 
unsatisfactory,  we  allow  them  all  two 
weeks  off. 

There  were  booths  kept  by  pretty 
Italian  girls,  where  cheap  toys  were 
offered,  which  were  marked,  etc. 


Oti  our  account,  he  has,  for  three 
months,  been  aiding  Fred  to  make 
sales. 


64 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Exercise  62. 

Write  the  following  sentences,  making  such 
changes  in  the  position  or  structure  of  the  ele- 
ments as  will  make  the  meaning  clearer : 

1.  You  should  consider  our  advertising  as 
one  of  the  important  classes  of  work  to  be 
done,  when  you  make  up  your  list  of  needed 
office  employees. 

2.  I  cannot  attend  to  your  correspondence 
with  a  lot  of  men  cracking  jokes  at  my  elbow. 

3.  Students  should  not  throw  stones  at 
cows  or  other  animals  on  their  way  to  school. 

4.  Your  representative  recently  called  to 
show  us  goods  in  a  state  of  beastly  intoxi- 
cation. 

5.  I  remained  until  he  counted  and  handed 
me  the  money  with  a  surly  look,  and  then  left 
the  office  swearing  like  a  pirate. 

(The  above  is  a  verbatim  extract'  from  a 
traveling  man's  letter  to  his  employers.  They 
were  in  some  doubt  as  to  whether  it  was  the 
customer  or  their  representative  who  had  been 
guilty  of  the  offensive  conduct.) 

6.  We  sell  better  goods  than  any  of  our 
competitors  for  lower  prices. 

7.  We  are  offering  a  prize  to  our  most 
successful  salesman  consisting  of  a  handsome 
leather  suit-case. 

8.  I  cannot  think  of  your  leaving  me  with- 
out distress. 

9.  Wanted,  apartments  near  the  Park,  by 
a  single  gentleman,  supplied  with  steam  heat 
and  modern  plumbing. 

10.  Children  will  not  be  admitted  by  any 
of  the  attendants  unaccompanied  by  adults. 

11.  Dr.  Varden  will  address  the  associa- 
tion on  the  subject  of  bathing  before  break- 
fast at  half-past  eight  this  evening. 

12.  Just  at  dawn,  a  half  dozen  auto- 
mobiles came  tearing  along  the  deserted  street, 
which  were  crowded  with  laughing  people,  the 
.chug-chugging  of  their  motors  making  an  un- 
earthly din. 

13.  The  poem  was  written  by  a  friend  of 
mine  who  died  years  ago  just  for  pastime. 

14.  I  understand  that  the  applicant  is  a 
man  with  one  leg  named  Johnson. 

15.  My  dear  doctor,  you  have  saved  my 
life  after  being  brought  nearly  to  the  point  of 

eath  by  your  unremitting  attention. 


186.  The  qualities  of  force  and  brevity  are 
so  closely  related  that  they  may  be  considered 
together. 

Force  relates  to  the  effect  of  an  expression ; 
brevity  to  its  compactness.  While  a  forcible 
sentence  is  not  necessarily  a  short  sentence,  it 
is  quite  true  that  brevity  usually  contributes  to 
force.  Superfluous  words  add  to  the  weakness, 
as  well  as  to  the  length,  of  the  sentence,  just 
as  adding  water,  to  win"e  increases  the  volume 
and  diminishes  the  strength 

187.  The  choice  of  words  is  as  important 
in  securing  force  as  it  is  in  attaining  clearness. 
To  be  forceful,  one  should  select  words  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  following  principles: 

1.  Short  words  are  usually  more  forcible 
than  long  ones ;  thus,  stingy  is  a  stronger  word 
than  penurious;  angry,  than  offended;  touchy 
than  irritable;  mean,  than  pusillanimous;  petty, 
thaii  insignificant;  funny,  than  humorous;  at 
hand,  than  available;  paying,  than  remuner- 
ative, etc. 

It  is  the  weak  or  inexperienced  writer  who 
uses  long  or  unusual  words  in  the  hope  of  be- 
ing impressive. 

2.  Concrete  and  specific  terms  are  more 
forceful  than  abstract  or  general  terms. 
"The  pen  is  mightier  than  the  sword,"  is  much 
more  forceful  than,  "Literature  is  more  potent 
in  its  influence  than  war."  Many  of  the  say- 
ings and  proverbs  of  the  people  owe  their  pop- 
ularity to  the  forcefulness  that  comes  from  the 
use  of  special  rather  than  general  terms.  Thus, 
"Take  care  of  the  pennies  and  the  dollars  will 
take  care  of  themselves,"  would  never  have 
gained  currency  had  it  been  expressed  in  some 
such  language  as,  "If  we  are  careful  to  save 
small  sums  the  larger  amounts  will  not  require 
our  attention." 

3.  Words  that  carry  a  picture,  or  flash 
their  meaning  upon  the  mind,  are  more  force- 
ful than  those  that  convey  their  meaning  more 
slowly. 

Note  the  italicized  expressions  in  the  fol- 
lowing examples : 

You  could  read  "miser"  in  every  zvrinkle 
of  his  dry  leathery  hrozv,  and  see  the  glint  of 
silver  in  every  gleam  of  his  little  ratlike  eyes. 


CLEARNESS 


Vi 


Like  a  flash,  Ralph  sprang  to  the  hehn, 
while  George  plunged  head  first  over  the  rail 
into  the  sea. 

Our  competitors  are  szvarming  into  that 
territory  like  locusts;  we  must  be  with  them  at 
once,  and  scramble  for  our  share  of  the  busi- 
ness. 

"Give  every  man  a  square  deal;  no  more,  no 
less." — Theodore  Roosevelt. 


OUR  "FOUR  IN  HAND. 


"Lower  Prices, 
Higher  Qualities 


Smiling  Customers, 
Larger  Sales." 


It  is  the  man  who  hustles  that  makes  the 
best  member  of  society,  and  the  surest  pro- 
moter of  the  public  weal.  You  can  hustle  if 
you  can  do  things,  for  you  can  then  find  a 
place  to  hustle  in. 


188.  The  omission  of  needless  words  is  an  important  means  of  adding  to  the  forceful- 
ness  of  a  sentence.  "Boil  it  down,"  is  a  standard  and  ever  valuable  rule.  The  young  writer  will 
find  it  an  excellent  practice  to  go  over  the  first  drafts  of  his  letters  or  other  composition,  cross 
out  all  needless  words  and  then  rewrite.  This  is  a  method  often  employed  even  by  ex- 
perienced writers. 

The  use  as  modifiers,  of  words  or  phrases,  rather  than  clauses,  yields  a  gain  in  force  as  well 
as  brevity. 


Note  the  following  contracted  expressions : 

i.     Goods  which  are  manufactured  in  Eng- 
land. 

2.  People  who  are  disposed  to  be  indolent. 

3.  Laws  that  relate  to  what  we  shall  eat 
or  what  we  shall  drink. 

4.  We   write   for   the   purpose   of   asking 
what  you  desire*  should  be  done  in  the  matter. 


2. 
3" 


English  goods. 

Lazy  people. 
Sumptuary  laws. 


4.     We  write  to  ask  as  to  your  wishes  in 
the  matter. 


189.  Arrangement  of  elements.     A  sentence  is  often  made  more  forcible  by  placing  the 
most  important  element  last. 

Study  the  following  examples : 

WEAK  ARRANGEMENT. 

1.  We  have  decided  to  accept  your  ofifer  of 
the  10th,  as  we  can  make  the  shipment  on  the 
date  specified,  and  as  we  are  especially  desir- 
ous of  introducing  our  goods  in  your  city. 


2.  I  saw  an  uncut  diamond  worth  ten 
thousand  dollars  while  I  was  on  a  visit  to  my 
brother  recently  who  lives  in  St.  Louis. 

3.  He  failed  completely  although  we 
amply  supplied  him  with  funds  and  allowed 
him  a  free  hand  in  the  matter  of  advertising, 
etc. 


STRONG  ARRANGEMENT. 

1.  As  we  are  especially  desirous  of  having 
our  goods  introduced  in  your  city,  and  as  we 
can  make  the  shipment  on  the  date  specified, 
we  have  decided  to  accept  your  offer  of  the 
10th. 

2.  During  a  recent  visit  to  my  brother  in 
St.  Louis,  I  saw  an  uncut  diamond,  valued  at 
ten  thousand  dollars. 

3.  Although  we  supplied  him  amply  with 
funds,  and  allowed  him  a  free  hand  in  the 
matter  of  advertising,  etc.,  he  failed  com- 
pletely. 


Exercise  63. 

Study  the  following  contrasted  examples  and  note  the  means  that  are  employed  to  change 


a  weak  and  rambling  sentence  into  a  concise  and  forcible  one : 


LACKING  IN  FORCE  AND  BREVITY. 

The  young  man  seems  to  show  an  inclina- 
tion toward  indolence  and  the  neglect  of  his 
duties. 

The  question  as  to  whether  or  not  we  will 
accept  your  proposition  will  be  entered  upon 
at  the  meeting  of  our  directors,  which  will 
occur  on  Monday  next. 


CORRECTED. 

The  young  man  is  inclined  to  be  lazy  and 
neglectful. 

Our  directors  are  to  meet  next  Monday  and 
will  then  consider  your  proposition. 


66 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Finally  we  discovered  that  the  line  was  be- 
ing interfered  with  by  a  limb  that  extended 
out  from  the  trunlc  of  a  big  oak  tree. 

All  at  once,  we  observed  a  man  of  diminu- 
tive stature  walking  with  great  rapidity  to- 
ward the  place  where  we  were  standing. 

We  especially  desire  to  call  your  attention 
to  the  fact,  etc. 

VVe  have  received  your  esteemed  favor  of 
the  22nd  inst.,  and  in  reply  to  the  same  we  re- 
gret to  be  obliged  to  inform  you,  etc. 

My  father  has  made  arrangements  so  that 
I  can  enter  at  your  school,  as  he  desires  me  to 
acquire  a  good  business  education. 


We  finally  saw  that  the  line-interference 
was  caused  by  the  projecting  limb  of  a  large 
oak. 

Suddenly  we  espied  a  little  man  hurrying 
towards  us. 

We  wish  you  to  notice,  etc. 

Answering  your  letter  of  June  22,  we  re- 
gret to  say,  etc. 

Wishing  me  to  receive  a  good  business 
education,  my  father  has  decided  to  send  me 
to  your  school. 


Exercise  64. 

Recast  the  following  sentences,  improving  the  construction  as  much  as  you  can : 


1.  It  having  been  decided  to  call  a  physi- 
cian, when  he  arrived  he  said  that  the  disease 
that  the  man  had  was  smallpox,  and  this  of 
course  naturally  produced  a  great  deal  of 
excitement  among  the  people  in  our  boarding- 
house. 

2.  He  put  on  his  overcoat  and  gloves  and 
then  he  ordered  his  carriage  and  then  drove  to 
the  White  House,  introducing  me  to  the 
President. 

3.  We  contemplated  attending  the  World's 
Fair  before  we  had  fully  considered  the 
necessarily  great  cost  attending  the  carrying 
out  of  our  undertaking,  but  finally  reached 
the  conclusion  that  it  would  not  be  prudent  for 
us  to  do  so,  and  so  abandoned  our  intention. 

4.  He  has  decided  to  devote  a  portion  of 
his  accumulated  wealth  to  the  establishment  of 
an  institution  for  giving  instruction  in  the 
trades  and  useful  arts  to  those  unfortunate 
boys  and  girls  who  have  neither  father  nor 
mother.  (The  use  of  the  words  fortunate,  in- 
dustrial school,  and  orphans,  will  greatly  re- 
duce this  over-padded  sentense.) 

5.  They  read  their  doom  in  the  setting  sun 
as  they  ascend  the  distant  mountain  slowly. 

6.  He  is  an  industrious,  diligent,  hard- 
working, careful,  painstaking  young  man, 
who  is  a  general  and  universal  favorite  with 
everybody  whom  he  comes  in  contact  with. 


7.  All  at  once  I  was  confronted  with  a  big 
black  bear  as  I  went  whistling  along  the 
mountain  trail  after  having  eaten  my  lunch- 
eon. 

8.  The  things  that  are  most  easy  for  all  of 
us  to  do  are  the  things  that  we  have  practiced 
doing  for  a  long  time.  . 

9.  She  fully  concluded  to  take  a  situation 
as  a  sales  woman,  something  she  had  never 
thought  she  could  bring  herself  to  do;  but 
circumstances  compelled  her,  as  her  money 
was  about  gone,  but  she  did  quite  well,  and 
was  fairly  contented  with  her  new  employ- 
ment. ( It  is  a  serious  fault  to  crowd  too  many 
things  into  one  sentence.) 

10.  The  book  "Ben  Hur"  of  which  you 
spoke  so  highly  and  which  I  have  been  trying 
to  buy  ever  since,  I  finally  found  and  I  have 
read  it  quite  hurriedly  which  was  not  accord- 
ing to  the  advice  which  you  gave  me,  although 
I  am  sure  it  is  a  book  which  should  be  care- 
fully read  and  which  I  intend  to  read  again. 

(The  stringing  of  long  clauses  together  in 
this  manner  has  a  most  weakening  effect ;  it 
has  been  called  "Whichcraft."  It  is  remedied 
by  the  use  of  the  short  sentence,  and  by  using 
phrases  and  one-word  modifiers  instead  of 
clauses,  as,  "contrary  to  your  advice,"  Instead 
of  "which  was  not  according  to  the  advice 
which  you  gave  me.") 


Part  11. 

LESSON  1. 
The  Letter  and  Its  Parts. 

190.  Of  all  forms  of  written  speech,  the  letter  offers  the  most  natural  and  general  means 
of  expression.  Nearly  everybody  writes  letters  of  some  kind,  and  thousands  of  people  prac- 
tice no  other  form  of  original  composition. 

The  foundation  idea  of  a  good  letter  is  that  it  should  contain  what  the  writer  would  say 
if  he  were  face  to  face  with  the  one  written  to.  Sometimes  we  hear  a  person  say :  "My  friend 
writes  charming  letters;  they  are  so  natural;  when  I  read  them,  it  seems  that  he  is  talking  to 
me."  This  is  the  highest  praise  to  be  given  to  any  letter,  and  it  applies  to  business  letters,  as 
well  as  to  letters  of  friendship  or  affection.  The  ideal  business  letter  is  the  one  that  has  the  life- 
like force  and  directness  of  a  business  talk.  The  person  who  would  become  an  adept  in  writing 
forceful  business  letters,  must  keep  this  basal  idea  ever  in  mind.  It  will  be  discussed  further 
under  the  heading,  "The  Body  of  the  Letter." 

191.  Importance  of  good  form.  A  word  should  be  said  on  the  importance  of  having  a 
business  letter  correct  in  all  essentials  as  to  form,  punctuation,  etc.  Some  young  people  are  in- 
clined to  underestimate  this,  and  to  get  the  idea  that  it  does  not  matter  much  whether  or  not  a 
letter  is  in  correct  form.  But  no  one  can  be  careless  in  these  particulars,  without  running  the 
risk  of  being  misjudged  as  to  his  knowledge  of  more  important  things.  Besides,  it  takes  no 
longer  to  write  a  letter  in  correct  than  in  incorrect  form,  when  the  matter  of  correctness  once 
becomes  a  habit.  The  attainment  of  this  habit,  is  a  mark  of  accuracy  and  orderliness  that  has  a 
cash  value  in  the  eyes  of  every  careful  business  employer. 

NOTE. — The  forms  recommended  and  illustrated  in  this  text  are  based  on  prevailing  usage,  so  far  as  the 
author  has  been  able  to  ascertain  it,  but  it  should  be  remarked  that  departures  from  this  usage  are  becoming  more 
and  more  common  in  business  offices.  This  is  particularly  the  case  as  to  margins,  and  indentations,  in  headings, 
superscriptions,  etc.  The  author  has  not  thought  it  desirable  to  run  the  risk  of  confusing  the  learner  by  present- 
ing illustrations  of  these  various  departures  from  conventional  forms,  since  they  have  not,  as  yet,  the  authority  of 
general  usage. 

192.  The  parts  of  a  letter  may  conveniently  be  treated  under  two  general  divisions,  viz. : 

1.  Form,  including  everything  that  has  reference  to  the  proper  beginning  and  closing  of 
a  letter,  and  the  orderly  arrangement  of  its  parts. 

2.  Subject-matter,  orallthatrelates  to  the  style  and  contents  of  the  "Body  of  the  Let- 
ter," or  message  itself. 

193.  Form  of  the  letter.  With  regard  to  form,  letters  may  be  divided  into  two  general 
groups,  Business  Letters  and  Social  Letters.    The  former  will  be  considered  first. 

194.  Paper.  The  paper  commonly  used  for  business  lettei  s,  consists  of  separate  sheets 
of  "standard  size ;"  that  is,  sheets  eleven  inches  long  and  eight  and  one-half  inches  wide. 
Special  sizes  are  often  used,  particularly  in  the  case  of  hotel  stationery.  The  paper  may  be  either 
plain  white  or  tinted. 

Most  firms  use  so-called  "letter-heads,"  or  sheets  of  standard-size  paper,  with  a  business 
announcement,  name  and  members  of  firm,  or  officers  of  company,  with  place  of  business,  etc., 
printed  at  the  top  of  the  sheet,  as  in  the  form  at  the  top  of  page  68. 


68  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Texts  and  Equipment 

for  Modern  Business 

Training 


195.  Style  of  penmanship.  The  writing  in  a  pen-written  business  letter,  should  be,  first 
of  all,  legible,  and  entirely  free  from  ornamental  flourishing,  shading,  etc.  "Fancy  writing"  of 
any  kind  is  strictly  out  of  place  in  a  business  letter,  as  it  is,  indeed,  everywhere  else  where  busi- 
ness writing  is  required.  Business  men  care  very  little  about  the  style  of  an  employee's  writing, 
if  it  is  reasonably  neat  and  can  be  read. 

196.  Parts  of  a  business  letter.  For  convenience  of  study,  the  parts  of  a  business  letter 
are  here  considered  under  the  following  classification: 


{i 


SCHEME  OF  A  BUSINESS  LETTER. 

Place. 
Date. 
I  Heading. 

1.  Opening.  \  Address. 

(  Salutation. 

2.  Body  of  Letter. 

j  1.     Words  of  Courtesy. 

3.  Closmg.  I  2.     Signature. 

These  several  parts  are  shown  on  the  model  letters  given  on  the  next  two  pages.  Study  the 
foregoing  scheme  until  you  can  write  it  without  referring  to  the  book. 

197.  The  heading.  This  includes  the  business  or  postal  address  of  the  writer,  and  the 
date.  It  is  usually  written  at  the  right  of  the  page  on  the  first  ruled  line.  In  the  case  of  unruled 
paper,  it  should  he  written  not  nearer  than  one  inch  from  the  upper  margin  of  the  paper,  but 
may  be  written  lower,  if  the  letter  does  not  occcupy  a  full  page. 

This  rule,  of  course,  does  not  apply  to  printed  letter-heads. 

The  purpose  of  the  heading  is  to  make  known  the  place  and  time  at  which  the  letter  is 
written.  If  an  answer  to  the  letter  is  expected,  the  heading  should  give  definitely  the  writer's 
postal  address.  The  street,  or  building,  and  room-number  should  be  given,  if  in  a  city,  and  the 
post  office,  county,  and  state,  if  the  letter  is  sent  from  a  country  address. 

In  the  case  of  large  cities,  as  New  York,  Chicago,  St.  Louis,  Philadelphia,  etc.,  the  name  of 
the  state  is  often  omitted.  The  name  of  the  county  is  unnecessary  in  the  case  of  a  small  city  or 
good-sized  town. 

The  state  may  be  omitted  only  in  the  case  of  the  largest  cities,  say,  those  of  a  quarter  of  a 
million  inhabitants  or  more,  also  in  the  case  of  letters  for  local  delivery. 

The  year  should  never  be  omitted  in  the  date,  especially  in  business  letters. 

If  the  heading  is  long,  it  may  occupy  more  than  one  line.  In  letter-head  paper  intended 
for  typewritten  letters,  the  printed  date-line  and  year-figures  are  preferably  omitted,  as  they 
only  delay  the  typist  in  writing  the  heading. 

198.  The  address.  This  includes  the  name  of  the  person  or  firm  to  whom  the  letter  is 
sent,  and  the  postal  address.  The  address  should  be  definite  enough  to  enable  the  postal  authori- 
ties to  deliver  the  letter,  should  the  envelope  be  destroyed  or  its  superscription  become  illegible 
during  transmission,  as  sometimes  happens. 

Care  should  ht  taken  to  have  the  name  agree,  in  form,  with  the  signature  of  the  person  to 
whom  the  letter  is  -^vritten.     Thus,  if  a  person  signs  his  name  "J'^mes  A.  Hill,"  do  not  address 

[continued   on    PAGE   71.] 


MODEL  LETTER 


cn 


c 
c 
ft 

O 


Racine,   Wis.,   June  16,    19 


Heading, 


A.  W.    Bell  &  CO. , 
Chicago.    111. 


Address. 


Gentlemen: 


Salutation. 


o 
(a 


Answering  your  letter  of  June  14,  we  have  to  report 
that  the  eggs  and  poultry  will  be  shipped  this  evening  by 
the  Str.  "Bettie  Morgan". 

We  have  found  some  difficulty  in  filling  your  order 
for  prime  strawberries,  as  the  crop  in  this  section  has  been 
damaged  by  the  recent  heavy  rains.  We  have  managed  to  get 
some  twenty  crates,  however,  which  we  will  express  by  first 
train  tomorrow. 

Hoping  the  goods  sent  will  prove  satisfactory,  and 
soliciting  your  further  orders,  we  are 


I  Very  truly  yours.  | 

Words  of  courtesy. 


Model  Typewritten  Letter. 


70  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


//u^--y-7't-<.^;^L^--<^^  ^,  /f^^. 


//v:^^?'^-<i:22S-<?'t^2^^^7^.X^ 


<?Z>2^Z^^i!'Z,tS^^-2?t-<2'Z--£-,£^i::2-<^^ 


..'Co'-ey. 


^^t^i..£^  y'z^'e,-?'-'i^...Je-<--^^ 


^'C'O'ty^ 


^'4=?^^>^*-i-<£«s^.<^t-ci^^^^^-^?-^-^^'-^'Z-^ 


Model  Pen- Written  Letter. 


LETTER  AND  ITS  PARTS  71 


him  as  "James  Hill,"  or  "J.  A.  Hill,"  etc.  It  is  but  a  common  courtesy  to  allow  a  person  to  de- 
cide as  to  the  form  in  which  his  own  name  is  written.  Great  care  should  be  taken,  also,  to  spell 
the  names  of  persons  properly.  People  are  sometimes  very  particular  as  to  the  spelling  of  their 
names,  and  are  offended  if  they  are  misspelled.  The  author  once  knew  a  person  named 
"Johnston"  who  was  always  greatly  irritated  when  his  name  was  written  "Johnson."  He  would 
even  refuse  to  answer  a  letter  thus  addressed.  We  may  think  this  sensitiveness  absurd,  but  it 
exists,  and  it  is  good  manners,  as  well  as  good  business  policy,  not  to  ignore  it. 

When  the  letter  is  addressed  to  an  individual,  the  title  Mr.,  Mrs.,  or  Miss  is  used.  In  the 
case  of  a  professional  person,  the  title.  Prof.,  Dr.,  Rev.,  etc.,  may  be  used,  or  the  equivalent 
degree-letters,  M.  D.,  A.  M.,  D.  D.,  etc.,  may  folow  the  name. 

CAUTION. — As  a  rule,  both  title  and  degree-letters  are  not  used  in  the  same  address,  but  an  exception  to 
this  rule  is  sometimes  made  in  the  case  of  clergymen  and  college  professors;  as,  "Rev.  S.  T.  Jones,  D.  D.," 
"Prof.  Charles  Wilson,  A.  M." 

The  title  Esq.  was  formerly  used  after  the  name  of  a  gentleman,  but  this  title  is  now  seldom 
used,  except  in  letters  to  lawyers. 

Messrs.  (from  the  French  plural  Messieurs — "Gentlemen")  was  formerly  used  in  address- 
ing a  firm  or  company,  but  is  now  rarely  seen. 

NOTE. — A  further  discussion  of  this  matter  will  be  found  under  "Titles  and  Salutations." 

The  name  in  the  address  should  begin  on  the  margin-line  at  the  left,  and  the  postal  or  busi- 
ness address  should  be  written  on  the  next  line,  and  should  begin  an  appropriate  distance  to  the 
right  of  the  margin-line.  For  position  and  punctuation  of  heading  and  address,  see  the  model 
forms,  page  69  and  70. 

199.  The  salutation.  This  is  the  term  of  respect,  friendship,  or  affection  with  which  a 
letter  is  introduced.  It  is  usually  written  on  the  next  line  below  the  address  and  should  begin 
at  the  margin.  (See  model  letters,  pages  69  and  70.)  The  salutation  varies  with  the  nature  of 
the  letter  and  the  relations  of  the  writer  and  receiver  of  the  letter.  Where  the  parties  are 
strangers  or  mere  business  acquaintances,  the  most  common  salutations  are  "Dear  Sir,"  or 
"Madam,"  for  individuals,  and  "Gentlemen,"  "Dear  Sirs,"  or  "Dear  Madams,"  for  a  firm  or 
company.  "My  dear  Sir,"  or  "My  dear  Madam,"  is  more  cordial,  and  "Dear  Mr.  Jones,"  or 
"Dear  Mrs.  Brown,"  is  more  familiar  still.  "Sir"  and  "Madam"  alone  are  distant  and  for- 
mal salutations,  used  only  in  official  letters,  or  where  the  relations  between  the  persons  are 
unfriendly. 

The  kind  of  salutation  to  be  used  is  largely  a  matter  of  taste.  It  is  presumptuous,  if  not 
impertinent,  to  use  a  familiar  salutation,  as,  "My  dear  Smith,"  or  "My  dear  Mrs.  Brown,"  in 
writing  to  a  person  with  whom  one  has  but  a  sliglit  acquaintance.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  over- 
formal,  if  not  discourteous,  to  use  "Sir,"  or  "Madam,"  in  writing  an  ordinary  business  letter, 
or  "Dear  Sir,"  or  "Dear  Madam,"  when  writing  even  a  business  letter  to  a  friend  or  familiar 
acquaintance. 

NOTE.— In  the  case  of  a  formal  letter  to  an  unmarried  woman,  the  salutation  may  be  "Dear  Madam,"  or 
it  may  be  omitted.     Strictly   speaking,  the   title,   "Madam,"  is  appropriate  only  to  married  or  elderly  women. 

If  one  uses  a  very  familiar  salutation,  like  "My  dear  Brown,"  "Dear  Mr.  Jones,"  "Friend 
Palmer,"  etc.,  the  address  should  not  precede  the  salutation,  but  should  appear  on  the  left  side 
of  the  sheet  at  the  close  of  the  letter.     See  model  letter  to  David  Weston,  page  104. 

Punctuation.  Custom  allows  some  variation  as  to  the  punctuation-mark  following  the  sal- 
utation. It  is  usually  a  colon,  but  the  colon  and  dash,  and  sometimes  the  comma  and  dash,  are 
used.  Van  Sant's  Typewriting  Instructor,  a  well-known  authority,  recommends  the  colon  alone, 
and  usage,  at  the  present  time,  seems  to  favor  this  punctuation  of  the  salutation. 

Capitalizing.  Nouns  used  as  the  principal  words  in  a  salutation  are  capitalized,  but  other 
words  are  not,  unless  they  begin  the  salutation. 

Examples:  My  dear  Sir;  Dear  Friend  Frank;  My  dear  Mother;  My  very  dear  Friend; 
Dear  old  Chum ;  My  darling  Sister ;  My  dear  Friend  and  Teacher. 

Model  Openings. 

200.  The  following  models  illustrate  various  forms  of  headings,  addresses,  and  saluta- 
tions.    Study  them  carefully  before  preparing  the  work  required  in  Exercise  1. 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


No.  1.    Ordinary  Form. 

Vincent,  Iowa,  April  6,  19 
Mr.  H.  M.  Stone, 

Fulton,  111. 
Dear  Sir: 

In  answer  to  your  letter,  etc. 

No.  2.    Two-Line  Heading. 

Room  519,  Equity  Bldg., 
Chicago,  May  7,  '05. 
C.  F.  Roberts  &  Co . , 

817  Locust  St.,  St.  Louis. 
Gentlemen: 

Answering  your  inquiry,  etc. 


No.  3.  To  an  Unmarried  Woman. 

Racine,  Wis.,  Aug.  17,  19 
Miss  Clarice  Marshall, 

110  Fern  Ave.  Redlands,  Calif. 

If  the  salutation  is  omitted,  the  first  paragraph  of  the  letter  should  be  indented  uniformly  as  in  a  three  line 
address,  and  extra  space  allowed  between  the  address  and  the  first  line  of  the  letter. 

No.  5.  To  Two  Women. 

147  Van  Buren  St . , 

Chicago,  Sept.  9,  19 

Mcsdair.es  La  Voux  &  Marc, 

69  Cortland  Place,  New  York, 
Dear  Madams : 

Answering  your  letter,  etc. 

No.  6.    Familiar  Address. 

2142  Park  Row  Bldg., 

New  York,  June  10,  '05. 

My  dear  Longley: 

Your  very  welcome  letter  of  May  20  is  at  hand. 


FORM  OF  THE  LETTER  73 


No.  7.    To  Member  of  Religious  Community. 

320   Second  Ave. , 

Clinton,  la.   Jan.  9,  19 
Sister  M.  Geraldine, 

Convent  of  St.  Francis, 
Rock  Island,  111. 
Dear  Sister: 

In  answer  to  your  valued  letter,  etc. 


No.  8.    OflBcial  Letter. 

Room   69,    Govt.    Bldg., 

Omaha,  Nebr- .  May  29,  '05, 
Hon.  Geo.  B.  Cortelyou, 

Post  Office  Department, 
Washington,  D.  C. 
Sir: 

I  have  the  honor  to  report,  etc. 

Exercise  1. 

(a)  Write  the  following  openings,  observing  proper  form,  position,  and  punctuation.  Use 
standard-size  letter  paper,  and  either  pen  and  ink  or  typewriter,  as  your  teacher  may  direct: 

1.  Glenellyn  Dupage  Co  111    Mar  19  1913     Mr  R  M  Seymour  215  Ry  Ex  Bldg    Chi- 
cago   Dear  Sir    Answering  your  letter  of  March  18  etc. 

2.  529   Oakwood    Blvd   Chicago   Jan.    17  '13    Mrs.  Esther  Ames   257   Concord    Place 
Boston  Dear  Madam     We  have  your  letter  of  June  14  etc. 

3.  Mayor's  Office  Cincinnati  Ohio  USA  Nov  25  1913     Hon  Samuel  Chatterton  M  P 
41  Cheapside  London  Eng    Dear  Sir     Answering  your  letter  etc. 

NOTE. — In  the  headings  of  letters,  addressed  to  persons  in  foreign  countries,  the  name  of  the  state   (un- 
abbreviated) should  be  given,  and  the  letters,  U.  S.  A.  (United  States  of  America),  should  be  used. 

4.  Gray  Gables  Maywood  Rockingham  Co  Va  Aug  29  '13    Dear  Mr  Marble    We  are  all 
delighted  to  know  etc. 

5.  124  Main  St  Room  26  Quincy  111  Feb  21  1913     Miss  Helen  Seymour  459  Washing- 
ton St  St  Louis    Your  letter  of  Feb  20  relating  to  etc. 

(b)  Write  five  original  openings,  showing  variations  in  headings,  address  and  styles  of 
salutation,  and  including  first  few  words  of  the  letter  as  in  the  model  openings. 


LESSON  2. 
Form  of  the  Letter. — (Continued.) 

201.  Body  of  the  letter.  This  usually  begins  on  the  line  below  and  a  little  to  the  right  of 
the  salutation,  but  many  prefer  to  begin  on  the  same  line  with  the  salutation.  The  rules  relat- 
ing to  margin  and  paragraphing  should  be  carefully  observed.  (See  "Margin,"  Lesson  1, 
Part  I.) 

NOTE. — The  subject  matter  of  the  letter  will  be  discussed  in  a  subsequent  lesson. 


74 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


202.  The  closing.  The  body  of  the  letter  usually  ends  in  a  paragraph  consisting  of  some 
such  expression  as,  "Hoping  to  be  favored  with  your  further  orders,  we  remain,"  or  "Request- 
ing the  favor  of  an  early  answer,  I  am,  with  great  respect,"  but  these  are  optional,  and  their  use 
is  a  matter  of  taste.    The  closing,  proper,  consists  of  the  words  of  COUrtesy  and  the  signature. 

203.  Words  of  courtesy.  Like  the  salu  tation,  the  words  of  courtesy  may  be  either  for- 
mal, respectful,  familiar,  or  friendly,  depending  on  the  relations  between  the  writer  and  the 
person  written  to.     The  following  are  permissible   forms : 

FORMAL   AND   RESPECTFUL  MERELY    COURTEOUS 

Yours  truly. 
Very  truly. 
Yours  very  truly, 
Very  truly  yours, 


Respectfully, 
Respectfully  yours. 
Yours  very  respectfully. 
Very  respectfully  yours, 
With  great  respect. 
With  highest  regard. 


FAMILIAR   OR   FRIENDLY 

Yours, 

Your  friend. 

With  regard. 

With  warm  regard,  etc. 

Fraternally, 

Cordially, 

Sincerely, 

Gratefully, 

Faithfully, 

(Yours  may  precede  or 
follow  any  of  the  above 
except  the  first  two.  The 
word  very  may  also  be 
used  with  any  of  the 
last  four.) 

Those  in  the  "Formal  and  Respectful"  group  are  most  often  used  in  letters  addressed  to 
persons  in  official  stations,  to  members  of  the  clergy,  or  lo  persons  in  religious  orders,  etc.  Of- 
ficial letters  are  often  concluded  with  the  phrase,  "Your  obedient  servant.  Letters  to  an  editor 
may  close  with,  "I  am.  Sir."    This  form  is  used  by  Harper's  Weekly. 

Words  of  courtesy  should  never  be  abbreviated;  as,  "Resp'y,"  "Yrs,"  and  the  like. 

NOTE. — A  late  authority  on  business  correspondence,  advocates  the  disuse  of  both  salutation  and  words  of 
courtesy  in  business  letters.     This  practice  is  being  followed  in  some  offices. 

Capitalizing.    In  the  closing  words  of  courtesy,  only  the  first  word  is  capitalized. 

Examples:  Your  affectionate  daughter ;  Your  loving  friend ;  Very  truly  yours ;  Cordially 
and  fraternally  yours;  As  ever,  your  friend.  Titles,  as.  Sir,  Sirs,  Madam,  etc.,  are  always 
capitalized. 

204.  The  signature.  This  is  the  name  0  f  the  person,  firm,  or  company  who  is  respon- 
sible for  the  letter.  If  the  letter  is  written  by  an  employee  of  a  company  or  firm,  the  writer's 
name  or  initials  (pen-written)  should  accompany  the  signature.  (See  Model  Closing  5  and  6, 
page  75.) 

As  a  rule,  a  business  letter  should  have  a  pen-written  signature,  but  if  the  signature  is 
typewritten  or  stamped,  it  may  be  verified  by  the  pen-written  name  or  initials  of  the  person 
by  whom  the  letter  was  written  or  dictated.  In  most  offices,  it  is  the  rule  that  letters  must  be 
marked  with  the  initials  of  the  stenographer  who  transcribes  them. 

The  signer  of  a  letter  should  take  particular  care  to  have  his  signature  easily  legible.  In 
business  offices  that  have  much  miscellaneous  correspondence,  annoying  errors  are  constantly 
arising  because  there  are  so  many  people  who  do  not  write  their  names  so  they  can  be  read. 

It  is  also  desirable  that  the  signature  of  a  business  man  be  characteristic;  that  is,  always 
written  as  nearly  as  possible  in  the  same  way.  Banks  require  persons  doing  business  with 
them  to  file  their  signatures  for  reference  in  a  "Signature  Book"  or  on  a  "Signature  Card,"  and 
the  cashier  may  not  honor  the  checks  or  indorsements  of  a  person  whose  signature  does  not 
correspond  with  the  one  on  file. 

The  signature  of  a  woinan  should  indicate  her  sex,  and  whether  she  is  married  or  single, 
as  "(Miss)  Mabel  T.  Dwight,"  or  "Mrs.  Charles  L.  Day."  This  is  particularly  important  if 
the  letter  is  written  to  a  stranger.  A  married  woman,  unless  she  is  conducting  a  business  on  her 
own  account,  should  use  her  husband's  name  in  her  sigature  when  writing  to  strangers.  A 
widow  should  use  her  own  given  name  or  initials. 


FORM  OF  THE  LETTER  78 


Model  Closings. 

205.  The  following  models  illustrate  the  form,  position,  etc.,  required  in  different  styles 
of  closings.  After  studying  these,  prepare  the  closings  required  in  Exercise  2.  Note  that  the 
signature  ends  at  the  extreme  right  of  the  sheet. 

NO.  I. 

'      Hoping  to  hear  from  you  soon,  we  are 

Very  truly  yours . 

Blake  &  Macdonald 

No.  2. 

Awaiting  your  further  pleasure,  I  remain 

"Very  respectfully, 

Henry  A.  Malcolm. 

No.  3. 

Kindly  remember  me  to  all  "the  force". 

Cordially  yours, 

Tom  L.  Anderson. 

No.  4. 

I  have  the  honor.  Sir,  to  remain 

Your  obedient  servant, 

Walter  S.  Davis, 

Inspector. 

No.  5. 

Wishing  you  complete  success  in  your  most  worthy  under- 
takings, we  are.  Madam, 

With  great  respect. 

The  Harkness-Wells  Company. 

No.  6. 

Soliciting  your  further  orders,  we  remain 

Yours  very  truly. 

The  Ames  Pump  Company. 

per  J^t^^^^^^-c.^-^-,,^ 

Secretary. 

No.  r. 

Hoping  that  we  may  have  the  pleasure  of  another  visit 
from  you  soon,  I  remain,  as  ever, 

Your  sincere  friend, 

Helen  M.  Jackson. 

'^r.  C.  B.  Spencer, 
Melrose,  Mass. 

NOTE. — In  social  letters,  the  address  of  the  person  written  to  is  placed  at  the  close  of  the  letter  in  the  posi 
tion  here  indicated. 

No.  8. 

Kindly  address  further  communications  relating  to  -his 
Jiatter  to  our  lawyers,  Davis  &  Martin,  216  Eauity  Bldg. 

Respectfully, 

Stark  &  McGuire. 


76  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Exercise  2. 

Write  the  following  closings,  giving  careful  attention  to  position,  punctuation,  etc. : 

1.  Wishing  you  a  profitable  trip  we  are  Cordially  yours  Edwin  A  Moore  &  Co  per 
CSM 

2.  Be  sure  to  write  us  when  you  reach  Boston.  Yours  very  truly  The  Herman  A  Price 
Company  per  Arthur  Way  President. 

3.  Wishing  you  every  success  I  remain  Cordially  and  sincerely  yours  Chester  L  Brooks. 

4.  Looking  forward  with  much  pleasure  to  your  promised  visit  we  are  as  ever  Your 
grateful  friends  Charles  and  Edith  Armstrong  Col  A  T  Daniels  2427  Prospect  Ave  Chicago 
(See  Model  No.  7). 

5.  I  remain  Sir  with  great  respect  Your  obedient  servant  E  L  Rose  Governor  To  Hon 
Eugene  N  Dow  Secretary  of  State  Columbus  Ohio. 

NOTE. — In  official  letters,  the  address  is  often  wri'.ten  at  the  close  of  the  letter. 

6.  Kindly  answer  at  your  earliest  convenience  Cordially  and  fraternally  yours  Geo  S 
Meredith  Chancellor  Commander  North  Star  Lodge  No.  34. 

7.  Trusting  that  you  will  adjust  this  matter  without  further  delay  we  are  Very  respect- 
fully The  Ames-Rathbone  Company  per  W  T  Winans  Secy. 

8.  Hoping  our  explanation  may  be  entirely  satisfactory  we  are  Madam  with  greatest  re- 
spect Benj  P  Andrews  &  Co  per  J  N  Wilson  Treasurer. 


LESSON  3. 

Envelopes  and  the  Superscription. 

206.  The  envelope.  (Pronounced  en- velope  or  a/rw-velope.)  This  name  is  applied  to  the 
protecting  cover  in  which  a  letter  is  enclosed  for  transmission  through  the  mails.  Envelopes 
vary  greatly  in  size,  shape,  material  and  color,  depending  on  the  nature  of  the  enclosure.  They 
range  from  the  dainty,  tinted  envelopes  required  by  etiquette  for  social  correspondence,  invita- 
tions, etc.,  to  those  of  heavy  IManilla  paper,  used  for  official  documents,  etc.  For  business  cor- 
respondence, two  general  styles  are  used,  business  and  oMcial. 

Business  envelopes.  Of  these,  two  sizes  are  used,  the  designations  and  dimensions  of 
which  are  as  follows: 

"No.  6>4,"  dimensions,  3.>^x6><,  and  used  for  ordinary  letters,  and  "No.  6,"  dimensions, 
3^x6  inches.  The  "No.  6"  is  used  as  a  self-ad:lressed  envelope  to  enclose  for  return,  and  is, 
therefore,  smaller  than  the  standard  size. 

NOTE. — A  self-addressed  envelope  is  one  which  bears  a  superscription,  consisting  of  the  name  and  address 
of  the  person  or  firm  using  it.  Self-addressed  envelopes  are  for  the  convenience  of  those  from  whom  answers 
are  expected. 

Official  envelopes.  These  are  for  bulky  letters,  large  business  papers,  or  official  docu- 
ments, etc.  There  are  two  sizes,  viz. :  "No.  10,"  4>4x9>^  inches,  and  "No.  9,"  3%x8^ 
inches,  used  as  a  self-addressed  envelope  to  enclose  in  "No.  10." 

Government  envelopes.  Some  fourteen  different  styles  and  sizes  of  stamped  envelopes, 
newspaper-wrappers,  etc.,  are  kept  on  sale  at  United  States  post  offices.  They  are  sold  at  the 
ordinary  price  asked  by  dealers  for  envelopes  of  a  similar  size  and  quality,  with  the  postage 
added.  Many  firms  use  these  instead  of  unstamped  commercial  envelopes.  Government  en- 
velopes differ  in  size  and  designation  from  commercial  envelopes.  The  government  envelope 
used  in  business  is  the  "No.  5."  It  is  three  and  one-half  by  six  and  five-sixteenths  inches,  or 
slightly  smaller  than  the  commercial  envelope,  "No.  6>^."  The  government  official  envelope, 
"No.  8,"  is  of  the  same  dimensions  as  the  commercial,  "No.  10." 

Special-request  envelopes.  These  are  envelopes  that  have  printed  upon  them  (preferably 
in   the   upper   left-hand   corner)    a    request   for  return  in  case  of  non-delivery.    This  request 

[continued  on  page  80.] 


SUPERSCRIPTION  FORMS 


77 


Fig.  1,    Diagram  Showing  Correct  Position  of  Parts. 


^>-.\=f^' 

STAMP 

^^/^^^ 

^asi^^- 

Fig.  2.    Faulty;  Inharmonious  Arrangement  and  Parts  in  Wrong  Position. 


78 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Fig.  3.    Three-line  Superseription  with  Local  Address. 


STAMP 


STAMP 

^^^:^2^^/....^..,^Z.^;' 

Fig.  4.    In  care  of  Another  Person. 

NOTE.— The  abbreviation  "%"  is  often  used  for  "in  care  of.* 


SUPEUSCRIPTION  FORMS 


7« 


Fig.  5.    Letter  of  Introduction. 

NOTE. — A  letter  of  introduction,  being  delivered  in  person,  does  not  require  a  stamp. 


After— Days  Return  to 

JOHN  C.  SMITH 

146  State  St. 
WILKESVILLE,  N.  Y. 


STAMP 


Mr.    Frank  B.    Smith, 

2416  Front  Street, 

Oswego , 

Ohio, 


Fig.  6.    Four-line  Superscription,  (lovemment  Model. 


80  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


usually  reads :  "If  not  called  for  in  10  days,  return  to,"  or,  "After  5  days  return  to,"  followed 
by  the  name  and  address  of  the  sender.  To  facilitate  the  prompt  return  of  undelivered  mail,  the 
postal  authorities  request  that  the  name  and  address  of  the  sender  be  placed  on  all  letters  and 
packages  sent  by  mail.  Many  firms  combine  a  brief  business  card  with  the  special  request.  If 
ordered  in  lots  of  500  or  more,  the  Government  furnishes  without  extra  charge,  printed  special- 
request  envelopes,  giving  the  name  and  address  of  the  sender.  No  matter  of  an  advertising 
nature  is  printed  on  these. 

Color,  quality,  etc.  The  color  of  envelopes,  whether  they  are  used  for  business  or  social 
purposes,  varies  greatly,  but  tints  are  usually  preferred  to  pronounced  or  strong  colors. 

There  are  also  great  differences  in  quality.  Envelopes  made  of  light  or  cheap  paper  are 
sometimes  used  for  advertising  circulars,  etc.,  but  firms  of  good  standing  rarely  use  anything 
but  the  best  grade  of  envelopes  for  business  letters.  It  is  not  good  form  to  use  cheap  stationery 
or  business  letter-heads  or  envelopes  for  any  kind  of  social  letter-writing. 

207.  The  superscription,  or  direction,  consists  of  whatever  is  written  or  printed  on  the 
envelope  to  insure  its  delivery  to  the  person  entitled  to  receive  it.  Superscriptions  may  be  pen- 
written,  typewritten,  or  printed.  They  usually  consist  of  (1)  the  Name  of  the  person  or  firm 
to  whom  the  letter  is  sent,  (2)  the  General  Address,  consisting,  usually,  of  the  city  and  state, 
(3)  the  Local  Address,  as  street  and  number,  building  and  room-number,  post  office  box-num- 
ber, etc. 

There  is  a  growing  tendency  in  many  business  offices,  and  in  some  business  schools,  to  de- 
part from  the  usage  that  has  hitherto  prevailed  in  the  matter  of  the  form  and  arrangement  of 
the  several  parts  of  the  superscription.  In  some  offices,  the  name  and  address  are  written  in  the 
same  alignment,  and  without  indentation  or  extra  spacing.  Others  write  the  name  of  the  town 
and  the  state  on  the  same  line.  As  these  variations  make  more  or  less  trouble  for  the  Govern- 
ment mailing  clerks,  and  sometimes  are  the  cause  of  letters  being  missent,  the  Post  Office  De- 
partment has  printed  on  the  cover  of  its  stamp  booklets,  a  model  address,  as  a  guide  to  the  pub- 
lic, and  in  the  interest  of  uniformity  in  superscriptions.  We  reproduce  this  form  in  Fig.  6, 
page  79. 

For  pen-written  superscriptions,  the  following  rules  are  generally  observed  by  persons  of 
good  taste : 

1.  Write  the  name  first,  and,  as  nearly  as  possible,  on  a  line  midway  between  the  top  and 
the  bottom  of  the  envelope. 

2.  The  name  of  the  town  is  written  next,  below  and  to  the  right,  and  then  the  state,  the 
initial  letters  beginning  at  such  points  that  they  will  touch  a  straight  line  connecting  the  first 
letters  in  the  superscription.      (See  Fig.  1,  page  77.) 

3.  The  local  address  is  sometimes  written  at  the  lower  left-hand  corner  of  the  envelope, 
but  the  best  usage  requires  it  to  be  written  just  after  the  name,  as  in  Fig.  6,  page  79.  It  may 
be  written  at  the  left,  however,  if  the  other  parts  of  the  superscription  require  four  lines. 

4.  If  it  is  desired  to  mention  the  official  or  business  position  of  the  person  written  to,  as, 
"Supt.  of  City  Schools,"  "Editor  American  Penman,"  "Governor  of  Ohio,"  etc.,  this  should  be 
written  below  the  name,  thus  making  a  four-line  superscription. 

5.  Superscriptions  on  letters  or  packages  for  registry  (see  page  116)  should  give  the 
name  of  the  county,  unless  in  the  case  of  a  large  city.  On  other  classes  of  mail,  the  name  of 
the  county  is  unnecessary. 

6.  In  the  case  of  mail  matter  for  rural  free  delivery,  it  is  very  important  to  write  the 
number  of  the  route;  as,  "R.  F.  D.  No.  3"  (Rural  Free  Delivery  No.  3).  This  is  quite  as  im- 
portant as  is  the  local  address  in  a  letter  sent  to  a  large  city. 

7.  The  parts  of  the  superscription  below  the  name  should  be  written  in  such  a  position  as 
to  divide  the  envelope  space  below  the  name  into  equal  parts. 

Instructions  relating  to  typewritten  superscriptions  will  be  given  in  a  subsequent  lesson. 
Great  care  should  be  taken  to  write  all  parts  of  the  superscription  legibly.  Ornamental  writing 
should  be  avoided,  unless  in  the  case  of  correspondence  between  professional  penmen. 

The  punctuation  of  a  superscription  is  the  same  as  that  required  in  the  address  at  the 
opening  of  the  letter. 

The  diagrams  given  on  pages  77,  78,  and  79  will  aid  the  student  in  applying  the  rules 
given  under  207.  Consult  these  forms  in  preparing  the  addresses  required  under  the  following 
exercise. 


FOLDING  AND  KNCLOSURES  81 


Exercise  3. 

Prepare  twenty  slips  of  unruled  white  paper,  having  the  dimensions  of  a  No.  G^^  envelope 
(S^xSyi  inches). 

Write  on  these  (with  pen  and  ink)  the  following  superscriptions: 

1.  Mr.  Geo.  H.  Nettleton,  Mound  City,  Kansas,  R.  F.  D.  No.  1. 

2.  Master  Irving  Stone,  Battle  Creek,  Mich.,  Care  I.  L.  Stone,  216  Maple  St. 

3.  Prof.  Seymour  Eaton,  President  Drexel  Institute,  Philadelphia. 

4.  Miss  Ena  Harmer,  1529  C  Ave.,  Cedar  Rapids,  Iowa. 

5.  Mr.  E.  H.  Anderson,  Prop'r  Northwestern  Bus.  Coll.,  Fargo,  N.  D. 

6.  Hon.  A.  P.  Rogers,  M.  P.,  421  Ry.  Exch.  Bldg.,  Toronto,  Ont. 

7.  Sister  M.  Beatrice,  Convent  of  the  Sacred  Heart,  Moline,  111. 

8.  Hon.  W.  N.  Ferris,  Big  Rapids,  Mich. 

9.  The  South  Side  Development  Co.,  4976  Stuart  Ave.,  Chicago. 

10.  The  Chicago  Chess  and  Checker  Club,  1196  Schiller  Bldg.,  Chicago. 

11.  Mr.  Horace  G.  Healey,  Editor  "Business  Journal,"  203  Broadway,  New  York. 

12.  Hon.  Geo.  W.  Clarke,  Governor,  Capitol  Bldg.,  Des  Moines,  Iowa. 

13.  Col.  Edw.  L.  Stanton,  Soldiers'  Home,  Dayton,  Ohio. 

14.  Sergt.  C.  A.  Watson,  Fifth  U.  S.  Cavalry,  Manila,  P.  I. 

15.  Hon.  David  Brewer,  U.  S.  Supreme  Court,  Washington,  D.  C. 

16.  Harper,  Jones  &  Hall,  346  Trude  Bldg.,  Chicago. 

17.  Miss  Inez  Day,  Hopedale,  Conn. 

18.  Hon.  Randolph  C.  Carpenter,  House  of  Representatives,  Topeka,  Kansas. 

19.  Mrs.  Archie  A.  Robinson,  Flat  B,  4047  Ellis  Ave.,  Chicago. 

20.  Mr.  Harlin  Endicott,  Room  29,  University  Bldg.,  Boston. 


LESSON  4. 
Folding  and  Enclosures. 

208.  Folding.  The  method  of  folding  a  letter-sheet  depends  upon  the  kind  of  stationery 
used.  If  the  length  of  the  envelope  exceeds  the  width  of  the  paper,  the  letter-sheets  are  folded 
in  one  direction  only,  as  in  Fig.  1,  page  82.  If  the  standard  letter-paper  is  used  with  ordinary 
business  envelopes,  the  sheets  must  be  folded  in  two  directions,  and  it  is  a  matter  of  consider- 
able importance  to  learn  to  do  this  correctly  and  rapidly.  The  student  should  provide  himself 
with  a  few  sheets  of  letter-paper  and  practice  folding  them  in  accordance  with  the  following 
directions  and  the  illustrations  on  pages  82,  83,  and  84. 

1.  Place  the  sheet  before  you,  face  upward;  take  hold  of  the  bottom  margin  and  turn  it 
upward  to  within  one-half  inch  of  the  top  margin,  being  careful  to  have  the  side  margins  even ; 
then  fold  by  passing  the  nail  of  the  second  finger  firmly  from  left  to  right  across  the  bottom  of 
the  folded  sheet.     (See  Fig.  2.) 

2.  Turn  upward  about  two  and  one-half  inches  of  the  right-hand  margin  of  the  folded 
sheet  to  the  left  and  fold  as  in  Fig.  3. 

3.  Turn  the  same  width  (23/2  inches),  of  the  right-hand  margin  toward  the  left,  and 
fold  firmly  with  the  nail  of  the  second  finger,  as  before.     (See  Fig.  4.) 

Be  careful  to  have  the  margms  in  their  right  positions  when  folding,  and  keep  the  sheet 
free  from  creases,  finger-marks,  etc. 

209.  Inserting  letter  in  envelope.  Taking  the  envelope  in  the  left  hand,  with  its  face 
next  to  the  palm,  and  the  folded  letter  in  the  right,  insert  the  letter,  as  shown  in  Fig.  5.  The 
letter  should  be  so  folded  as  to  occupy  a  little  less  than  the  full  length  and  width  of  the  envelope. 

210.  Enclosures.  These  are  documents  or  other  papers,  as  checks,  drafts,  1  eceipts,  or  the 
like,  which  are  to  be  enclosed  with  a  letter.  If  the  enclosure  is  of  considerable  size,  as,  a  lengthy 
bill  or  statement,  a  contract,  insurance-policy  or  other  legal  document,  an  official  envelope  is 
used,  the  paper  or  document  is  folded  apart  from  the  letter,  and  inserted  in  the  envelope  as  a 
separate  enclosure.  In  the  case  of  a  check,  short  bill,  receipt  or  other  small  paper,  the  enclosure 
should  be  placed,  face  upward,  across  the  face  of  the  letter  and  folded  with  it.     (See  Fig.  6.) 

[continued  on  page  85.] 


82 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Fig.  1.    Width  of  paper  Less  tlian  Lengtii  of  Envelope.     (One-direction  Folding.) 


Fig.  2.    First  Fold,  Where  Standard  Size  Sheet  is  to  be  Inserted  in  Business 
Envelope.     (Two-direction  Folduig.) 


FOLDING  AND  ENCLOSURES 


83 


Fig.  3.    Second  Fold  in  Two-direction  Folding. 


Fig.  4.    Tiiird  Fold  in  Two-direction  Folding. 


84 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Fig.  5.    Inserting  in  Envelope. 


Fig.  6.    Position  of  Enclosure. 


POSTAGE  AND  MAILING  86 


Papers  enclosed  in  this  way  are  not  likely  to  be  overlooked  or  accidentally  dropped  when  the 
letter  is  removed  from  the  envelbpe,  as  they  are  when  not  folded  with  the  letter.  It  is  the  cus- 
tom in  some  offices  to  fasten  enclosures  to  the  letter-sheet. 

If  circulars,  etc.,  are  enclosed,  they  should  not  be  folded  with  the  letter,  but  put  in  as  a 
separate  enclosure. 

If  one  or  two  stamps  are  enclosed,  they  should  be  fastened  (not  stuck)  to  the  top  of  the 
letter-sheet.  If  a  considerable  number,  say,  a  dozen  or  more,  stamps  are  enclosed,  they  should 
be  folded,  and  inserted  loose  within  the  folds  of  the  letter. 

Exercise  4. 

1.  Write  the  following  letter  to  Henry  A.  French  &  Co.,  246  Ocean  St.,  Seattle,  Wash. 
Use  your  present  address  and  the  current  date  as  a  heading,  an  appropriate  salutation  and  clos- 
ing words  of  courtesy,  and  your  own  signature.  Direct  and  enclose  the  letter  in  a  No.  6^  busi- 
ness envelope,  and  prepare  a  slip  of  blank  paper  of  the  size  of  an  ordinary  receipt,  to  represent 
the  enclosure. 

(body  of  letter.) 

"I  have  yours  of  May  19  enclosing  Chicago  draft  for  $25.60  to  balance  your  account  to 
date.    Enclosed  find  receipt  for  same. 

"Thanking  you  for  the  remittance,  I  am" 

2.  Holmes  Bros.  &  Co.,  of  275  Market  St.,  Cleveland,  Ohio,  on  June  6,  1913,  received  a 
letter  from  P.  C.  Blake  &  Sons,  Vendone,  Ind.,  dated  June  4,  1913,  and  containing  a  check  for 
$150  to  apply  on  account.  Write  the  letter  of  acknowledgment,  enclosing  a  slip  of  paper  to  rep- 
resent the  receipt.  Direct  the  envelope  and  fold  and  enclose  letter  as  in  previous  examples. 
Unless  you  are  using  imitation  stamps  in  your  letter-writing  work,  mark  the  envelope  with  an 
outline  showing  the  position  of  the  stamp. 

Present  the  foregoing  letters  to  your  teacher  for  approval. 


LESSON  5. 
Postage  and  Mailing. 

211.  Domestic  mail-matter  includes  all  mail-matter  deposited  in  the  mails  for  local  de- 
livery, or  for  transmission  from  one  place  to  another  within  the  United  States,  or  to  or  from 
or  between  the  possessions  of  the  United  States. 

Porto  Rico  and  Hawaii  are  included  in  the  term  "United  States."  The  Philippine  Arch- 
ipelago, Guam,  Tutuila  (including  all  the  adjacent  islands  of  the  Samoan  group  which  are 
possessions  of  the  United  States),  and  the  Canal  Zone  are  included  in  the  term  "Possessions 
of  the  United  States."  The  term,  "Canal  Zone,"  includes  all  territory  purchased  from  Pan- 
ama, embracing  the  Canal  Zone  proper  and  certain  islands  in  the  Bay  of  Panama. 

212.  Classes  of  matter  and  postage.  Domestic  mail-matter  is  divided  into  four  classes, 
as  follows : 

First-class  consists  of: 

1.  All  written  matter,  whether  written  with  pen  or  typewriter,  or  other  device.  This  in- 
cludes letters,  U.  S.  postal  cards,  private  post-cards,  and  any  other  written  matter  (or  partly 
written  and  partly  printed),  whether  sealed  or  unsealed. 

NOTE. — Even  printed  matter  will  be  rated  as  first-class  if  it  is  in  the  nature  of  a  special  or  personal 
communication. 

2.  All  matter  sealed  or  otherwise  closed  against  inspection. 

Rates.  Two  cents  for  each  otuice  or  fraction.  Limit  of  weight,  four  pounds.  U.  S. 
postal  cards  cost  one  cent  each,  and  private  post-cards  (subject  to  Government  regulations  as 
to  size,  material,  etc.),  require  a  one-cent  stamp,  whether  the  matter  on  them  is  written  or 
printed.  Full  pre-payment  of  postage  is  not  required  for  first-class  matter.  In  case  of  insuf- 
ficient postage,  the  amount  unpaid  will  be  collected  from  the  receiver  of  the  letter  when  it  is 
delivered.  An  unstamped  letter  will  not  be  sent  to  its  destination,  but  will  be  returned  to  the 
writer,  if  his  identity  can  be  determined  from  the  envelope;  if  not,  the  letter  will  be  held  for 
postage. 


86  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Drop-letters.  These  letters  are  addressed  for  delivery  at  the  office  where  mailed.  If 
mailed  at  an  office  where  there  is  no  delivery  by  letter-carriers,  the  postage  is  two  cents  for 
each  ounce  or  fraction.  If  mailed  at  letter-carrier  offices,  the  postage  is  the  same  as  for  other 
first-class  matter. 

Second-class  (Unsealed)  consists  of  newspapers  and  periodicals  which  bear  the  author- 
ized statement,  "Entered  at  the  post  office  as  second-class  mail-matter." 

The  term  unsealed  means  enclosed  in  an  open  or  removable  wrapper,  as  one  that  is  open 
at  the  ends,  or  fastened  by  cords,  rubber  bands,  etc.,  thus  permitting  inspection  by  the  post- 
office  officials.  Special  communications  in  writing  are  not  allowed  either  on  the  wrapper  or  on 
the  enclosed  matter.  The  presence  of  these  may  cause  the  package  to  be  held  for  postage  at 
first-class  rates.  This  rule  applies  also  to  third-  and  fourth-class  matter.  It  is  permissible, 
however,  to  write  on  the  wrapper  the  name  and  address  of  the  sender,  after  the  words 
"From,"  Sent  by,"  etc.  The  worcls,  "Marked,"  "Special  Copy,"  etc.,  may  also  be  written  oi 
stamped  on  the  wrapper  or  enclosiire.  It  is  also  permissible  to  make  corrections  of  type- 
graphical  errors,  etc.,  on  the  periodical  enclosed. 

Rates.  One  cent  for  four  ounces  or  fraction.  Full  pre-payment  is  required.  No  limit 
as  to  weight. 

Publishers'  second-class  rates.  When  a  newspaper  or  other  periodical  is  established,  the 
publishers  apply  to  the  Postoffice  Department  at  Washington  to  have  it  "entered  as  second- 
class  matter."  If  this  is  authorized,  the  publishers  may  send  the  periodical  through  the  mails 
at  the  rate  of  one  cent  for  each  pound  or  fraction.  Matter  thus  mailed  is  called  "publishers'  sec- 
ond-class," or  "pound-rate"  matter.  Other  second-class  matter  is  known  as  "transient  second- 
class." 

Third-class  Unsealed.  This  comprises  all  printed  matter  other  than  newspapers,  period- 
icals, etc.,  or  special  communications  of  a  personal  nature.  It  includes  books  under  eight 
ounces  in  weight,  circulars,  proof-sheets,  corrected  proof-sheets,  with  manuscript  copy  accom- 
panying the  same,  matter  in  print,  or  raised  characters  for  the  blind,  photographs,  maps,  etc. 

Rates.  One  cent  for  each  two  ounces  or  fraction.  Full  pre-payment  required.  Limit  of 
weight,  four  pounds,  except  it  be  one  book. 

Fourth-class —  Unsealed.  This  comprises  all  mailable  matter  not  included  in  the  first, 
second,  and  third  classes.  It  includes  generally  all  merchandise,  blank-books,  or  paper,  speci- 
mens of  plants,  minerals,  etc.,  and  printed  matter  on  other  material  than  paper,  and  books  of 
eight  ounces  in  weight  or  over,  also,  all  packages  of  third  class  matter  weighing  over  four 
pounds. 

EXCEPTIONS. — Seeds,  bulbs,  roots,  plants,  cuttings,  etc.,  weighing  less  than  eight  ounces,  available  for  plant 
propagation,  are,  by  special  legislation,  mailable  at  third-class  rates — one  cent  for  each  two  ounces  or  fraction. 

Parcel  post.  (Revised  to  September,  1915.)  By  an  act  of  Congress  under  date  of  August 
24,  1912,  provision  was  made  for  transporting  by  mail,  packages  of  fourth-class  matter  at 
rates  which  vary  with  the  distance. 

This  act,  known  as  the  Parcel  Post  Law,  became  effective  January  1,  1913.  Prior  to  this 
date,  packages  of  fourth-class  matter,  not  exceeding  four  pounds  in  weight,  were  transmitted 
regardless  of  distance  at  the  uniform  rate  of  1  cent  per  ounce.  The  increase  in  the  weight  limit 
of  the  mailable  package,  and  the  greatly  decreased  cost  of  transmission  through  short  distances, 
have  had  the  effect  of  turning  into  the  mails  a  great  many  shipments  that,  under  former  condi- 
tions, would  have  been  handled  by  the  various  private  express  companies.  Packages  weighing 
up  to  seventy  pounds  may  be  mailed  for  local  delivery,  or  to  any  point  within  the  first  two  zones, 
at  rates  prescribed  by  the  postal  authorities.  Beyond  the  second  zone  the  weight  limit  is  fifty 
pounds. 

It  should  be  noted  that  the  Parcel  Post  Law  makes  few  changes  in  the  classification  of 
mail-matter,  provided  for  in  previous  laws.  A  circular  of  information,  with  "Parcel  Post  Guide" 
and  map,  giving  a  schedule  of  rates  for  the  different  parcel  post  zones,  can  be  obtained,  on  ap- 
plication, from  the  Third  Assistant  Postmaster  General  at  Washington,  D.  C.  The  fee  for 
this  service  is  75  cents. 

Greneral  Bate  Rule. 

Matter  of  a  higher  class^  enclosed  zuith  matter  of  a  lower  class,  subjects  the  whole  package 
to  the  higher  rate. 


POSTAGE  AND  MAILING 


87 


214.  Umnailable  matter.  This  is  matter  that  is  prohibited  admission  to  the  mails.  It 
comprises : 

1.  All  matter  illegibly,  incorrectly,  or  insufficiently  addressed. 

2.  All  "transient  second-class"  matter  and  all  matter  of  the  third  and  fourth  classes  not 
fully  prepaid,  and  all  first-class  matter  not  prepiid  one  full  rate — three  cents. 

3.  All  first-class,  third-class  (except  a  single  book),  and  fourth-class  matter  weighing 
more  than  the  weight  fixed  by  the  postal  rules. 

4.  All  matter  harmful  or  objectionable  in  its  nature,  as  poisons,  or  animals  or  vegetable 
substances  liable  to  decomposition;  all  intoxicating,  explosive  or  highly  combustible  or  inflam- 
mable liquids,  or  any  other  article  that  is  likely  to  cause  harm  to  the  postal  employees,  or  to 
the  mail-pouches,  or  other  government  property. 

5.  All  written  or  printed  matter  or  pictures  of  an  offensive  nature,  or  any  libelous  or 
scurrilous  matter  intended  to  reflect  injuriously  upon  the  character  of  another. 

6.  All  matter  pertaining  to  lotteries,  gift  enterprises,  etc.,  also,  anytliing  concerning 
schemes  to  obtain  money  under  false  pretenses. 

NOTE. — Severe  penalties  are  provided  for  the  violation  of  the  last  two  regulations. 

215.  Preparing  matter  for  mailing.  Employees  in  a  business  office  are  often  called 
upon  to  attend  to  the  mailing  of  letters,  circulars,  samples  of  goods,  books,  and  other  classes  of 
mail-matter.  It  is  important  to  be  able  to  do  this  with  accuracy  and  dispatch.  Postage-stamps 
of  various  denominations,  ranging  from  one  cent  to  a  dollar  or  more,  are  to  be  obtained  at 
all  postoffices  and  are  usually  kept  on  hand  in  the  quantities  and  denominations  required.  Most 
letters  will  require  a  three-cent  stamp,  while  printed  circulars  sent  unsealed  will  usually  require 
one  cent.  The  stamp  should  be  placed  at  the  upper  right-hand  corner  of  the  face  of  the  en- 
velope, and  at  a  distance  of  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch  within  the  margin.  See  illustrations 
on  pages  78  and  79. 

When  large  numbers  of  letters  are  mailed,  some  appliance  for  moistening  stamps  is  usually 
provided. 

Special  postage-scales  also  are  in  general  use  for  ascertaining  the  postage  required  on  let- 
ters and  packages.  These  scales  are  provided  with  a  graduated  index  which  shows  at  a  glance 
the  postage  required  for  each  of  the  several  classes  of  mail-matter  except  fourth-class. 

A  Reference  List  of  Mailable  Matter. 

The  following  alphabetical  list  as  issued  by  the  Post  Office  Department,  gives  the  articles 
most  generally  dispatched  in  the  mails,  with  the  mailing-class  to  which  each  belongs.  It  will  be 
found  useful  for  reference,  and  may  be  consulted  in  answering  certain  of  the  questions  asked 
under  Exercise  5. 


Article 


Class 


Article 


Advertising  signs  printed  on  other  material  thanj 

paper    4th 

Albums,  autograph,  without  writing 4th 

Albums,  autograph,  with  writing 1st 

Albums,  photograph    4th 

Almanacs    3d 

Animals,  stuffed   4th 

Architectural   designs,   printed 3d 

Architectural    designs,    containing    writing     (see 

Drawings)     1st 

Artificial  flowers 4th 

Assessment  notices,  wholly  in  print 3d 

Assessment  notices,  partly  in  writing 1st 

Baggage  checks,  metal '  4th 

Bills,  wholly  or  partly  in  writing ,  1st 

Blank  account  books    [  4th 

Blank  Books,  with  written  entries '  1st 

Blank  cards   |  4th 

Blank  Printed  forms,  with  written  signature \  1st 

Blind,    indented    or   perforated    sheets    of   paperl 

containing  characters  which  can  be  read  by  the, 

unsealed 
Blueprints 


3d 
3d 

Books,  printed  (see  parcel  post  regulations) ..3d  or  4th 


Botanical  specimens,  not  susceptible  of  being  used 
in   propagation    

Bulbs   (special  rate)    

Calendars,  printed   on   paper 

Calendars,  printed  on  material  other  than  paper. 

Candies 

Carbon  copies  of  typewritten  matter 

Card  games    

Cards,   blank    

Cards,  Christmas,  Easter,  etc.,  printed  on  paper.. 

Cards,  Christmas,  Easter,  etc.,  printed  on  ma- 
terial other  than   paper. 

Cards,  visiting,  bearing  written  name 

Catalogues    

Certificates,   blank    

Certificates,  filled   out  in  writing 

Check  books,  blank   

Checks,  blank    

Checks,  in  writing,  canceled  or  uncanceled 

Chromos,  printed  on  paper 

Cigars    

Circulars,  printed  (see  "Third-Class  Matter") . . . 

Cloth,  samples  of  

Coin    


Class 


4th 

4th 

3d 

4th 

4th 

1st 

4th 

4th 

3d 

4th 

1st 

3d 

3d 

1st 

3d 

3d 

1st 

3d 

4th 

3d 

4th 

4th 


88 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Article 


Class 


Coin  holders,  card,  blank 

Copy  books,  school,  with  printed  lines  and  in- 
structions  for  use    

Crayon  pictures  or  drawings,  framed  or  unframed 

Cuts,  wood  and  metal   

Cuttings  of  plants  or  trees  (special  rate) 

Daguerreotypes     

Designs,  wholly  in  print  on  paper 

Diplomas,  blank    

Diplomas,  filled  out  in  writing 

Drawings  (pen  or  pencil),  without  writing, 
framed  or  unframed   

Drawings  or  plans  containing  written  words, 
letters,  or  figures  indicating  size,  price,  dimen- 
sions,  etc 

Electrotype   plates    

Engravings,  when  framed   

Engravings  and  wood  cuts,  impressions  from, 
printed   on  paper    

Engravings  and  wood  cuts  on  wood  or  metal  base 

Envelopes,  mailed  in  bulk 

Flour,   samples   of    

Flowers,  cut  or  artificial 

Fruit,  dried    

Geological   specimens    

Grain,   samples    of 

Herbs,   dried    

Honey,  in  comb  

Insects,    dried    

Invitations,  printed  or  engraved,  containing  no 
other  writing  than  date  and  name  and  address 
of  person  addressed  and  sender 

Labels,  written    

Letterpress  copies  of  handwritten  or  typewritten 
matter    

Liquids    

Liquors,  ardent,  vinous,  spiritous,  or  malt,  un- 
mailable. 

Lithographs    

Magazines  or  newspapers,  mailed  by  the  public. 

Manuscript  or  typewritten  copy,  without  proof- 
sheets    

Manuscript  copy,  accompanied  with  proof-sheets. 

Maps,  printed   on   cloth 

Maps,  printed  on  paper,  with  the  necessary 
mountings     


Article 


Class 


4th 

3d 

4th 

4th 

4th 

4th 

3d 

3d 

1st 

4th 


1st 
4th 
4th 

3d 

4th 
4th 
4th 
4th 
4th 
4th 
4th 
4th 
4th 


3d 
1st 

1st 
4th 


3d 
2d 

1st 
3d 
4th 

3d 


Medals  or  coins   

Merchandise,  samples  of   

Metals    

Minerals     

Music  books   

Newspaper  clippings,  with  name  and  date  of  paper 
stamped  or  written  in 

Newspapers  or  magazines,  mailed  by  the  public. 

Nuts,  in  natural  state  

Paintings,  framed  or  unframed 

Paper,   blank 

Patterns,  printed  or  unprinted   

Photographs,  mounted   or  unmounted 

Plans  and  architectural  designs,  printed 

Plants  for  propagating  purposes   (special  rate).. 

Postage  stamps,  canceled  or  uncanceled 

Postal  cards,  wholly  or  partly  in  writing,  re- 
mailed     

Post  cards,  printed,  in  bulk 

Posters,  printed  on   cloth 

Posters,   printed   on   paper 

Price  lists,  printed,  containing  written  figures 
changing  individual  items   

Price  lists,  wholly  in  print 

Printed  matter  on  other  material  than  paper. . . . 

Printing,  samples  of   

Proof-sheets,  printed,  corrected,  with  or  without 
manuscripts     

Receipts,  printed,  with  written  signatures 

Receipts,  partially  printed,  with  writing 

Roots  for  propagation   (special  rate) 

Rulers,  wooden  or  metal   

Seeds   (special  rate)    

Sheet  music 

Shorthand  or  stenographic  notes  

Soap    

Tags    

Telegram   blanks    

Tintypes     

Typewritten  matter,  original  letterpress  and 
manifold  copies  thereof   

Valentines,  printed  on  paper 

Valentines,  printed  on  other  material  than  paper. 

Wall  paper   


4th 
4th 
4th 
4th 
3d 

3d 

2d 

4th 

4th 

4th 

4th 

3d 

3d 

4th 

3d 

1st 
3d 
4th 
3d 

1st 
3d 
4th 
3d 

3d 

1st 

1st 

4th 

4th 

4th 

3d 

1st 

4th 

4th 

3d 

4th 

1st 
3d 
4th 
4th 


Exercise  5. 

Find  the  amount  of  postage  required  to  mail  each  of  the  following-described  articles: 

1.  A  magazine  weighing  8^  ounces. 

2.  A  typewritten  manuscript  sent  to   a  newspaper   for   publication   and   weighing   6^ 
ounces. 

3.  A   package   of   printed   patterns   weighing  11  pounds,  5  ounces,  to  be  sent  to  Second 
Parcel  Post  Zone, 

4.  Package  of  maps  weighing  2  pounds,  3^  ounces. 

5.  A  package  of  newspapers   (not  mailed  by  publisher)  weighing  2  pounds,  3^4  ounces. 

6.  A  sealed  letter  weighing  3ys  ounces. 

7.  1500  unsealed  circular  letters  each  containing  a  printed  circular,  and  each  weighing 
lj4  ounces.     (Mailed  separately.) 

8.  2000  sealed  letters  with  enclosures,  to  make  each  letter  weigh  lj4  ounces. 

9.  Package  of  books  to  first  zone  weighing  18^  pounds. 

10.     Package  of  newspapers,  with  which  was  included  a  sealed  letter,  weight  of  package  1 
pound,  33/2  ounces. 


THE  BODY  OF  THE  LETTER 


LESSON  6. 
The  Body  of  the  Letter. 

216.  Composition  and  construction.  The  style  of  a  letter  is  determined  by  its  purpose 
and  the  relations  of  the  writer  to  the  one  written  to.  We  all  want  our  letters  to  make  a  good 
impression,  just  as  we  wish  to  present  what  is  called  "a  pleasing  address"  when  we  meet  peo- 
ple personally.  To  accomplish  this,  a  letter  should  be  natural,  direct,  and  appropriately  phrased. 
As  previously  suggested,  the  best  guide  to  letter-writing  style  is  to  write  as  you  would  talk  were 
you  face  to  face  with  your  correspondent.  This  does  not  mean  that  a  letter  may  be  incorrect 
as  to  grammar,  or  contain  slang  or  other  objectionable  forms  of  speech.  A  letter  need  not  be 
bookish  or  formal  in  order  to  be  written  in  good  English. 

217.  Colloquialisms  permissible.  Many  conversational  terms  and  expressions  are  allow- 
able and  even  desirable  in  a  letter,  whether  it  be  on  business  or  otherwise,  which  would  not  be 
proper  in  any  essay  or  other  form  of  strictly  literary  composition.  The  following  three  letters 
are  here  introduced  to  show  how  a  natural  conversational  style  may  be  secured.  Read  them 
carefully  and  note  the  effect  of  such  colloquial  expressions  as  the  following,  in  the  first  letter : 

'thinking  over  our  plan." 

'your  idea  has  some  good  points." 

'it  is  out  of  the  question." 


up  to  his  ears  in  work." 
see  about  this  account." 
working  up  trade." 


478  Broadv/ay,  New  YorK. 
Jan.  16,  19 

Mr.  Amos  L.  Macey, 

10 

Greendale,  Pa. 

s 

Dear  Sir: 

10 

5     Since  our  talk  on  Monday,  we  have  been  thinking  over 
your  plan  as  to  working  up  trade  in  North  Jersey.   No  doubt 
your  idea  has  some  good  points,  at  least  good  enough  to 
justify  a  trial  later  in  the  secson  when  we  are  not  so 
busy  and  can  spare  the  extra  men  to  send  into  the  new 
field.   Just  now,  however,  it  is  out  of  the  question,  as 
everybody  is  up  to  his  ears  in  work.   Be  sure  that  we 
appreciate  your  enterprise  in  the  matter,  and  if  the  plan 
succeeds,  the  credit  shall  be  yours. 

10 

By  the  way,  Hawkes  &  Fuller  of  Waynesville,  Pa.,  owo 
us  a  considerable  balance  that  is  nearly  two  months  past 
due.   You  would  better  call  there  on  your  way  in  next  week 
suid  see  about  this  account.   We  enclose  statement. 

35 

Cordially  yours. 

The  Evans-Belle  Cc. 

Per  C.  J.  B. 


90  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


The  following  letter  is  rather  more  formal  than  the  last  one,  but  it  has  the  simple,  straight- 
forwardness of  a  face-to-face  talk.    See  if  you  can  find  the  expressions  that  give  this  effect. 

Avalon  College, 

Avalon,  0.,  July  26,  '05. 
Mr.  Henry  B.  Nelson, 

Ghadwick,  Ind. 
My  dear  Sir: 

I  have  your  letxer  of  July  S4,  asking  about  the  work  at 
Avalon  College. 

In  our  catalog,  which  I  am  mailing  you  to-day,  you  will 
find  answers  to  your  questions  as  to  tuition  rates,  living 
expenses,  courses  of  study,  etc.   Avalon  College  is  not  a 
"cheap  school"  in  the  sense  in  which  this  term  is  commonly 
used,"  neither  are  our  charges  higher  than  is  consistent  with 
good  service. 

The  watch-word  at  Avalon  is  WORK.   It  is  a  school  for 
young  men  and  women  who  are  in  earnest,  and  who  want  results. 
It  is  no  place  for  dawdlers  and  snobbishly  inclined  young 
folks  who  want  the  name  of  "going  to  college",  but  do  not 
care  to  do  the  work  required  in  getting  a  genuine  education.. 

Now,  Mr.  Nelson,  if,  as  I  hope,  you  are  looking  for 
this  kind  of  a  school,  you  are  pretty  sure  to  be  pleased 
with  Avalon,  and  we  shall  be  glad  to  give  you  a  hearty 
welcome . 

Hoping  that  you  may  decide  to  become  one  of  us,  I  am 

Sincerely  yours, 

Ghas .  S.  Gasterlin, 

Registrar 

There  Is  a  cordiality,  as  well  as  a  businesslike  directness  in  the  followins  letter,  that  would  make  it 
apiK-al  strongly  to  the  favor  of  a  business  man,  even  though  he  did  not  accept  the  writer's  proposition.  Note 
the  expressions  that  put  life  and  vim  into  this  letter. 

Brookton,  111.,  May  £9,  19 
The  Anderson  Grocery  Co., 

Peoria,  111. 
Gentlemen: 

Are  you  quite  satisfied  with  your  present  means  of 
getting  country  produce?   If  not,  you  may  be  interested  in 
what  we  are  doing  in  this  line.   Knowing  the  trouble  that 
first-class  houses  have  in  getting  from  the  commission  men 
really  choice  produce  fresh  from  the  farm  and  garden,  we 
have  adopted  the  plan  of  working  up  a  line  of  special  con- 
tracts with  the  farmers,  gardeners,  and  dairymen,  by  which 
we  buy  only  the  best  SELECTED  STOCK,  which  we  deliver  to 
our  customers  within  a  few  hours  after  purchase.   Our  plan 
is  to  send  wagons  to  the  farms  early  each  morning,  gather 
up  the  very  choicest  products,  and  get  them  to  you  by  the 
time  your  doors  are  open.   Thus,  you  are  always  sure  of  a 
full  supply  of  the  best  goods  to  be  had,  and  in  a  condition 
that  will  bring  smiles  to  the  faces  of  your  customers. 

Of  course,  such  goods  cost  a  shade  more  than  the  cold- 
storage  stuff  from  the  commission  houses,  but  people  are 
willing  to  pay  more  for  choice  things  with  the  morning  dew 
still  on  them,  and  your  pofits  may  easily  be  maintained. 

If  our  idea  strikes  you  favorably,  and  you  are  in  a 
position  to  do  business  with  us,  kindly  drop  us  a  line 
and  one  of  our  men  will  call  on  you  at  once  and  go  into  the 
matter  in  detail. 

Very  truly  yours, 

C.  P.  Harr>er  &  Sons. 


THE  BODY  OF  THE  LETTER  01 


218.  Cant  terms,  meaningless  expressions,  etc.  Custom  has  long  sanctioned  the  use,  in 
business  letters,  of  a  certain  conventional  jargon,  which  is  quite  meaningless,  and  really  serves 
no  useful  purpose  whatever.     Belonging  in  this  category  are  such  expressions  as  the  following : 

"Your  esteemed  favor  at  hand." 

"Your  favor  of  the  3rd  came  duly  to  hand." 

"Replying  to  the  same  would  say." 

"We  beg  to  advise  you,"  "We  beg  to  suggest." 

"Allow  us  to  call  attention  to  the  fact." 

"Enclosed  please  find." 

"We  trust  you  will  recognize  the  importance." 

"We  take  pleasure  in  informing  you." 

"Your  esteemed  favor  at  hand  and  contents  noted  and  in  reply  to  same  would  say." 

"Kindly  permit  us  to  call  your  attention  to." 

"We  beg  to  acknowledge  your  esteemed  favor  of  the  19th." 

The  foregoing  and  similar  expressions  have  nothing  but  usage  to  justify  them.  Anyone 
who  should  use  such  language  in  personal  intercourse,  would  have  his  sanity  called  into  ques- 
tion. Furthermore,  these  formalisms  are  fast  falling  into  disuse  among  modern  business  letter- 
writers.  We  advise  the  student  to  dispense  entirely  with  these  and  other  expressions  of  the 
same  class.  They  are  opposed  to  simplicity,  directness,  and  naturalness,  and  tend  to  give  to  a 
letter  that  very  stiffness  and  formality  most  to  be  avoided.  Beyond  tlie  terms  of  courtesy  in  be- 
ginning and  ending  a  letter,  put  nothing  into  it  that  you  would  not  say  to  your  correspondent 
were  you  talking  instead  of  writing  to  him. 

219.  Paragraphing.  A  paragraph  is  a  sentence,  or  a  group  of  sentences  relating  to  some 
particular  matter.  A  letter  may  consist  of  one  or  of  several  paragraphs,  according  as  it  treats 
of  one  or  of  several  distinct  matters. 

No  definite  rules  can  be  laid  down  to  govern  paragraphing.  It  is  often  a  question  of  taste 
or  of  individual  judgment  as  to  whether  a  given  matter  is  sufficiently  distinct  from  the  rest  of 
the.  letter  to  require  a  paragraph. 

It  is  very  important  that  the  several  topics  of  a  letter  should  be  introduced  in  a  natural 
order,  and  that  each  should  be  completed  fully  before  another  is  taken  up.  Nothing  is  more 
confusing  or  annoying  than  to  receive  a  letter  in  which  sentences  in  no  wise  related  are  thrown 
together  at  random,  just  as  they  came  into  the  mind  of  the  writer,  and  with  no  attempt  at  co- 
herence or  logical  arrangement. 

As  a  rule,  the  first  paragraph  of  a  business  letter  should  show  the  purpose,  or  occasion, 
of  the  letter.  If  it  is  in  answer  to  another  letter,  the  date  and  purport  of  this  letter  should  be 
given,  as  in  the  following : 

"We  have  yours  of  June  10  relating  to  our  recent  shipment  of  sulky  plows." 

"This  is  in  answer  to  your  letter  of  January  6,  as  to  the  advisability  of  our  establishing  an 
agency  in  your  city." 

"Your  kind  letter  in  answer  to  ours  of  June  7  reached  us  to-day." 

If  the  letter  is  not  written  in  answer  to  another  letter,  it  is  still  advisable,  as  a  rule,  to  have 
an  opening  paragraph  setting  forth  the  purpose  of  the  letter. 

Examples:  "We  are  writing  this  to  make  some  inquiries  as  to  your  new  ruling  machine, 
advertised  in  the  February  'Inland  Printer'." 

"Our  house  is  in  the  market  for  a  line  of  straw  board,  and  we  have  thought  it  well  to  take 
up  the  matter  with  you  by  letter." 

"This  letter  is  to  interest  you  in  a  new  cutter  and  feeder  that  we  have  just  put  orr  the 
market." 

A  separate  paragraph  should  be  given  to  any  concluding  phrases  of  a  courteous  or  compli- 
mentary nature;  as — 

"Hoping  to  receive  further  orders  from  you,  we  are"  etc. 

"Thanking  you  in  advance  for  an  early  answer  to  our  inquiry,  we  remain"  etc. 

An  excellent  custom  is  followed  in  many  business  offices,  of  separating  the  paragraphs  of 
a  letter  by  extra  spacing.  This  facilitates  reference  to  the  several  matters  contained  in  the  letter. 
The  following  model  letter  illustrates  the  method  and  purpose  of  paragraphing.  Study  it  care- 
fully, after  which,  proceed  with  the  work  required  in  Exercise  6. 


92 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Hammond,  Ind. ,  Apr.  6,  19 
Mr.  R.  E.  Thayer, 

Beatrice,  Nebr. 

Eear  Sir: 

We  are  writing  this  letter  of  inquiry  at  the  suggestion 
of  Mr.  C.  W.  Pierce,  of  Chicago,  who  assures  us  that  you  can 
give  us  reliable  data  as  to  the  matters  about  which  we  ask. 

We  are  manufacturers  of  various  grades  of  straw- 
board,  wrapping,  and  other  coarse-fiber  papers,  and  we  are 
considering  the  advisability  of  establishing  a  branch 
factory  at  some  good  town  in  your  state.   Mr.  Pierce  tells 
us  that  Beatrice  has  some  advantages  for  the  location  of 
such  an  enterprise,  but  he  is  unaDle  to  give  us  bucii  de- 
tailed information  as  we  require. 

Can  you  tell  us  whether  there  are  any  straw-board 
factories  in  your  part  of  the  state,  and,  if  so,  where  they 
are  located? 

Do  the  farmers  in  the  vicinity  of  Beatrice  raise  much 
small  grain,  and  is  there  any  demand  for  straw,  aside  from 
the  ordinary  uses? 

What  is  the  present  market  price  of  straw  per  ton, 
and  is  baled  straw  shipped  from  your  town  to  any  consider- 
able extent? 

Are  straw-board  boxes,  cases,  etc.,  much  used  in  your, 
part  of  the  state  in  shipping  eggs,  fruit,  or  other 
products? 

Do  you  think  any  concessions  in  the  way  of  remission 
of  taxes,  the  providing  of  a  site  for  the  factory  at  a 
nominal  cost,  etc.,  could  be  obtained  from  your  people,  in 
the  event  that  it   should  be  found  feasible  to  locate  the 
factory  at  Beatrice? 

We  shall  regard  it  as  a  great  personal  favor  if  you 
will  kindly  send  us  answers  to  the  foregoing  questions, 
with  any  other  information  bearing  on  the  matter,  which 
you  may  be  able  to  give.   We  also  request  that  you  will, 
for  the  present,  regard  this  letter  as  confidential. 

Thanking  you  in  advance  for  an  early  answer,  we  remain 

Very  truly  yours,  . 

J.  P.  Hannibal  &  Sons, 

per  J.    P.    H. 

Exercise  6. 

If  a  letter  is  brief,  occupying  much  less  than  a  full  page,  with  ordinary  margins,  it  is  com- 
mon to  have  the  margins  much  wider,  thus  decreasing  the  length  of  the  lines,  and  giving  a 
more  pleasing  general  effect.  In  the  forms  on  pages  93-94  the  improvement  effected  by  the 
wider  margins  in  No.  2  is  evident. 

The  spacing  (distance  between  lines)  may  also  vary  in  the  case  of  typewritten  letters,  de- 
pending on  the  length  and  character  of  the  letter,  short  letters  being  often  double-spaced,  while 
the  single  space  is  used  for  longer  ones.  In  many  offices,  however,  all  letters,  regardless  of 
length,  are  single  spaced  and  have  standard  margins.     While  most  of  the  model  letters  in  this 


THE  BODY  OF  THE  LETTER  93 


book  are  thus  presented,  the  student,  in  preparing  the  letters  required  in  the  exercises,  may  use 
his  taste  and  judgment  as  to  spacing  and  margins. 

1.  Write  an  answer  to  tlie  preceding  letter,  setting  forth  such  assumed  facts  as  might  be 
given  in  response  to  such  a  letter.  Paragraph  your  letter,  as  required  by  the  different  matters 
referred  to,  answering  the  questions  in  the  order  that  they  are  asked.  When  your  letter  is 
finished,  fold  it  properly,  enclose  in  a  correctly  addressed  envelope,  and  hand  it  to  your  teacher. 

2.  Reconstruct  the  following  letter,  correcting  all  errors.  Give  careful  attention  to  the 
errors  in  punctuation,  form,  etc.  In  recasting  this  letter,  do  not  attempt  to  follow  the  writer's 
arrangement.  Omit  all  needless  matter,  and  try  to  have  your  letter  well  arranged,  definite,  and 
businesslike. 

St.  Louis,  Mo.  No.  69  Broad  St. 
Feb,  17  05 
Mr.  C.  W.  Walker  Esq. 
Murrayville,  Ills. 
Sir: 

There  is  a  firm  in 
your  town  or  was  last  year  named  Clarke  and  Reynolds  that 
owes  me  for  a  Bill  of  Goods  that  I  sold  them  on  credit 
nearly  two  years  ago.   As  I  understand  that  you  make  a 
business  of  collecting  these  kind  of  accounts  I  thought  I 
would  write  to  you.   Can  you  tell  me  whether  they  are  any 
good  or  not.   Our  bill  is  for  $47.25  and  I  dont  want  to  lose 
it.   What  per  cent  do  you  charge  for  collecting  such  bills? 
Th3  bill  is  for  our  Patent  Roofing  it  is  all  right  and  they 
pro-nised  to  pay  in  60  d.  but  didn't.   Do  you  charge  the 
same  when  you  have  to  bring  a  law  suit.   please  answer  as 
soon  as  possible  as  I  want  to  get  this  account  straightene.-i 
up. 

Yrs  very  Respect fuly 
J.  Peters 


Form  No.  1.    Wide  Measure. 

Springfield,  111., 

May  20,  19--. 
Ames  &  Robinson, 

Fairview,  Texas. 

Gentlemen : 

Tnis  in  ansA^er  to  your  letter  of  May  15,  relating  to 
weight  and  form  of  packages  of  our  Red  Eagle  Biiolcwheat  Flour, 

We  advise  that  this  brand  is  supplied  only  in  five- 
pound  cartons,  and  in  three-pound  hinge-lid  tins.  You  will 
find  these  quoted  in  our  Price  List  for  this  quarter.  Divi- 
sion L. 

We  believe  a  copy  of  this  has  been  mailed  you. 

Very  truly  yours, 

THE  ACME  MILLING  CO, 


94  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Form  No.  2.    Narrow  Measure. 

Springfield,    111., 

May  ZO,    19--. 

Ames  &  Robinson, 

Fairview,  Texas. 

Gentlemen : 

This  in  answer  to  your  letter  of 
May  15,  relating  to  weight  and  form  of 
packages  of  our  Red  Eagle  Buckwheat  Flour 

We  advise  that  this  brand  is  supplied 
only  in  five-pound  cartons,  and  in  three- 
pound  hinge-lid  tins.  You  will  find  these 
quoted  in  our  Price  List  for  this  quarter. 
Division  L. 

We  believe  a  copy  of  this  has  been 
mailed  you. 

Very  truly  yours. 

The  Acme  Milling  Co. 


LESSON  7. 
Special  Hints  and  Cautions. 

220.  Neatness  and  the  correction  of  errors.  A  letter  that  is  marred  by  blots,  erasures, 
soiled  or  wrinkled  paper,  etc.,  is  more  than  an  offense  to  the  eye;  it  is  an  indication  of  a  care- 
less and  slovenly  personality.  Paper  to  be  used  for  letter-writing  should  be  kept  where  it  will 
not  be  soiled  or  wrinkled.  Before  handling  the  letter-paper  or  envelopes,  one  should  be  sure  that 
his  hands  are  free  from  dust,  perspiration,  ink-stains,  etc.  If  errors  in  a  letter  are  corrected  by 
means  of  erasures,  the  erasing  should  be  so  carefully  done  that  the  receiver  of  the  letter  would 
not  suspect  that  an  error  had  been  made.  If  there  is  not  time  or  opportunity  to  make  correc- 
tions by  means  of  erasures,  it  is  better  to  draw  an  ink  line  through  the  incorrect  word,  and  re- 
write it  correctly  and  neatly  in  the  space  above.     If  several  errors  occur,  rewrite  tlie  letter. 

221.  Figures  and  abbreviations.  The  use  of  figures  and  abbreviations  in  tlie  body  of  a 
letter  is  to  be  avoided,  except  in  indicating  a  sum  of  money  or  in  preparing  lists  of  merchandise, 
with  quantities,  prices,  etc.  In  giving  an  address,  as  "Moline,  111."  "Fremont,  Nebr."  "119  Wal- 
nut St."  "Room  65  Plymouth  Bldg.,"  abbreviations  should  be  used.  The  name  of  a  state 
should  be  written  in  full  when  not  used  as  part  of  an  address.  It  is  very  bad  form  to  abbreviate 
ordinary  words,  as  "ad"  for  advertisement,  "Mdse."  for  merchandise,  except  in  special  cases  re- 
quiring such  abbreviations.  Some  expressions,  as  "C.  O.  D.  (collect  on  delivery),  "f.  o.  b." 
(free  on  board),  are  always  abbreviated. 

NOTE.— See  lesson   on   "Abbreviations." 

222.  Specifying  dates.  In  specifying  the  date  of  a  letter  that  is  being  answered,  the  ab- 
breviations, "inst."  (instant),  "ult."  (ultimo),  "prox."  (proximo),  are  sometimes  used.  "Inst." 
means  the  present  montli,  "ult."  means  the  preceding  month,  and  "prox."  means  the  succeeding 
month.  In  many  offices  these  terms  have  been  discontinued,  the  date  being  indicated  by  giving 
the  name  of  the  month  and  date;  as,  "We  have  your  letter  of  May  29,"  instead  of,  "We  have 
your  letter  of  the  29th  ult.,"  and,  "Our  representative  will  call  on  you  about  June  10,"  instead 
of,  "Our  representative  will  call  on  you  about  the  10th  prox."  The  method  of  date-reference 
here  recommended  has  obvious  advantages. 


SPECIAL  HINTS  AND  CAUTIONS  95 


223.  When  to  enclose  stamps.  In  writing  a  letter  to  a  stranger,  or  to  a  slight  acquaint- 
ance, requesting  information  or  other  favors  relating  to  a  matter  in  which  the  one  written  to 
has  no  personal  interest,  always  enclose  a  stamp,  or,  better  still,  a  self-addressed  stamped  en- 
velope, or  postal  card.  A  stamp  is  not  necessary  in  writing  business  letters  about  a  matter  in 
which  the  person  written  to  is  interested,  or  to  public  officials  for  information  that  is  properly 
requested  of  them.  It  shows  affectation,  also,  to  enclose  a  stamp  for  reply,  in  a  letter  written  to 
a  friend  or  familiar  acquaintance. 

224.  Writing  on  both  sides  of  paper.  This  is  allowable  only  in  personal  correspond- 
ence. In  writing  a  business  letter,  use  the  second  sheet  in  all  cases,  when  a  letter  is  too  long  to 
be  written  on  one  page.  This  is  also  a  fixed  requirement  in  all  printing-offices,  in  the  case  of 
letters,  advertising,  or  other  matter  received  for  printing  or  publication. 

225.  Paging.  When  a  letter  requires  two  or  more  sheets,  these  should  invariably  be 
paged.  Failure  to  do  this  may  occasion  much  inconvenience  to  the  person  receiving  the  letter, 
and  may  cause  him  to  overlook  entirely  some  of  the  sheets,  should  he  be  interrupted  in  the 
course  of  the  reading. 

226.  Placing  in  right  envelope.  When  several  letters  are  written,  it  is  of  the  utmost  im- 
portance that  they  should  be  enclosed  in  their  proper  envelopes.  Mistakes  in  this  matter  have 
often  caused  serious  embarrassment  or  misunderstanding.  As  soon  as  a  letter  is  written,  the 
envelope  should  be  directed  and  the  sheet  or  sheets  inserted  under  the  flap  of  the  envelope,  in- 
cluding enclosures,  if  any,  there  to  remain  until  the  letter  is  folded  and  enclosed.  In  the  case 
of  correspondence  prepared  by  stenographers,  the  letters  and  envelopes  should  be  thus  arranged 
when  presented  to  the  dictator  for  signature. 

227.  Disposal  of  letters  when  received.  The  systematic  disposal  of  correspondence  in 
a  business  office  is  a  very  important  matter.  When  a  "mail"  is  received,  consisting  of  a  number 
of  letters,  they  should  be  sorted  before  opening,  in  order  to  lay  aside  any  of  them  that  may  be  of 
a  private  or  personal  nature,  to  be  opened  only  by  the  persons  to  whom  they  are  addressed.  In 
opening  letters,  a  letter-opener  should  be  .used ;  this  usually  consists  of  a  narrow  blade  of  metal 
or  bone  made  for  the  purpose.  The  blade  of  the  letter-opener  is  inserted  beneath  the  flap  of  the 
envelope,  and  the  latter  is  separated  at  the  edge  where  it  joins  the  face  of  the  envelope.  In 
using  a  letter-opener,  care  should  be  taken  not  to  injure  the  contents  of  the  envelope.  If  a  letter- 
opener  is  not  at  hand,  a  penknife  may  be  used.  Never  open  a  letter  by  tearing  the  envelope 
across  the  end.  In  doing  this,  one  is  likely  to  mutilate  the  letter  or  other  enclosure.  In  some 
offices,  all  the  envelopes  are  opened  before  the  contents  of  any  of  them  are  removed ;  in  other 
offices,  the  contents  of  each  envelope  are  disposed  of  before  any  of  the  others  are  opened.  In 
case  there  are  many  letters,  the  former  method  will  be  found  the  more  expeditious. 

The  envelopes  should  not  be  destroyed  when  the  contents  are  removed,  but  kept  until  all  the 
correspondence  is  disposed  of.  It  frequently  happens  that  the  writers  of  some  of  the  letters  fail 
to  write  their  addresses,  or  even  their  signatures,  and  it  is  necessary  to  refer  to  the  postmark  on 
the  envelope  to  learn  where  the  letter  was  mailed  in  order  to  ascertain  who  wrote  it. 

If  the  letter  contains  a  check,  draft,  receipt,  or  other  enclosure,  a  note  of  the  fact,  together 
wit?i  the  amount  (in  case  of  a  remittance),  should  be  entered  on  the  face  of  the  letter  at  the 
time  it  is  taken  from  the  envelope.  In  some  cases  it  is  found  advisable  to  pin  the  enclosure  to 
the  letter,  where  it  remains  until  the  answer  is  dictated  to  the  stenographer. 

Exercise  7. 

Prepare  written  answers  to  the  following  review  questions.  Every  answer  should  be  in 
the  form  of  a  complete  sentence.  Some  of  the  questions  are  not  directly  answered  in  the  text. 
Their  purpose  is  to  give  exercise  to  the  student's  judgment  and  to  his  thinking  faculties. 

1.  As  the  manager  of  a  business,  would  you  consider  it  good  policy  to  have  your  corre- 
spondence neat  and  businesslike?     Why? 

2.  What  corrections  would  you  make  in  these  sentences:  "He  came  here  four,  or  five 
years  ago  from  Mich.  I  met  him  about  the  1st  of  Sept.  1915.  At  the  time  I  sold  him  25  bu. 
of  Oats,  but  he  did  not  pay  me,  and  soon  after  moved  to  Rockport,  Illinois." 

3.  Illustrate  the  meaning  of  "inst.,"  "ult.,"  and  "prox."  Why  is  it  preferable  to  give  the 
month  and  date  instead  of  using  these  abbreviations? 

4.  In  what  cases  would  you  enclose  a  stamp  in  a  letter  requiring  an  answer?  When 
would  you  not  do  so? 


96  BUSINESS  KNGLISH 


5.  Why  should  a  business  letter  be  written  on  but  one  side  of  the  paper  ? 

6.  What  precautions  will  prevent  the  enclosure  of  letters  in  wrong  envelopes? 

7.  ■  What  is  done  with  a  letter  that  is  mailed  without  a  stamp? 

8.  Why  should  opened  envelopes  not  be  destroyed  until  the  letters  in  them  have  been  read 
or  answered  ? 

9.  What  troubles  might  occur  through  failure  to  observe  proper  methods  in  disposing  of 
incoming  mail? 

10.     Give  two  reasons  for  answering  correspondence  promptly. 


LESSON  8. 
Special  Hints  and  Cautions. 

228.  Copying,  filing,  etc.  In  manv  business  offices,  copies  are  kept  of  all  letters  sent  out. 
These  are  usually  made  by  means  of  carbon  sheets  at  the  time  the  letters  are  typewritten,  or 
else  with  a  copying-press,  by  means  of  which  impression  copies  are  made  in  books  consisting  of 
blank  leaves  of  tissue  paper,  specially  manufactured  for  the  "purpose.  Various  methods  are  used 
for  systematically  filing  the  letters  received,  and  the  copies  of  those  sent  out.  The  object  of  the 
filing  system  is  to  provide  a  convenient  means  oi  referring  to  any  letter  that  has  been  received 
or  sent.  Filing  systems  are  also  used,  consisting  of  boxes  or  cases  filled  with  cards  alpha- 
betically arranged  and  containing  special  data  pertaining  to  the  business.  A  general  under- 
standing of  the  methods  of  copying  and  filing  is  an  important  part  of  a  business  education. 

229.  Use  of  postal  cards.  The  use  of  postal  cards  for  ordinary  business  correspondence 
is  not  to  be  recommended.  The  postal  card  is,  at  best,  but  a  makeshift,  and  is  generally  looked 
upon  with  disfavor  among  business  men.  Postal  cards  and  private  post-cards,  on  account  of 
their  cheapness,  are  used  extensively  for  brief  advertising  announcements,  and  by  the  officers  of 
lodges,  societies,  etc.,  for  sending  out  notices,  but  they  should  not  be  used  for  more  important 
business  communications. 

A  postal  card  is  rendered  unmailable  by  writing  or  printing  anything  but  the  add-ess  on  its 
face,  or  address  side,  (picture  post-cards  provide  space  for  a  message  on  the  address  side),  or 
by  pasting  or  otherwise  attaching  anything  to  the  card.  Postal  cards  may  be  used  for  brief  and 
unimportant  personal  communications  when  the  use  of  ordinary  stationery  is  inconvenient.  In 
such  communications  the  heading  should  be  given,  but  the  letter-address  and  the  closing  words 
of  courtesy  may  be  omitted. 

230.  Promptness  in  answering  letters.  To  respond  to  a  letter  promptly  is  as  much  a  re- 
quirement of  ordinary  courtesy  as  it  is  to  answer  when  one  is  spoken  to.  If  circumstances 
make  a  delay  necessary  in  returning  a  complete  answer  to  a  letter,  an  acknowledgment  of  its  re- 
ceipt should  be  sent,  briefly  explaining  the  necessity  for  the  delay.  Some  letters,  in  the  nature 
of  the  case,  do  not  require  an  answer,  but  letters  containing  remittances  of  money  or  other  im- 
portant enclosures  should  always  be  answered  promptly,  and  the  receipt  of  packages  sent  by  mail 
or  express  should  always  be  acknowledged. 

The  rule  of  courtesy  requiring  answers  to  letters  does  not  apply  to  circular  letters  or  to 
those  of  a  purely  advertising  character,  even  though  they  may  contain  a  request  for  an  answer. 
But  the  receipt  of  circulars,  catalogs,  etc.,  when  sent  in  response  to  a  request,  should  always  be 
acknowledged. 

231.  Confidential  letters.  It  is  a  general  rule  that  all  letters  not  written  for  publication 
are  "confidential,"  and  their  contents  should  not  be  revealed  (unless  by  the  express  permission  of 
the  writer),  to  any  one  other  than  the  person  written  to,  or  to  those  having  confidential  relations 
with  him.  To  violate  this  rule  is  entirely  dishonorable.  A  business  employee  is  also  in  honor 
bound  to  regard  as  confidential  all  correspondence  which  may  pass  through  his  hands  while  per- 
forming his  duties.  It  is  also  especially  mean  and  dishonorable  to  read,  unless  by  express  permis- 
sion or  request,  the  letters  intended  only  for  the  eye  of  another.  Violations  of  this  rule  are 
justifiable  only  in  extreme  cases,  as,  for  instance,  by  those  engaged  in  detecting  crime. 


SPECIAL  HINTS  AND  CAUTIONS  97 


Letters  of  a  personal  or  specially  confidential  character  addressed  to  a  business  proprietor 
or  manager,  and  intended  to  be  read  by  him  only,  should,  if  sent  to  the  firm  address,  be  marked 
on  the  envelope,  "Personal." 

232.  Abusive  letters.  Only  a  coward  will  make  use  of  a  letter  to  write  insolent  or  abusive 
things  that  he  would  not  dare  to  say  were  he  face  to  face  with  the  person  written  to.  It  is  a 
good  rule  never  to  write  a  letter  when  one  is  angry.  Nothing  is  more  vulgar  or  degrading  than 
to  carry  on  a  coarse  quarrel  by  means  of  the  mails.  If  an  offensive  letter  is  received,  either 
ignore  it  entirely  or  answer  it  briefly  in  terms  of  dignity  and  courtesy.  This  is  the  way  that  a 
lady  or  gentleman  "gets  even"  with  the  writer  of  an  insulting  letter.  It  m  ly  be  necessary  occa- 
sionally to  write  in  terms  of  severity,  but  such  letters  should  never  show  anger,  and  they  should 
always  be  kept  within  the  bounds  prescribed  by  courtesy  and  good  breeding. 

An  anonymous  letter  is  one  that  is  purposely  sent  without  a  signature,  or  over  a  fictitious 
signature.  A  forged  letter  is  one  to  which  the  name  of  a  person  other  than  the  writer  is  signed 
without  his  consent.  Anonymous  letters  are  written  only  by  the  cowardly,  the  vicious,  or  the 
criminal.    If  they  are  received,  it  is  usually  best  to  ignore  them  altogether. 

233.  Definiteness  and  brevity.  The  ideal  business  letter  is  the  one  that  carries  its  mes- 
sage in  the  fewest  words  and,  at  the  same  time,  is  so  definite  that  its  meaning  cannot  be  mis- 
understood. There  is  no  objection  to  a  long  letter,  provided  it  is  no  longer  than  necessary.  In 
trying  to  make  a  letter  brief,  it  may  be  made  so  indefinite  that  it  might  as  well  have  been  left 
unwritten.     Consider,  for  instance,  the  wording  of  the  following  letter: 

Gentlemen: 

I  have  just  seen  your  ad.   Send  me  one  of  the  books  at 
once . 

Yours  truly, 

J.  Smith. 

The  firm  written  to  may  have  a  score  of  advertisements,  and  may  publish  hundreds  of 
books.  The  "brief"  letter  would  probably  result  in  Mr.  Smith's  receiving  a  book  that  he  did 
not  want,  or  else  of  putting  the  firm  to  the  trouble  of  writing  a  letter  of  inquiry,  and  Mr.  Smith 
to  the  further  trouble  of  writing  again.  By  mentioning  in  his  first  letter  the  name  and  date  of 
the  periodical  containing  the  advertisement,  and  the  name  of  the  book  wanted,  this  trouble 
would  be  avoided. 

Hardly  less  annoying  than  the  indefinite  letter,  is  the  rambling,  badly  constructed  letter  with 
its  long  involved  sentences  full  of  "buts"  an:l  "ands,"  and  containing  irrelevant  matter  and 
needless  repetitions.  The  best  business  letters  are  made  up  of  short,  crisp  sentences  that  go 
straight  to  the  mark  and  leave  nothing  to  be  guessed  at.  It  is  a  pleasure  both  to  receive  and  to 
answer  such  letters. 

234.  Business  and  social  matters.  Books  on  letter-writing  generally  teach  that  matters 
of  business  and  of  friendship  should  not  be  referred  to  in  the  same  letter,  but  this  rule  is  not 
generally  observed  in  business  correspondence  among  business  men  who  are  friends  or  ac- 
quaintances. Indeed  there  seems  to  be  no  good  reason  for  the  rigid  observance  of  such  a  rule. 
A  country  merchant,  for  instance,  might,  during  a  visit  to  the  city,  be  entertained  socially  by 
the  members  of  the  firm  with  whom  he  does  business.  On  returning  to  his  home  town,  he  might 
write  to  this  firm  on  a  business  matter  and,  in  the  course  of  the  letter,  refer  to  the  courtesies  re- 
ceived or  ask  to  be  "remembered"  to  mutual  friends,  etc.  Such  things  add  a  human  element  to 
business  affairs  and,  so  far  from  being  objectionable  in  a  letter,  may,  and  often  do,  have  a  dis- 
tinct business  value.  If  any  matter  of  a  personal  or  social  nature  be  introduced  into  a  business 
letter,  however,  it  should  be  given  a  separate  paragraph,  preferably  near  the  close  of  the  letter. 

235.  Postscripts.  A  postscript  is  an  additional  paragraph  added  to  a  letter,  either  below 
the  signature  or  on  a  separate  sheet.  Its  purpose  is  to  set  forth  something  that  was  uninten- 
tionally omitted  when  the  letter  was  written.  The  postscript  is  introduced  by  the  letters.  P.  S. 
(abbreviation  of  the  Latin  expression,  "postumscriptum,"  meaning  "after  the  writing").  In 
signing  a  postscript,  the  writer  uses  his  initials  instead  of  his  ordinary  signature.  Postscripts 
should  be  avoided,  as  much  as  possible,  in  every  kind  of  correspondence. 


08  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Exercise  8. 

Prepare  written  answers  to  the  following  questions,  as  in  Exercise  7 : 

1.  Would  you  consider  it  advisable  to  include  in  a  circular  letter  a  special  request  for  an 
answer  ?     Why  ? 

2.  What  reasons  should  induce  a  stenographer  or  office  clerk  to  treat  as  confidential  the 
contents  of  letters  received  or  written  by  his  employer? 

3.  What  means  may  be  used  to  secure  brevity  in  a  business  letter? 

4.  Why  should  long  sentences  be  avoided? 

5.  Why  is  it  not  advisable  to  devote  a  considerable  portion  of  a  business  letter  to  personal 
or  social  matters? 

6.  What  means  may  be  taken  to  avoid  the  need  of  a  postscript? 

7.  What  advantage  is  gained  by  putting  into  separate  paragraphs  the  different  matters 
discussed  in  a  letter? 

8.  In  what  way  are  filing  systems  advantageous? 

9.  Why  should  important  enclosures  be  folded  with  the  letter  ? 

10.     Why  should  the  envelope  be  addressed  at  the  time  the  letter  is  written? 


LESSON  9. 
Classes  of  Business  Letters. 

236.  Acknowledgment.  Letters  of  acknowledgment  are  usually  very  brief,  consisting  of 
a  few  lines  announcing  the  receipt  of  money,  etc.  If  the  payment  is  in  currency,  the  receipt, 
written  in  due  form,  should  be  enclosed  with  the  letter.  If  the  payment  is  by  check,  draft,  or 
other  commercial  paper,  a  separate  receipt  is  usually  unnecessary.  The  following  is  an  accept- 
able form  for  a  letter  of  acknowledgment : 

Davenport,  Iowa,  June  25,  19 
0.  P.  Davis  &  Co. , 

Springdale,  111. 
Gentlemen: 

This  is  to  acknowledge  your  letter  of  June  22  contain- 
ing remittance  of  Chicago  draft  for  $62.45  in  settlement  of 
your  account  to  date. 

Thanking  you  for  the  favor,  we  are 

Very  truly  yours. 

Miller  &  Day. 

A  letter  acknowledging  the  receipt  of  a  payment  should  not  fail  to  mention  the  amount  and 
purpose  of  the  payment  and  the  form  of  remittance,  whether  by  draft,  money-order,  etc. 

237.  Enclosing  payments.  Letters  enclosing  payments  should  mention  the  amount,  pur- 
pose, and  form  of  payment.  They  may  or  may  not  refer  to  other  matters  of  a  business  nature. 
The  next  letter  illustrates  the  usual  form. 

749  East  Ave.,  Dayton,  0., 
March  20,  19   . 
0.  P.  Hamilton  &  Co., 

175  Fourth  St.,  Cincinnati. 
Gentlemen: 

Find  enclosed  express  money-order  for  $247.15,  in  pay- 
ment of  your  invoice  dated  February  26,  1906,  less  discount 
of  five  per  cent. 

Very  truly, 

George  H.  Bell  &  Sons. 


CLASSES  OP  BUSINESS  LETTEES 


238.  Ordering  goods.  It  is  the  custom  in  most  business  offices,  in  ordering  goods  by 
mail,  to  itemize  the  articles  wanted,  on  a  special  form  called  an  order-sheet,  instead  of  specify- 
ing the  goods  in  the  body  of  the  letter.  Many  firms  supply  order-sheets  to  their  customers.  It  is 
very  important,  in  ordering  goods  by  letter,  to  specify  clearly  the  kinds  of  goods  wanted,  also 
to  make  no  mistake  as  to  quantities  required.  Such  orders  are  in  the  nature  of  written  contracts, 
and  mistakes  are  at  the  risk  of  the  party  giving  the  order.  If  the  goods  ordered  are  listed  in  the 
catalog,  it  is  best  to  give  both  the  catalog  number  of  the  article  and  the  name.  In  the  first  of 
the  two  following  letters,  it  is  supposed  that  the  goods  are  listed  separately  on  an  enclosed  order- 
sheet.     In  the  second  letter,  the  goods  are  listed  in  the  body  of  the  letter. 

Clear  Lake^  Wis.,  May  14,  19 
The  Badger  State  Manufacturing  Co., 
526  Water  St.,  Milwaukee,  Wis. 
Gentlemen: 

Please  ship  goods  as  per  enclosed  order-sheet,  as  soon 
as  possible,  routing  them  over  North-Western  Railway. 

We  shall  expect  the  usual  sixty  days'  credit,  with 
discount  of  six  per  cent,  if  paid  before  maturity. 

Very  truly  yours, 

J.  P.  Ames  &  Co. 


Henderson,  Ind. ,  Sept.  4,  19 
0.  A.  Spencer  &  Co., 

347  Lake  St.,  Detroit,  Mich. 
Gentlemen: 

Please  ship  us  by  U.  S.  Express  the  following  goods  at- 
prices  as  given  in  your  catalog  of  19   : 

1  doz .  prs.  Shears,  #735. 

I   "    "Keenkutter"  Knives  #598. 

1-1/Z   doz.  Combination  Knives  #613. 

3  sets  Rogers'  Knives  and  Forks  #827. 

5  doz.    "     Ta'ole  Spoons  #598. 

5  sets    "     Teaspoons  #841. 

Please  get  tlr-ese  goods  to  us  as  soon  as  pos.sible. 

Very  truly, 

J.  W  Rice. 

In  letters  ordering  goods,  the  method  of  transportation,  whether  by  freight  or  express, 
should  be  specified.  If  desirable,  the  letter  may  also  indicate,  in  the  case  of  a  freight  order,  the 
railroad  over  which  the  buyer  wishes  the  goods  shipped,  and,  if  by  express,  the  name  of  the 
express  company. 

Exercise  9. 

General  Directions.  In  this  and  all  subsequent  exercises  in  letter-writing,  use  stand- 
ard business  stationery.  Properly  fold  and  enclose  your  letters  in  a  correctly  addressed  en- 
velope, but  do  not  seal  the  envelope.  If  you  are  not  provided  with  imitation  stamps,  indicate 
the  position  of  the  stamp,  as  in  the  model  forms  on  page  77. 

In  writing  your  letters,  use  your  own  phraseology;  do  not  copy  the  forms  of  expression 
employed  in  the  model  letters. 

1.  A.  M.  Blair  &  Co.,  of  Mendota,  III.,  have  sent  you  a  postal  money-order  for  $21.40. 
in  settlement  of  their  account  to  date.  Write  a  proper  letter  of  acknowledgment  and  enclose  a 
receipt  for  the  payment. 

2.  Write  a  letter  to  Geo.  S.  Clarke,  247  Western  Ave.,  Chicago,  enclosing  a  check  for 


100  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


$75,  to  be  applied  as  a  payment  on  your  note  in  his  favor,  of  June  6,  1915.     Request  a  receipt 
for  the  payment  and  say  that  you  will  pay  the  remainder  of  the  note  at  an  early  date. 

3.  Write  to  the  Western  Plow  Co.,  241  River  St.,  Moline,  111.,  ordering  one  dozen  Acme 
Cultivators,  Style  C,  Catalog  number  79.  Direct  shipment  by  I.  C.  Ry.,  and  say  that  you  will 
remit  the  amount  of  the  bill  as  soon  as  the  goods  are  received. 

4.  Write  to  R.  C.  Watson  &  Co.,  1146  Broad  St.,  Philadelphia,  ordering  a  bill  of  dry- 
goods,  as  per  an  enclosed  order-sheet.  Order  shipment  by  B.  &  O.  Ry.  and  ask  them  to  bill  the 
goods  at  sixty  days. 

5.  Write  to  the  Central  Publishing  Co.,  376  Lake  St.,  Toledo,  Ohio,  enclosing  a  New 
York  draft  for  $27.15  in  payment  of  their  bill  (specifying  date).  Also,  include  in  the  body  of 
your  letter  an  order  for  forty  Robinson's  Spellers,  to  be  sent  by  American  Express  and  billed  at 
thirty  days. 


LESSON  10. 

Classes  of  Business  Letters. 

239.  Responses  to  advertisements.  Letters  responding  to  advertisements  should  always 
mention  the  name  of  the  periodical  containing  the  advertisement.  Care  should  be  taken  that 
the  letter  sets  forth  clearly  the  writer's  wishes  in  connection  with  the  matters  referred  to.  Let- 
ters of  this  character  take  wide  range  as  to  form,  length,  etc.,  depending  on  the  nature  of  the 
advertisement  that  is  being  answered.  The  following  letter  illustrates  the  usual  form  for  this 
class  of  letters : 

35  Pine  St.,  Kalamazoo,  Mich., 
July  Z,    19 
Mr.  C.  B.  Wilson, 

Room  E47,  Tribune  Bldg.,  Chicago. 
Dear  Sir: 

I  am  writing  this  in  response  to  your  advertisement  of 
this  date  in  the  Chicago  Record-Herald,  relating  to  fruit 
lands  in  Southwestern  Iowa  for  sale  by  you.   I  am  in  a  posi- 
tion to  consider  an  investment  of  this  kind  and  should  like 
to  hear  from  you  further  regarding  the  location,  character, 
and  price  of  the  lands  referred  to. 
Awaiting  your  response,  I  am 

Yours  very  truly, 

Charles  S.  McDonald. 

240.  Applications  for  positions.  This  is  a  very  important  class  of  letters,  especially  for 
young  people  who  are  studying  stenography,  bookkeeping,  etc.,  with  the  view  of  applying  for 
office  positions.  The  qualifications  of  an  applicant  for  a  position  are  likely  to  be  judged  by  the 
character  of  his  letter  of  application.  It  is  for  this  reason  that  employers  often  require  applica- 
tions for  such  positions  to  be  made  by  letter.  If,  as  is  usually  the  case,  the  application  is  in  re- 
sponse to  an  advertisement,  the  writer  should  refer  to  the  periodical,  date  of  advertisement,  etc. 
He  should  be  particular  to  set  forth  in  his  letter  all  information  that  may  be  called  for  in  the 
advertisement.  He  may  also  mention  any  other  facts  that  may  be  relevant  to  his  qualifications 
for  the  desired  position.  The  letter  may  be  either  typewritten  or  in  the  writer's  own  hand- 
writing. 

In  writing  a  letter  of  application,  great  care  should  be  taken  to  have  the  letter  neat  and 
business-like,  also,  to  have  no  errors  in  spelling,  capitalizing,  punctuating,  etc.  The  following 
is  an  acceptable  form  for  such  a  letter : 


CLASSES  OF  BUSINESS  LETTERS  W 


£41  Elm  Ave,,  Madison,  Wis., 
Oct.  24,  1905. 
Reynolds  Printing  and  Binding  Co., 

51  Ninth  St.,  St.  Paul,  Minn. 
Gentlemen: 

I  am  writing  you  in  response  to  your  advertisement  for 
an  assistant  bookkeeper,  as  published  in  the  Pioneer  Press 
of  Oct.  ZZ. 

I  am  a  graduate  of  the  Madison  School  of  Commerce, 
class  of  '03,  and  have  had  nearly  two  years'  experience 
with  the  firm  of  Clark  &  Wilson,  wholesale  grocers  of  this 
city,  my  present  employers.   For  the  past  six  months,  I 
have  had  full  charge  of  the  books  in  their  tea  and  coffee 
department  and  I  have  also  had  some  experience  in  collect- 
ing.  The  manager  of  this  firm,  Mr.  A.  C.  Clark,  permits 
me  to  refer  you  to  him  as  to  my  qualifications  for  the 
position  applied  for. 

I  may  say  that  my  position  here  is  a  fairly  remuner- 
tive  one  and  my  relations  with  my  employers  are  most  pleas- 
ant, but  I  should  like  to  secure  a  position  in  a  larger 
city,  where  I  shall  have  a  better  opportunity  for  advance- 
ment as  an  accountant. 

Hoping  to  receive  an  encouraging  response  from  you,  I 
remain 

Yours  sincerely, 

Orville  T.  Brooks. 

Exercise  10. 

1.  Answer  the  following  advertisement,  requesting  full  particulars;  say  that  you  are  in  a 
position  to  make  the  required  mvestment  if  everything  is  satisfactory : 

FOR  SALE.  Stock  in  a  reliable  manufacturing  concern  paying  annual  dividend  of  12  per  cent.  Ofifers  of 
less  than  $500  not  considered.    Address,  Holmes  Manufacturing  Co.,  Tribune,  Chicago. 

2.  Write  a  letter  of  application  for  the  position  referred  to  in  the  following  advertisement : 

WANTED.  An  assistant  bookkeeper,  either  lady  or  gentleman.  Must  be  a  good  penman,  with  working 
knowledge  of  bookkeeping  and  office  methods.    References  required.    C.  P.  Lane  &  Sons,  1047  6th  Ave.,  New  York. 

3.  Answer  the  following  advertisement.  Ask  about  nature  of  business  and  chance  for 
promotion : 

STENOGRAPHER  WANTED.  Bright  young  man  or  woman  who  can  take  ordinary  dictation.  Must  have 
had  good  English  training  and  know  something  about  business.  Give  qualifications  fully,  with  references  as  to 
character,  ability,  etc.    Address,  Wilson  &  Harper,  74  Monroe  St.,  Detroit,  Mich. 


LESSON  11. 
Classes  of  Business  Letters. 

241.  Requesting  information.  Letters  of  this  class,  if  they  are  addressed  to  a  stranger 
and  relate  to  matters  in  which  he  has  no  interest,  should  be  accompanied  with  a  stamp  or 
stamped  envelope  for  answer.  The  model  letter  given  in  Lesson  6  will  serve  as  a  suitable 
example.    Make  no  mention  of  the  enclosed  stamp. 

242.  Soliciting  trade.  Of  all  letters  that  business  men  are  called  upon  to  write,  those 
soliciting  trade  are  probably  the  most  important.  They  belong  to  the  class  of  letters  that  are 
expected  to  yield  results  in  dollars  and  cents.  They  should  be  direct  and  business-like  and  so 
composed  as  to  please  as  well  as  to  convince.  A  good  example  of  such  a  letter  is  the  one 
addressed  to  the  Anderson  Grocery  Co.,  on  page  90. 


P&  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


243.  Dunning-letters.  These  are  letters  requesting  the  payment  of  money  or  the  adjust- 
ment of  accounts.  They  require  the  exercise  of  great  care  and  good  judgment.  To  write  a 
dunning-letter  in  such  form  that  it  will  accomplish  its  purpose  without  giving 'ofifense,  some- 
times requires  a  most  diplomatic  and  facile  pen.  Circumstances  may  require  that  a  dunning- 
letter  be  peremptory,  or  even  severe,  in  its  terms,  but  it  never  sliould  be  discourteous  or  of- 
fensive, no  matter  what  the  provocation  may  be.  The  character  of  a  dunning-letter,  whether 
persuasive,  conciliatory,  formal,  or  peremptory,  will  depend  wholly  upon  the  nature  of  the  case. 
The  following  examples  illustrate  some  of  the  forms  such  letters  may  take  in  the  case  specified : 

1.    Notice  of  Approaching  Maturity  of  Note. 

i^ear   Sir: 

Your  note  in  our  favor  for  $175.25,  dated  October  16,. 
19   ,  matures  on  the  15th  of  the  present  month. 

You  will  confer  a  favor  by  arranging  to  take  care  of 
this  matter  promptly. 

Yours  very  truly. 

Day,  Morton  &  Co. 

2.    Calling  Attention  to  Overdue  Account. 

Gentlemen: 

We  enclose  statement  of  your  account,  now  some  weeks 
past  due . 

We  suppose  the  matter  has  been  overlooked  and  hope  that 
you  will  kindly  give  it  prompt  attention. 

Very  truly, 

Eugene  Snow  &  Sons. 

3.    Persuasive  and  Conciliatory  Request  for  Payment  on  Account. 

Doar   oir: 

I  am  writing  this  to  request  earnestly  the  payment  of 
some  portion,  at  least,  of  your  account. 

As  you  doubtless  know,  the  amount  is  long  past  due,  and 
I  have  several  times  requested  payment.   You  will  surely 
agree  that  I  have  been  quite  patient  in  this  affair,  but  .'i 
am  just  now  very  much  in  need  of  money,  and  I  hope  you  will 
favor  me  with  a  payment  at  once. 

Trusting  that  you  will  not  disappoint  me  in  this 
matter,  I  am 

Sincerely  yours, 

James  S.  Marvin. 

4.    More  Peremptory. 

Dear  Sir: 

We  have  several  times  requested  the  payment  of  the 
amount  you  cv?e  this  firm,  now  some  six  months  overdue,  but, 
xhus  far,  you  seem  to  have  ignored  our  request. 

Much  to  our  regret,  we  are  now  constrained  to  take 
effective  measures  for  the  collection  of  the  amount  due  us. 
Unless  you  arrange  at  once  for  the  satisfactory  adjustment 
of  your  account,  either  by  cash  payment  or  by  properly  se- 
cured note,  we  must  take  the  necessary  steps  for  its  collec- 
tion through  the  courts. 

Hoping  for  a  prompt  response,  we  are 

Very  truly, 

Hammond  &  Sons. 


CLASSES  OF  BUSINESS  LETTERS  103 

Exercise  11. 

Write  to  Chas.  S.  Moore,  County  Supt.  of  Schools,  Hawley,  Rock  Co.,  Colo.,  asking  in- 
formation as  to  teaching  in  his  county.  Enquire  as  to  number  of  teachers,  length  of  term,  and 
salaries  paid.  Ask,  also,  as  to  the  climate  and  resources  of  the  county  and  the  railway  connec- 
tions with  Denver. 

2.  Answer  the  preceding  letter,  giving  the  required  information.. 

3.  Assuming  that  you  have  decided  to  open  a  book-  and  stationery-store  in  your  town, 
write  a  circular  letter,  such  as  you  might  appropriately  mail  to  the  leading  citizens  of  the  com- 
munity, for  the  purpose  of  announcing  your  business  and  soliciting  trade. 

4.  Mr.  Very  Slowpay  has  for  some  months  been  owing  you  a  considerable  amount  and 
pays  no  attention  to  statements  rendered.  Write  him  such  a  letter  as  should,  without  offend- 
ing him,  induce  him  to  pay  the  debt. 

5.  You  have  decided  to  resort  to  the  courts  for  the  collection  of  a  debt  owed  to  you  for  a 
year  or  more  by  D.  B.  Dodge,  of  Hoaxville,  N.  Y.  Write  him  a  peremptory  letter  demanding 
a  settlement. 


LESSON  12. 
Classes  of  Business  Letters. 

244.  Requesting  credit  or  other  favors.  These  letters  also  call  for  the  exercise  of  much 
tact  and  judgment  on  the  part  of  tlie  writer.  They  should  contain  no  suggestion  of  fawning  or 
severity,  neither  should  they  have  a  whining  or  a  complaining  tone.  Like  all  other  business 
letters,  they  should  be  direct  and  manly,  and  have  the  ring  of  truthfulness  and  sincerity.  Since 
it  is  not  supposed  that  anyone  would  write  a  letter  which  prefers  an  unreasonable  request,  a 
letter  asking  for  a  business  favor  may  be  written  in  the  tone  of  confidence  which  assumes  that 
the  favor  will  be  granted.     Following  is  an  example  of  such  a  letter: 

Gentlemen: 

I  am  carrying  on  a  small  but  prosperous  retail  grocerj^ 
business  in  this  town  and  have  decided  to  move  into  a  largei* 
bx'.i  Iding  and  work  for  an  increased  trade.   If  this  is  done, 
Z    must  carry  a  larger  stock  than  heretofore,  and  I  am 
writing  this  to  lea.rn  whether  your   house  is  willing  to  ex- 
tend me  a  credit  of,  say,  from  $500  to  $600  on  goods  bought 
at  ninety  days. 

I  am  quite  aware  that  my  commercial  rating,  really, 
does  not  justify  such  a  credit,  but  it  has  occurred  to  me 
that,  considering  the  circumstances,  you  might  be  disposed 
to  allow  it. 

If  desired,  I  shall  be  glad  to  file  with  you  a  certi- 
fied financial  statement,  and  I  can  also  give  you  the  best 
of  local  references  as  to  my  business  standing  and  prospects . 

Awaiting  a  favorable  response,  I  am 

Very  truly  yours, 

John  H.  Allricht. 

245.  Letters  of  introduction.  The  purpose  of  a  letter  of  introduction  is  to  introduce 
the  person  receiving  it  to  one  who  has  never  met  him  personally.  It  is  not  mailed,  but  is  deliv- 
ered by  the  person  presenting  the  letter.  The  words,  "Introducing  Mr. ,"  should  be  writ- 
ten near  the  lower  left-hand  corner  of  the  envelope.  (See  Fig.  5,  page  79.)  A  letter  of  intro- 
duction should  never  be  sealed.  On  presenting  it,  the  person  introduced  should  give  his  name 
and  residence,  and  mention  the  writer  of  the  letter.  The  person  receiving  the  letter  should 
read  it  before  engaging  the  bearer  in  conversation. 

Letters  of  introduction  may  be  either  formal  or  familiar,  but  they  should  always  be  brief, 
and  contain  nothing  not  essential  to  their  purpose.     As  a  rule,  they  should  be  pen-written. 


104  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


The  following  are  appropriate  forms : 

(Formal.) 
Dear  Sir: 

This  will  introduce  to  you  Mr.  Amos  S.  Jennings  of  this  city,  one  of  our  leading  dry- 
goods  dealers,  and  an  entirely  reliable  business  man.  You  will  find  Mr.  Jennings  a  very 
agreeable  gentleman,  and  altogether  worthy  of  any  courtesies  you  may  be  able  to  show  him. 

Very  truly, 

Arkwright  &  Co. 

(More  familiar.) 
My  Dear  Weston  : 

The  gentleman  who  presents  this  letter,  Mr.  Henry  Shields,  has  for  many  years  been  a 
valued  friend  of  mine.     I  think  you  have  heard  me  speak  of  him. 

Mr.  Shields  is  one  of  the  best-known  electricians  in  our  city,  and  goes  to  Washington  to 
look  after  certain  patents  in  which  he  is  interested.  This  is  his  first  visit  to  the  capital,  and  he 
will  gratefully  appreciate  the  courtesies  that  I  am  sure  you  will  be  glad  ot  show  him. 

Your  friend, 

I  CM  L.  Mason. 
Mr.  David  Weston, 

Washington,  D.  C. 

246.  Letters  of  recommendation.  Letters  of  this  class  are  either  General  or  Special. 
The  former  are  addressed  to  the  public  in  general,  and  the  latter  to  individuals.  They  are 
usually  written  by  employers  for  the  purpose  of  endorsing  and  commending  those  who  have 
been  in  their  employ.  A  special  letter  of  recommendation  may  also  serve  the  purpose  of  a  letter 
of  introduction. 

Letters  of  recommendation,  to  be  effective,  should  be  concise  and  should  set  forth  the 
special  as  well  as  the  general  capabilities  of  the  person  recommended.  If  the  latter  is  leaving 
the  employ  of  the  person  who  gives  the  letter  of  recommendation,  the  reasons  for  his  leaving 
should  be  given  in  such  a  way  as  to  show  that  there  has  been  no  dissatisfaction  with  his  work. 
This  adds  greatly  to  the  value  of  the  letter. 

No  one  having  a  proper  regard  for  his  word  will  write  either  a  general  or  a  special  letter 
of  recommendation  for  the  benefit  of  a  person  who  is  not  fairly  entitled  to  it.  Weak  and  easy- 
going employers  sometimes  violate  this  rule,  and  give  letters  of  recommendation  to  those 
whom  they  have  actually  discharged  for  incompetency.  Such  a  practice  is  not  only  reprehen- 
sible but  clearly  dishonorable.  Others  will  evade  the  matter  by  giving  to  unworthy  persons  let- 
ters of  recommendation  so  vaguely  worded  as  to  mean  but  little  as  an  endorsement.  Much 
better  is  it  firmly  to  refuse  such  letters  to  all  but  those  who  are  entirely  deserving,  and,  when 
giving  them  to  those  who  are  worthy,  to  write  the  letter  in  such  unmistakable  terms  that  it  will 
really  be  of  value  to  the  one  receiving  it. 

Study  the  following  forms: 

General  Letter  of  Becommendation. 

To  the  Public; 

We  take  much  pleasure  in  giving  the  bearer.  Miss  Jennie 
L.  Stanton,  this  unqualified  endorsement  of  her  merits  as  a 
capable  and  accurate  amanuensis  stenographer.   Miss  Stanton 
is  courteous  and  obliging,  as  well  as  painstaking  and  con- 
scientious, in  all  her  work.    She  has  been  in  our  employ 
for  three  years  and  leaves  on  account  of  the  removal  of  her 
fauDily  to  another  city. 

A.  C .  Bowen  &  Co. , 
per  A.  C.  B. 


FORMAL  AND  SOCIAL  LETTERS  105 


Special  Letter  of  Recommendation. 

Gentlemen: 

We  are  informed  that  the  bearer,  Mr.  Harry  E.  Turner, 
is  applying  for  the  position  of  manager  of  your  silk  de- 
partment . 

It  is  a  pleasure  for  us  to  say  that  we  know  Mr.  Turner 
to  be  alert  and  diligent,  as  well  as  faithful  to  his  duties 
and  loyal  to  his  employers.   He  is  a  fine  judge  of  goods 
and  has  done  most  of  the  buying  in  our  dry  goods  department 
for  the  past  two  years. 

We  regret  to  lose  him,  but  the  position  he  seeks  in 
your  house  is  probably  much  better  than  anything  we  have  to 
offer,  and  we  hope  that  you  viill  decide  to  employ  him. 

Very  truly  yours. 

Sears  &  Manderson. 

Exercise  12. 

1.  Suppose  that  you  owe  for  a  bill  of  goods  bought  of  Venable,  Moore  &  Co.,  176  Madi- 
son St.,  Chicago,  that  the  bill  matures  soon,  and  that  it  is  inconvenient  to  meet  the  obligation 
on  maturity.  Write  requesting  an  extension  of  thirty  days.  Assume  the  necessary  dates, 
amount  of  bill,  etc. 

2.  You  are  about  to  open  a  book  and  stationery  store  in  your  town.  Write  to  A.  C. 
May  &  Co.,  247  Euclid  Ave.,  Cleveland,  Ohio,  asking  the  privilege  of  opening  a  ninety-day  ac- 
count to  the  amout  of  $1,000.  Give  particulars  as  to  class  of  goods  wanted,  and  refer  to  local 
bankers  and  business  houses,  etc. 

3.  Write  a  formal  letter  introducing  to  your  teacher,  a  friend  who  expects  to  enter  school. 

4.  Write  to  a  friend  who  is  attending  some  school,  introducing  another  friend  who  ex- 
pects to  enter  school. 

5.  Write  a  general  letter  recommending  the  courses  and  instruction  at  the  school  you  are 
attending. 

6.  You  have  a  friend  who  seeks  employment  as  a  bookkeeper  in  a  business  house  with 
which  you  have  had  dealings.     Write  a  suitable  letter  of  recommendation. 


LESSON  13. 
Formal  and  Social  Letters. 

247.  A  full  consideration  of  social  and  personal  letters  does  not  come  within  the  purpose 
of  this  course,  but  some  suggestions  regarding  the  more  important  requirements  of  this  class  of 
correspondence  are  offered  in  this  lesson. 

248.  Invitations  and  acceptances.  These  are  of  two  classes.  Formal  and  Informal. 
Special  stationery  is  used,  the  style  and  quality  varying  with  the  constantly  changing  rules  of 
etiquette  and  fashion.  Formal  invitations  may  be  either  printed  or  pen-written,  and  are 
usually  (but  not  always)  phrased  in  the  third  person.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the 
usual  forms: 

INVITATION    TO    DINE. 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Henry  Stuart  request  the  pleasure  of  Mr.  Frank  L.  Snow's  company  at  a 
dinner-party  to  be  given  Wednesday,  May  Cth,  at  six  o'clock. 
126  Maple  St. 

ACCEPTANCE   OF   THE   ABOVE. 

Mr.  Frank  L.  Snow  takes  much  pleasure  in  accepting  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Henry  Stuart's  kind 
invitation  for  May  6th. 

NON-ACCEPTANCE,   OR    "rEGRET." 

Mr.  Frank  L.  Snow  regrets  that  important  business  engagements  prevent  the  acceptance 
of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Henry  Stuart's  kind  invitation  for  May  6th. 


106  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


GENERAL   INVITATION. 

The  ladies  of  St.  Mary's  Guild  request  the  pleasure  of  your  attendance  at  a  reception  to 
be  given  at  the  social  parlors  of  the  Seventh  Avenue  Church,  Tuesday,  Oct.  12,  at  eight  o'clock. 

Music  and  light  refreshments. 

Mabel  Lane,  ^ 

Esther  Miller,     ■-    Committee. 

Rose  C.  Stevens,  ) 

INFORMAL   invitation. 

241  Center  Ave.,  June  6,  '13. 
Dear  Tom  : 

We  are  to  have  a  few  friends  at  an  informal  dinner  Thursday,  June  7,  at  five  o'clock, 
and  especially  wish  you  to  be  with  us. 
Please  don't  disappoint  us. 

Your  friends, 
Mr.  Thomas  N.  Carter,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Charles  Morton. 

125  Elm  St. 

acceptance. 

125  Elm  St.,  June  6,  '13. 
Dear  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Morton  : 

It  will  afford  me  great  pleasure  to  be  numbered  among  your  guests  at  the  dinner-party  on 
June  7. 

Sincerely, 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Charles  Morton,  Thomas  N.  Carter. 

241  Center  Ave. 

All  special  invitations  should  be  answered  promtply.  Invitations  of  a  general  nature,  as 
those  inviting  attendance  at  receptions,  etc.,  given  by  clubs  or  societies,  do  not  require  an  an- 
swer, unless  there  is  a  special  request  to  that  effect. 

249.  Congratulation.  Letters  of  congratulation  may  appropriately  be  sent  to  one's 
friends  or  business  acquaintances,  on  the  occasion  of  any  fortuitous  event,  as  a  wedding,  an 
election,  or  appointment  to  a  position  of  honor  or  profit,  or  upon  the  accomplishment  of  any 
notable  or  praiseworthy  achievement  on  the  part  of  the  person  who  is  congratulated.  Letters 
of  congratulation  should  be  sincere  and  natural,  rather  than  formal  and  perfunctory,  and  if  jus- 
tified by  the  relations  of  the  persons,  may  be  familiar  and  colloquial.     Study  the  following : 

My  Dear  Sir  : 

I  have  just  learned,  through  the  Boston  papers,  of  your  appointment  to  the  Glasgow  con- 
sulate. Your  many  friends  here  in  your  old  home  will  join  me  in  the  pleasure  of  sending 
heartiest  congratulations.     We  all  know  how  wisely  the  President  has  chosen. 

That  you  may  find  the  duties  of  your  new  field  of  work  pleasant  and  congenial  as  well  as 
remunerative,  is  my  earnest  wish. 

Sincerely  yours, 

Chas.  S.  Ramsey. 
(More  familiar.) 
Dear  Helen: 

The  arrival  of  this  month's  Home  Journal  containing  your  delightful  poem,  occasioned  a 
joyous  commotion  in  our  little  household.  How  eagerly  was  it  read,  and  how  ardently  do  we 
all  join  in  sending  you  congratulations!  Even  "Tiny  Tim"  seemed  to  realize  the  importance 
of  the  occasion,  and  crowed  exultantly. 

Apart  from  our  natural  interest  in  its  clever  author,  and  our  pride  in  being  numbered 
among  her  friends,  we  all  agree  that  the  poem  is  a  real  gem  and  will  materially  add  to  your 
already  well-won  reputation. 

Your  sincere  friend, 

Amy  French. 


TELEGRAPHING  107 


250.  Letters  of  condolence.  These  letters  are  written  on  the  occurrence  of  any  misfor- 
tune to  our  friends,  as  the  death  of  near  relatives,  business  reverses,  etc.  Like  letters  of  con- 
gratulation, they  should  be  heartfelt  rather  than  formal,  and  free  from  commonplace  cant,  as 
well  as  from  the  terms  of  extravagant  or  overwrought  emotion.  It  is  scarcely  worth  while  to 
give  examples  of  such  letters.  One  should  write  naturally,  and  as  he  really  feels,  and  in  a  way 
to  express  a  sincere  sympathy  that  will  be  welcome  to  the  afflicted  one. 

251.  Friendship  or  affection.  The  unfailing  charm  of  a  letter  of  friendship  or  affection 
is  naturalness.  It  does  not  require  a  person  of  literary  skill  to  write  delightful  letters.  All 
that  is  needed  is  the  art  of  putting  into  a  letter  what  one  would  say  were  he  in  the  presence  of  his 
friend.  Beyond  this,  very  little  helpful  instruction  can  be  given  as  to  the  construction  of  this 
class  of  letters.    A  few  suggestions,  however,  may  prove  helpful. 

1.  Do  not  presume  on  friendship  or  on  family  or  other  relationship,  to  write  careless  or 
untidy  letters.  The  higher  the  regard  in  which  one  holds  his  correspondent,  the  more  care  he 
should  take  to  write  a  faultless  letter.  It  is  but  a  shabby  indication  of  regard  to  scrawl  on 
cheap  or  soiled  paper,  a  penciled  letter  to  the  dearest  friend  one  has  in  the  world,  because  it  is 
"only"  father  or  mother  or  brother  Will ! 

2.  One  should  take  the  same  pains  to  give  a  proper  heading  to  a  letter  of  friendship  that 
he  takes  in  the  case  of  a  business  letter.  He  should  sign  it  with  his  full  signature  unless  he 
uses  a  special  request  envelope ;  other  wise,  in  case  of  miscarriage  or  non-delivery,  the  postal 
authorities  will  be  unable  to  return  it  to  the  writer.  Thousands  of  dollars  accumulate  annually 
at  the  dead-letter  office  at  Washington,  the  money  being  taken  from  unsigned  letters  that  are 
improperly  or  incompletely  addressed. 

In  the  case  of  social  or  other  letters  beginning  with  a  familiar  salutation,  the  name  and 
address  of  the  person  written  to  should  be  written  at  the  left-hand  side  of  the  page,  below  the 
closing.  This  is  to  enable  the  postal  authorities  to  send  the  letter  to  its  destination,  if,  through 
any  accident,  the  envelope  should  be  destroyed  or  the  superscription  obliterated  during  trans- 
mission.    (See  No.  7,  page  75.) 

Exercise  13. 

1.  Your  class  is  to  give  a  banquet  as  a  feature  of  the  graduating  exercises.  Write  a  suit- 
able invitation  to  be  sent  to  the  guests.     Specify  the  place,  date,  and  hour  of  the  banquet. 

2.  Write  an  informal  invitation  to  attend  an  evening  party.  Write  an  acceptance  of 
your  invitation,  also  a  "regret." 

3.  Prepare  a  letter  of  congratulation  to  a  busiriess  acquaintance  who  has  been  appointed 
Private  Secretary  to  the  Governor  of  your  state. 

4.  You  have  learned  of  the  death  of  a  former  schoolmate.  Write  a  suitable  letter  of  con- 
dolence to  the  parents. 


LESSON  14. 
Telegraphing. 

252.  The  writing  of  telegrams  requires  the  greatest  brevity  of  expression  that  is  consist- 
ent with  clearness. 

Telegrams  of  ten  words  or  less  are  charged  for  at  certain  rates,  which  vary  with  the  num- 
ber of  times  the  message  must  be  "repeated,"  or  re-telegraphed,  during  the  course  of  transmis- 
sion. For  a  message  of  more  than  ten  words,  there  is  an  additional  charge  for  each  extra  word. 
It  becomes  important,  therefore,  for  those  who  do  business  by  telegraph,  to  learn  to  write  their 
messages  in  the  fewest  words  possible.  In  telegraphing,  it  is  customary  to  omit  all  words  not 
absolutely  necessary  to  the  understanding  of  the  message.  Notice  how  this  is  accomplished  in 
the  following  examples: 


108 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


MESSAGE. 

The  Acme  brand  of  starch  is  out  of  stock. 
Shall  we  ship  our  Nonpareil,  which  is  about 
the  same  grade?     Please  telegraph  us. 
(24  words.) 

I    have   succeeded    in    effecting   a    satisfac- 
tory settlement  with  the  Consolidated  Coal  & 
Iron  Co.  and  shall  start  for  Chicago  to-night. 
Will  see  you  at  Palmer  House  Saturday. 
(28  words.) 

Please  ship  by  express  as  soon  as  possible, 
forty  copies  Brown's  Arithmetic.  Will  remit 
cash  on  receipt  of  goods. 

(19  words.) 


CONDENSED. 

Out  of  Acme  starch.     Can  ship  Nonpareil 


same  grade. 


Wire. 

(10  words.) 


Satisfactory   settlement   with    Consolidated. 
Leave  to-night.     At  Palmer  House  Saturday. 
(10  words.) 


Express     forty     Brown's    Arithmetic, 
mittance  upon  receipt  of  goods. 
(9  words.) 


Re- 


EX.\MI>LES  SHOWING  CONDENSATION  OF  PHRASES,  CLAUSES,  ETC. 


1.  If  the  sale  is  to  be  made  to-day,  t'.le- 
graph  me  at  once. 

2.  Please  ship  at  once  by  express. 

3.  The  attorneys  for  the  parties  who  be- 
gan the  suit. 

4.  It  is  generally  believed  that  the  fire  is 
the  work  of  an  incendiary. 

5.  The  stockholders  of  the  Warriner 
Manufacturing  Co.  will  not  sell  for  less  than 
forty  thousand  dollars. 

6.  Telegraph  me  at  once. 


1.     If  sale  to-day,  wire. 


2. 
3^ 

4. 

5. 

sand. 


Express. 

Plaintiff's  attorneys. 

Incendiarism  generally  suspected. 

Warriner  stockholders  want  forty  thou- 


6.     Wire. 


Rules  Relating  to  Telegraph  Messages. 

253.  1.  Figures  are  never  telegraphed,  but,  if  written  in  a  message,  are  estimated  ac- 
cording to  the  number  of  words  required  to  write  them  out.  Thus,  "$1974"  would  be  tele- 
graphed "nineteen  seventy-four  dollars" — four  words. 

2.  Hyphenated  words,  as  half-morocco,  twenty-five,  eighty-pound,  letter-heads,  etc.,  are 
counted  as  two  words.  In  names,  each  given  name  or  initial  counts  as  a  separate  word.  Thus, 
the  name,  J.  M.  Jones,  would  be  charged  for  as  three  words,  should  it  occur  in  the  body  of  a 
message.  The  initials,  C.  O.  D.  (collect  on  delivery),  f.  o.  b.  (free  on  board),  A.  M.,  P.  M., 
and  a  few  other  abbreviations,  go  as  one  word. 

3.  Telegrams  may  be  prepaid  or  sent  "collect,"  tliat  is,  to  be  paid  for  by  the  person  to 
whom  the  message  is  sent.  As  a  rule,  telegrams  should  be  sent  prepaid,  but  they  may  be  sent 
"collect"  when  they  relate  to  business  in  which  the  person  to  whom  they  are  sent  is  interested. 

4.  No  charge  is  made  for  the  date,  or  for  the  address  from  which  tlie  message  is  sent; 
neither  is  there  a  charge  for  the  name  and  address  of  the  person  telegraphed  to,  nor  for  the 
signature  of  the  writer. 

Code-words.  Firms  doing  much  business  by  telegraph  or  ocean  cable  often  use  a  system 
of  code  words,  as  a  means  of  shortening  messages,  one  word  standing  for  a  descriptive  phrase 
or  title  of  several  words.  Some  business  codes  are  very  elaborate,  and  by  means  of  these  a 
ten-word  message  may  be  made  to  convey  information  tliat,  without  the  employment  of  a  code, 
would  require  hundreds  of  words. 

Night  letters.  Tlie  leading  telegraph  companies  of  America  now  permit  the  sending  of  a 
so-called  "niglit  letter"'  not  exceeding  fifty  words,  at  the  same  charge  as  for  a  ten-word  day  mes- 
sage. Night  letters  will  be  sent  only  between  the  hours  of  six  o'clock  P.  M.  and  midnight.  The 
service  extends  to  all  points  in  the  United  States,  and  most  of  Canada,  but  not  to  Alaska  or  the 
island  possessions  of  the  United  States.  The  use  of  code  words  is  not  permissible  in  night 
letters.  Day  letters,  not  exceeding  fifty  words,  may  also  be  sent  at  a  special  rate,  with  reduced 
charges  for  additional  words. 


USE  OF  TELEPHONES  109 


Exercise  14. 

Condense  the  following  telegrams  so  as  to  bring  them  within  the  ten-word  limit : 

1.  A  fire  broke  out  this  morning  and  partially  destroyed  our  warehouse  at  No.  6  Water 
Street.     Loss  about  $10,000. 

2.  Your  proposition  is  satisfactory,  but  1  can  not  commence  work  until  Jan.  1.  Wire  me 
if  this  is  satisfactory. 

3.  Your  brother  Walter  is  seriously  ill.  The  doctor  says  there  are  symptoms  of  pneu- 
monia.    If  he  does  not  improve,  I  will  wire. 

4.  Mr.  Johnson  is  willing  to  go  to  work  for  our  firm  for  ninety  dollars  per  month  for 
one  year.     Shall  I  engage  him? 

5.  You  sent  us  No.  8  shuttles  instead  of  No.  10.  We  must  have  the  No.  10.  Ship 
them  at  once. 

6.  The  failure  of  the  Clark  Publishing  Company  seriously  afifects  our  house.  Cancel  all 
your  orders  and  return  at  once. 

7.  Butler  County  gives  Mason  a  majority  of  two  thousand  votes.  He  is  elected  beyond 
a  doubt. 

8.  I  can  get  five  thousand  tons  Hocking  Valley  at  three  dollars  and  ninety  cents  per  ton. 
Shall  I  close  the  deal  ?    Let  me  know  before  to-morrow. 

9.  I  am  advised  that  Coulter  is  buying  all  the  lard  in  sight  and  that  the  price  is  likely  to 
rise.     Shall  I  buy  a  carload? 

10.     You  may  sell  the  apples  at  two  dollars  per  barrel,  but  hold  the  potatoes  until  the 
twentieth,  for  a  better  price. 

Condense  the  following  messages  to  the  lowest  word-limit  consistent  with  clearness.  Omit 
all  obviously  unnecessary  matter : 

1.  I  arrived  here  early  this  morning,  and  at  once  looked  up  Mr.  Henderson.  Found  him 
about  ten  o'clock  at  the  Harlan  House  and  had  a  two  hours'  talk  with  him.  He  is  unwilling 
to  close  the  deal  with  us  unless  we  pay  him  a  bonus  of  $10,000  and  allow  him  twenty  per  cent 
of  the  stock.  I  do  not  think  we  can  get  any  better  terms  from  him.  If  you  want  me  to  close 
with  him  in  accordance  with  his  demands,  wire  at  once. 

2.  A  disastrous  fire  occurred  in  our  city  yesterday,  and  our  firm  is  numbered  among  the 
unfortunate.  Both  of  our  large  store-rooms  were  entirely  destroyed,  and  but  a  small  part  of 
our  stock  was  saved.  Our  loss  is  probably  from  twenty-five  to  thirty-five  thousand  dollars, 
upon  which  we  have  insurance  to  the  amount  of  twenty  thousand.  It  will  be  several  weeks  be- 
fore we  are  able  to  resume  business  again.  Under  the  circumstances,  you  would  better  discon- 
tinue road  work,  and  come  in  at  once. 


LESSON  15. 
Use  of  Telephones. 


254.  Notwithstanding  that  the  telephone  is  in  such  general  use,  there  are  many  who  are 
unfamiliar  with  the  business  rules  relating  to  it.  In  most  communities,  there  are  two  kinds  of 
telephones;  viz;  "Long-distance"  and  "local." 

255.  Long-distance  telephones  now  connect  practically  all  the  cities  and  important 
towns  of  the  eastern  and  central  portion  of  the  United  States  and  Canada.  The  rates  for  using 
this  service  are  practically  uniform  and  are  as  follows: 

One-fifth  of  a  cent  per  minute  for  each  mile  of  distance,  the  minimum  charge  being  for  not 
less  than  three  minutes. 

Thus,  if  the  distance  were  one  liundred  miles,  the  cliarge  for  a  three-minute  connection 
would  be  one  hundred  times  three-fifths  of  a  cent,  or  sixty  cents. 

If  the  connection  is  longer  than  three  minutes,  an  extra  pro  rata  charge  is  added  of  one- 
fifth  of  a  cent  per  mile  for  each  minute  or  fractional  part  of  a  minute  of  the  excess  time. 

Thus,  if  one  used  a  long-distance  telephone  for  6^  minutes  wliere  the  distance  is  500 
miles,  his  charge  would  be  for  seven  minutes,  and  would  equal  seven-fiftlis  of  $5.00,  or  $7.00. 

For  short  distances,  there  is  usually  a  fixed  minimum  charge,  somewhat  in  excess  of  the 
toll  as  calculated  by  the  distance-rate  for  a  brief  service. 


110  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Long-distance  connections  can  usually  be  had  through  the  local  telephones.  If  a  local  sub- 
scriber wishes  to  use  the  long-distance  telephone,  he  calls  "central"  and  asks  for  "toll."  He  is 
put  in  connection  with  the  toll-operator,  and  gives  the  name  of  the  town  and  the  person  with 
whom  he  wishes  to  talk.  He  then  hangs  up  the  receiver  and  waits  till  the  operator  notifies 
him  that  the  person  at  the  other  end  of  the  line  is  ready  to  receive  his  message. 

No  cliarge  is  made  for  the  time  required  to  effect  the  connection,  neither  is  there  any 
charge  if  the  person  called  cannot  be  reached,  or,  for  any  other  reason,  is  unable  to  respond. 

256.  Local  telephones  connect  the  homes  or  offices  of  residents  of  the  same  com- 
munity. In  many  places,  there  are  two  or  more  independent  systems,  each  having  its  own 
subscribers.  Local  telephone  service  is  usually  charged  for  by  the  month,  and  the  subscribers 
are  not  limited  as  to  time  in  sending  messages.  In  most  of  the  larger  cities,  a  charge  (usually 
five  or  ten  cents  )is  made  for  each  message  sent  by  non-subscribers.  A  slot-telephone  is  often 
used,  in  which  the  person  making  the  call  deposits  the  required  coin  when  the  operator  makes 
the  desired  connection.  In  using  a  telephone  of  this  class,  one  should  not  deposit  the  coin  until 
notified  to  do  so  by  tlie  operator.  In  many  places,  if  the  telephone  is  used  beyond  the  time- 
limit  (usually  five  minutes),  another  fee  is  charged. 

257.  Rules  for  the  use  of  the  telephone.  Those  using  telephones  will  find  it  to  their 
advantage  to  observe  the  following  rules : 

1.  Before  making  a  local  telephone  call  ascertain  the  telephone-number  of  the  person  or 
firm  to  be  called,  consulting  the  Telephone  Directory  if  necessary. 

2.  Before  making  the  call,  think  just  what  you  tvant  to  say. 

3.  Speak  deliberately  and  in  a  low  tone  and  with  clear  enunciation. 

4.  Begin  your  message  by  giving  you  name,  and  if  you  are  addressing  a  stranger,  your 
place  of  residence  and  business.  Come  at  once  to  the  point,  and  make  your  message  as  brief 
as  possible. 

5.  Never  interrupt  one  who  is  speaking  to  you  through  a  telephone. 

6.  Do  not  engage  in  disputes,  or  use  discourteous  or  objectionable  language  while  using 
a  telephone.  Persons  who  carry  on  a  quarrel  by  telephone  are  liable  to  the  imputation  that  they 
dare  not  quarrel  face  to  face. 

7.  Always  avoid  impatient  or  offensive  language  in  addressing  the  telephone-operator. 
If  the  service  is  unsatisfactory,  report  the  matter  courteously  to  the  management. 

8.  Try  to  respond  to  all  telephone  calls  promptly,  and  in  case  of  unavoidable  delay,  make 
a  suitable  apology. 

9.  Do  not  make  use  of  a  telephone  to  visit  with  office  employees,  students  of  a  school,  or 
other  busy  persons.     A  telephone  is  for  business,  not  social  intercourse. 

10.  If  you  answer  a  telephone-call  for  a  person  who  is  absent,  ask  for  the  name  or  the 
telephone  number  of  the  person  calling,  in  order  that  it  may  be  reported  to  the  person  called 
for  when  he  returns. 

11.  After  using  a  telephone,  always  hang  up  the  receiver,  the  bell  or  buzzer. 

The  foregoing  rules  may  seem  obvious,  but  they  are  often  disregarded,  greatly  to  the 
inconvenience  of  telephone  patrons  and  employees. 

Exercise  15. 

Calculate  the  cost  for  the  use  of  a  long-distance  telephone  in  each  of  the  following  cases : 

1.  650  miles  for  4>4  minutes. 

2.  275        "        3  " 


3.  150        "        2 

4.  1500        "        5 

5.  950        "        53^ 


2 


LESSON  16. 

Letters  for  the  Newspapers. 

258.  Letters  or  articles  contributed  for  publication  in  a  newspaper  or  magazine  should 
usually  be  accompanied  with  a  brief  personal  letter  of  explanation  to  the  editor  or  publisher. 
Circumstances    will    determine    whether    a    writer  should  sign  his   name  to  a  communicated 


LETTERS  FOR  THE  NEWSPAPERS 


111 


article  for  publication,  but  the  name  and  address  of  the  writer  are  necessary  to  secure  an  editor's 
attention  to  the  article.     Editors  usually  ignore  all  anonymous  communications. 

It  is  an  imperative  rule  in  most  newspaper  offices,  that  all  matters  for  publication  shall 
be  written  on  one  side  of  the  paper  only.  If  the  article  is  pen-written,  the  writer  should  take 
especial  pains  to  have  his  writing  legible,  and  his  punctuation,  spelling,  etc.,  accurate.  It  is 
better,  whenever  possible,  to  have  the  matter  typewritten,  with  double  spacing  between  the  lines 
for  possible  corrections.  

259.  Need  for  brevity.  Brevity  and  clearness  of  statement  are  —  from  the  editor's 
standpoint  at  least — the  sovereign  virtues  of  a  newspaper  article.  "Boil  it  down,"  is  the  stand- 
ard and  paramount  rule  in  all  publication  offices.  Newspaper  space  has  a  cash  value  and  is 
not  to  be  wasted.  Newspaper  articles  or  letters  for  publication  should  usually  be  written 
in  a  more  formal  style  than  business  or  other  letters.  Colloquialisms  are  not  usually  permis- 
sible, unless  the  article  is  of  a  humorous  nature.  But  there  should  be  the  same  avoidance  of 
"big  words"  and  involved  or  lengthy  sentences,  tliat  is  advised  in  the  case  of  business  letters. 

Let  the  student  compared  the  following  letters,  paragraph  by  paragraph,  and  notice  how 
the  ponderous  sentences  of  the  wordy  but  dull  contributor,  contrast  with  the  crisp  and  business- 
like statement  of  the  man  of  ideas  rather  than  words.  The  one  may  have  scholarship,  but  the 
other  will  get  the  attention  of  the  public : 


WORDY  AND  DIFFUSE. 

To  the  Editor  of  the  Daily  Lookout: 

My  Dear  Sir:  If  I  am  not  intruding  too 
lengthily  upon  your  valuable  space,  I  hope  you 
will  allow  me  to  express  my  disapproval  of  the 
inadvisable  and  wholly  unconsidered  and  un- 
necessary action  of  the  City  Council  in  re- 
ducing the  number  of  electric  lights  by  which 
our  city  is  illuminated. 

Considerations  of  economy  surely  do  not  re- 
quire, in  the  present  satisfactory  condition  of 
the  finances  of  the  municipality,  that  our  citi- 
zens should  be  deprived  of  so  very  essential 
and  desirable  a  thing  as  adequate  illumination. 

With  the  material  diminishment  in  the  num- 
ber of  the  lights,  there  come  to  the  criminally 
disposed  many  opportunities  for  burglary  and 
other  forms  of  robbery  that  do  not  exist  when 
the  city  is  sufficiently  lighted. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing  considerations, 
it  is  furthermore  true  that  our  sidewalks  are 
lamentably  out  of  repair,  and  pedestrians  will 
find  it  most  exasperating  to  attempt  to  traverse 
them  when  the  streets  are  enshrouded  in 
Ethiopian  darkness. 

In  urging  upon  the  Council  that  it  may  de- 
cide upon  the  advisability  of  reconsidering 
their  inconsiderate  action,  and  giving  to  our 
city  an  increase  rather  than  a  decrease  in  the 
number  of  electric  lights,  I  believe  that  I  am 
only  voicing  the  deliberate  judgment  of  the 
majority  of  our  tax-payers. 

Thanking  you  for  the  opportunity  to  direct 
public  attention   to   this  matter  through   the 
medium  of  your  valuable  journal,  I  remain 
Yours  most  respectfully, 

Solomon  Wiseman. 


MORE  TO  THE   POINT. 

Editor  of  the  Lookout: 

Sir  :  The  recent  action  of  the  City  Council 
in  reducing  the  number  of  street-lights,  seems 
quite  needless.  The  city  is  not  in  need  of  such 
cheese-paring  economy,  and  most  of  us  would 
rather  have  the  lights,  even  though  they  do 
make  our  taxes  a  trifle  higher. 

Putting  out  the  lamps  will  of  course  give 
the  burglars  and  other  thieves  a  better  chance 
to  ply  their  calling,  but  it  will  hardly  help  the 
honest  citizen  who  must  walk  after  nightfall 
over  our  broken  sidewalks  which  are  surely 
hard  enough  to  travel  over  in  the  daytime. 

I  believe  I  voice  the  views  of  a  large  ma- 
jority of  our  tax-payers  when  I  ask  that  the 
Council  reconsider  its  action  of  last  week  and 
give  us  more,  rather  than  fewer,  lights. 
I  am,  Sir, 

John  T.  Bright. 


112  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


Exercise  16. 

Select  any  two  of  the  three  requirements  following: 

1.  Write  for  newspaper  publication,  a  description  of  some  occurrence  of  public  interest, 
as  a  fire,  a  public  entertainment,  a  school  debate,  etc. 

2.  Write  a  short  letter  for  your  local  paper,  calling  attention  to  some  needed  public  im- 
provement. 

3.  Write  a  letter  for  publication,  criticising  the  administration  of  some  public  service  as 
the  street-cars,  the  waterworks,  the  lighting  system,  the  police  department,  etc. 


LESSON  17. 

Advertising. 

260.  No  application  of  business  English  is  more  important  than  that  which  relates  to  ad- 
vertising. No  other  kind  of  language  skill  commands  a  higher  price  in  the  employment  market 
than  the  ability  to  write  clear  and  attractive  advertisements.  There  are  men  whose  cleverness 
in  this  field  enables  them  to  earn  from  $15,000  to  $20,000  a  year. 

261.  While  much  of  the  attractiveness  of  an  advertisement  depends  on  the  arrangement 
of  the  matter,  and  the  type,  illustrations,  etc.,  it  is  quite  evident  that  the  choice  of  words  and 
the  style  of  composition  are  also  very  important.  In  the  work  of  the  best  advertising  experts, 
brevity  and  clearness  are  combined  with  a  frank  conversational  style,  that  tends  to  appeal  at 
once,  and  with  force,  to  the  understanding  of  every  reader. 

Let  the  student  study  the  construction  and  phraseology  of  the  following  examples : 
1.     Extracts  from  a  successful  soap  advertisement: 

Just  an  aid  to  Nature,  that  is  all.  It  opens  the  pores  and  sets  the  delicate  glands  to  doing  their  proper  work. 
Under  its  magic  touch,  the  harshest,  muddiest  complexion  quickly  becomes  smooth,  fresh,  and  delicate.  A  toilet 
luxury  and  necessity.     Its  use  is  a  fine  habit. 

The  article  in  question  may  or  may  not  be  better  than  others  of  its  class,  but  such  praise 
as  the  foregoing  zvill  lead  people  to  buy  it. 

2.  From  an  advertisement  of  a  patent  coffee-pot: 

It  is  so  simple  that  a  child  can  make  just  as  good  coffee  as  a  hotel  chef.  Fits  any  coffee-pot  or  any  tea-pot, 
as  shown  in  the  cut.  Makes  excellent  coffee  almost  as  quickly  as  a  pocket-camera  snaps  a  picture ;  uniform  in 
quality  and  in  strength.  No  boiling,  no  obnoxious  bag;  no  waste,  no  eggs;  no  coffee  dregs;  no  bitter  taste;  and 
always  piping  hot.    You  can  make  one  cup  just  as  easily  as  five  or  ten. 

Could  anything  be  more  appealing  to  a  coffee-drinker  than  that? 

3.  Following  is  a  characteristic  advertisement  by  a  famous  mak^r  of  lamp-chimneys,  who 
is  credited  with  accumulating  millions,  mainly  through  the  success  of  his  advertisements : 

Lamp-Fits. 

Hozv  do  you  know  zvliat  chimney  tits  your  lamp? 

Your  grocer  tells  you. 

Hozv  does  he  knozv? 

He  doesn't  knozv. 

Do  you  then? 

That's  about  hozv  lamps  are  fitted  zvith  chimneys  by  people  zvho  don't  «.?<? 
my  index;  and  they  complain  of  bad  chimneys!  Lamp-fits  indeed.  Do  you  zvant  tlie 
index? 

Free. 

4.  The  following  is  from  an  advertisement  by  a  man  who  has  grown  wealthy  advertising 
a  certain  brand  of  rubber  shoe-heels.     It  is  printed  in  a  space  having  the  shape  of  a  shoe-sole : 

Heels  of  new  rubber  have  the  springy,  elastic  tread  that  makes  walking  healthful  and  delightful. 

Eminent  scientists  say  that  a  person,  weighing  150  pounds,  who  walks  three  miles  a  day,  lifts  1,188,000  pounds. 
Where  do  rubber  heels  come  in? 

Doesn't  it  stand  to  reason  that  the  heel  of  new  rubber  is  essential?  That  it  sheaths  your  walk  through  life 
with  comfort  because  it  carries  out  what  nature  intended? 

Experience  teaches  that  heels  of  new  rubber  are  economical.  They  also  make  you  look  energetic  and  feel 
young. 


ADVERTISING  113 


The  foregoing  advertisements  sufficiently  illustrate  the  clear-cut,  direct,  familiar  style  of 
expression  used  by  successful  advertisers.  The  student  will  find  many  other  interesting  ex- 
amples by  studying  the  pages  of  the  popular  magazines  or  tlie  advertising  panels  in  street  cars. 

262.  Besides  a  Iiappy  and  original  style,  an  advertisement  should  have  tlie  further  merit 
of  setting  forth  clearly  those  special  advantages  or  qualities  of  the  goods  advertised  that  belong 
to  them  and  to  no  other.  Good  advertising  does  not  consist  in  mere  indiscriminate  praise. 
Advertisers  and  salesman  always  lay  stress  on  what  they  call  the  "talking  points"  of  the  goods. 
It  is,  therefore,  necessary  for  the  writer  of  successful  advertisements  to  be  thoroughly  familiar 
with  the  business  or  goods  that  are  to  be  advertised.  One  cannot  learn  by  any  amount  of  gen- 
eral instruction  to  advertise  successfully  a  business  or  an  article  that  he  knows  nothing  about. 

263.  Announcements,  reading  notices,  etc.  Some  very  effective  advertising  is  often 
secured,  especially  by  retailers  in  our  smaller  cities,  through  the  medium  of  brief  "locals"  and 
business  announcements  printed  in  the  columns  of  the  local  paper.  Following  are  some  good 
examples  of  this  kind  of  advertising: 

Yes,  nearly  everybody  knows  about  our  "Gilt  Edge"  butter.  Delivered  right  from  our  cold  storage  rooms. 
It's  firm,  it's  fresh,  it's  sweet.     Try  it  once  and  you  will  always  want  it.     Phone  206. 

The  Harper  Grocery  Co. 

A  Stationer's  Special. 

Do  you  read?  If  so,  you  will  want  to  sec  that  large  collection  of  specially  selected  new  books  that  liavc  just 
been  put  on  sale  at  Hillman's.  They  afford  a  rare  chance  to  add  some  new  treasures  to  your  library.  Standard 
editions  as  well  as  all  the  late  popular  books.  And  there  is  a  big  cut  in  prices,  too ;  in  fact,  the  greatest  book- 
bargains  ever  afforded  in  the  city.    Don't  miss  them. 

Exercise  17. 

1.  Study  the  "want  column"  of  some  daily  newspaper,  after  whicli  write  a  brief  adver- 
tisement for  a  position  as  stenograplier,  stating  qualifications,  etc. 

2.  You  are  about  to  open  a  small  book  and  stationery  store.  Write  a  suitable  announce- 
ment for  publication  in  the  local  paper. 

3.  Write  an  advertisement  setting  forth  the  merits  of  some  special  make  of  bicycle,  sew- 
ing-machine, typewriter,  or  other  article  with  which  you  are  familiar. 

4.  You  have  decided  to  open  a  real  estate  and  insurance  office  in  your  town.  Write  a 
suitable  announcement  for  publication.  Mention  the  kinds  of  real  estate  property  in  which  you 
propose  to  deal,  also  the  insurance  companies  for  which  you  have  secured  the  agency. 

5.  You  have  taken  a  position  as  a  public  stenographer  in  a  leading  hotel.  You  will  take 
dictation  and  prepare  letters  for  travelers  and  business  men  and  do  general  typewriting  work 
for  the  public.     Prepare  a  suitable  business  announcement  for  publication. 


LESSON  18. 

Payments  and  Remittances. 

264.  Letters  enclosing  checks,  drafts,  money  orders,  etc.,  for  the  purpose  of  effecting 
payments  of  money,  comprise  a  considerable  part  of  the  correspondence  of  most  business' 
offices,  and  it  is  important  for  the  person  who  handles  this  class  of  correspondence  to  have  a 
knowledge  of  the  rules  governing  such  papers. 

265.  Commercial  substitutes  for  money.  Probably  more  tlian  nine-tenths  oi  the  com- 
merce of  the  United  States  is  carried  on  without  direct  payment  of  money.  Goods  are 
bought  and  sold,  debts  settled,  collections  made,  and  remittances  forwarded  by  means  of  checks, 
bank  and  commercial  drafts,  postal  and  express  money  orders,  telegraph  orders,  etc. 

In  many  great  business  houses  where  the  sum  of  annual  transactions  runs  far  into  the  mil- 
lions, very  little  actual  money  is  handled,  and  tlie  convenient  custom  of  keeping  one's  money  in 
the  bank,  and  paying  Ijills  by  means  of  checks,  is  coming  more  and  more  into  popular  favor. 

The  extensive  use  of  these  various  substitutes  for  money,  makes  it  a  matter  of  importance 
for  all  who  expect  to  transact  business,  to  become  familiar  with  the  ordinary  customs  observed 


114 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


UOMESTIC 


$. 


100 


(Form  No.  6001) 


in  their  use,  also  to  know  the  obh'gations  that  devolve  upon  those  who  give  or  receive  these 
commercial  instruments. 

266.  Use  of  personal  checks.  In  making  and  receiving  payments  by  means  of  personal 
checks,  the  following  rules  should  be  observed : 

1.  Make  payments  by  check  to  those  only  to  whom  you  are  known  personally  or  in  a 
business  way. 

2.  Do  not  accept  payment  by  check  from  strangers. 

NOTE. — These  rules,  of  course,  do  not  apply  to  checks  that  have  been  indorsed  by  a  responsible  person  who 
is  known  to  the  payee. 

3.  Indorse  no  check  unless  you  expect  to  be  held  responsible  for  its  payment. 

'4.  Present  promptly  for  payment  or  deposit,  all  checks  received.  Delay  in  the  presenta- 
tion of  a  check  may  cause  the  payee  to  lose  his  right  of  recourse  on  the  maker,  or  indorser,  in 
the  event  of  there  being  a  default  of  payment. 

5.  When  your  own  checks  are  paid  and  returned  to  you,  file  them  in  order  of  their 
datings  and  keep  them  as  vouchers  for  the  payments. 

267.  Remittances.  In  making  payments  by  mail,  the  amount  and  character  of  the  re- 
mittance should  be  mentioned  in  the  letter  accompanying  it. 

Remittances  in  currency  should  be  made  only  by  registered  letter,  unless  the  amount  is 
quite  small,  in  which  case,  stamps  or  small  coins  may  be  sent,  but  always  at  the  risk  of  the 
sender. 

268.  Postal  money  orders.  These 
may  be  purchased  at  specified  postofiices, 
throughout  the  United  States,  also,  in 
most  foreign  countries.  The  person  wish- 
ing to  purchase  a  money  order,  fills  out 
an  application  blank,  as  herewith  shown, 
and  hands  it  with  the  necessary  money 
and  fee  to  the  money  order  clerk.  The 
latter  makes  out  a  money  order  for  the 
amount  required,  payable  by  the  post- 
master at  the  place  to  which  the  money 
order  is  sent.  He  also  gives  the  remitter 
a  receipt  for  the  amount  remitted,  for  use 
in  case  it  should  be  necessary  to  make 
further  inquiry  regarding  the  order. 

In  form,  a  money  order  does  not 
dififer  materially  from  a  draft.  It  does 
not  require  the  indorsement  of  either  the 
purchaser  or  payee,  but  the  latter  must  at- 
tach his  signature  to  the  order  as  a  receipt 
when  it  is  presented  for  payment.  Money 
orders  are  not  negotiable,  but  by  signing 
a  blank  form  provided  for  the  purpose  on 
the  back  of  the  order,  the  payee  may 
authorize  payment  to  be  made  to  another 
person. 

In  case  the  payee  is  unknown  per- 
sonally at  the  postoffice  where  payment  is 
made,  he  must  be  identified,  but  the 
sender  of  the  money  order  may,  at  his 
own  risk,  waive  the  identification,  if  he 
thinks  it  may  occasion  inconvenience  to  the  person  to  whom  the  remittance  is  made.  Postal 
money  orders  are  not  issued  for  a  sum  greater  than  $100,  but  any  number  of  tliese  may  be  pur- 
chased at  one  time,  except  in  case  of  orders  payable  at  fourth-class  offices;  of  these,  not  more 
than  $300  payable  to  one  person  can  be  issued  on  the  same  day. 


No. 


Space  above  this  line  is  for  Postmaster's  record,  to  be  filled  by  him 


Application  For  Postal  Money  Order. 


Amount.. 


IL.. Dollars .*? 

3eilt  to         Goodyear- Marshall  Publishing'  Co. 


.Cents 


City  or  town.. 


Cedar  Rapids, 


Street  an 


Stale 


a  No 3S?....?.'S°"£?.'..:.. 


Iowa. 


Sent  by. 


Chas.  P.  Robinson, 


Alton.  III. 


Address  of  Sender ^:. •^'^'..r^^^ Street. 


PAYMENTS  AND  REMITI^ANCES 


115 


UNITED  STATES  POSTAL  MONEY  ORDER 


Alton,  Illinois 


Feb.  5, 


.1901 


PAY  TO  THE   ORDER  OF 

Goodyear- Marshal  I  Publishing  Co. 


1  it-enly-One 


For  Dollars  Writ*  Words 


.DOLLARS. 


40 


For  Cents  Use  Figures 


TO   THE    POSTMASTER    AT 
Cedar  Rapids, 


Iowa 


IV.  T.  Martin, 


K. 


POSTMASTER 


Tlis  Maximnm  Amount  For 
Which  anr  Postal  Order  Can 
Lawfully  be  issued  is  One 
Hundred  Dollars. 

Sign  Name  Opposite  When 
Payment  is  Made. 


Received  Payment 


^o.     8706 

Not  Payable  in  Canada,  Mexicoi  or  in  tny 
Other  Foreign  Country,  or  in  Cuba, 

This  Order  Must  Correspond  in  Particu- 
lars to  its  Advice  of  Same  Number  and  OatSi 


21 


-DOLLARS- 


40 


-CENTS 

(amount    FON  WHtCH     IVSUKo) 

In  Above  Spaces  Write  the  Amount  in 
Figures.  On  NeJct  line,  in  Body  of  Order, 
Repeat  the  Amount,  There  Using  a  Word  oi 
Words  to  Express  Number  of  Oollari. 


269.  Registered  letters.  The  delivery  of  a  letter  or  other  mailable  package  to  the  per- 
son to  whom  it  is  addressed,  may  be  rendered  more  certain  by  having  the  letter  or  package 
registered  by  the  postmaster  who  receives  it.  A  receipt  for  the  letter  is  given  to  the  sender 
by  the  receiving  postmaster,  and  afterward,  by  each  postoffice  official  into  whose  hands  it 
passes  during  the  process  of  transmission.  Finally  it  is  receipted  for  by  the  person  to  whom  it 
is  delivered. 

The  Postoffice  Department  does  not  guarantee  the  delivery  of  a  registered  letter,  nor  does 
it  reimburse  the  sender,  in  the  event  of  the  letter's  being  lost  or  stolen,  but  the  extra  precautions 
taken  render  its  proper  delivery  practically  certain  The  registry  fee  is  eight  cents,  which,  of 
course,  does  not  include  postage. 

Not  being  so  safe  nor  so  satisfactory  as  money  orders  or  drafts,  registered  letters  are  rarely 
used  in  business  for  remitting  money.  They  are  more  frequently  employed  for  safe  transmis- 
sion of  manuscripts,  documents,  or  other  valuable  packages,  also  for  important  letters  of  the 
delivery  of  which  the  sender  wishes  to  be  assured. 

270.  Express  money  orders.  These  are  issued  by  the  various  express  coinpanies,  under 
conditions  similar  to  those  governing  the  issue  of  postal  money  orders.  Express  orders,  however, 
are  negotiable  by  indorsement,  and  no  written  application  is  required  of  the  purchaser.  Express 
orders  are  payable  at  the  offices  of  all  express  companies  doing  a  money-order  business,  and  are 
accepted  by  banks  generally,  as  the  equivalent  of  cash. 

The  rates  charged  for  express  money  orders  are  about  the  same  as  those  for  postal  orders, 
and  vary  from  3  cents  for  orders  of  $2.50  or  less,  to  30  cents  for  orders  amounting  to  $100. 

Express  money  orders  are  not  issued  for  amounts  greater  than  $50,  but  one  may  purchase 
as  many  of  these  orders  at  one  time  as  may  be  desired,  and  at  a  proportional  reduction  of  rate 
for  the  total  amount.  Postal  and  express  order.^  are  limited  as  to  amount,  in  order  to  lessen 
their  liability  to  forgery. 

271.  Telegraph  orders.  Money  may  b2  "telegraphed,"  (transmitted  by  telegraph) 
through  the  agency  of  the  various  express  and  telegraph  companies,  under  conditions  similar 
to  those  governing  express  and  postal  ordei's. 

A  higher  rate  is  charged  for  telegraph  orders,  and  they  may  be  secured  for  larger  amounts. 
They  are  employed  only  in  em'ergencies,  when  there  is  an  urgent  necessity  for  the  immediate 
transmission  of  money. 


116  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


KouisTZE  Brothers 


CXRC:i71>A1CI<BTTER  OF  CXCEDIT 

N9  9810 


Expiring  *^^^-c^  /^,/f^ 

x/j^^ydi^-/^^^^f^^<m^  l(@on  City  aiidMidlaiid  Bank.  Limited. 


$^^2^^.^^=^-^.^%^^^.^  9810 


Fig.  1.    Letter  of  Credit. 


PAYMENTS  AND  REMITTANCES 


117 


n 
M    a: 

9     h 


Z     Z 

I-  u 


f 


09 

O 


J 


1^4 1-^^ 


1^ 


tl^*'^^%I^^^H*>'^ 


118 


BUSINESS  lONGLISH 


272.  Bank  drafts.  By  far  the  greater  part  of  the  monetary  exchanges  of  the  world  are 
effected  by  means  of  bank  drafts. 

The  bank  draft  system  is  operated  as  follows : 

Banks  in  the  smaller  towns  keep  funds  on  deposit  with  banks  in  the  larger  cities,  against 
which  they  issue  drafts  in  favor  of  persons  who  wish  to  buy  "exchange"  on  these  cities.  Banks 
generally  charge  a  low  rate  of  exchange  (usually  about  25  cents  per  $100)  for  these  drafts, 
but  some  banks,  unless  the  amount  is  large,  issue  them  to  their  regular  customers  without  ex- 
change charge. 

Drafts  on  New  York,  Chicago,  and  other  large  cities  are  usually  received  as  cash  by  banks 
throughout  the  country,  but  the  person  presenting  them,  if  unknown  to  the  bank  officials,  must 
be  identified. 

273.  Cashier's  Checks.  These  are  checks  drawn  by  the  cashiers  of  large  city  banks. 
They  are  made  payable  by  the  bank  issuing  them,  and  serve  the  same  general  purpose  as  bank 
drafts. 


Q, 


(Signature  I 
(Signature  I 


QfC6iMi4^iS)C^  oBzotfi^z^t^y. 


Fig.  3.    Form  of  Identification. 


274.  Bills  of  exchange.  This  is  a  general  term  used  to  designate  bank  drafts  payable 
in  foreign  countries.  When  purchased  by  travelers  or  emigrants,  they  are  often  made  out  in 
duplicate,  so  that  in  the  event  of  one  of  them  being  lost,  the  other  can  be  presented  and  paid. 
When  made  out  in  this  form  they  are  known  as  "sets  of  exchange,"  and  are  so  phrased  that 
but  one  bill  of  the  set  can  be  collected. 

275.  Letters  of  credit.  Travelers  find  it  conwenient  to  secure  funds  for  their  current 
expenses  in  the  different  countries  they  visit,  by  means  of  letters  of  credit.  These  are  issued 
by  banks,  and  addressed  to  their  correspondents  or  banks  in  other  countries  with  which  the 
bank  does  business.  The  letter  of  credit  authorizes  its  holder  to  receive  from  any  bank  named 
in  the  list  attached  to  the  letter,  any  money  he  may  require — to  an  amount  not  exceeding  the 
sum  for  which  the  letter  is  issued,  or  such  portion  of  it  as  may  remain  undrawn. 

To  obtain  a  letter  of  credit,  it  is  necessary  to  deposit  with  the  bank  issuing  it  a  sufficient 
sum  to  cover  the  amount  for  which  the  letter  is  issued,  plus  the  banker's  charges  for  exchange. 
At  the  time  of  receiving  the  letter,  the  purchaser  records  his  signature  on  its  face  as  a  means  of 
identification,  when  he  presents  it  for  payment. 


HINTS  TO  STENOGRAPHERS  118 


When  payments  are  made  they  are  indorsed  on  the  back  of  the  letter  by  the  banker  by 
whom  they  are  made.  Letters  of  credit  in  Europe  are  usually  made  payable  in  English, 
French,  or  German  monetary  denominations,  but  the  payments  are  made  in  the  money  of  the 
country  where  they  are  presented. 

The  banks  also  issue  domestic  letters  of  credit  which  are  used  to  some  extent  by  persons 
who  travel  for  business  or  pleasure  in  the  United  States. 

The  forms  on  pages  116,  117,  and  118  illustrate  the  letter  of  credit  issued  by  a  well-known 
New  York  bank. 

Fig.  1  shows  the  face  of  the  letter,  Fig.  2  the  indorsements  made  by  the  several  European 
banks  at  which  money  is  drawn,  and  Fig.  3  the  form  of  identification,  showing  the  signature 
of  the  person  who  purchased  the  letter. 

Exercise  18. 

Prepare  written  answers  to  the  following  questions : 

1.  Which  would  you  prefer,  a  draft  or  a  personal  check,  in  payment  of  a  debt  owed  you  by 
a  person  living  at  a  distance  from  your  town  ?     Why  ? 

2.  Why  is  it  safer  not  to  indorse  a  draft  until  the  time  of  its  presentation? 

3.  Can  a  postal  or  express  money  order  be  obtained  that  is  payable  to  the  order  of  the 
person  buying  it?  If  you  are  not  certain  as  to  the  correct  answer  to  this  question,  where  can 
you  get  the  needed  information  ? 

4.  What  are  the  advantages  of  a  letter  of  credit  over  an  ordinary  draft,  to  one  who  is 
traveling  ? 

5.  Who  would  ordinarily  pay  the  cost  of  transmitting  money,  the  person  who  receives  it, 
or  the  person  who  sends  it  ? 

6.  If  you  were  sending  a  payment  of  $50  by  mail,  would  you  send  it  by  registered  letter 
or  by  money  order  ?     Why  ? 

7.  By  what  means  may  a  postal  money  order  be  made  payable  to  a  person  other  than  the 
one  in  whose  favor  it  is  issued  ? 


LESSON  19. 

Suggestions  to  Stenographers  and  Typists. 

276.  The  invention  of  the  typewriting  machine  has  revolutionized  the  methods  of  busi- 
ness correspondence  that  were  in  vogue  a  generation  ago.  Stenography  and  its  companion  art, 
typewriting,  are  now  so  universally  used,  and  have  so  many  applications  in  modern  business, 
that  a  knowledge  of  them  has  become  an  indispensable  part  of  an  office  training.  While  it 
does  not  come  within  the  purpose  of  this  book  to  present  any  full  consideration  of  these  arts, 
they  are  so  intimately  connected  with  the  matter  of  practical  English,  that  it  seems  appropriate 
to  offer  here  some  suggestions  as  to  their  more  important  requirements,  as  applied  to  business 
letter-writing. 

277.  The  stenographer's  equipment.  This  consists  of  note-book,  pencils,  stationery, 
and  typewriting  machine  and  its  appliances,  which,  in  the  case  of  salaried  stenographers,  are 
usually  supplied  by  the  employer. 

Notebooks.  These  are  books  of  a  convenient  size  and  ruling,  manufactured  especially  for 
the  use  of  stenographers.  The  stenographer  should  number  his  notebook  consecutively  on  the 
cover,  and  record  also  the  dates  between  which  the  book  is  used.  It  is  well  also  to  write  the  name 
and  address  of  the  stenographer  on  the  cover,  so  that  in  case  of  loss  the  finder  may  be  able  to 
restore  it  to  the  owner.     The  following  is  a  practical  form : 


120 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


NOTE  BOOK  NO. 
Stenographer  . 
Address  

From 

To 


The  dates  should  be  entered  at  the  beginning  of  each  day's  dictation,  the  letters  in  each 
book  should  be  numbered  consecutively,  and  the  initials  of  the  dictator  should  be  entered  at  the 
beginning  of  the  notes  for  each  letter. 

Pen  or  pencil.  Most  stenographers  use  pencils  in  recording  their  notes,  but  many  use  a 
fountain  pen.  If  pencils  are  used,  they  should  be  of  medium  hardness  (No.  2),  and  of  a  good 
quality.  The  stenographer  should  have  always  at  hand  several  pencils,  and  these  should  be 
freshly  sharpened  at  the  beginning  of  each  dictation  period.  For  sharpening,  use  either  a 
good  pencil  sharpener,  or  a  penknife  with  a  sharp  blade.  If  a  fountain  pen  is  used,  see  that  it  is 
freshly  filled  and  in  good  order  at  tlie  beginning  of  each  day's  work. 

Stationery.  This  is  supplied  by  the  employer,  and  usually  consists  of  standard-size  printed 
letter-head  with  blank  sheets  for  e.xtra  pages,  and  standard  "No.  63/2"  business  or  "No.  5.  .  Gov- 
ernment envelopes.  Stationery  should  be  kept  in  an  accessible  place,  where  it  will  be  protected 
from  dust  and  other  means  of  soiling. 

278.  Taking  dictation.  Calmness  and  a  complete  command  of  the  faculties  are  essential 
mental  qualities  of  a  good  stenographer.  Nervousness  or  a  mind  inclining  to  "wander,"  is  fatal 
to  good  work.  The  stenographer  should  grasp  the  meaning  as  well  as  hear  the  words  of  the  dic- 
tator, and  the  notes  must  be  made  with  such  accuracy  that  there  can  be  no  mistake  in  transcrib- 
ing them.  If  the  dictation  is  too  rapid,  politely  indicate  the  fact  to  the  dictator.  Accuracy  is 
always  more  important  than  speed. 

Proper  names  should,  in  most  cases,  be  written  in  longhand,  and  inquiry  as  to  the  spelling 
should  be  made  when  there  is  any  chance  for  doubt.  Proper  names  often  vary  in  their  spelling, 
and  there  is  no  discredit  in  asking  about  them.  If  you  fail  to  hear  a  word  or  phrase,  or  forget 
a  part  of  a  sentence  dictated,  ask  for  its  repetition.  The  dictator  will  much  prefer  your  doing 
that,  to  your  wasting  time  afterward  in  trying  to  supply  the  omission,  or  to  your  coming  to  him 
for  help  after  the  sentence  has  passed  from  his  mind. 


HINTS  TO  STENOGRAPHERS  121 


279.  The  transcription.  In  this,  as  in  taking  dictation,  it  is  important  to  remember  that 
however  desirable  speed  may  be,  accuracy  is  still  more  desirable.  The  typist  should  follow  the 
meaning  of  every  sentence  transcribed  and  should  not  hesitate  to  correct  any  obvious  errors  in 
grammar,  diction,  or  construction,  that  may  occur  in  the  letter  as  it  was  dictated.  In  the  hurry 
of  dictation,  errors  often  occur  that  should  not  appear  in  a  letter.  The  stenographer  who  aspires 
to  be  more  than  a  mere  machine,  will  correct  these  when  the  notes  are  transcribed. 

Transcription  is  greatly  facilitated  by  reading  ahead  one  or  more  phrases,  or  even  through 
a  short  sentence,  and  keeping  the  words  in  mind  until  transcribed,  instead  of  consulting  the 
notebook  for  each  word  or  phrase. 

Inexperienced  stenographers  will  find  it  well  to  read  the  notes  of  each  letter  before  begin- 
ning the  transcription. 

280.  Spelling,  punctuation,  etc.  In  all  cases  of  doubt  as  to  spelling,  capitalizing, 
hyphenating,  dividing  syllables  at  the  end  of  the  line,  etc.,  consult  the  dictionary.  It  is  well  to 
keep  a  list  of  all  words  thus  verified,  and  practice  writing  them  occasionally. 

It  is  particularly  important  for  the  stenographer  to  understand  and  apply  the  rules  for 
punctuating  and  paragraphing.  Few  dictators  will  take  the  trouble  to  indicate  the  required 
paragraphs  and  punctuation-marks,  yet  they  are  likely  to  comment  unfavorably  on  their 
absence. 

The  cheap,  careless  stenographer,  who  is  without  pride  or  ambition,  may  afford  to  neglect 
these  details,  but  not  the  one  who  wants  to  succeed. 

281.  Special  marks,  initials,  etc.  In  many  offices,  the  stenographer  is  required  to  mark 
each  letter-sheet  with  his  initials,  also  the  initial  of  the  dictator  (see  the  letters  WHM — S.  on 
the  model  letter,  page  122).  When  the  letter  consists  of  several  pages,  the  initials  of  the  person 
or  firm  written  to,  are  placed  on  all  pages  after  the  first.  If  the  letter  is  to  contain  an  enclosure, 
the  word  "Enclosure"  or  the  abbreviation  Enc,  is  written  at  the  left-hand  near  the  bottom.  This 
may  prevent  the  letter's  being  mailed  without  the  enclosure.  If  there  are  several  enclosures,  the 
letter  is  marked  2  Enc,  3  Enc,  etc. 

282.  Margin  and  indentation.  By  the  term  indentation,  is  meant  the  distance  to  the 
right  of  the  margin  at  which  a  paragraph  or  otlier  part  of  a  letter  begins.  In  typewriting,  the 
amount  of  indentation  is  designated  by  means  of  tlie  numbers  on  the  typewriter  scale.  In  most 
typewriters  these  range  from  0  to  70,  or  more. 

Custom  varies  as  to  the  width  of  the  margin  and  the  indentation  to  be  given  to  the  dif- 
ferent parts  of  a  letter.  The  paragraph  indentation  should  be  uniform  and  should  equal  the 
width  of  the  margin.  The  position  of  the  other  parts,  particularly  of  the  heading  and  the 
closing,  may  need  to  vary  somewhat,  according  to  the  length  and  number  of  the  words  in  the 
several  parts.  It  is  advisable,  however,  for  the  typist  to  follow  a  uniform  system  as  far  as 
possible,  and  depart  from  it  only  when  it  is  clearly  necessary.  In  some  offices,  all  letters  are 
required  to  be  single-spaced;  in  others,  they  are  double-spaced.  Sometimes  the  body  of  the 
letter  is  single-spaced  while  the  parts  of  the  opening  and  the  closing  are  double-spaced.  In  fact, 
there  is  little  uniformity  in  these  particulars,  and  a  stenographer,  on  taking  an  office  position, 
should  ascertain  what  method  is  followed  in  that  office. 

On  page  122  is  a  typewritten  form  of  the  pen-written  letter  given  on  page  70,  the  inden- 
tation-numbers and  spacing,  as  given,  being  adapted  to  the  average  business  letter. 

The  paper  should  be  inserted  in  the  machine  so  that  the  uncovered  parts  at  the  ends  of  the 
platen  will  be  equal. 


122  BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


35 

Morning  Star,  Mich., 

Feb.  6,  19 

Mr,  Charles  A.  Webb. 

10 

Prin.  Mahoning  Academy, 

15 

Delphi,  Ohio. 
My  dear  Sir: 

10 

5     I  have  your  kind  letter  of  Feb.  3,  relating  to  my  son 
Fred. 

10 

5     It  is  indeed  a  pleasure  to  receive  from  you  so  favor- 
able an  account  of  the  boy's  conduct  at  your  school,  and  of 
his  satisfactory  progress  in  his  studies. 

10 

5     In  view  of  the  facts  set  forth  in  your  letter,  v;e  have 
decided  to  defer  to  your  judgment  and  allow  him  to  finish 
the  course  this  year, 

10 

s     Mrs.  Stanton  joins  me  in  expressing  our  grateful  ap- 
preciation of  the  benefits  our  son  has  received  through  his 
attendance  at  your  excellent  school,  and  we  wish  to  thank 
you  personally  for  the  very  kind  interest  you  have  shown  in 
hip  welfare. 

3t' 

Sincerely  yours. 


283.  When  second  sheet  is  required.  It  ciften  happens  that  a  letter  is  just  long  enough 
to  fill  the  space,  leaving  no  room  for  the  closing  signature.  There  are  several  ways  of  meet- 
ing this  difficulty.  If  it  is  a  double-spaced  letter,  single-space  the  last  paragraph,  so  as  to  leave 
room  for  the  closing.  If  a  second  sheet  is  plainly  necessary,  do  not  fill  the  first  sheet  completely, 
but  leave  a  part  of  the  letter  for  the  second  sheet.  In  any  event,  avoid  having  only  a  line  or 
two,  with  the  closing,  on  the  second  sheet.  By  noticing  the  space  occupied  by  his  notes,  a 
stenographer  can  soon  learn  to  know  whether  the  letter  will  require  more  than  one  sheet. 

284.  Superscriptions.  It  is  impracticable,  in  addressing  envelopes  with  the  typewriter, 
to  follow  closely  the  rules  prescribed  for  pen-written  superscriptions,  as  given  on  page  77.  As 
in  the  case  of  the  several  parts  of  a  letter,  a  uniform  system  of  position  and  indentation  should 
be  followed,  varying  this  to  suit  unusual  conditions.  The  forms  of  superscriptions  on  pages 
123  and  124  illustrate  the  positions,  indentations,  and  spacing  that  may  be  generally  followed. 
The  parts  of  a  three-line  address  are  separated  by  three  spaces,  while  two  spaces  separate  the 
parts  of  a  four-line  address. 

The  envelope  should  be  inserted  in  the  machine  at  the  left-hand  end  of  the  platen. 


HINTS  TO  STENOGRArHERS 


128 


25 

Mr. 

Return  <o 
he  General  Investment  Co., 

79  State  St.,  Chicago. 

STAMP 

119  Wilton  St. 

Henry  B.  Ainsjey, 

35 

Davenpo/t, 

4S 

Iowa. 

Fig.  1 


After  5  days  return  to 

AMES  &  MILLER,   BASKERS 
MADISON,  WIS. 


Room  758. 


STAMP 


25 


The  Western  Investment  Co., 


35 


Park  Row  Bldg. , 


45 

New  York, 


Fit.  2. 


J  24 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


GOODYEARMARSHALL  rUBLISHING  CO. 

PCBLISHERS   OF   BOOKKEEPING   AND 
BUSINKSS   TRAINING    SUPPLIES 

CEDAR     RAPIDS.     IOWA 


STAMP 


20 


Dr.   Charles  H.   Allen, 


30 


Pres.  Peabody  College, 


40 


Stanton, 


238  Fountain  St. 


so 

Tenn, 


Fig.  3. 


Alter  5  Days  return  to 

JAMES  F.  STANTON 

MOHNINO  SIDE.  MICn. 


STAMP 


20 


Mr.    Charles  A.   Webb, 


30 


Prin.  Mahoning  Academy, 


40 


Delphi, 


so 
Ohio, 


Fig. 


Abbreviations 


An  abbreviation  is  a  letter  or  letters  stand- 
ing for  a  word  or  phrase  of  which  they  are  a 
part. 

Rules  and  Suggestions. 

1.  Abbreviations  of  proper  nouns,  titles, 
etc.,  consist  of  or  begin  with  capitals,  as  do, 
also,  the  abbreviations  of  many  other  words  or 
phrases  that  do  not  begin  with  capitals  when 
written  in  full.  The  capitalizing  of  abbrevia- 
tions is  entirely  a  matter  of  usage. 

2.  Abbreviations  should  always  be  fol- 
lowed by  a  period. 

3.  Except  in  the  case  of  proper  nouns  or 
addresses,  do  not  ordinarily  use  abbreviations 
in  the  body  of  the  sentense. 

NOTE. — An  exception  to  this  rule  is  the  abbrevia- 
tions, C.  O.  D.  (collect  on  delivery),  f.  o.  b.  free  on 
board),  and  the  abbreviations,  A.  M.,  P.  M.,  A.  D., 
B.  C,  etc.,  when  used  with  figures  to  indicate  time. 
The  names  of  the  months  may  also  be  abbreviated  in 
the  body  of  the  sentence  to  indicate  a  date;  as,  Feb.  6; 
Aug.   16. 

4.  Names  of  cities,  and  names  of  the  days 
of  the  week  should  never  be  abbreviated  except 
in  lists,  tables,  etc.,  where  there  may  not  be 
space  to  write  the  words  in  full. 

NOTE.— Philadelphia  is  sometimes  written  "Phila." 
and  the  abbreviation  "N.  O."  is  often  used  for  New  Or- 
leans, and  "S.  F."  for  San  Francisco. 

5.  Abbreviations  are  usually  i)luralized  by 
adding  s  to  the  singular;  as,  Bro.,  Bros.;  lb., 
lbs. ;  fol.,  fols. ;  etc. 

The  following  classified  lists  of  commonly 
used  abbreviations  should  be  studied  until  the 
student  is  thoroughly  familiar  with  them: 

The  United  States  and  Territorial  Possessions. 

The  following  list  includes  the  official  ab- 
breviations of  the  several  states,  the  territories. 
and  territorial  possessions  of  the  United 
States,  as  published  by  the  Postoffice  Depart- 
ment. A  number  of  other  forms  are  in  com- 
mon use,  but,  as  a  means  of  establisliing  uni- 


formity as  well  as  to  prevent  the  missending 
of  mail  matter,  the  postal  authorities  advise 
the  use  of  the  official  forms.  It  will  be  noted 
that  in  the  case  of  several  states,  the  name  is 
preferably  written  in  full : 

Names.  Abbreviations. 

United  States  of  America U.  S.  A. 

Alabama    Ala. 

Alaska  Territory  Alaska 

Arizona    Ariz. 

Arkansas     Ark. 

California    Cat. 

Colorado    Colo. 

Connecticut    Conn. 

Delaware   Del. 

District  of  Columbia  D.  C. 

Florida    Fla. 

Georgia    Ga. 

Guam    Guam 

Hawaii  Territory   Hawaii 

Idaho    Idaho 

Illinois    III. 

Indiana    Ind. 

Iowa  Iowa 

Kansas    Kans. 

Kentucky     Ky. 

Louisiana    La. 

Maine    Maine 

Maryland    Md. 

Massachusetts    Mass. 

Michigan    Mich. 

Minnesota    Minn. 

Mississippi    Miss. 

Missouri    Mo. 

Montana    Mont. 

Nebraska    Nebr. 

Nevada Nev. 

New  Hampshire   N.  H. 

New  Jersey  N.  J. 

New  Mexico   N.  Mex. 

New  York   N.  Y. 

North  Carolina  N.  C. 

North  Dakota  N.  D. 

Ohio     Ohio 

Oklahoma    Okla. 

Oregon    Oregon 

Pennsylvania    Pa. 

Porto  Rico   P.  R 

Rhode  Island   R.  I. 

Samoa,  Tutuila    Samoa 

South  Carolina  S.  C 

South  Dakota  S.  Dak. 

Tennessee    Tenn. 

Texas    Tex. 

Utah   Utah 

Vermont    ., Vt. 

Virginia    Va. 


120  BUSINKSS  ENGLISH 


Washington    Wash.  Mexico    Mex. 

West  Virginia   W.  Va.  Netherlands     Neth. 

Wisconsin    Wis.  Nova  Scotia  N.  S. 

Wyoming    Wyo.  North  West  Territory N.  W.  T. 

Philippine  Islands  P.  I.  Ontario    Ont. 

•  Prince  Edward's  Island P.  E.  I. 

Foreign  Countries.  West  Indies  W.  I. 

In  sending  letters  to  foreign  addresses,   it  The  Names  of  the  Months. 

is  usually  advisable  to  write  the  name  of  the  Name.                                                Abbreviation. 

country  in  full.     The  following  abbreviations,     January   Jan. 

,  r^  ,  r  ebruary    Feb. 

however,  are  often  used :  August    Aug. 

.    .  September    Sept. 

Names.  Abbreviations.  October    Oct. 

Austria    Aust.  November    Nov. 

Australia    Austral.  December    Dec. 

Belgium  "!^         ..................... ..... ..... .Belg!  The   following  should   not  be  abbreviated: 

British  India  B.  I.  March,  April,  May,  June,  July. 

Canada    Can. 

Cape  of  Good  Hope C.  G.  H.  NOTE. — Usage  has  supported  the  abbreviations,  Mar., 

East  Indies   E.   I.  Apr.,  Jun.,  and  Jul.,  respectively,  for  March,  April,  June, 

England    Eng.  and  July,  but  in  most  modern  offices,  their  use  has  been 

Finland    Fin.  discontinued. 

Business  Abbreviations 

The  following  list  contains  the  more  important  abbreviations  commonly  used  in  business. 
In  making  out  bills  or  inventories  of  merchandise,  it  is  often  found  convenient  to  use  may  ab- 
breviations not  authorized  by  general  usage,  but  which  are  familiar  to  those  engaged  in  the 
special  line  of  business  in  which  the  abbreviations  are  used. 

NOTE. — Abbreviations  for  weights  or  quantities,  as,  bu.,  lb.,  pkg.,  are  usually  capitalized  in  bills,  inventories, 
etc.,  but  are  begun  with  small  letters  in  most  other  cases. 

Attorney  Att.  or  Atty.   Cents    cts.  First  Quality  Al  Pages    pp. 

Account  Acct.  or  acct.   Charged    Cgd.  Folio   F.  or  Fol.  Paid    Pd. 

Adventure    Adv.   Check    Ck.  Foot  or   Feet ft.  Pair    pr. 

Advertisement . .  ad.   or   adv.   Cleared    eld.  Forenoon   A.  M.  Payment    Payt. 

Afternoon   P.  M.    Clerk    elk.  Forward    Ford.  Peck   pk. 

Against  (versus)    vs.   Collection    Coll.  Free  on  board f.  o.  b.  Piece    pc. 

Agent    Agt.  Collect  on  Delivery. .  C.O.D.  Freight    Frt.  Pieces    ps. 

AH  correct  O.  K.   College    Coll.  Gallon    gal.  Pint  pt. 

Amount    Amt.  Commercial. .Com.  or  Coml.  Gentlemen  or  Sirs.  .Messrs.  Post  office  P.  Q. 

And  so  forth.... &c  or  etc.    Commission    Com.  Gross  gr.  or  gro.  Postoffice  Order... P.  O.  O. 

Answer    Ans.    Consignment    Con.  Handkerchief    Hdkf.  Pound   lb. 

Arrive    ar.  County  or  Company. ..  .Co.  Hogshead    Hhd.  Premium    Prem. 

Article    Art.   Creditor    Cr.  Hour    hr.  President    Pres. 

Assorted    Asstd.  Current   (this  month). ..Cur.  Hundred    C.  Quart    qt. 

At    @   Custom  House  C.  H.  Hundred  Weight   Cwt.  Quarter    qr. 

Average    av.   Day   Book D.   B.  Inches    in.  Rail  Road R.  R. 

Avoirdupois    Avoir.    Days    ds.  Instant   (this  month).,  .inst.  Railwav    Ry. 

Bags    Bgs.   Deadhead   (free)    D.  H.  Insurance    Ins.  Sales  Book  S.  B. 

Balance    Bal.   Debtor    Dr.  Interest    Int.  Secretary  Sec.  or  Secy. 

Bales    Bis.   Department    Dept.  Inventory    Invt.  Shipment    Shipt. 

Bank    Bk.   Deposit    Dep.  Invoice    Inv.  Steamer    Str. 

Barrel   brl.  or  bbl.   Discount    Dis.  Invoice  Book I.  B.  Stenographer    Sten. 

Bill  book  B.  B.   Ditto  (the  same) do  Junior    Jr.  Street   St. 

Bill  of  lading B.  L.   Dollars dolls,  or  Dolls.  Journal    J.  Superfine    Super. 

Bills   Payable B.   Pay.   Domestic    dom.  Journal  Folio  J.  F.  Sundries    Sunds. 

Bills   Receivable B.    Rec.   Dozen    doz.  Ledger  Folio  L.  F.  Take  Notice  N.  B. 

Black    Blk.   Draft    Dft.  Manufacturing    Mfg.  That  is  i.e. 

Bought    Bot.    Each    ea.  Memorandum    Mem.  Thousand    M. 

Bound,  Bond   Bd.   Electric    Elec.  Merchandise    Mdse.  Ton    T. 

Brother    Bro.    Embroidered    Embd.  Mister    Mr.  Transportation    Trans. 

Brought    Brot.  Errors  and  omissions  Mistress    Mrs.  Transaction    Trans. 

Brown    Bro.       excepted E.  and  O.  E.  Money  order M.  O.  Treasurer   Treas. 

Bundles    Bdls.    Errors  Excepted    E.  E.  Month    mo.  Vice-President  V.  Pres. 

Bushels    Bu.    Example    Ex.  Namely    viz.  Volume    Vol. 

By  way  of via   Exchange    Exc.  National    Nat.  Way  Bill   W.  B. 

Capital    Cap.    Expense    Exp.  Next  month   Prox.  Week    wk 

Carat    Car.  Express  money  order  Number    No.  Weight              Wf 

Case   cs.       * Ex.  M.  O.  Ounce    oz.  ^    ^       , 

Cash  Book C.  B.  Favor   Fav.  Package    pkg.  ^^^°^    yd- 

Cashier    Cash.  Figured   Figd.  Page   p.  Year    yr. 


TITLES  AND  SALUTATIONS 


127 


Titles  and  Salutations 

In  addressing  business  or  official  letters  to  members  of  the  learned  professions  or  to  per- 
sons holding  important  official  or  other  positions,  one  should  always  use  the  form  of  address 
and  salutation  prescribed  by  custom  or  etiquette.  Failure  to  do  this  may  give  offence  or,  at 
least,  prejudice  the  purpose  for  which  the  letter  is  written. 

The  following  classified  reference  list  of  such  addresses  and  salutations  will  prove  of  service 
to  those  who  may  have  occasion  to  write  letters  to  persons  included  in  the  classes  above 
referred  to : 

GOVERNMENT  OFFICIALS. 

To  the  President. 

To  the  President, 

Executive   Mansion,   Washington,  D.   C. 
Sir  (or  Mr.  President)  : 


NOTE. — The  President  is  the  only  government  of- 
ficial whose  name  should  be  omitted  in  the  address.  In 
conversation,  the  President  is  addressed  as  "Mr.  Presi- 
dent. 

To  the  Vice-President. 

To  the  Honorable  Thomas  R.  Marshall, 
Vice-President  of  the  United  States, 

Senate  Chamber,  Washington,  D.  C. 
Sir: 

To  a  Cabinet  Officer. 

To  the  Honorable  A.  S.  Burleson, 
Postmaster-General, 

Post  Office  Department, 


Sir: 


Washington,  D.  C. 


To  a  United  States  Senator. 

Hon.  Chester  I.  Long, 

Senate  Chamber,  Washington,  D.  C. 
Senator : 

NOTE. — If  the  writer  is  an  acquaintance  he  may 
write,  "My  dear  Senator." 

To  a  Justice  of  the  Supreme  Court. 
Hon.  Charles  E.  Hughes, 

Justice  of  the  Supreme  Court, 
Washington,  D.  C. 
Sir: 

To  a  Congressman. 

Hon.  James  W.  Good,  M.  C, 

House  of  Representatives,  Washington,  D.  C. 

Sir: 

To  a  Governor. 

To  His  Excellency,  Woodbridge  N.  Ferris, 

Governor  of  Michigan. 
Sir  (or  Governor)  : 

Other  civil  or  judicial  offices  of  the  United 
States,  or  of  the  several  states,  are  given  the 
title  "Hon."  and  the  salutation  "Sir"  or 
"Dear  Sir." 


The  title  "Hon."  is  now  rather  loosely  em- 
ployed in  the  case  of  any  prominent  person 
who  holds,  or  has  held,  any  important  official 
position. 

The  title  "Esq."  (esquire)  is  often  used 
with  the  names  of  lawyers  or  persons  holding 
minor  official  positions. 

TO  PERSONS  IN  THE  MILITARY  OR  ' 
NAVAL  SERVICE. 
To  a  General. 

Maj.  Gen.  Arthur  Murray,  U.  S.  A., 
Commanding  Western  Division, 
San  Francisco,  Cal. 
General : 

Brij^.  Gen.  Frederick  A.  Smith,  U.  S.  A., 
Commander  Dept.  of  the  Missouri, 
Omaha,  Nebr. 
General : 

To  a  Minor  Commissioned  Officer. 
Maj.  A.  T.  Buel,  U.  S.  A., 

Commanding  2nd  Battalion,  7th  Inf., 
Ft.  Sheridan,  111. 
Major : 

NOTE. — It  is  military  etiquette  to  give  the  rank  salu- 
tation, as,  General,  Colonel,  Captain,  etc.,  to  any  army 
or  navy  officer  above  the  rank  of  lieutenant.  A  lieu- 
tenant or  a  non-commissioned  officer  is  given  the  salu- 
tation, "Sir." 

To  a  Rear  Admiral. 

Adm.  Alfred  Reynolds,  U.  S.  N., 

Commanding  Pacific  Reserve  Fleet, 
San  Francisco,  Cal. 
Rear  Admiral : 

To  a  Commander, 

Com.  Wm.  W.  Phelps,  N.  S.  N., 

Commanding  Battleship  "Iowa." 
Commander : 

NOTE. — In  addressing  an  army  or  navy  officer  in  ac- 
tive service,  his  command  should  be  designated.  In  the 
case  of  a  retired  officer,  the  address  and  salutation  are 
the  same  as  for  an  officer  in  active  service.  The  salu- 
tation, Sir,  is  given  to  other  persons  connected  with  the 
army  and  navy,  as,  quarter-masters,  adjutants,  etc.,  but 
these  are  given  their  rank-title  in  the  address,  as.  Gen., 
Maj.,  Col.,  etc.  A  complete  list  of  the  rank-titles  of  all 
officials  of  the  army  and  navy  of  the  United  States  may 
he  obtained  by  addressing  the  War  and  Navy  Depart- 
ments at  Washington. 


12S 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


TO  MEMBERS  OF  THE  CLERGY— PROT- 
ESTANT. 
To  a  Bishop  (Other  than  a  Methodist.) 

To  the  Right  Reverend  Henry  L.  Stone,  D.  D. 

Bishop  of  Pennsylvania. 
Right  Reverend  Sir: 

To  a  Methodist  Bishop,  or  Other  Clergyman, 

Priest,  Rahbi,  Rector,  of  Any 

Denomination. 

Rev.  Samuel  S.  Jones, 

Pastor  Seventh  Avenue  Baptist  Church, 
Henderson,  111. 
Reverend  Sir  (or  Rev.  and  Dear  Sir)  : 

NOTE. — The  pastoral  charge  or  other  position 
should,  when  known,  be  given  in  the  address. 

TO  MEMBERS  OF  THE  CLERGY- 
ROMAN  CATHOLIC. 

It  would  not  be  appropriate  in  a  work  of 
this  kind  to  attempt  a  full  consideration  of  the 
many  titles  and  salutations  of  respect  or  cour- 
tesy used  in  correspondence  with  the  various 
officials  of  the  Roman  Catholic  church.  As  a 
rule,  non-Catholics  would  not  be  expected  to 
use  the  forms  of  address  and  salutation  that 
would  be  appropriate  for  Catholics  to  use. 

The  following  forms  may  be  serviceable  to 
those  who  may  have  occasion  to  write  business 
letters  to  members  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
clergy  or  to  officials  of  the  various  orders  and 
societies : 

To  a  Cardinal. 

To  His  Eminence,  Cardinal  Gibbons, 

Cathedral,  Baltimore,  Md. 
Most  Eminent  and  Reverend  Sir : 

To  an  Archbishop. 

Most  Reverend  John  Ireland, 

Archishop  of  St.  Paul, 

Cathedral,  St.  Paul,  Minn. 

Most  Reverend  Sir : 

NOTE. — If  the  Christian  name  of  the  prelate  is  un- 
known, the  address  may  be  simply,  "Most  Reverend 
Archbishop   Ireland,   Cathedral,   St.   Paul,  Minn." 

To  a  Bishop. 

Right  Reverend  Francis  Dunn,  D.  D., 
Bishop  of  St.  Louis, 

Cathedral,  St.  Louis. 
Right  Reverend  Sir : 

To  a  Rector  or  Head  of  a  Religious  Order. 

Very  Reverend  Stephen  Brady,  S.  J., 

Rector  (or  Prior)  St.  James  College, 
Albion.  Ohio. 
Very  Reverend  Sir: 


NOTE. — The  initials  of  the  order  are  usually  ap- 
pended to  the  name;  as,  S.  J.  (Society  of  Jesus), 
O.  S.  B.  (Order  of  St.  Benedict). 

To  a  Female  Superior  of  Order. 

Reverend  Mother  Coleta, 

Superior,  Convent  of  the  Holy  Cross, 
Indianapolis,  Ind. 
Rev.  and  dear  Mother: 

To  a  Female  Member  of  a  Religious  Order. 

Sr.  M.  Genevieve, 

Sacred  Heart  School, 
Davenport,  Iowa. 
Rev.  and  dear  Sister: 

To  a  Priest. 

Rev.  Joseph  Delaney,  D.  D., 
St.  Benedict's  Church, 
Fenton,  Ohio. 
Rev.  and  dear  Sir : 

or, 
Rev.  Father  Delaney, 

St.  Benedict's  Church,  etc. 

TO  SECULAR  PROFESSIONS. 

To  the  President  of  a  College. 

Pres.  Henry  L.  Ames,  LL.  D., 
Elmhurst  College, 
Clinton,  Nebr. 
Dear  Sir : 

NOTE. — If  the  head  of  a  college  (as  is  usually  the 
case)  is  a  clergyman,  the  address  should  be,  "Rev. 
Henry  L.  Ames,  LL.  D.  (or  other  degree  title).  Presi- 
dent Elmhurst  College,"  or,  "Rev.  Dr.  Henry  L.  Ames," 
etc. 

To  a  Professor. 

Chas.  A.  Snow,  Ph.  D., 

Professor  of  Biology,  Oberlin  College, 
Oberlin,  Ohio. 
Dear  Sir : 

or. 
Prof.  Chas.  A.  Snow,  Ph.  D., 

Department  of  Biology,  etc., 
or, 
Dr.  Chas  A.  Snow, 

Professor  of  Biology,  etc. 

"Professor"  and  "Doctor." 

Any  scholastic  degree  containing  the  letter 
D.  entitles  its  holder  to  the  address  title  "Dr." 
or  "Doctor,"  but  this  title  is  not  usually  given 
unless  the  holder  is  a  clergyman,  a  teacher  in  a 
college,  or  a  practicing  physician,  surgeon, 
dentist,  etc. 

The  title  "Prof."  or  "Professor"  is  properly 
employed  only  in  the  case  of  a  teacher  who 
holds  a  scholastic  degree,  and  who  teaches  in  a 
college   or  other   institution   conferring  schol- 


GENERAL  REVIEW 


12? 


astic  degrees.  The  abuse  of  this  title  is  very 
prevalent.  In  some  parts  of  the  country,  al- 
most every  teacher  is  given  and  complacently 
accepts  the  title  "Professor,"  and  the  title  is 
also  appropriated  by  musicians,  sleight-of- 
liand  performers,  dancing-masters,  and  various 
ether  persons  whose  employments  are  some- 
what out  of  the  usual  order.  A  proper  regard 
for*  the  real  dignity  and  value  of  the  title 
"Professor"  should  lead  intelligent  persons  to 
confine  its  application  to  those  who  are  really 
entitled  to  it. 

To  a  Physician. 

C.  W.  Hall,  M.  D.. 

Holbrook,  Ohio. 
Dear  Sir  (or  Dear  Doctor)  : 

or, 
Dr.  C.  W.  Hall,  etc. 

NOTE.— Do  not  use  both  tlie  title  "Dr."  and  the  de- 
gree letters.  This  is  permissible  only  in  the  case  of 
clergymen  or  professors  in  colleges.  The  title  "Mr."  is 
never  used  when  the  degree  letters  are  given. 

To  a  Lawyer. 
Mr.  Chas.  S.  May,  Attorney  at  Law, 

Bennington,  Vt. 
Dear  Sir: 

or, 
Chas.  S.  May,  Esq.,  etc. 

NOTE. — The  title  "Esq."  (esquire)  was  formerly 
given  to  lawyers  and  to  private  citizens  having  a  cer- 
tain official  or  social  prominence  but  not  enough  to 
justify  the  title  "Hon." 

The  title  "Esq."  is  now  but  little  used  in  America, 
and  its  use  is  not  really  essential  in  any  case.  Never 
use  both  "Mr."  and  "Esq."  in  the  same  address. 

TITLES  APPLIED  TO  WOMEN. 

A  woman  who  holds  an  official  or  other 
position,  is  given  the  same  title  that  would  in 
the  same  case  be  given  to  a  man.  If,  for  in- 
stance, Mary  J.  Brown  were  to  be  elected  gov- 
ernor of  Colorado,  her  address  would  be,  "To 
Her  Excellency,  Mary  J.  Brown,  Governor  of 
Colorado.     Madam   (or  Governor)." 

If  a  woman  holds  a  degree  and  teaches  in  a 


college  or  other  degree-conferring  institution, 
she  is  given  the  title  "Dr."  or  "Prof.,"  as  h, 
the  case  of  a  man. 

The  titles  "Miss"  or  "Mrs."  may  or  may  not 
be  used,  but  they  should  not  be  employed  when 
the  title  "Dr."  or  "Prof."  is  used. 

Examples. 

Miss  Mary  L.  Stone,  A.  M., 

Professor  of  English  History, 

Vassar  College. 

Mrs.  Alice  A.  Marvin,  Ph.  D., 

Professor  of  Modern  Languages, 

Delphi  College. 

Dear  Madam: 

Professor  Ellen  E.  Davis,  A.  M., 

Dept.  Domestic  Science, 

Lewis  Institute, 

Chicago. 

Dear  Madam : 

NOTE. — The  salutation  "Madam"  is  given  unless  the 
title  "Miss"  is  used.  In  the  latter  case,  the  salutation 
should  be  omitted  in  formal  letters.  If  the  writer  is  a 
friend,  student,  or  acquaintance,  the  salutation  may  be, 
"Dear  Miss  Davis,"  or  "Dear  Professor,"  etc. 

HUSBAND'S  TITLE. 

A  woman  should  never  be  given  her  hus- 
band's title;  as,  "Mrs.  Gov.  Henry  T.  Davis," 
"Mrs.  Col.  A  .B.  Jones,"  etc.  The  address 
should  be  "Mrs.  Henry  T.  Davis,"  "Mrs.  A. 
B.  Jones,"  unless  the  woman  is  addressed  by 
her  own  christian  name.  Neither  should  a 
woman  engaged  in  a  professional  pursuit  be 
addressed  by  the  title  "Mrs."  or  "Miss"  in 
combination  with  the  professional  title;  as, 
"Mrs.  Dr.  Sarah  Wilson,"  "Rev.  Mrs.  Cynthia 
Stuart,"  or,  "Miss  Dr.  A.  Shaw,"  etc. 

SALUTATIONS. 

In  the  secular  professions  generally,  the  sal- 
utation "Sir"  or  "Dear  Sir"  is  given  to  men 
and  "Madam"  to  women.  More  familiarly, 
either  men  or  women,  may  be  given  the  saluta- 
tion, "Dear  Doctor,"  "Dear  Professor,"  "My 
dear  Professor,"  etc. 


For  General  Review. 


To  the  Teacher:  The  following  lists  of  test  ques- 
tions are  intended  to  review  the  student's  knowledge 
of  the  preceding  lessons.  It  has  been  thought  best  not 
to  divide  this  matter  into  lessons,  but  to  leave  the 
amount  and  method  of  assignment  to  the  instructor. 

Nouns  and  Pronouns. 

Write  short  sentences,  using  the  following 
nouns  as  subjects  followed  by  is  or  are,  as  the 
case  may  require : 


ashes 

news 

goods 

riches 

calisthenics 

tidings 

morals 

f^sh 

politics 

dice 

Correct  the  following  where  necessary 

^.     men's  hats. 

2.     science's  discoveries. 

130 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


3.  A  women's  right's  meeting. 

4.  My  aunt's  husband's  cousin. 

5.  Frank's  brother's  bicycle's  tires  are 
punctured. 

6.  My  friend's  sisters  were  not  at  home. 

7.  We  don't  sell  boy's  sizes,  we  have  only 
the  men's. 

Write  the  following  sentences,  choosing 
the  correct  word  from  those  italicized : 

1.  Whom  zvho  do  you  see?  Him  he  and 
Harry. 

2.  He  believed  it  to  be  us  we;  but  it  was 
them  they. 

3.  I  saw  the  man  zvho  whom  they  told  me 
was  to  be  appointed. 

4.  Whom  who  do  you  suppose  it  to  be? 

5.  Both  they  them  and  their  confederates 
believed  it  to  be  us  we  who  exposed  them. 

Correct  such  of  the  following  sentences  as 
you  consider  incorrect  and  briefly  indicate  the 
reason  for  the  correction : 

1.  It  could  not  have  been  them. 

2.  All  of  us  returned  to  their  work. 

3.  Everyone  brought  their  lunch. 

4.  The  book  is  not  our's ;  it  is  her's. 

5.  He  is  a  man  who  I  know  to  be  honest. 

6.  He  is  a  man  whom  I  feel  sure  is  honest. 

7.  He  does  not  cross  his  ts  or  dots  his  is. 

8.  We  saw  several  deers  and  caught  a  fine 
string  of  fishes. 

9.  Neither  of  us  had  our  lessons. 

10.  They  came  with  Kate  and  I  but  we  do 
not  know  who  else  they  are  acquainted  with. 

11.  The  contract  must  be  signed  both  by 
yourself  and  wife. 

12.  Everybody  presented  their  tickets  at 
the  door. 

13.  You  may  .make  your  complaint  to 
whoever  you  like. 

14.  He  was  with  I  and  Harry  when  his 
friend  arrived. 

Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 
Write   a   list   giving   the   comparative    and 
superlative  degree  for  such  of  the  following 
adjectives  as  admit  of  comparison  : 

black  true  round 

perfect  splendid  elegant 

handsome  good  hearty 

superior  frank  human 

handy  false  humane 

Correct  such  of  the  following  sentences  as 
you  think  are  incorrect : 

1.  We  should  try  to  look  pleasantly  even 
if  we  feel  badly. 

2.  A  more  perfect  specimen,  I  ha\'e  never 
seen. 

3.  The  fruit  tasted  delicious. 


4.  We  had    quite    a    nice  time  but  were 
some  tired  when  we  got  home. 

5.  We  all  looked  seriously  after  he  got 
through  talking. 

6.  I  saw  him  previous  to  his  election. 

7.  I  only  intended  to  frighten  him. 

8.  Tlie  house  needs  painting  badly. 

9.  He  stood  silently  for  a  couple  of  min- 
utes, and  then  walked  away  very  slow. 

10.  I  cannot  run  as  swiftly  as  you  do. 

11.  She  hasn't  seen  none  of  them  since 
Easter. 

12.  I  haven't  no  use  for  those  kind  of 
people. 

13.  That  light  complected  young  man  is 
real  smart  ain't  he? 

14.  I  would  not  select  them  kind,  they  are 
quite  expensive. 

15.  He  talks  considerable,  but  not  near  so 
much  as  he  used  to. 

16.  His  statement  is  more  complete  than 
yours. 

17.  He  has  someone's  else  books. 
38.     Let  everyone  enjoy  theirselves. 

19.  All  five  of  the  children  quarreled  with 
each  other  constantly. 

20.  Your  work  looks  very  nice  indeed. 

Verbs. 

Write  the  five  principal  forms  of  each  of  the 
following  verbs : 
write  see  set 

lie  (or  recline)  go  throw 

talk  sit 

lay  blow 

Write  five  sentences,  each  having  a  transi- 
tive verb  or  verbal  with  a  pronoun  for  its 
object  complement. 

Write  correctly  such  of  the  following  sen- 
tences as  you  consider  incorrect,  and  be  pre- 
pared to  give  the  reason  for  your  correction : 

1.  The    odds   is   five   to    four   in   Fred's 
favor. 

2.  Twenty   dollars   were   paid    for  insur- 
ance. 

3.  He  has  not  went  to  the  theatre  for  a 
month. 

4.  They  lay  him  to  rest  in  the  old  church 
yard  last  Wednesday. 

5.  She  come  to  school  last  term. 

6.  I  would  have  liked  to  have  met  him. 

7.  The  committee  is  invited  to  dine  at  the 
Governor's  mansion. 

8.  I  fear  I  will  be  unable  to  go. 

9.  A   pair   of   twins   was  playing  on  the 
grass  near  the  gate. 

10.     If  I  was  you,  I  should  refuse  to  go. 


GENERAL  REVIEW 


181 


11.  We  have  only  got  ten  dollars;  we  had 
ought  to  have  at  least  twenty. 

12.  Altogether,  nearly  two  hundred  dollars 
were  raised. 

13.  A  pair  of  scissors  was  laying  on  the 
table. 

14.  Fifty  tons  were  sold  in  October. 

15.  Several  carloads  of  wheat  was  re- 
ceived. 

16.  More  than  a  thousand  bushels  of  wheat 
were  burned. 

17.  If  I  was  to  have  pneumonia  again.  I  do 
not  believe  I  should  recover. 

18.  The  jury  is  dissatisfied  with  its  quar- 
ters. 

19.  The  committee  include  a  number  of 
wealthy  men. 

20.  The  family  has  removed  to  California 
for  its  health. 

21.  The  leaders,  not  the  union,  is  to  blame. 

22.  Neither  the  councilmen  nor  the  mayor 
are  to  blame. 

23.  The  bridal  pair  was  congratulated  by 
their  friends. 

24.  One  basket  of  eggs  was  nearly  all  bad. 

Miscellaneous  Errors  for  Written  Review. 

Write  correctly  such  of  tlie  following  sen- 
tences as  you  think  are  incorrect.  In  many 
cases,  the  sentence  contains  several  errors. 
Try  to  find  all  of  them.  Be  prepared  to  give 
a  reason  for  all  corrections : 

1.  It  don't  make  as  much  noise  as  the 
other  machines  and  it  seldom  ever  wants  re- 
pairing. 

2.  He  don't  use  tliose  kind  of  envelopes 
for  his  personal  letters. 

3.  He  seemed  to  feci  badly  about  it  at 
the  time,  but  he  hasn't  said  nothing  about  it 
lately. 

4.  Try  and  see  him  to-day. 

NOTE. — It  is  a  common  error  to  use  and  for  to 
when  the  verb  try  is  followed  by  an  infinitive. 

5.  Neither  him  or  me  will  agree  to  the 
arrangement,  and  just  between  you  and  I,  I 
don't  believe  Mr.  Harlan  likes  the  plan  real 
well  either. 

6.  I  shall  try  and  make  the  sale,  but  I  am 
by  no  means  sure  tliat  I  will  succeed. 

7.  You  are  not  the  one  for  whom  I  was 
looking. 

NOTE.— The  rule  of  the  old  rhetoricians,  "Do,  not 
end  a  sentence  with  a  preposition,"  is  no  longer  rigidly 
observed  by  onr  best  writers.  Such  expressions  as  the 
following  are  now  quite  allowable: 

"That  was  what  I  w.ts  looking  for." 

"He  had  no  one  to  talk  to." 

"I  had  nothing  to  write  with." 


"We  had  much  to  talk  about." 

"We  had  little  to  go  on." 

Questions,  however,  should  not  end  with  a  preposi- 
tion. Say,  "Of  whom  were  you  speaking?"  not  "Whom 
were  you  speaking  of?" 

8.  I  shall  try  to  immediately  see  him. 

NOTE. — A  modifier  should  not  separate  the  parts  of 
an  infinitive.  This  construction  is  known  as  a  "split 
infinitive." 

9.  He  praised    his    bravery    highly,  even 
compared  him  with  a  lion. 

10.  This  is  very  different  than  where  you 
are  working  at  so  much  a  week. 

11.  The  gentleman  proved  to  be  none 
other  than  the  President. 

12.  I  honor  him  above  all  my  friends. 

13.  I  am  the  youngest  of  my  four  brothers. 

14.  Have  you  got  a  good  pen  to-day, 
Mark?  If  not,  you  have  got  to  get  one  before 
you  begin  writing. 

15.  Speak  more  distinct;  I  can  scarcely 
understand  you. 

16.  Did  you  ever  know  of  me  doing  a 
thing  like  that? 

17.  Shall  I  return  the  goods  which  remain 
unsold  ? 

18.  The  letter  has  laid  on  his  desk  for  a 
week. 

19.  He  was  one  of  those  boys  who  never 
does  anything  right. 

20.  I  have  no  other  friend  but  him. 

21.  It  is  nothing  else  but  laziness  that 
causes  her  to  do  her  work  so  poor. 

22.  No  one  but  me  and  Fred  are  to  blame. 

23.  I  did  not  hear  about  him  going  to  Bos- 
ton till  Thursday. 

24.  It  would  have  gave  me  much  pleasure 
to  have  gone. 

25.  He  is  a  better  penman  than  a  book- 
keeper. 

26.  This  is  an  old  story  of  my  friend 
Major  Wilson. 

NOTE. — The  above  sentence  may  mean  that  the 
story  was  one  told  by  Major  Wilson  or  about  him.  Re- 
move the  ambiguity. 

27.  This  is  a  sketch  of  my  brother's  when 

he  was  but  sixteen. 

NOTE. — The  "double  possessive"  is  condemned  by 
some  authors,  but  is  justified  by  good  usage.  To  omit 
the  sign  of  possession  here  would  make  the  sentence 
mean  that  the  sketch  represented  my  brother,  but  was 
not  his  work.  The  double  possessive  could  be  avoided, 
however,  by  using  the  phrase  "drawn  by  my  brother." 

28.  You  must  either  deliver  the  goods 
yourself  or  get  someone  else  to. 

NOTE. — Ending  the  sentence  with  the  infinitive  par- 
ticiple to  is  considered  inelegant,  but  is  perhaps  an  al- 
lowable colloquialism,  in  such  sentences  as,  "He 
doesn't  need  to,"  "He  wants  to,"  "We  will  trv  to,"  "I 
do  not  like  to,"  etc.,  where  the  verb  is  clearlv  under- 
stood. 


132 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


29.  He  is  very  much  pleased  at  the  result. 

30.  Mr.  B.,  another  one  of  the  office  force, 
and  who  was  an  old  bookkeeper,  also  helped 
me  sometimes. 

31.  I  have  little  use  for  these  kind  of 
people. 

32.  The  rule  relates  to  words  ending  in 
final  e  only. 

33.  We  have  both  Byron  and  Moore's 
poems. 

34.  He  issues  orders  as  though  he  was  the 
proprietor. 

35.  It  is  much  the  most  costly  of  the  two. 

36.  Neither  of  us  are  required  to  be  at  the 
oflfice  till  eight. 

37.  Myself  and  Mr.  A.  were  invited. 

38.  I  did  not  go.  If  I  had,  I  would  prob- 
ably have  been  chosen. 

FOR  ORAL  REVIEW. 

Grammar. 

Why  are  the  following  incorrect? 

1.  One  don't  know  how  many  gram- 
matical errors  they  make  until  their  attention 
is  called  to  it. 

NOTE. — Errors  in  grammar  are  not  grammatical. 

2.  I  will  be  obliged  to  cancel  our  contract. 

3.  We  have  a  most  complete  stock  of  the 
very  latest  styles. 

4.  Him  and  Harry  had  thought  it  was  us. 

5.  Each  man  has  some  good  in  him. 

6.  Nell  is  always  scared  of  cyclones. 

7.  I  am  so  hoarse  I  can't  scarcely  speak. 

8.  I  have  most  finished  my  new  book. 

9.  Who  is  this  letter  for? 

10.  It  is  fifteen  minutes  to  nine. 

NOTE. — The  meaning  is  that  it  lacks  fifteen  minutes 
of  being  nine. 

11.  He  is  not  as  tall  as  me. 

12.  You  study  harder  than  him. 

13.  He  wasn't  much  sick  Monday,  but  he 
is  awful  bad  to-day. 

14.  Only  three  or  four  people  were 
present. 

15.  Five  of  we  girls  roomed  together  and 
we  quarreled  with  each  other  nearly  every 
day. 

16.  A  case  of  eggs  were  bought. 

17.  I  can't  go  without  you  do. 
NOTE. — Avoid  using  without  as  a  conjunction. 

18.  He  was  real  sick,  but  not  exactly  dan- 
gerous. 

19.  So  soon  as  I  said  my  say,  I  struck  out 
for  home. 

20.  I  am  afraid  I  cannot  spare  the  money 
to-day. 


21.  I  could  do  a  lot  better  if  I  had  a  new 
machine  like  Joe. 

22.  We  rode  over  in  a  horse  and  buggy. 

23.  We  are  to  have  company  for  supper. 

NOTE. — This  remark  was  not  made  by  a  cannibal. 

24.  He  asked  me  to  go  and  fetch  him  a 
morning  paper. 

25.  We  are  going  to  go  to-day. 

26.  He  hadn't  ought  to  stand  for  it;  if  I 
was  him  I  would  look  out  for  my  rights. 

Misused  Words. 

In  many  of  the  following  sentences,  there 
are  from  two  to  four  misused  words.  Try  to 
find  all  of  them : 

1.  I  recollect  the  date;  it  was  June  1, 
1913.  I  am  certain  of  this,  although  I  am 
generally  liable  to  forget  dates. 

2.  Do  you  know  how  soon  it  will  be  be- 
fore you  go  to  St.  Louis  again  ? 

3.  I  was  stopping  at  the  Palmer  House 
before  the  accident  transpired. 

4.  At  that  school,  every  girl  has  got  to 
take  a  two  hours'  dictation  a  day. 

5.  Each  dog  has  his  day. 

6.  He  is  now  quite  a  musician  and  thinks 
of  adopting  music  as  an  avocation. 

7.  We  talked  as  much  as  an  hour,  and  he 
did  not  seem  as  mad  at  us  as  he  did  at  the 
Brown  Company. 

8.  You  had  better  fetch  your  umbrella 
along;  it  is  apt  to  rain. 

9.  His  account  was  partially  settled  last 
month. 

10.  We  have  hardly  enough  paper  to  do 
us  till  Saturday. 

11.  The  book  abounds  in  errors,  and  we 
have  been  able  to  sell  but  a  small  portion  of  the 
invoice. 

12.  He  was  not  adapted  for  selling  goods 
and  in  this  regard  I  had  the  advantage  of 
him. 

13.  You  need  solicit  us  no  farther;  our 
answer  is  definite. 

14.  We  have  plenty  of- this  brand  for  pres- 
ent orders,  but  our  supply  is  not  adequate  for 
tlie  demand  that  will  come  with  the  opening  of 
tlie  season. 

15.  Your  conduct  has  antagonized  our 
patrons,  and  we  feel  that  such  acts  are  not  be- 
coming of  you. 

16.  One  party  left  us  because  he  thought 
the  business  is  not  a  healthy  one,  but,  of 
course,  that  is  a  mistake. 

17.  He  stated  that  he  had  been  acquitted 
from  all  blame  in  the  matter. 


GENERAL  REVIEW 


133 


18.  I  thought  when  I  bought  the  new 
feeder  tliat  it  would  prove  a  good  proposition, 
but  the  machine  is  not  a  success. 

19.  About  an  hour  ago  lie  was  killed  dead 
by  an  accident. 

20.  I  was  sick  with  pneumonia  for  quite  a 
while. 

21.  They  have  got  a  neostyle  in  the  office, 
but  I  am  still  awkward  at  using  it. 

22.  You  will  have  exceptionable  oppor- 
tunities for  proving  yourself  a  success. 

23.  I  will  be  very  pleased  to  meet  you. 

24.  You  had  ought  to  be  more  careful  in 
directing  the  envelopes. 

25.  He  sent  a  postal  asking  for  a  raise  in 
salary. 

26.  I  greatly  appreciated  that  ride  to  the 
beach ;  your  new  carriage  is  indeed  fine. 

27.  Our  statement  was  confirmed  with  the 
evidence  given  by  two  of  the  witnesses. 

28.  He  died  with  heart  disease  most  a  year 
ago. 

29.  He  is  an  enemy  to  our  house,  and  I  am 
bound  to  beat  him  in  that  territory,  if  possible. 

30.  The  kind  of  letters  you  write  are  cal- 
culated to  antagonize  our  best  patrons. 

31.  As  we  thought  there  was  no  necessity 
of  our  being  in  a  hurry,  we  stopped  at  the  park 
a  while  and  listened  at  the  music. 

32.  I  parted  with  him  about  two  o'clock, 
and  took  a  trolley  for  Boston. 

33.  You  can  transcribe  this  letter  now,  and 
I  shall  dictate  the  other  one  later. 

34.  He  seemed  to  feel  some  resentment  at 
me,  but  did  not  charge  me  with  neglect  for 
my  duties. 

35.  I  expect  he  has  been  tampering  among 
the  records  and  I  calculate  to  watch  him  from 
now  on. 

36.  We  were  delighted  at  the  work  of  the 
new  machine ;  it  is  certainly  hard  to  beat. 

37.  He  claims  that  we  have  a  prejudice  to- 
ward him,  but  this  is  not  right;  we  have 
treated  him  the  same  as  others. 

38.  The  profits  for  this  work  aren't  large. 

39.  We  consider  that  you  had  ought  to  be 
satisfied  with  what  you  have  already  got. 

40.  We  beg,  herewith,  to  advise  you  that 
your  shipment  of  June  1  is  at  hand. 

41.  We  are  gratified  to  be  able  to  state  that 
your  conduct  has  been  abundantly  satisfactory. 

42.  Can  I  speak  to  you  a  few  minutes 
about  a  business  deal  ? 

43.  He  footed  the  bill  and  I  have  got  the 
money  from  him.  Please  find  a  check  for  the 
amount  enclosed. 


44.  You  have  got  to  quit  giving  such  big 
discounts.    The  house  won't  stand  for  it. 

45.  He  was  raised  in  Maine  and  is  well 
posted  in  the  lumber  business. 

46.  There  has  been  a  general  raise  in 
prices,  and  I  prophesy  that  they  will  go  higher 
yet. 

47.  He  was  sick  with  nervous  prostration 
for  a  while,  but  has  absolutely  recovered. 

48.  We  consummated  the  deal  to-day,  and 
I  am  sure  it  is  a  good  proposition  for  us. 

49.  We  are  anticipating  a  large  trade  this 
winter. 

50.  The  abominable  weatlier  has  prevented 
me  making  more  than  two  or  three  towns  this 
week,  but  I  anticipate  a  better  record  for  next 
week. 

51.  Our  house  usually  donates  abundantly 
to  all  benevolent  propositions. 

Letter- Writing  Exercises. 

Write  the  letters  called  for  in  the  following 
exercises  (using  pen  or  typewriter,  as  your 
teacher  may  direct),  address  the  required  en- 
velopes, and  prepare  and  insert  all  necessary 
enclosures.  Do  not  seal  the  envelopes  unless 
so  directed  by  your  teacher. 

Answer  any  three  of  the  following  adver- 
tisements : 

1.  Wanted.  A  competent  young  lady  with  fair  edu- 
cation to  act  as  office  assistant.  Person  with  some 
knowledge  of  bookkeeping  preferred.  Answer  in  own 
handwriting.     Maxwell  Printing  Co.,  Times  Office. 

2.  A  Bright  Young  Man  can  earn  a  good  salary 
selling  our  specialties.  Plenty  of  good  territory.  Must 
be  a  hustler.    Address,  McB.  &  C,  Tribune. 

3.  Stenographer  Wanted.  Experienced  lady  or 
gentleman.  Good  salary  to  thoroughly  competent  per- 
son. Address,  giving  references  and  experience,  Han- 
nibal &  Sons,  156  State  St.,  Chicago. 

4.  Wanted.  A  competent  bookkeeper  to  take  charge 
of  the  books  in  a  manufacturing  business.  Must  under- 
stand latest  methods  and  corporation  accounting.  Men- 
tion references  and  experience.  Address,  C.  P.  A., 
Herald  Office. 

5.  Shipping  Clerk  Wanted.  Must  be  a  ready  pen- 
man and  familiar  with  express  and  railroad  business. 
Young  man  preferred.  Salary  $20  per  week.  Address 
in  own  handwriting,  giving  particulars  as  to  qualifica- 
tions and  experience,  The  Beeler  Co.,  175  W.  Madi- 
son St. 

6.  Wanted — Saleslady.  Permanent  position  with 
chance  for  advancement.  Must  have  fair  education 
and  pleasing  address.  Person  with  home  in  city  pre- 
ferred.   Address  at  once,  Harkwood,  Times  Office. 

7.  Write  a  general  letter  of  recommenda- 
tion for  a  friend  who  wants  a  position  as  book- 
keeper. 

8.  Write  a  formal  invitation  to  an  even- 
ing party,  an  answer  to  the  same,  and  a 
"regret." 

9.  Write  to  Chas.  S.  Weaver„Supt.  of 
Schools,  Haverhill,  Ohio,  applying  for  a  posi- 


134 


BUSINESS  ENGLISH 


tion  as  teacher  in  Grade  4.    Give  all  necessary 
particulars  as  to  your  qualifications. 

10.  Write  to  a  friend  in  Bloomington,  III., 
inquiring  as  to  the  demand  for  stenographers 
in  that  city,  salaries  paid,  cost  of  living,  etc. 

11.  C.  "VV.  Marvin  has  sent  you  a  postoffice 
money  order  for  $29.75  in  payment  for  an  in- 
voice of  goods  recently  purchased.  Write  let- 
ter of  acknowledgment,  enclosing  receipt. 

12.  Write  a  letter  politely  calling  attention 
to  an  overdue  account.  Supply  names,  dates, 
amount,  etc. 

13.  An  agent  who  has  been  selling  goods 
for  you  on  commission  has  failed  to  make  his 
reports  promptly.  Write  a  letter  requesting 
an  immediate  settlement. 

14.  Order  from  Lyon  &  Healy,  178  Wa- 
bash Ave.,  Chicago,  a  Washburn  mandolin, 
catalog  number  1113 j/2,  price  $15.75.  Have 
the  instrument  sent  by  American  Express  and 
enclose  Chicago  draft  in  payment.  (Use  slip 
of  paper  suitable  size  for  enclosure.) 

15.  A  friend  of  yours  has  received  an  ap- 
pointment to  enter  the  U.  S.  Military  academy 
at  West  Point.  Write  him  a  letter  of  con- 
gratulation. 

16.  A  business  acquaintance  has  lost  his 
store  and  stock  of  goods  by  fire.  Write  a  suit- 
able letter  expressing  your  regret  at  the  occur- 
rence and  your  hope  that  he  may  soon  be  es- 
tablished in  business  again. 

17.  Write  a  letter  to  a  delinquent  debtor, 
demanding  payment  and  saying  that  you  will 
appeal  to  the  courts  unless  the  account  is  ad- 
justed at  once. 

18.  Answer  the  letter  called  for  in  the 
previous  exercise,  enclosing  a  check  for  the 
amount,  and  make  a  suitable  explanation  for 
the  delay  in  settlement. 

19.  Write  to  the  Emerson  Publishing  Co., 
St.  Paul,  Minn,  ordering  ,the  following  goods : 


45  Strong's  Arithmetics, 

25  Harper's  El.  Bookkeeping, 

50  Main's  Shorthand  Manuals, 

3  Reams  Letter  Paper — Cat.  No.  121, 

25  Check-Books—  "       "     214, 

25  Note-Books—  "       "     175. 

Enclose    order-sheet   giving   your    shipping 

address,  freight  route,  etc. 

Say  that  you  will  remit  for  goods  on  their 
arrival. 

20.  Write  a  telegram  of  not  more  than  ten 
words,  stopping  the  shipment  of  the  foregoing 
order  and  saying  that  a  letter  giving  particu- 
lars will  follow. 

21.  Write  to  the  Emerson  Publishing  Co. 
informing  them  that  owing  to  a  fire  that  par- 
tially destroyed  your  school  and  equipment,  it 
is  necessary  to  close  the  school  temporarily  and 
that  the  goods  will  not  be  needed  at  present. 

22.  Write  a  letter  for  the  Emerson  Pub- 
lishing Co.  in  answer  to  your  last  letter,  ac- 
knowledging the  receipt  of  your  telegram  and 
letter,  but  saying  that  the  books  liad  been 
shipped  before  the  telegram  was  received.  Say 
that  the  goods  may  be  kept  and  paid  for  when 
needed,  or  returned,  as  you  may  think  best. 

23.  The  proprietor  of  a  fruit  and  candy 
store  offers  a  prize  of  ten  pounds  of  choice 
candy  for  the  best  advertisement  of  their  busi- 
ness for  display  in  the  local  street  car.  Com- 
pete for  this  prize,  enclosing  your  advertise- 
ment, with  a  suitable  letter  addressed  to  the 
firm. 

24.  Write  a  letter  for  publication  in  a  local 
paper,  advocating  the  establishment  of  a  pub- 
lic reading-room  and  library. 

25.  Write  a  letter  to  the  Secretary  of  the 
U.  S.  Civil  Service  Commission,  Washington, 
D.  C,  asking  for  information  as  to  the  ex- 
amination of  applicants  for  positions  as  gov- 
ernment stenographers. 


INDEX 


Page 

Abbreviations   94,  125-126 

Acceptance  of  Invitations  105 

Address    68 

Adjectives    12,  30-33 

Adverbs   12,  30-33 

Advertising   112-113 

Ambiguity    62 

Antecedent    18 

Attribute  Complement   11 

Auxiliary  Verbs   20 

Auxiliaries,  Misuse  of  25 

Bank   Drafts 118 

Bare  Subject  and  Predicate  10 

Big  Words   52-54 

Bills  of  Exchange  118 

Brevity    64,  111 

Business  Letters,  Parts  of 68 

Cant  Terms   91 

Capitalizing    54-56 

Cashier's    Checks    118 

Checks,  Personal,  Use  of 114 

Classes  of  Business  Letters  98-105 

Clauses    33 

Clauses,  Restrictive  and  Non-Restrictive 58 

Clearness    62-63 

Closing    74 

Colloquialisms    37,   89 

Commas,  General  Rule  for  Use  of 59 

Commas,  Use  of  58,  59,  60 

Comparison    30-31 

Complements    11-12 

Compound  Subjects 23 

Confidential  Letters   96 

Conjunctions,  Errors  in  Use  of  35-36 

Connectives    33-34 

Copula    11 

Copulative  Verbs   11 

Copying   96 

Correct  Expressions,  Qualities  of  54-66 

Dates,  Specifying  94 

Diacritical  Marks  38 

Dictation,  Suggestions  Regarding   120 

Diction    36 

Dictionary,  Use  of  38 

Domestic  Mail  Matter  85 

Drop   Letters    86 

Dunning  Letters  102 

Elements  of  the  Sentence  13 

Enclosures    81-85 

Envelopes    76-80 

Envelopes,  Placing  Letter  in  Right  One 95 

Essential  Elements   13 

Erasures    94 

Figures  and  Abbreviations  94 

Filing   96 

Folding    81 

Folding,  Cuts  Illustrating  82-84 

Force   64-66 

Forethought   4 

Forms  of  the  Verbs 20 


Page 

Gender    18 

General  Review  129-134 

Heading  of  Manuscripts   .*. . .      4 

Heading  of  a  Letter  68 

Hints  for  Stenographers    119-124 

Hyphenated  Words   47-48 

Improper  Verbs   45 

Indentation  for  Envelopes  123-124 

Indentation  for  Letters  121-122 

Independent  Elements   13 

Inflection   15 

Intcrrogatives    34 

Inverted  Elements  58 

Invitations    105 

Irregular  Verbs    24 

Letters,  Abusive   97 

Letters,   Acknowledgments    98 

Letters,  Applications  for  Positions  100 

Letters,    Condolence    107 

Letters,   Confidential    96 

Letters,   Congratulation    106 

Letters  Containing  Business  and  Social  Matters...     97 

Letters,    Credit    118 

Letters,  Definiteness  and  Brevity 97 

Letters,  Disposal  of 95 

Letters,  Dunning  102 

Letters,  Formal    105 

Letters,   Friendship    107 

Letters,  Introduction   103 

Letters,  Ordering  Goods 99 

Letters,  Parts  and  Forms   67-76 

Letters  for  Publication   110-112 

Letters,   Recommendation    104 

Letters,  Requesting  Favors   103 

Letters,  Requesting  Information   101 

Letters,  Responses  to  Advertisements  100 

Letters,   Social    105 

Letters,  Soliciting  Trade  101 

Letters,  Typewritten    121-122 

Letter- Writing,  Hints  and  Cautions  94-98 

Mail  Matter,  Classes  of  85-86 

Mail  Matter,  Preparation  of  87 

Mailable  Matter,  Reference  List  of 87-88 

Margin    121 

Margin  for  Manuscripts  4 

Marking  Papers  5,  6,  7 

Measures,  Wide  and  Narrow  92-94 

Misused  Adjectives  and  Adverbs  45-48 

Misused  Nouns   39-41 

Misused   Prepositions    49-52 

Misused  Verbs   42-45 

Misused  Words 39-52 

Mode  and  Tense  Forms  21 

Model  Closings  7.5 

Model  Openings   71-73 

Model  Letters,  Construction  of 89-90 

Model  Letter,  Pen-Written  70 

Model  Letter,  Typewritten  69,  122 

Modifiers,  Classes  of  10 

Money,  Substitutes  for   113 

Money  Orders,  Express  115 

Money  Orders,  Form  of 115 

Money  Orders,  Postal   114 


136 


INDEX 


Page 

Neatness   4 

Needless  Words  65 

Negatives    32-33 

Note  Books  119-120 

Nouns,  Inflection  of  15-18 

Nouns,  Misuse  of  39-41 

Number 15-16 

Object  Complement  12 

Omission  of  Verbs  28 

Paging    95 

Paper  for  Letters  67 

Paper,  Writing  on  Both  Sides  of 95 

Paragraphing    91-92 

Parcel   Post   86 

Participles    20 

Parts  of  Speech,  Brief  Consideration 5 

Payments  and  Remittances   113-119 

Penmanship    68 

Pen  or  Pencil   120 

Personal  Checks,  Use  of 114 

Phrases    13 

Position  of  Elements    63 

Posssssives    17-18 

Postage  and  Mailing  85-88 

Postal  Cards,  Use  of 96 

Postscripts    97 

Prepositions    49-52 

Prepositional  Phrase  13 

Promptness  in  Answering  Letters 96 

Pronouns  14,  18-19 

Pronouns,  Agreement  of   19 

Publishers'  Mailing  Rates  86 

Punctuation    56-62 

Punctuation,  Intermediate  58 

Punctuation,  Terminal    57 

Punctuation   Marks    57 

Punctuation  Marks,  Special  Use  of 60-61 

Registered  Letters  115 

Regrets   105 


Page 

Relative  Pronouns   34 

Remittances    114 

Salutation 71,  127-129 

Second  Sheet,  When  Required  122 

Sentence    9-10 

Sentences,   Structure  and  Elements 9-14 

Shall  and  Will  25 

Should  and  Would   26 

Signature   74 

Spelling  Rules   20-21 

Stamps,  When  to  Enclose 95 

Stationery  for  Business  Letters 120 

Stenographer's  Equipment  1 19-120 

Stenographers,   Suggestions,  etc 119-124 

Superscription    80 

Superscriptions,    Model   Pen- Written   Forms 77-79 

Superscriptions,  Typewritten    122-124 

Telegrams,  Rules  Relating  to  108 

Telegraphing    107-109 

Telegraph  Orders    115 

Telephones    109-110 

Tense    20 

Titles  and  Salutations  127-129 

Transcription    121 

Transitive  Verbs  12,  24 

Typewriting,   Suggestions,   etc 119-124 

Unmailable  Matter    87 

Verbals    27-28 

Verbal  Phrase  13 

Verb  Forms  20 

Verbs  and  Verbals  19-30 

Verbs,  Agreement  of   22 

Verbs,  Misuse  of 42-45 

Verbs  and  Adjectives  Misused  for  Nouns 41 

Words  of  Courtesy  74 

Word  Study  37-38 

Written  Exercises,  Preparation  of 4 


YE  07063 


.^!i>''i'fi'tl? 


gSh    TT    3$ 


diuN-on 


